AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 14th Lesson Nuclei Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 14th Lesson Nuclei

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are isotopes and isobars ?
Answer:
Isotopes : The nuclei having the same atomic number (Z) but different mass numbers (A) are called isotopes.
E.g.:
\({ }_8^{16} \mathrm{O}\), \({ }_8^{17} \mathrm{O}\), \({ }_8^{18} \mathrm{O}\)

Isobars : The nuclei having the same neutron number (N) but different atomic number (Z) are called isobars.
E.g.: \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}\), \({ }_7^{14} \mathrm{N}\)

Question 2.
What are isotones, and isomers?
Answer:
Isotones : The nuclei having same neutron number (N) but different atomic numbers (Z) are called isotones.
E.g. : \({ }_80^{198} \mathrm{Hg}\), \({ }_79^{197} \mathrm{N}\)

Isomers: Nuclei having the same atomic number (Z) and mass number (A) but with different nuclear properties such as radioactive decay and magnetic moments are called isomers.
E.g. : \({ }_{35}^{80} \mathrm{Br}^{\mathrm{m}}\), \({ }_{35}^{80} \mathrm{Br}^{\mathrm{g}}\)

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 3.
What is a.m.u. ? What is its equivalent energy ?
Answer:
The mass of \(\frac{1}{12}\)th of the mass of \({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}\) atom is called atomic mass unit (a.m.u)
1 a.m.u = \(\frac{1}{12}\) of mass of \({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}\) atom = 1.66 × 10-27 kg
Equivalent energy of a.m.u= 931.5 MeV

Question 4.
What will be the ratio of the radii of two nuclei of mass numbers A1 and A2 ?
Answer:
The ratio of the radii of two nuclei of mass numbers A1 and A2 will be \(\frac{R_1}{R_2}\) = \(\left[\frac{\mathrm{A}_1}{\mathrm{~A}_2}\right]^{\frac{1}{3}}\) since R = R0 A1/3.

Question 5.
Natural radioactive nuclei are mostly nuclei of high mass number why ?
Answer:
Natural radioactivity is displayed by heavy nuclei beyond lead in the periodic table because of relatively low binding energy per nucleon as 7.6 MeV Hence to attain greater stability.

Question 6.
Does the ratio of neutrons to protons in a nucleus increase, decrease or remain the same after the emission of an α – particle ?
Answer:
The ratio of neutrons to protons in a nucleus, increases after the emission of an α – particle.
E.g. : Taking,
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 1
Before emission, the ratio of neutrons to protons
= \(\frac{\mathrm{A}-\mathrm{Z}}{\mathrm{Z}}\) = \(\frac{238-92}{92}\) = \(\frac{144}{92}\) = 1.57
After emission, the ratio of neutrons to protons
= \(\frac{234-90}{90}\) = 1.6

Question 7.
A nucleus contains no electrons but can emit them. How?
Answer:
When the nucleus disintegrates and radiates β-rays, it is said to be β-decay. β-particles are nothing but electrons. So the nucleus eject electrons.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 8.
What are the units and dimensions of the disintegration constant ?
Answer:
λ = –\(\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{~T}}\)
Units = sec-1
Dimensions = -1

Question 9.
Why do all electrons emitted during β-decay not have the same energy ?
Answer:
When a neutron is converted into a proton, an electron and neutron are emitted along with it
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 2
In β – decay proton remains in the nucleus, but electron and neutron are emitted with constant energy. The energy of neutron is not constant. So, all electrons do not have same energy.

Question 10.
Neutrons are the best projectiles to produce nuclear reactions. Why ?
Answer:
Neutrons are uncharged particles. So they do not deflected by the electric and magnetic fields. Hence Neutrons are considered as best projectiles in nuclear reaction.

Question 11.
Neutrons cannot produce ionization. Why ?
Answer:
Because neutrons are uncharged particles and cannot produce ionization.

Question 12.
What are delayed neutrons ?
Answer:
Neutrons are emitted in the fission products after sometime are called delayed neutrons.

Question 13.
What are thermal neutrons ? What is their importance ?
Answer:
Neutrons having kinetic energies approximately 0.025 eV are called as slow neutrons or thermal neutrons. 235U undergoes fission only when bombarded with thermal neutrons.

Question 14.
What is the value of neutron multiplication factor in a controlled reaction and in an uncontrolled chain reaction ?
Answer:
In controlled chain reaction K = 1
In uncontrolled chain reaction K > 1

Question 15.
What is the role of controlling rods in a nuclear reactor ?
Answer:
In nuclear reactor controlling rods are used to absorb the neutrons. Cadmium, boron materials are used in the form of rods in reactor. These control the fission rate.

Question 16.
Why are nuclear fusion reactions called thermo nuclear reactions ?
Answer:
Nuclear fusion occurs at very high temperatures. So it is called as thermo nuclear reaction.

Question 17.
Define Becquerel and Curie.
Answer:
Becquerel: 1 disintegration or decay per second is called Becquerel. It is SI unit of activity.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 3
Curie : 3.7 × 1010 decays per second is called Curie.
1 Curie = 1Ci = \(\frac{3.7 \times 10^{10} \text { decays }}{\text { second }}\) = 3.7 × 1010 Bq.

Question 18.
What is a chain reaction ?
Answer:
Chain reaction: The neutrons produced in the fission of a nucleus can cause fission in other neighbouring nuclei producing more and more neutrons to continue the fission until the whole fissionable material is disintegrated. This is called chain reaction.

Question 19.
What is the function of moderator in a nuclear reactor ?
Answer:
They are used to slow down the fast moving neutrons produced during the fission process.
e.g.: Heavy water, Berilium.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 20.
What is the energy released in the fusion of four protons to form a helium nucleus ?
Answer:
26.7 MeV energy is released.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Why is the density of the nucleus more than that of the atom ? Show that the density of nuclear matter is same for all nuclei.
Answer:

  1. Volume of the atom is greater than that of nucleus and it consists of nucleons
  2. Since density ∝ \(\frac{1}{\text { volume }}\)
    ∴ Density of the nucleus more than that of the atom.
  3. Mass of the nucleus = no.of nucleons (A) × mass of nucleon (m)
    = Am
  4. Volume of the nucleus V= \(\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{R}^3\)
    = \(\frac{4}{3} \pi\left(R_0 A^{1 / 3}\right)^3\)
    = \(\frac{4 \pi \mathrm{R}_0^3 \mathrm{~A}}{3}\) = 1.2 × 10-45m3.A. [∵ R0 = 1.2 × 10-15m]
    i. e., the volume of the nucleus is proportional to the mass number A.
  5. Density of the nucleus (ρ)
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 4
  6. The above equation represents it clear that the density of the nucleus is independent of the mass number A and is same for all the nuclei.

Question 2.
Write a short note on the discovery of neutron.
Answer:

  1. Bothe and Becker found that when beryllium is bombarded with α – particles of energy 5 MeV, which emitted a highly penetrating radiation.
  2. The equation for above process can be written as
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 5
  3. The radiations are not effected by electric and magnetic fields.
  4. In 1932, James Chadwick, had subjected nitrogen and argon to the beryllium radiation. He interpreted the experimental results by assuming that the radiation is of a new kind of particles which has no charge and its mass is equal to proton. These neutral particles were named as ‘neutrons’. Thus the neutron was discovered.
  5. The experimental results can be represented by the following equation.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 6

Question 3.
What are the properties of a neutron ?
Answer:

  1. Neutron is an uncharged particle and hence it is not deflected by the electric and magnetic fields.
  2. It has very high penetrating power and has very low ionization power.
  3. Inside the nucleus neutrons appear to be stable. The average life of an isolated neutron is about 1000 seconds. A free neutron is unstable and spontaneously decays into a proton, electron and an antineutrino \((\bar{v})\).
  4. If fast neutrons pass through substances like heavy water, paraffin wax, graphite etc., they are slowed down.
  5. Neutrons are diffracted by crystals.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 4.
What are nuclear forces ? Write their properties.
Answer:
The forces which hold the nucleons together in nucleus are called nuclear forces. Properties of Nuclear forces :

  1. Nuclear forces are attractive forces between proton and proton (P – P), proton and neutron (P – N) and neutron and neutron (N – N).
  2. Nuclear forces are independent of charge. It was found that force between proton and proton is same as force between neutron and neutron.
  3. These forces are short range forces i.e., these forces will act upto a small distance only. Generally the range of nuclear forces is upto few Fermi (10-15 m).
  4. These forces are non central forces, i.e., they do not act along the line joining the two nucleons.
  5. These forces are exchange forces. The force between two nucleons is due to exchange of π-mesons.
  6. These forces are spin dependent. These forces are strong when the spin of two nucleons are in same direction and they are weak when they are in opposite direction.
  7. Nuclear forces are saturated forces i.e., the force between nucleons will extend upto the immediate neighbouring nucleons only.
  8. These are the strongest forces in nature. They are nearly 1038 times stronger than gravitational forces and nearly 100 times stronger than Coulombic forces.

Question 5.
For greater stability a nucleus should have greater value of binding energy per nucleon. Why?
Answer:

  1. Uranium has a relatively low binding energy per nucleon as 7.6 MeV Hence to attain greater stability Uranium breaks up into intermediate mass nuclei resulting in a phenomenon called nuclear fission.
  2. Lighter nuclei such as hydrogen combine to form heavy nucleus to form helium for greater stability, resulting in a phenomenon called nuclear fusion.
  3. Iron whose binding energy per nucleon stands maximum at 8.7 MeV is the most stable and will undergo neither fission nor fusion.

Question 6.
Explain α – decay ?
Answer:

  1. It is the phenomenon of emission of an a particle from a radioactive nucleus. When a nucleus emits an alpha particle, its mass number decreases by 4 and charge number decreases by 2.
  2. In general, alpha decay is represented as
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 7
    Where Q is the energy released in the decay.
  3. Thus the total mass energy of the decay products is less than the mass energy of the original nuclide.
  4. The difference between the initial mass energy and the total mass energy of decay products is called disintegration energy (Q) of the process.
  5. This can be calculated using Einstein’s mass energy equivalence relation, E = (Δm). c2
    i-e., Q = (mx – my – mHe) c2
    The energy released (Q) is shared by daughter nucleus y and alpha particle.

Question 7.
Explain β – decay ?
Answer:

  1.  It is the phenomenon of emission of an electron from a radioactive nucleus.
  2. When a parent nucleus emits a β-particle (i.e., an electron), mass number remains same because mass of electron is negligibly low. However, the loss of unit negative charge is equivalent to a gain of unit positive charge. Therefore, atomic number is increased by one.
  3. In general, we can write
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 8
    where Q is the energy released in β-decay.
  4. The basic nuclear process underlying p-decay is the conversion of neutron to proton.
    n → P + \(\overline{\mathrm{e}}\) + \(\overline{\mathrm{v}}\)
    While for β+ decay, it is the conversion of proton ino neutron.
    P → n + e+ + v
  5. The emission of electron in β-decay is accompained by the emission of an anti neutrino \((\bar{v})\) In β, decay instead, a neutrino (v) is generated. Neutrons are neutral particles with very small mass compared to electrons. They have only weak interactions with other particles.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 8.
Explain γ – decay ?
Answer:

  1. It is the phenomenon of emission of gamma ray photon from a radioactive nucleus.
  2. Like an atom, a nucleus has discrete energy levels in the ground state and excited states.
  3. When a nucleus in an excited state spontaneously decays to its ground state (or to a lower energy state), a photon is emitted with energy equal to the difference in the two energy levels of the nucleus. This is the so called gamma-decay.
  4. The energy (MeV) corresponds to radiation of extremely short wave length, shorter than the hard X-ray region.
  5. A Gamma ray is emitted when a or p decay results in a daughter nucleus in an excited
    state.
  6. The \(\bar{\beta}\) -decay of 27CO60 transforms it into an excited 28Ni60 nucleus. This reaches the ground state by emission of γ-rays of energy 1.17 MeV and 1.33 MeV. This is shown in figure.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 9

Question 9.
Define half life period and decay constant for a radioactive substance. Deduce the relation between them.
Answer:
Half life period (T) : Time taken for the number of radio active nuclei to disintegrate to half of its original number of nuclei is called Half life period.
Decay constant (λ) : The ratio of the rate of radioactive decay to the number of nuclei present at that instant.
It is a proportional constant and is denoted by ‘λ’.
λ = \(\frac{-\left(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)}{\mathrm{N}}\)

Relation between half the period and decay constant:

  1. The radioactive decay law N = N0 e-λt states that the number of radioactive-nuclei in a radioactive sample decreases exponentially with time. Here λ is called decay constant.
  2. If N0 is the number of nuclei at t = 0 and N is the radioactive nuclei at any instant of time’t’.
  3. Substituting N = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_0}{2}\) at t = T in N = N0e-λt.
    Where T is half life of the radioactive substance.
  4.  \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_0}{2}\) = N0 e-λT
    eλT = 2
    λT = ln2
    T = \(\frac{\ln 2}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{2.303 \log _{10}^2}{\lambda}\)
    ∴ T = \(\frac{0.693}{\lambda}\)

Question 10.
Define average life of a radioactive substance. Obtain the relation between decay constant and average life.
Answer:
Average life \((\tau)\) : It is equal to the total life time of all the N0 nuclei divided by the total number of original nuclei N0. It is denoted by \((\tau)\).

Relation between decay constant and average life :

  1. Let N0 be the radioactive nuclei that are present at t = 0 in the radioactive sample; The no’ of nuclei which decay between t and t + dt is dN.
  2. The total life time of these dN nuclei is t dN. The total life time of all the nuclei present initially in the sample = \(\int_0 \mathrm{t} \mathrm{dN}\)
  3. Average life time \((\tau)\) is equal to the total life time of all the N0 nuclei divided by the total number of original nuclei N0.
  4. Average \((\tau)\) = \(\frac{\int \mathrm{tdN}}{\mathrm{N}_0}\)
    But \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = -λN
    dN = -λNdt = N0e-λtdt [∵ N = N0e-λt]
  5. AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 10
    On integrating, we get \(\tau\) = \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\)
    \(\tau\) = \(\frac{T}{0.693}\) [∵ λ = \(\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{~T}}\)]
  6. From the above equation ‘the reciprocal of the decay constant gives us the average life of a radioactive sample.

Question 11.
Deduce the relation between half life and average life of a radioactive substance.
Answer:
Relation between half life (T) and average life (\(\tau\)) :

  1. We know, the radioactive decay law, N = N0 e-λt —– (1)
  2. Consider, ‘N0‘ is the number of nuclei present at t = 0 and after time T, only \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_0}{2}\) are left and after a time ‘2T’, only \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_0}{4}\) remain and soon.
  3. Substituting N = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_0}{2}\) at t = T in eqn. (1) then
    \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_0}{2}\) = N0 e-λT ⇒ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{e}^{\lambda \mathrm{T}}}\) ⇒ eλT = 2
    Taking loge on both sides, we get
    λT = \(\log _{\mathrm{e}}^2\) = 2.303 \(\log _{\mathrm{e}}^2\) = 0.693
    ∴ T = \(\frac{0.693}{\lambda}\) —— (2)
  4. Average life \(\tau\) = \(\frac{\int \mathrm{tdN}}{\mathrm{No}}\)
  5. But –\(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = λN dN = -λ.N0 e-λt dt [∵ from eqn. (1)]
  6. AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 11
    on integrating, we get \(\tau\) = \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) —– (3)
  7. From equs (2) and (3) we get \(\tau\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}}{0.693}\)
    This is the relation between average life and half life of radioactive substance.

Question 12.
What is nuclear fission ? Give an example to illustrate it.
Answer:
Nuclear fission : The process of dividing a heavy nucleus into two or more smaller and stable nuclei due to nuclear reaction is called nuclear fission.
Ex : The fission reaction is
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 12
Where Q is the energy released.
Q = (Total mass of reactants – Total mass of product) C2
= [(Mass of \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) + Mass of \({ }_0^1 n\)) – (Mass of \({ }_{56}^{141} \mathrm{Ba}\) + Mass of \({ }_{36}^{92} \mathrm{Kr}\) + Mass of three neutrons)]C2
= (235.043933 – 140.9177 – 91.895400 – 2 × 1.008665) amu × C2.
= 0.2135 × 931.5 MeV = 198.9 MeV = 200 MeV

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 13.
What is nuclear fusion ? Write the conditions for nuclear fusion to occur.
Answer:
Nuclear fusion : The process of combining lighter nuclei to produce a larger nucleus is known as nuclear fusion.
E.g : Hydrogen nuclei (1H1) are fused together to form heavy Helium (2He4) along with 25.71 MeV energy released.

Conditions for nuclear fusion :

  1. Nuclear fusion occurs at very high temperatures such as 107 kelvin and very high pressures. These are obtained under the explosion of an atom bomb.
  2. Higher density is also desirable so that collisions between light nuclei occur quite frequently.

Question 14.
Distinguish between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
Answer:
Nuclear fission

  1. In this process heavy nucleus is divided into two fragments along with few neutrons.
  2. These reactions will takes place even at room temperature.
  3. To start fission atleast one thermal neutron from out side is compulsory.
  4. Energy released per unit mass of participants is less.
  5. In this process neutrons are liberated.
  6. This reaction can be controlled.
    Ex: Nuclear reactor.
  7. Atom bomb works on principle of fission reaction.
  8. The energy released in fission çan be used for peaceful purpose.
    Ex : Nuclear reactor and Atomic power stations.

Nuclear fusion

  1. In this process lighter nuclei will join together to produce heavy nucleus.
  2. These reactions will takes place at very high temperature such as Kelwin.
  3. No necessary of external neutrons.
  4. Energy released per unit mass of participants is high. Nearly seven times more than fission reaction.
  5. In this process positrons are liberated.
  6. There is no control on fusion reaction.
  7. Hydrogen bomb works on the principle of fusion reaction.
  8. The energy released in fusion cannot be used for peaceful purpose.

Question 15.
Explain the terms tchain reaction’ and multiplication factor’. How is a chain reaction sustained?
Answer:
Chain reaction : In nuclear fission nearly three neutrons are produced when one uranium atom is destoryed. If they again participate in fission reaction nine neutrons are produced. In next generation the neutrons becomes 27. In this process the number of neutrons increases in geometric progression and the whole uranium is destroyed in few seconds. This type of self sustained fission reaction is called chain reaction.

Neutron multiplication factor (K) : Neutron multiplilcation factor is defined as the ratio of number of neutrons produced in one generation to the number of neutrons in previous generation.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 13

Neutron multiplication factor is useful to understand the nature of nuclear reactions in a nuclear reactor.

To sustained chain reaction:
1. Neutron multiplication factor K ≥ 1.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define mass defect and binding energy. How does binding energy per nucleon vary with mass number ? What is its significance ?
Answer:

  1. Mass defect (ΔM) : The difference in mass of a nucleus and its constituents is called the mass defect. The nuclear mass M is always less than the total mass, Σm, of its constituents.
    Mass defect, (ΔM) = [Zmp + (A – Z)mn – M]
  2. Binding energy: The energy required to break the nucleus into its constituent nucleons is called the binding energy.
    Binding Energy, (Eb) = ΔMC2 = [Zmp + (A – Z)mn – M] 931.5 MeV
    Nuclear binding energy is an indication of the stability of the nucleus.
    Nuclear binding energy per nucleon Ebn = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{b}}}{\mathrm{A}}\).
  3. The following graph represents how the binding energy per nucleon varies with the mass number A.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 14
  4. From the graph that the binding energy is highest in the range 28 < A < 138. The binding energy of these nuclei is very close to 8.7 MeV.
  5. With the increase in the mass number the binding energy per nucleon decreases and consequently for the heavy nuclei like Uranium it is 7.6 MeV
  6. In the region of smaller mass numbers, the binding energy per nucleon curve shows the characteristic minima and maxima.
  7. Minima are associated with nuclei containing an odd number of protons and neutrons such as \({ }_3^6 \mathrm{Li}\), \({ }_5^{10} \mathrm{~B}\), \({ }_7^{14} \mathrm{~N}\) and the maxima are associated with nuclei having an even number of protons and neutrons such as \({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\), \({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}\), \({ }_8^{16} \mathrm{O}\).
    Significance :
  8. The curve explains the relationship between binding energy per nucleon and stability of the nuclei.
  9. Uranium has a relatively low binding energy per nucleon as 7.6 MeV. Hence to attain greater stability Uranium breaks up into intermediate mass nuclei resulting in a phenomenon called fission.
  10. On the other hand light nuclei such as hydrogen combine to form heavy nucleus to form helium for greater stability, resulting in a phenomenon called fusion.
  11. Iron is the most stable having binding energy per nucleon 8.7 MeV and it neither undergoes fission per fusion.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 2.
What is radioactivity ? State the law of radioactive decay. Show that radioactive decay is exponential in nature.
Answer:

  1. Radioactivity : .The nuclei of certain elements disintegrate spontaneously by emitting alpha (α), beta (β) and gamma (γ) rays. This phenomenon is called Radioactivity or Natural radioactivity.
  2. Law of radioactivity decay: The rate of radioactive decay \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)\) (or) the number of nuclei decaying per unit time at any instant, is directly proportional to the number of nuclei (N) present at that instant is called law of radioactivity decay’.
  3. Radioactive decay is exponential in nature : Consider a radioactive substance. Let the number of nuclei present in the sample at t = 0, be N0 and let N be the radioactive nuclei remain at an instant t.
    \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) ∝ N ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = -λN
    dN = -λNdt ——— (1)
    The proportionality constant λ is called decay constant or disintegration constant. The negative sign indicates the decrease in the number of nuclei.
  4. From eq.(1) \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{N}}\) = -λ dt ——- (2)
  5. Integrating on both sides
    \(\int \frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{N}}\) = \(-\lambda \int \mathrm{dt}\)
    In N = -λt + C ——- (3)
    Where C = Integration constant.
  6. At t = O; N = N0. Substituting in eq. (3), we get in ln N0 = C
    ∴ ln N – ln N0 = – λt
    ln \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_0}\right)\) = – λt
    ∴ N = 0e-λt
    The above equation represents radioactive decay law.
  7. It states that the number of radioactive nuclei in a radioactive sample decreases exponentially with time.

Question 3.
Explain the principle and working of a nuclear reactor with the help of a labelled diagram. (A.P.Mar.’19,’16, ’15 & T.S. Mar. ‘15) (Mar. ’14)
Answer:
Principle : A nuclear reactor works on the principle of achieving controlled chain reaction in natural Uranium 238U enriched with 235U, consequently generating large amounts of heat.
A nucleàr reactor consists of
(1) Fuel
(2) Moderator
(3) Control rods
(4) Radiation shielding
(5) Coolant.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 15

1. Fuel and clad : In reactor the nuclear fuel is fabricated in the form of thin and long cylindrical rods. These group of rods treated as a fuel assembly. These rods are surrounded by coolant, which is used to transfer of heat produced in them. A part of the nuclear reactor which use to store the nuclear fuel is called the core of the reactor. Natural uranium, enriched uranium, plutonium and uranium – 233 are used as nuclear fuels.

2. Moderator : The average energy of neutrons released in fission process is 2 MeV They are used to slow down the velocity of neutrons. Heavy water or graphite are used as moderating materials in reactor.

3. Control Rods : These are used to control the fission rate in reactor by absorbing the neutrons. Cadmium and boron are used as controlling the neutrons, in the form of rods.

4. Shielding : During fission reaction beta and gamma rays are emitted in addition to neutrons. Suitable shielding such as steel, lead, concrete etc are provided around the reactor to absorb and reduce the intensity of radiations to such low levels that do not harm the operating personnel.

5. Coolant: The heat generated in fuel elements is removed by using a suitable coolant to flow around them. The coolants used are water at high pressures, molten sodium etc.

Working: Uranium fuel rods are placed in the aluminium cylinders. The graphite moderator is placed in between the fuel cylinders. To control the number of neutrons, a number of control rods of cadmium or beryllium or boron are placed in the holes of graphite block: When a few 235U nuclei undergo fission fast neutrons are liberated. These neutrons pass through the surrounding graphite moderator and loose their energy to become thermal neutrons.

These thermal neutrons are captured by 235U. The heat generated here is used for heating suitable coolants which in turn heat water and produce steam. This steam is made to rotate steam turbine and there by drive a generator of production for electric power.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 4.
Explain the source of stellar energy. Explain the carbon – nitrogen cycle, proton – proton cycle occurring in stars.
Answer:
Scientists proposed two types of cyclic processes for the sources of energy in the sun and stars. The first is known as carbon-nitrogen cycle and the second is proton-proton cycle.

1. Carbon-Nitrogen Cycle: According to Bethe carbon – nitrogen cycle is mainly responsible for the production of solar energy. This cycle consists of a chain of nuclear reactions in which hydrogen is converted into Helium, with the help of Carbon and Nitrogen as catalysts. The nuclear reactions are as given below.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 16
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 17

2. Proton – Proton Cycle: A star is formed by the condensation of a large amount of matter at a point in space. Its temperature rises to 2,00,000°C as the matter contracts under the influence of gravitational attraction. At this temperature the thermal energy of the protons is sufficient to form a deuteron and a positron. The deuteron then combines with another proton to form lighter nuclei of helium \({ }_2^3 \mathrm{He}\). Two such helium nuclei combine to form a helium nucleus \({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\) and two protons releasing a total amount of energy 25.71 MeV The nuclear fusion reactions are given below.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 18
The net result is
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 19

Problems

Question 1.
Show that the density of a nucleus does not depend upon its mass number (density is independent of mass)
Solution:
Density of nucleus matter =
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 20
No. of nucleons (A) × mass of nucleons (m)
Volume of nucleus V = \(\frac{4}{3} \pi R^3\)
But R = R0A1/3
∴ V = \(\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{R}_0^3 \mathrm{~A}\)
∴ Density of nucleus matter = \(\frac{\mathrm{Am}}{\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{R}_0^3 \mathrm{~A}}\) = \(\frac{3 \mathrm{~m}}{4 \pi \mathrm{R}_0^3}\)
∴ Density of nucleus is independent of mass.

Question 2.
Compare the radii of the nuclei of mass numbers 27 and 64.
Solution:
A1 = 27; A2 = 64
\(\frac{\mathrm{R}_1}{\mathrm{R}_2}\) = \(\left[\frac{\mathrm{A}_1}{\mathrm{~A}_2}\right]^{1 / 3}\) [∵ R = R0A1/3]
\(\frac{\mathrm{R}_1}{\mathrm{R}_2}\) = \(\left[\frac{27}{64}\right]^{\frac{1}{3}}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
∴ R1 : R2 = 3 : 4

Question 3.
The radius of the oxygen nucleus \({ }_8^{16} \mathrm{O}\) is 2.8 × 10-15m. Find the radius of lead nucleus \({ }_{82}^{205} \mathrm{~Pb}\).
Solution:
R0 = 2.8 × 10-15 m; A0 = 16
APb = 205; RPb = ?
\(\frac{R_{P b}}{R_0}\) = \(\left[\frac{A_{P b}}{A_0}\right]^{1 / 3}\) = \(\left[\frac{205}{16}\right]^{1 / 3}\)
[∵ R = R0A1/3]
\(\frac{R_{P b}}{2.8 \times 10^{-15}}\) = (12.82)1/3 = 2.34
RPb = (2.34) × (2.8 × 10-15)
= 6.55 × 10-15m

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 4.
Find the binding energy of \({ }_{26}^{56} \mathrm{Fe}\). Atomic mass of Fe is 55.9349u and that of Hydrogen is 1.00783u and mass of neutron is 1.00876u.
Solution:
Mass of hydrogen atom
mp = 1.00876u; mn = 1.00867u
Z = 26; A = 56
Mass of Iron atom M = 55.9349u

i) Mass defect Δm
= [Zmp + (A – Z) mn – M]
= [26 × 1.00876 + (56 – 26) (1.00867) – 55.9349] u
∴ Δm = 0.55296u

ii) BE of nucleus = ΔMC2
= ΔM × 931.5 MeV
= 0.55296 (931.5) MeV
= 515.08 MeV

Question 5.
How much energy is required to separate the typical middle mass nucleus \({ }_{50}^{120} \mathrm{Sn}\) into its constituent nucleons? (Mass of \({ }_{50}^{120} \mathrm{Sn}\) = 119.902199u, and mass of neutron = 1.008665u)
Solution:
mp = 1.007825u
mn = 1.008665u
For Sn, Z = 50;

A = 120; M = 119.902199u

i) Mass defect Δm
= [Zmp + (A – Z)mn – M]u
= 50 (1.007825) + (120 – 50) [(1.008665) – 119.902 199]
= [150 × 1.007825 + 70 × 1.008665 – 119.902199]u
= [50.39125 + 70.60655 – 119.902199]u
ΔM = [120.9978 – 119.902199]
= 1095601u

ii) Energy required to šeparate the nucleons = B.E of the nucleus
BE = ΔMc2 = ΔM × 931.5MeV
= 1.095601 × 931.5 MeV
= 1020.5 MeV

Question 6.
Calculate the binding energy of an α-particle. Given that mass of proton = 1.0073 u, mass of neutron = 1.0087u, and mass of α- particle = 4.0015u.
Solution:
For 2He4, A = 4, Z = 2, mp = 1.0073u
mn = 1.0087u, mn = 4.0015u

i) ΔM
= [Zmp + (A – Z)mn – M]
= [2(1.0073) + (4 – 2) (1.0087) – 4.00260]
= [2 × 1.0073 + 2 × 1.0087 – 4.00260]
= (2.0146 + 2.0174) – 4.0015
ΔM = [4.032 – 4.0015] = 0.0305 u

ii) BE = ΔM × c2 = ΔM × 931.5 MeV
= 0.0305 × 931.5
∴ BE = 28.41 MeV

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 7.
Find the energy required to split \({ }_8^{16} \mathrm{O}\) nucleus into four α-particles. The mass of an α-particle is 4.002603u and that of oxygen is 15.994915u.
Solution:
The energy required to split O =
[Total mass of the products – Total mass of the reactants] c2
Mass of four \({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\) – Mass of \({ }_8^{16} \mathrm{O}\)] × c2
= [(4 × 4.002603) – 15.994915] u × c2
= [16.010412 – 15.994915] u × c2
= (0.015497) 931.5 MeV
= 14.43 MeV

Question 8.
Calculate the binding energy per nucleon of \({ }_{17}^{35} \mathrm{Cl}\) nucleus. Given that mass of \({ }_{17}^{35} \mathrm{Cl}\) nucleus = 34.98000 u, mass of proton = 1.007825u, mass of neutron = 1.008665u and 1 is equivalent to 931 MeV.
Solution:
For \({ }_{17}^{36} \mathrm{Cl}\), A = 35, Z = 17;
mp = 1.007825 u
mn = 1.008665 u,
M = 34.98u

(i) ΔM = [Zmp + (A – Z) mn – M]
= [17 × 1.007825 + (35 – 17)(1.008665) – 34.98]
= [17.13303 + 18.15597 – 34.98]
ΔM = [35.289 – 34.98]
= 0.3089 u

(ii) BE = ΔMc2
= 0.3089 × 931 MeV = 287.5859 MeV
∴ BE per nucleon
= \(\frac{B \cdot E}{A}\) = \(\frac{287.5859}{35}\) = 8.21 MeV

Question 9.
Calculate the binding energy per nucleon of \({ }_{20}^{40} \mathrm{Ca}\). Given that mass of \({ }_{20}^{40} \mathrm{Ca}\) nucleus = 39.962589u, mass of a proton = 1.007825 u,; mass of Neutron = 1.008665u and 1u is equivalent to 931 MeV.
Solution:
For \({ }_{20}^{40} \mathrm{C}\), A = 40, Z = 20; mp = 1.007825 u
mn = 1.008665 u; M = 39.962589 u

(i) ΔM = [Zmp + (A – Z) mn – M]
= [(20) (1.007825) + (40 – 20)(1 .008665) – 39.962589]
[(20 × 1.007825) + (20 × 1.008665) – 39.962589]
= [40.3298 – 39.962589] = 0.3672 u

(ii) BE = ΔMc2 = 0.3672 × 931 MeV
= 341.86 MeV
B.E ‘341.86

(iii) B.E per nucleon = \(\frac{B . E}{A}\) = \(\frac{341.86}{40}\)
= 8.547 MeV

Question 10.
Calculate
(i) mass defect,
(ii) binding energy and
(iii) the binding energy per nucleon of \({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}\) nucleus. Nuclear mass of \({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}\) = 12.000000 u; mass of proton = 1.007825 u and mass of neutron = 1.008665 u.
Solution:
For \({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}\), A = 12; Z = 6; mp = 1.007825u
mn = 1.008665u; M = 12.000000u

(i) ΔM = [Zmp + (A – Z) mn – M]
= [6(1.007825) + (12 – 6)(1.008665) – 12,00]
= [6 × 1.007825 + 6 × 1.008665 – 12]
= [6.04695 + 6.05199 – 12.00]
ΔM = [12.09894 – 12.00] = 0.098944

(ii) BE = ΔM × c2 = 0.09894 × 931.5 MeV
= 92.16 MeV

(iii) BE per nucleon
= \(\frac{B . E}{A}\) = \(\frac{92.16}{12}\) = 7.68 MeV

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 11.
The binding energies per nucleon for deuterium and helium are 1.1 MeV and 7.0 MeV respectively. What energy in joules will be liberated when 106 deuterons take part in-the reaction.
Solution:
\(\left[\frac{B \cdot E}{A}\right]_D\) = 1.1 MeV; \(\left[\frac{B . E}{A}\right]_{H e}\) = 7.0 MeV
For deuterium \(\left({ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}\right)\),
A = 2
For He \(\left({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\right)\), A = 4
\(\left[\frac{B \cdot E}{2}\right]_D\) = 1.1 MeV ⇒ [B.E.]D
= 2 × 1.1 MeV = 2.2 MeV
\(\left[\frac{B . E}{4}\right]_{\mathrm{He}}\) = 70 MeV ⇒ [B.E.]He
= 4 × 7.0 MeV = 28 MeV
We know 1H2 + 1H22He4
Energy released = B.E of 106 deuterons – B.E of \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 106 Helium atoms
B.E = 2.2 × 106 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 106 × 28
= 106(2.2 – 14)
= -11.8 × 106 MeV
= -11.8 × 106 × 1.6 × 10-13J
= -18.88 × 10-7 J
(- ve sign indicates that energy is released)
∴ Energy released = 18.88 × 10-7 J

Question 12.
Bombardment of lithium with protons gives rise to the following reaction :
\({ }_3^7 \mathrm{Li}\) + \({ }_1^1 \mathrm{H}\) → 2 \(\left[{ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\right]\) + Q. Find the Q-value of the reaction. The atomic masses of lithium, proton and helium are 7.016u, 1.0084 and 4.004u respectively.
Solution:
Mass of Lithium = 7.0 16 u
mp = 1.008 u
Mass of Helium = 4004 u;
u = 931.5 MeV
Q = [Total mass of the reactants – Total mass of the products] c2
= [Mass of Lithium + mp – (2 × mass of Helium)] × 931.5 MeV
= [7.016+ 1.008 – 2(4.004)] × 931.5MeV
= [18.024 – 8.008] × 931.5 MeV
∴ Energy Q = 0.016 × 931.5
= 14.904 MeV

Question 13.
The half life radium is 1600 years. How much time does lg of radium take to reduce to 0.125 g. (T.S. Mar. ’16)
Solution:
Half life of radium = 1600 years
Initial mass = 1g
Final mass 0.125 g = \(\frac{1}{8}\) g
The quantity remaining after ‘n’ half lifes is \(\frac{1}{2^{\mathrm{n}}}\) of the initial quantity.
In this problem,
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 21
∴ Time taken = ’n’ half-lifes = 3 × 1600
= 4,800 years

Question 14.
Plutonium decays with a half – life of 24,000 years. If plutonium is stored for 72,000 years, what fraction of it remains ?
Solution:
Half-life of plutonium = 24,000 years
The duration of the time = 72,000 years
Initial mass = Mg
Final mass = mg
Number of half lifes (n)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 22
Fraction of plutonium that remains
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 23

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 15.
A certain substance decays to 1/232 of its initial activity in 25 days. Calculate its half-life.
Solution:
Fraction of substance decays
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 24
= \(\frac{1}{2^n}\) = \(\frac{1}{32}\) = \(\frac{1}{2^5}\)
∴ n = 5
Duration of time = 25 days
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 25

Question 16.
The half-life period of a radioactive substance is 20 days. What is the time taken for 7/8th of its original mass to disintegrate?
Solution:
Half life period = 20 days
In this problem,
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 26
∴ Time taken to disintegrate
= n × Half life time
= 3 × 20 = 60 days

Question 17.
How many disintegrations per second will Occur in one gram of \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U}\), if its half-life against α-decay is 1.42 × 10-17s?
Solution:
T = 1.42 × 1017 sec
Decay constant (λ) = \(\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{~T}}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{1.42 \times 10^7}\)
No. of disintegration (n) in 1 gm
= \(\frac{1}{238}\) × 6.023 × 1023
∴ Activity A = λN
= \(\frac{0.693}{1.42 \times 10^{17}}\) × \(\frac{1}{238}\) × 6.023 × 1023
= 1.235 × 104 disintegrations / sec

Question 18.
The half-life of a radioactive substance is 100 years. Calculate in how many years the activity will decay to 1/10th of its initial value.
Solution:
T = 100 years
λ = \(\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{~T}}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{~T}}\) = 0.693 × 10-2 years
N = N0e-λt ⇒ e-λt = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_0}\) = \(\frac{1}{10}\)
eλt = 10 ⇒ λt = \(\log _e^{10}\) = 2.303 × \(\log _{10}^{10}\)
t = \(\frac{2.303 \times 1}{0.693 \times 10^{-2}}\) = 3.323 × 102
= 332.3years

Question 19.
One gram of radium is reduced by 2 milligram in 5 years by a-decay. Calculate the half-life of radium.
Solution:
Initial (original) mass (N0) = 1 gram
Reduced mass = 2 mg = 0.002 grams
Final mass (N) = 1 – 0.002 = 0.998 grams
t = 5 years
e-λt = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_0}\) ⇒ eλt = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_0}{\mathrm{~N}}\) ⇒ λt = \(\log _{\mathrm{e}}\left[\frac{\mathrm{N}_0}{\mathrm{~N}}\right]\)
λt = 2.303 log\(\left[\frac{\mathrm{N}_0}{\mathrm{~N}}\right]\)
λt = 2.303 log \(\left[\frac{1}{0.998}\right]\)
= 2.303 × 0.000868
= 0.001999
λ = \(\frac{0.001999}{5}\) = 0.0003998
T = \(\frac{0.693}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{0.0003998}\) = 1733.3 years

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 20.
The half-life of a radioactive substance is 5000 years. In how many years, its activity will decay to 0.2 times a its initial value ? Given log105 = 0.6990.
Solution:
T = 5000 years; t = ?
Activity, A = Nλ = 0.2 times initial value
Initial activity A0 = N0λ
In radioactivity,
N = N0e-λt ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_0}\) = e-λt = 0.2
Put 0.2 = \(\frac{1}{5}\) ; \(\frac{1}{5}\) = e-λt (or) -λt = \(-\log _e^5\)
(or) t = \(\log _{\mathrm{e}}^5 \frac{5}{\lambda}\)
Radioactive decay constant A = \(\frac{\log _{\mathrm{e}} 2}{\mathrm{~T}}\)
= \(\frac{2.303 \log _{10}^2}{5000}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{5000}\)
Time taken to decay
t = \(\frac{\log _{\mathrm{e}}^5}{\lambda}\) × 5000
∴ t = \(\frac{2.303 \times 0.6990 \times 5000}{0.693}\) = \(\frac{8049}{0.693}\)
= 1.161 × 104 years

Question 21.
An explosion of atomic bomb releases an energy of 7.6 × 1013J. If 200 MeV energy is released of fission of one 235U atom calculate
(i) the number of uranium atoms undergoing fission,
(ii) the mass of uranium used in the bomb.
Solution:
Energy released (E) = 7.6 × 1013 J
Energy released on fissions (E) = 200 MeV
= 200 × 106 × 1.6 × 10-19 J
i) No. of fissions (n) = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{E}}\)
= \(\frac{7.6 \times 10^{13}}{200 \times 10^6 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
∴ n = 2.375 × 1024 atoms

But Avogadro number N = 6.023 × 1023 atoms
Mass of uranium (m) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n} \times 235}{\mathrm{~N}}\)
= \(\frac{2.375 \times 10^{24}}{6.023 \times 10^{23}}\)
= 926.66 g

Question 22.
If one microgram of \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) is completely destroyed in an atom bomb, how much energy will be released ? (T.S. Mar. ’19)
Solution:
m = 1μg = 1 × 10-6 g = 1 × 10-6 × 10-3 kg
= 10-9 kg
c = 3 × 108 m/s
E = mc2 = 1 × 10-9 × 9 × 106 = 9 × 107 J

Question 23.
Calculate the energy released by fission from 2g of \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) in kWh. Given that the energy released per fission is 200 MeV.
Solution:
Mass of uranium = 2g
Energy per fission = 200 MeV
No. of atoms in 2g, n = \(\frac{2 \times 6.023 \times 10^{23}}{235}\)
Total energy released (E’) = nE
= \(\frac{2 \times 6.023 \times 10^{23}}{235}\) × 200 × 106 × 1.6 × 10-19J
= \(\frac{2 \times 602.3}{235}\) × 32 × 109
= \(\frac{1640.3 \times 10^8}{36 \times 10^5}\)
∴ E’ = 45.56 × 103 kWh
= 4.556 × 104 kWh

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 24.
200 MeV energy is released when one nucleus of 235U undergoes fission. Find the number of fissions per second required for producing a power of 1 megawatt.
Solution:
E = 200 MeV
P = 1 × 106W
P = \(\frac{\mathrm{nE}}{\mathrm{t}}\) ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{t}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{E}}\) = \(\frac{10^6}{200 \times 10^6 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= \(\frac{1}{32}\) × 1018
= 3.125 × 106

Question 25.
How much 235U is consumed in a day in an atomic power house operating at 400 MW, provided the whole of mass 235U is converted into energy ?
Solution:
P = 400 MW = 400 × 106 W, c = 3 × 108 m/s
t = 24 hours = 24 × 60 × 60 sec
E = mc2
\(\frac{\mathrm{Pt}}{\mathrm{c}^2}\) = m [∵ P = \(\frac{E}{t}\)]
m = \(\frac{400 \times 10^{-6} \times 24 \times 60 \times 60}{9 \times 10^6}\)
= 384 × 10-6 kg
∴ Mass required = 384 × 10-6 × 103 g = 0.384 g

Textual Exercises

Question 1.
a) Two stable isotopes of lithium \({ }_3^6 \mathrm{Li}\) and \({ }_3^7 \mathrm{Li}\) have respective abundances of 7.5% and 92.5%. These isotopes have masses 6.01512 u and 7.01600 u, respectively. Find the atomic mass of lithium.
b) Boron has two stable isotopes, \({ }_5^{10} \mathrm{~B}\) and \({ }_5^{11} \mathrm{~B}\). Their respective masses are 10.01294 u and 11.00931 u, and the atomic mass of boron is 10.811u. Find the abundances of \({ }_5^{10} B\) and \({ }_5^{11} \mathrm{~B}\).
Solution:
a) Atomic weight
= Weighted average of the isotopes.
= \(\frac{6.01512 \times 7.5+7.01600 \times 92.5}{(7.5+92.5)}\)
= \(\frac{45.1134+648.98}{100}\)
= 6.9414

b) Let relative abundance of 5B10 be x%
∴ Relative abundance 5B11 = (100 – x) %
Proceeding as above
10.811 = \(\frac{10.01294 x+i 1.00931 \times(100-x)}{100}\)
x = 19.9% and (100 – x) = 30.1%

Question 2.
The three stable isotopes of neon : \({ }_{10}^{20} \mathrm{Ne}\), \({ }_{10}^{21} \mathrm{Ne}\) and \({ }_{10}^{22} \mathrm{Ne}\) have respective abundances of 90.51%, 0.27% and 9.22%. The atomic masses of the three isotopes are 19.99u, 20.99 u and 21.99u, respectively. Obtain the average atomic mass of Neon.
Solution:
The masses of three isotopes are 19.99u, 20.99 u, 21.99u
Their relative abundances are 90.51%, 10.27% and 9.22%
∴ Average atomic mass of Neon is
m = \(\frac{90.51 \times 19.99+0.27 \times 20.99+9.22 \times 21.99}{(90.51+0.27+9.22)}\)
= \(\frac{1809.29+5.67+202.75}{100}\) = \(\frac{2017.7}{100}\) = 20.17u

Question 3.
Obtain the binding energy (in MeV. of a nitrogen nucleus \(\left({ }_7^{14} \mathrm{~N}\right)\), given m \(\left({ }_7^{14} \mathrm{~N}\right)\) = 14.00307 u.
Solution:
7N14 Nucleius contains 7 protons and 7 neutrons
Mass defect (ΔM) = 7mH + 7mn – mN
= 7 × 1.00783 + 7 × 1.00867 – 14.00307
= 7.05481 + 7.06069 – 14.00307
= 0.11243μ
Binding energy = 0.11243 × 931 MeV
= 104.67 MeV

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 4.
Obtain the binding energy of the nuclei \({ }_{26}^{56} \mathrm{~F}\) and \({ }_{83}^{209} \mathrm{Bi}\) in units of MeV from the following data : m\(\left({ }_{26}^{56} \mathrm{Fe}\right)\) = 55.934939 u, m\(\left({ }_{83}^{209} \mathrm{Bi}\right)\) = 208.980388 u
Solution:
(i) 26F56 nucleus contains 26 protons and (56 – 26) = 30 neutrons
Mass of 26 protons = 26 × 1.007825
= 26.26345 a.m.u
Mass of 30 neutrons = 30 × 1.008665
= 30.25995 amu
Total mass of 56 nucleons
= 56.46340 a.m.u
Mass of 26Fe56 Nucleus
= 55.934939 a.m.u
Mass defect Δm = 56.46340 – 55.934939
= 0.528461 a.m.u
Total binding energy = 0.524861 × 931.5 MeV
= 492.26 MeV
Average B.E per nucleon = \(\frac{492.26}{56}\)
= 8.790 MeV

(ii) 83Bi209 nucleus contains 83 protons and (209 – 83) = 126 neutrons
Mass of 83 protons = 83 × 1.007825
= 83.649475 a.m.u
Mass of 126 Neutrons = 126 × 1.008665
= 127.09170 a.m.u
Total mass of nucleons = 210.741260 a.m.u
Mass of 83Bi209 nucleus = 208.986388 a.m.u
Mass defect Δm = 210.741260 – 208.980388
= 1.760872
Total B.E = 1.760872 × 931.5 MeV
= 1640.26 MeV
Average B.E. per nucleon = \(\frac{1640.26}{209}\)
= 7.848 MeV
Hence 26Fe56 has greater B.E per nucleon than 83Bi209

Question 5.
A given coin has a mass of 3.0gi Calculate the nuclear energy that would be required to separate all the neutrons and protons from each other. For simplicity assume that the coin is entirely made of 29Cu atoms (of mass 62.92960 u.
Solution:
Number of atoms in 3g coin =
\(\frac{6.023 \times 10^{23} \times 3}{63}\)
= 2.868 × 1022
Each atom of copper contains 29 protons and 34 neutrons. Therefore, mass defect of each atom= [29 × 1.00783 + 34 × 1.00867] – 62.92960 = 0.59225 u
Total mass defect for all the atoms
= 0.59225 × 2.868 × 1022 u
ΔM = 1.6985 × 1022u
As, 1u = 931 MeV
Nuclear energy required
= 1.6985 × 1022 × 931 MeV
= 1.58 × 1025 MeV

Question 6.
Write nuclear reaction equations for
i. α-decay of \({ }_{88}^{226} \mathrm{Ra}\)
ii. α-decay of \({ }_{94}^{242} \mathrm{Pu}\)
iii. β-decay of \({ }_{15}^{32} \mathrm{P}\)
iv. β-decay of \({ }_{83}^{210} \mathrm{Bi}\)
v. β+-decay of \({ }_6^{11} \mathrm{C}\)
vi. β+-decay of \({ }_{43}^{97} \mathrm{Tc}\)
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 27

Question 7.
A radio active isotope has a half-life of T years. How long will it take the activity to reduce to
a) 3.125%,
b) 1% of its original value ?
Solution:
a) Here \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_0}\) = \(\frac{3.125}{100}\) = \(\frac{1}{32}\)
From \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_0}\) = \(\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^{\mathrm{n}}\) = \(\frac{1}{32}\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^5\) ∴ n = 5
From t = nT = 5T

b) Here \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_0}\) = \(\frac{1}{100}\)
From \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_0}\) = e-λt = \(\frac{1}{100}\)
-λt = log 1 – \(\log _{\mathrm{e}} 100\)
= 0 – 2.303 \(\log _{10} 100\) = -2.203 × 2
= -4.606
t = \(\frac{4.606}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{4.606}{0.693 / \mathrm{T}}\) = 6.65 T

Question 8.
The normal activity of living carbon-containing matter is found to be about 15 decays per minute for every gram of carbon. This activity arises from the small proportion of radioactive \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}\) present with the stable carbon isotope \({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}\). When the organism is dead, its interaction with the atmosphere (which maintains the above equilibrium activity, ceases and its activity begins to drop. From the known half-life (5730 years. of \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}\), and the measured activity, the age of the specimen can be approximately estimated. This is the principle of \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}\) dating used in archaeology. Suppose a specimen from Mohenjodaro gives an activity of 9 decays per minute per gram of carbon. Estimate the approximate age of the Indus-Valley civilisation.
Solution:
Here normal activity R0 = 15 decays/min
Present activity R = 9 decays / min
T = 5730 yrs
Age t = ?
As activity is proportional to the number of radio active atoms, therefore
\(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_0}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{R}_0}\) = \(\frac{9}{15}\)
But \(\frac{N}{N_0}\) = e-λt
e-λt = \(\frac{9}{15}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
e+λt = \(\frac{5}{3}\)
λt \(\log _{\mathrm{e}} \mathrm{e}\) = \(\log _e \frac{5}{3}\) = 2.3023 log 1.6667
λt = 2.3026 × 0.2218 = 0.5109
t = \(\frac{0.5109}{\lambda}\)
λ = \(\frac{0.693}{T}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{5730}\)yt-1
∴ t = \(\frac{0.5109}{0.693 / 5730}\) = \(\frac{0.5109 \times 5730}{0.693}\)
t = 4224.3 years

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 9.
Obtain the amount of \({ }_{27}^{60} \mathrm{Co}\) necessary to provide a radioactive source of 8.0 mCi strength. The half-life of \({ }_{27}^{60} \mathrm{Co}\) is 5.3 years.
Solution:
Here, mass of 27Co60 =?
Strength of source, \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 8.0 mci
= 8.0 × 3.7 × 107 disint/sec
Half life, T = 5.3 years
= 5.3 × 365 × 24 × 60 × 60 sec
= 1.67 × 108 sec
λ = \(\frac{0.693}{T}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{1.67 \times 10^8}\) = 4.14 × 10-9 s-1
As \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 2N
∴ N = \(\frac{\mathrm{dN} / \mathrm{dt}}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{8 \times 3.7 \times 10^7}{4.14 \times 10^{-9}}\)
= 7.15 × 1016
By definition of Avogadros number, Mass of 6.023 × 1023 atoms of 27Co60 = 60 g
Mass of 7.15 × 1016 atoms of 27Co60
= \(\frac{60 \times 7.15 \times 10^{16}}{6.023 \times 10^{23}}\) = 7.12 × 10-6g

Question 10.
The half-life of \({ }_{38}^{90} \mathrm{~Sr}\) is 28 years. What is the disintegration rate of 15 mg of this isotope?
Solution:
Here T = 28 years = 28 × 3.154 × 107s
As number of atoms in 90 g of 38Sr90
= 6.023 × 1023
∴ Number of atoms in 15mg of 38Sr90
= \(\frac{6.023 \times 10^{23}}{90}\) × \(\frac{15}{1000}\)
i.e., N = 1.0038 × 1020
Rate of disintegration \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = λN
= \(\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{~T}} \mathrm{~N}\)
= \(\frac{0.693 \times 1.0038 \times 10^{20}}{28 \times 3.154 \times 10^7}\)
= 7.877 × 1010 Bq

Question 11.
Obtain approximately the ratio of the nuclear radii of the gold isotope \({ }_{79}^{197} \mathrm{Au}\) and the silver isotope \({ }_{47}^{107} \mathrm{Ag}\).
Solution:
Here A1 = 197 and A2 = 107
\(\frac{\mathrm{R}_1}{\mathrm{R}_2}\) = \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{A}_1}{\mathrm{~A}_2}\right)^{1 / 3}\) = \(\left(\frac{197}{107}\right)^{1 / 3}\) = 1.225

Question 12.
Find the Q-value and the kinetic energy of the emitted α-particle in the α-decay of (a) \({ }_{88}^{226} \mathrm{Ra}\) and (b) \({ }_{86}^{220} \mathrm{Rn}\).
Given m \(\left({ }_{88}^{226} \mathrm{Ra}\right)\) = 226.02540 u,
m \(\left({ }_{86}^{222} R n\right)\) = 222.01750 u,
m \(\left({ }_{86}^{222} \mathrm{Rn}\right)\) =220.01137 u, m \(\left({ }_{84}^{216} \mathrm{Po}\right)\) = 216.00189 u.
Solution:
a) 88Ra22685Rn222 + 2He4 Q value
[m(88Ra226) – m(86Rn222) – mα] × 931.5 MeV
= [226.02540 – 222.0 1750 – 4.00260] × 931.5 MeV
Q = 0.0053 × 931.5 MeV = 4.94 MeV
K.E of a particle =
\(\frac{(A-4) Q}{A}\) = \(\frac{226-4}{226}\) × 4.94 = 4.85 MeV

b) Proceeding as above, in case of
Q = 6.41 MeV
K.E of a particle
= \(\frac{(\mathrm{A}-4) \mathrm{Q}}{\mathrm{A}}\) = \(\frac{(220-4)}{220}\) × 6.41 = 6.29 MeV

Question 13.
The radionuclide 11C decays according to AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 28 The maximum energy of the emitted positron is 0.960 MeV. Given the mass values ; m\(\left({ }_6^{11} \mathrm{C}\right)\) = 11.011434u and \(\left({ }_6^{11} \mathrm{~B}\right)\) = 11.009305 u, calculate Q and compare it with the maximum energy of the positron emitted.
Solution:
Mass defect in the given reaction is Δm = m(6C11)
= [m (5B11) + Me]
This is in terms of nuclear masses. If we express the Q value interms of atomic masses we have to subtract 6me from atomic mass of carbon and 5 me from that of boron to get the corresponding nuclear masses
Therefore, we have
Δm = [m(6C11) – 6 me – m(5B11) + 5me – me
= [m(6C11) – m(5B11) – 2 me]
= [11.011434 – 11.009305 – 2 × 0.000548] u
= 0.001033u
As, 1u = 931 MeV
Q = 0.001033 × 931 MeV = 0.961 MeV
Which is the maximum energy of emitted position.

Question 14.
The nucleus \({ }_{10}^{23} \mathrm{Ne}\) decays by β-emission. Write down the β – decay. Write down the β-decay equation and determine the maximum kinetic energy of the electrons emitted. Given that:
\(m\left({ }_{10}^{23} \mathrm{Ne}\right)\) = 22.994466 u
\(\mathrm{m}\left({ }_{11}^{23} \mathrm{Na}\right)\) = 22.089770 u.
Solution:
The β decay of 10Ne23 may be represented as
10Ne2311Na231e0 + v + Q
Ignoring the rest mass of antineutrino and v electron
Mass defect, Δm = m(10Ne23) – m (11Na23)
= 22.994466 – 22.989770
= 0.004696 amu
Q = 0.004696 × 931 MeV
= 4.372 MeV
As 11Na23 is very massive, this energy of 4.3792 MeV is shared by ev pair. The max K.E of e = 4.372 MeV when energy carried by v is zero.

Question 15.
The Q value of a nuclear reaction A + b → C + d is defined by Q = [mA + mb – mc – md] c2 where the masses refer to the respective nuclei. Determine from the given data the Q-value of the following reactions and state whether the reactions are exothermic or endothermic.
i) \(\mathrm{H}_{\mathrm{1}}^{\mathrm{1}}\) + \({ }_1^3 \mathrm{H}\) → \({ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}\) + \({ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}\)
ii) \({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}\) + \({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}\) → \({ }_{10}^{20} \mathrm{Ne}\) + \({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\)
Atomic masses are given to be
\(\mathrm{m}\left({ }_{\mathrm{1}}^2 \mathrm{H}\right)\) = 2.014102u
\(\mathrm{m}\left({ }_1^3 \mathrm{H}\right)\) = 3.016049 u
\(\mathrm{m}\left({ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}\right)\) = 12.000000u
\(\mathrm{m}\left({ }_{10}^{20} \mathrm{Ne}\right)\) = 19.992439 u
Solution:
i) \(\mathrm{H}_{\mathrm{1}}^{\mathrm{1}}\) + \({ }_1^3 \mathrm{H}\) → \({ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}\) + \({ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}\)
Q = Δm × 931 MeV =
[m (1H1 + m(1H3) – 2m (1H2)] × 931 MeV
= [1.007825 + 3.01604 – 2 × 2.014102] × 931 MeV
= -4.03 MeV
∴ This reaction is endothermic,

ii) 6C12 + 6C1210Ne20 + 2He4
Q = Δm × 931 MeV =
[2m(6C12) – m(10Ne20) – m(2He4)] × 931 MeV
= [24.000000 – 19.992439 – 4.002603] × 931 MeV
= ±4.61 MeV
∴ The reaction is exothermic.

Question 16.
Suppose we think of fission of a \({ }_{26}^{56} \mathrm{Fe}\) nucleus into two equal fragments, \({ }_{13}^{28} \mathrm{Al}\), Is the fission energetically possible ? Argue by working out Q of the process. Given \(\mathrm{m}\left({ }_{26}^{56} \mathrm{Fe}\right)\) = 55.93494 u and \(\mathbf{m}\left({ }_{13}^{28} \mathrm{~A} l\right)\) = 27.98191 u.
Solution:
Q = [m(26Fe56 – 2m (13 Al28.] × 931.5 MeV
= [55.93494 – 2 × 27.9819] × 931.5 MeV
Q = – 0.2886 × 931.5 MeV = – 26.88 MeV
Which is negative.
This fission is not possible energetically.

Question 17.
The fission properties of \({ }_{94}^{239} \mathrm{Pu}\) are very similar to those of \({ }_{92}^{238} U\). The average-energy released per fission is 180 MeV. How much energy, in MeV is released if all the atoms in 1kg of pure \({ }_{94}^{239} \mathrm{Pu}\) undergo fission?
Solution:
No. of atoms in 1kg of pure .
UP = \(\frac{6.023 \times 10^{23}}{239}\) × 1000 = 2.52 × 1024
As average energy released / fission is 180 MeV, therefore total energy released
= 2.52 × 1024 × 180 MeV = 4.53 × 1026 MeV

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 18.
A 1000 MW fission reactor consumes half of its fuel In 5.00 y. How much \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) did it contain initially ? Assume that the reactor operates 80% of the time, that all the energy generated arises from the fission of \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) and that this nuclide is consumed only by the fission process.
Solution:
In the fission of one nucleus of 92U235 energy generated is 200 MeV
∴ Energy generated in fission of 1 kg of
92U235 = 200 × \(\frac{6 \times 10^{23}}{235}\) × 1000 MeV
= 5.106 × 1026 MeV = 5.106 × 1026 × 1.6 × 10-13J
= 8.17 × 103 J
Time for which reactor operates \(\frac{80}{100}\) × 5
years = 4 years.
Total energy generated in 5 years.
= 1000 × 106 × 60 × 60 × 24 × 365 × 4J
∴ Amount of U consumed in 5 years
= \(\frac{1000 \times 10^6 \times 60 \times 60 \times 24 \times 365 \times 4}{8.17 \times 10^{13}} \mathrm{~kg}\)
= 1544 kg
∴ Initial amount of 92U235 = 2 × 1544 kg
= 3088 kg

Question 19.
How long can an electric lamp. of 100W be kept glowing by fusion of 20 kg of deuterium ? Take the fusion reaction as \({ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}\) + \({ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}\) → \({ }_2^3 \mathrm{He}\) + n + 3.27 MeV
Solution:
Number of deuterium atoms in 2.0 kg
\(\frac{6.023 \times 10^{23} \times 2000}{2}\) = 6.023 × 1026
Energy released when 2 atoms füse = 3.27 MeV
∴ Total energy released
= \(\frac{3.27}{2}\) × 6.023 × 1026 MeV
= 1.635 × 6.023 × 1026 × 1.6 × 10-13 j
= 15.75 × 103 J
Enery consumed by the bulb/sec = 100 J
∴ Time for which bulb will glow
= \(\frac{15.75 \times 10^{13}}{100} \mathrm{~S}\)
= \(\frac{15.75 \times 10^{11}}{60 \times 60 \times 24 \times 365}\) = 4.99 × 107 years

Question 20.
Calculate the height of the potential barrier for a head on collision of two deuterons. (Hint : The height of the potential barrier is given by the Coulomb repulsion between the two deuterons when they just touch each other. Assume that they can be taken as hard spheres of radius 2.0 fm.
Solution:
For head on collision distance between centres of two deuterons = r = 2 × radius
r = 4 fm = 4 × 10-15 m
Charge of each deuteron e = 1.6 × 10-10 C
Potential energy
\(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\) = \(\frac{9 \times 10^9\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)^2}{4 \times 10^{-15}}\) Joule
= \(\frac{9 \times 1.6 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-14}}{4 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-16}}\)KeV
PE = 360 KeV
P.E = 2 × K.E of each deuteron = 360 KeV
K.E of each deuteron = \(\frac{360}{2}\) = 180 KeV
This is a measure of height of Coulomb barrier

Question 21.
From the relation R = R0A1/3, where R0, is a constant and A is the mass number of a nucleus, show that the nuclear matter density is nearly constant (i.e., independent of A.
Solution:
Density of nuclear matter
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 29
ρ = \(\frac{\mathrm{mA}}{\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{R}^3}\), where m is average mass of a nucleon
Using R = R0A1/3 we get
ρ = \(\frac{3 \mathrm{~mA}}{4 \pi\left(\mathrm{R}_0 \mathrm{~A}^{1 / 3}\right)^3}\) = \(\frac{3 \mathrm{~m}}{4 \pi \mathrm{R}_0^3}\)
As R0 is constant, therefore ρ is constant.

Question 22.
For the β+ (positron) emission from a nucleus, there is another competing process known as electron capture (electron from an inner orbit, say, the K – shell, is captured by the nucleus and a neutrino is emitted).
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 30
Show that if β+ emission is energetically allowed, electron capture is necessarily allowed but not vice-versa.
Solution:
The β+ emission from a nucleus ZXA may be represented as
zXA = z-1YA + 1e0 + v + Q1 —– (i)
The other competing process of electron capture may be represented as
-1e0 + ZXA = Z-1yA + v + Q2 —– (ii)
The energy released in Q1 in (1. is given by
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 31
Note that mN here denotes mass of nucleus and m denotes the mass of atom similarly from (ii)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 32
Ir Q1 > 0 then Q2 > 0
i.e., If positron emission is energetically allowed electron capture is necessarily allowed. But Q2 > 0 does not necessarily mean Q1 > 0. Hence the reverse is not true.

Additional Exercises

Question 1.
In a periodic table the average atomic mass of magnesium is given as 24.312 u. The average value is based on their relative natural abundance on earth. The three isotopes and their masses are \({ }_{12}^{24} \mathrm{Mg}\) (23.98504u), \({ }_{12}^{25} \mathrm{Mg}\) (24.98584u) and \({ }_{12}^{26} \mathrm{Mg}\) (25.98259u). The natural abundance of \({ }_{12}^{24} \mathrm{Mg}\) is 78.99% by mass. Calculate the abundances of other two isotopes.
Solution:
Let the abundance of \({ }_{12} \mathrm{Mg}^{25}\) by mass be x% therefore, abundance of 12Mg26 by mass
= (100 – 78.99 – x%)
= (21.01 – x%)
Now average atomic mass of magnesium is
24.312 =
\(\frac{23.98504 \times 78.99+24.98584+25.98529(21.01-\mathrm{x})}{100}\)
on solving we get x = 9.303% for 12Mg25 and for 12Mg26 (21.01 – x) = 11.71%

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 2.
The neutron separation energy is defined as the energy required to remove a neutron from the nucleus. Obtain the neutron separation energies of the nuclei \({ }_{20}^{41} \mathrm{Ca}\) and \({ }_{13}^{27} \mathbf{Al}\) from the following data: .
m(\({ }_{20}^{40} \mathrm{Ca}\)) = 39.962591 u
m(\({ }_{20}^{41} \mathrm{Ca}\)) = 40.962278 u
m({ }_{13}^{26} \mathrm{Ca}) = 25.986895 u
m({ }_{13}^{27} \mathrm{Ca}) = 26.981541 u
Solution:
When a neutron is separated from 20Ca41 we are left with
20Ca40 i.e. 20Ca4120Ca40 + 0n1
Now mass defect
ΔM = m(20Ca40) + mn – m (20Ca41)
= 39.962591 + 1.008665 – 40.962278
= 0.008978 a.m.u
∴ Neutron seperation energy
= 0.008978 × 931MeV
= 8.362 MeV
similarly 13Al2713Al26 + 0n1
∴ Mass defect, ΔM = m (13Al26) + mn – m(13Al27)
= 25.986895 + 1.008665 – 26.981541
= 0.013845 u
∴ Neutron seperation energy. = 0.0138454 × 931MeV
= 12.89 MeV

Question 3.
A source contains two phosphorous radio nuclides \({ }_{15}^{32} \mathbf{P}\) (T1/2 = 14.3d) and \({ }_{15}^{33} P\) (T1/2 = 25.3d). Initially, 10% of the decays come from \({ }_{15}^{33} \mathrm{P}\). How long one must wait until 90% do so ?
Solution:
Suppose initially the source has 90% 15pt32 and 10% \({ }_{15} \mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{t}}^{32}\), say 9x gram P2 and x gram of P1.

After t days, suppose the source has 90% \({ }_{15} \mathbf{P}_2^{33}\) and 10% \({ }_{15} \mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{t}}^{32}\) i.e., y gram of P2 and 9y gram of P1
we have to calculate :
from \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_0}\) = \(\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^n\) = \(\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^{t / T}\) = 2-i/T
N = N02-t/T
y = 9×2-t/14.3 for P2 and 9y = x 2-t/25.3 for P1
Dividing we get
\(\frac{1}{9}\) = 9 × 2(t/25.3 – t/14.3.)
or \(\frac{1}{81}\) = 2-11t/25.3 × 14.3
log 1 – log 81 = \(\frac{-11 \mathrm{t}}{25.3 \times 14.3}\) log 2
0 – 1 – 9085 = \(\frac{-11 \mathrm{t}}{25.3 \times 14.3}\) × 0.3010.
t = \(\frac{25.3 \times 14.3 \times 1.9085}{11 \times 0.3010}\) = 208.5 days

Question 4.
Under certain circumstances, a nucleus can decay by emitting a particle more massive than an α – particle. Consider the following decay processes :
\({ }_{88}^{223} \mathrm{Ra}\) → \({ }_{82}^{209} \mathrm{~Pb}\) + \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}\)
\({ }_{88}^{223} \mathrm{Ra}\) → \({ }_{86}^{219} \mathrm{~Pb}\) + \({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\)
Calculate the Q-values for these decays and determine that both are energetically allowed.
Solution:
i) For the decay process
88Ra 22382pb209 + 6C14 + Q
mass defect, ΔM = mass of Ra223 – (mass of pb209 + mass of C14)
= 223.01850 – (208.98107 + 14.00324)
= 0.03419u
Q = 0.03419 × 931 MeV = 31.83 MeV

ii) For the decay process
88Ra2386Rn219 + 2He4 + Q mass defect, ΔM = mass of Ra223 – (mass of Rn219 + mass of He4) = 223.01850 – (219.00948 + 4.00260)
= 0.00642 u
∴ Q = 0.00642 × 931 MeV = 5.98 MeV
As Q values are positive in both the cases, therefore both the decays are energetically possible.

Question 5.
Consider the fission of \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathbf{U}\) by fast neutrons. In one fission event, no neutrons are emitted and the final end products, after the beta decay of the primary fragments, are \({ }_{58}^{140} \mathrm{Ce}\) and \({ }_{44}^{99} \mathrm{Ru}\). Calculate Q for this fission process. The relevant atomic and particle masses are
m(\({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U}\)) = 238.05079 u
m(\({ }_{58}^{140} \mathrm{Ce}\)) = 139.90543 u
m(\({ }_{44}^{99} \mathrm{Ru}\))= 98.90594 u
Solution:
For this fission reaction,
92U238 + on1 → 58Ce140 + 44Ru99 + Q
mass defect ΔM = mass of U238 + mass of n – (mass of Ce140 + mass of Ru99.
= 238.05079 + 1.00867 – (139.90543 + 98.90594)
= 0.24809U
∴ Q = 0.24809 × 931 MeV = 230.97 Mev

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei

Question 6.
Consider the D-T reaction (deuterium- tritium fusion)
\({ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}\) + \({ }_1^3 \mathrm{H}\) → \({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\) + n
a) Calculate the energy released in MeV in this reaction from the data:
m\(\left({ }_1^2 \mathrm{H}\right)\) = 2.014102 u
m\(\left({ }_1^3 \mathrm{H}\right)\) = 3.016049 u
b) Consider the radius of both deuterium and tritium to be approximately 2.0 fm. What is the kinetic energy needed to overcome the Coulomb repulsion between the two nuclei ? To what temperature must the gas heated to
initiate the reaction ?
(Hint : Kinetic energy required for one fusion event = average thermal kinetic energy available with the interacting particles = 2(3kt/2); k = Boltzman’s constant, T = absolute temperature..
Solution:
a) For the process 1H2 + 1H3 + 2He4 + n + Q
Q = [m(1H2) + m (1H3) + m(2He4) – mn] × 931 MeV
= (2.014102 + 3.016049 – 4.002603
1.00867) × 931 MeV
= 0.018878 × 931 = 17.58 MeV

b) Repulsive potential energy of two nuclei when they almost touch each other is
= \(\frac{q^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0(2 r)}\) = \(\frac{9 \times 10^9\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)^7}{2 \times 2 \times 10^{-15}}\) Joule
= 5.76 × 10-14 Joule

Classically KE atleast equal to this amount is required to overcome Coulomb repulsion. Using the relation
K.E. = 2 × \(\frac{3}{2}\) KT
T = \(\frac{\mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}}{3 \mathrm{k}}\) = \(\frac{5.76 \times 10^{-14}}{3 \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23}}\) = 1.39 × 109K
In actual practise the temperature required for trigerring the reaction is somewhat less.

Question 7.
Obtain the maximum kinetic energy of β-particles, and the radiation frequencies of γ decays in the decay scheme shown in Fig. You are given that
m(198Au) = 197.968233 u
m(198Hg) = 197.966760 u.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Nuclei 33
Solution:
Energy corresponding to r1
E1 = 1.088 – 0 = 1.088 MeV
= 1.088 × 1.6 × 10-13 Joule
Frequency v1 = \(\frac{E_1}{h}\)
= \(\frac{1.088 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-13}}{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}\)
= 2.63 × 1020 HZ
similarly v2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_2}{\mathrm{~h}}\)
= \(\frac{0.412 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-12}}{6.6 \times 10^{10}}\)
= 9.98 × 1013 Hz
and v3 = \(\frac{E_3}{h}\)
= \(\frac{(1.088-0.412) \times 1.6 \times 10^{-13}}{6.6 \times 10^{20} \mathrm{~Hz}}\)
Maximum K.E. of β1 particle
Kmax1)= [m(79Au198 – mass of Second excited state of 80Hg198] × 931 MeV
= [m(79Au198) – m(82Hg198) – \(\frac{1.088}{931}\)] × 931 MeV
= 931 [197.968233 – 197.966760] – 1.088 MeV
= 1.371 – 1.088 = 0.283 MeV
similarly kmax2) – 0.957 MeV

Question 8.
Calculate and compare the energy released by a. fusion of 1.0 kg of hydrogen deep within Sun and b. the fission of 1.0 kg of 235U in a fission reactor.
Solution:
In sun, four hydrogen nuclei fuse to form a helium nucleus with the release of 26 MeV energy.
∴ Energy released by fusion of 1 kg of hydrogen = \(\frac{6 \times 10^{23} \times 26}{4}\) × 103 MeV
As energy released in fission of one atom of 92U236 = 200 MeV
Energy released in fission of 1 kg of 92U238
= \(\frac{6 \times 10^{23} \times 1000}{235}\) × 200 MeV
E2 = 5.1 × 1026 MeV
\(\frac{\mathrm{E}_1}{\mathrm{E}_2}\) = \(\frac{39 \times 10^{26}}{5.1 \times 10^{26}}\) = 7.65
i.e., Energy released in fusion is 7.65 times the energy released in fission.

Question 9.
Suppose India had a target of producing by 2020 AD, 2,00,000 MW of electric power, ten percent of which was to be obtained from nuclear power plants. Suppose we are given that, on an average, the efficiency of utilization (i.e. conversion to electric energy of thermal energy produced in a reactór was 25%.
How much amount of fissionable uranium would our country need per year by 2020 ? Take the heat energy per fission of 235U to be about 200 MeV.
Solution:
Total targeted power = 2 × 105 MW
Total Nuclear power = 10% of 2 × 105 MW
= 2 × 104 MW
Energy produced in fission = 200 MeV
Effeciency of power plant =25%
∴ Energy converted into electrical energy per fission = \(\frac{25}{100}\) × 200 = 50 MeV
= 50 × 1.6 × 10-13 Joule.
Total electrical energy to be produced :
= 2 × 104 MW = 2 × 104 × 106 Watt
= 2 × 1010 Joule/Sec
= 2 × 1010 × 60 × 60 × 24 × 365 Joule / year
No. of fissions in one year
= \(\frac{2 \times 10^{10} \times 60 \times 60 \times 24 \times 365}{50 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-13}}\)
= 2 × \(\frac{36 \times 24 \times 365}{8}\) × 1024
Mass of 6.023 × 1023 atoms of U235 = 235 gm = 235 × 10-3 kg
Mass of \(\frac{2 \times 36 \times 24 \times 365}{8}\) × 1024 atoms
= \(\frac{235 \times 10^{-3}}{6.023 \times 10^{23}}\) × \(\frac{2 \times 36 \times 24 \times 365 \times 20^{24}}{8}\)
= 3.08 × 104 Kg
Hence mass of Uranium needed per year = 3.08 × 104 Kg.

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material 1st Lesson Bills of Exchange Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material 1st Lesson Bills of Exchange

Essay Questions

Question 1.
Define a bill of exchange. Explain the main features of a bill of exchange.
Answer:
Sec. 5 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 defines a bill of exchange as follows:
“A bill of exchange is an instrument in writing containing an unconditional order signed by the maker, directing a certain person to pay a certain sum of money only to, or to the order of a certain person or to the bearer of the instrument”.
Features of a bill of exchange: The following are the features of a bill of exchange.

  • A bill of exchange must be in writing.
  • It must contain an order and not a request to make payment.
  • The order of payment must be unconditional.
  • The amount of the bill of exchange must be certain.
  • The date of the bill of exchange should be clearly mentioned.
  • It must be signed by the maker or drawer of the bill.
  • It must be accepted by the drawee by signing on it.
  • The amount is payable either to a certain person or to his order or to the bearer of the bill.
  • The amount of the bill of exchange is payable either on demand or on the expiry of a certain period.
  • It must be properly stamped as per legal requirements.

Question 2.
What are the advantages of a bill of exchange?
Answer:
A bill of exchange as an instrument or credit is used frequently in business because of the following advantages.

  • It helps in the purchase and sale of goods on a credit basis.
  • It is a legally valid document in the eyes of law. It assures an easier recovery to the drawer if the drawee fails to make payments.
  • It acts as a source of finance since it can be discounted from the file bank before the due date.
  • It is a written and signed acknowledgment of debt.
  • It can be easily transferred from one person to another person by endorsement.
  • By drawing accommodation bills on one another traders can raise money.

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 3.
What are the different types of bills of exchange?
Answer:
Bills of exchange can be classified as follows:

  • Time bill: When the payment of a bill of exchange is to be made after a particular period of time. The bill is termed a time bill. In such a case, the date of maturity is always calculated by adding three days of grace.
  • Demand bill: In the case of a demand bill, payment is to be made on demand. Neither the acceptance of the drawee is necessary nor any days of grace allowed.
  • Trade bill: When a bill of exchange has been drawn and accepted for a genuine trade transaction, it is termed a trade bill.
    Ex: A sold goods to B on credit and draws a bill of exchange on B who accepted it. It is a trade bill.
  • Accommodation bill: Accommodation bills refer to those bills which are drawn, accepted endorsed without any consideration. These bills are drawn and accepted to meet the financial needs of drawer/drawee/both for a temporary period by getting bills disconnected at the bank.
  • Inland bill: A bill is termed as an Inland bill if it is drawn in India on a person residing in India whether payable in or outside India.
    Or
    It is drawn in India on a person residing outside India but payable in India.
  • Foreign bill: A bill that is not an inland bill is a foreign bill. A foreign bill is generally drawn up in triplicate and each copy is sent by separate post so that atleast one copy reaches the concerned party at the earliest. Of course, the drawer of the acceptor will sign on a single set. It becomes the actual bill and the payment will be made on the such bill.

Question 4.
Explain the differences between a bill of exchange and a promissory note.
Answer:
The differences between bill of exchange and promissory note are as follows:

Basis of difference Bills of exchange Promissory note
1. Drawer It is drawn by the creditor. It is drawn by the debtor.
2. Order or promise It contains an order to make payment. It contains a promise to make payment.
3. No. of parties It has three parties namely

  • Drawer
  • Drawee
  • Payee
It has two parties namely

  • The maker
  • Payee
4. Acceptance It is valid only when it is accepted by the drawee. It does not require any acceptance.
5. Payee The drawer and payee can be the same person. The drawer cannot be the payee of it.
6. Noting In case of dishonour of bill noting becomes important. Noting is not necessary in case of dishonour of promissory note.

Question 5.
Explain the differences between a bill of exchange and a cheque.
Answer:
A cheque is a bill of exchange drawn on a specified banker and payable on demand (sec 6 of N.I Act, 1881). A cheque is similar to a bill of exchange with two additional conditions. They are:

  • It is always drawn by a specified banker.
  • It is always payable on demand.

Differences between Bill of exchange and Cheque

Basis of difference Bills of exchange Cheque
1. Acceptance It requires acceptance to become a legal instrument. It does not require any acceptance.
2. Stamp duty It requires the necessary stamp as per the act. It does not require any stamp.
3. Crossing It will not have any crossing on the instrument. It may be crossed.
4. Due date for payment The proceeds of the bill will be payable on the due date of the instrument. The cheque amount should be paid immediately as and when it is presented to the bank for payment.
5. Days of Grace Three days of grace are allowed after the due date of the bill for payment of the bill amount. Days of grace are not applicable in the case of cheques.
6. Withdrawal Once accepted the bill cannot be withdrawn by the drawee. It can be withdrawn by the maker by giving a stop payment order to the bank.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is a bill of exchange?
Answer:
When goods are sold on credit, the buyer promises the seller that he will pay the number of goods purchased after a certain period. The buyer has to give a promise in writing. The bill of exchange contains an unconditional order to pay a certain amount on an agreed date.

Question 2.
State the three parties involved in a bill of exchange.
Answer:
There are three parties to a bill of exchange.

  • Drawer: The drawer is the person who writes the bill of exchange or the person who granted credit.
  • Drawee: Drawee is the person on whom the bill of exchange is drawn or to whom the credit is granted.
  • Payee: Payee is the person who receives the amount of the bill on maturity. Usually, the drawer and payee are the same people. But when the bill is discounted with a bank by the drawer then the payee is the banker. Similarly, when the bill is endorsed by the drawer to a third party then the payee is the endorsee.

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 3.
What is a Promissory Note?
Answer:
A promissory note is an instrument in writing (not being a bank note or currency note) containing an unconditional undertaking signed by the maker, to pay a certain sum of money only to or to the order of a certain person or to the bearer of the instrument.

Question 4.
What is the due date of a bill?
Answer:
A bill payable on demand or at sight, presentment becomes due as soon as the bill is presented. A bill payable a certain period after the date or after sight becomes nominally due after the expiry of such period. The date which becomes after adding 3 days of grace to be nominally due date of a bill is called the date of maturity.

Question 5.
What are the days of Grace?
Answer:
For making the payment of the bill, the drawee is allowed three extra days after the normal due date. Such three days are known as ‘Days of Grace. If the due date is a public holiday previous day is the due date. If the due date is a sudden holiday, the next day is the due date.

Question 6.
What do you mean by Noting Charges?
Answer:
To obtain proof of dishonour, the bill is re-sent to the drawee through a legally authorized person called a notary public. Notary public charges a small fee for providing this service known as noting charges. Noting charges are paid to the notary public first by the holder of the bill but are ultimately recovered from the drawee because he is the responsible person for the dishonour.

Question 7.
What is meant by acceptance of a bill of exchange?
Answer:
The drawee has to accept the bill prepared by the drawer. Unless the drawee gives his acceptance by writing the word ‘accepted’ and also putting his signature along with the date, the bill does not become a legal document. Before the acceptance, the bill is called ‘Draft’. After acceptance, the bill is returned to the drawer. This is called acceptance of a bill of exchange.

Question 8.
What is meant by discounting a bill?
Answer:
When the bill is encashed from the bank before its due date, it is known as discounting of the bill. Bank deducts a small sum of money as a discount from the amount of the bill and disburses the balance amount to the drawer of the bill.

Question 9.
What is the retirement of the bill of exchange?
Answer:
When the drawee makes the payment of the bill before its due date it is called ‘retirement of the bill’. In such a case, the holder of the bill usually allows a certain amount as a rebate to the drawee.

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 10.
What do you mean by the renewal of the bill of exchange?
Answer:
Sometimes the drawee of a bill finds himself unable to meet the bill on the due date. To avoid dishonouring of the bill, he may request the holder of the bill to cancel the original bill and draw a new bill in place of the old one. If the holder agrees, the old bill is cancelled and a new bill with new terms is drawn on the drawee and also accepted by him. This is called ‘Renewal of a bill’.

Question 11.
What is meant by ‘Dishonour of a Bill’?
Answer:
When the drawee or acceptor of the bill fails to make payment of the bill on the date of maturity it is called ‘Dishonour of the bill’.

Textual Exercises

A. Bills of Exchange Honoured

Question 1.
On 1st July 2014, Madhu sold goods to Pavan for ₹ 5,000 on credit and drew a bill of exchange for 3 months for the same amount. Pavan accepted the bill and returned it to Madhu. Pavan met his acceptance on maturity.
Pass the necessary Journal entries in the books of Madhu and Pavan.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Madhu
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q1
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q1.1
Journal entries in the books of Pavan
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q1.2

Question 2.
On 1st March 2013, Radhika sold goods to Harika worth ₹ 9,000 and drew a bill for 2 months for the same amount. Harika accepted the bill and returned it to Radhika. The bill is honoured on the date of maturity.
Pass the necessary Journal entries in the books of Radhika and Harika.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Radhika
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q2
Journal entries in the books of Harika
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q2.1

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 3.
On 25th March 2014, Vinod drew a bill for 3 months on Prakash for ₹ 3,000. Prakash accepted the bill and handed it over the bill to Vinod. The bill is honoured on the date of maturity.
Show the journal entries in the books of Vinod and Prakash.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Vinod
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q3
Journal entries in the books of Prakash
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q3.1

Question 4.
On 1st January 2014, Rajendra sold goods to Narendra worth ₹ 4,000 and drew a bill on Narendra payable after three months. After securing Narendra’s acceptance, Rajendra discounted the bill with his bank at 12% p.a. on 1st February 2014. On the due date, the bill is honoured.
Pass necessary journal entries in the books of Rajendra and Narendra.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Rajendra
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q4
Journal entries in the books of Narendra
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q4.1

Question 5.
Amar sold goods for ₹ 10,000 to Sundar OD credit on 1st July 2014. Amar drew a bill of exchange on Sundar for the same amount for three months. Sundar accepted the bill and returned it to Amar. Amar discounted the bill with his bank at 10% per annum on the same day. Sundar met bis acceptance on maturity.
Pass necessary journal entries in the books of Amar and Sundar.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Amar
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q5
Journal entries in the books of Sundar
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q5.1

Question 6.
Sandhya sold goods for ₹ 14,000 to Rajeswari on 1st March 2014 and drew upon her a bill of exchange payable after 2 months. Rajeswari accepted the bill and handed over the same to Sandhya. Sandhya immediately discounted the bill with her bank @ 12% p.a. On the due date, Rajeswari met her acceptance.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Sandhya and Rajeswari.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Sandhya
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q6
Journal entries in the books of Rajeswari
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q6.1

Question 7.
Satyam sold goods to Sivam worth ₹ 9,000 on 1st June 2013 and drew a bill for 2 months for the same amount. Sivam accepted the bill and returned it to Satyam. Satyam endorsed the bill to his creditor Sundaram on 1st July 2013. The bill was honoured on the due date.
Pass necessary journal entries in the books of Satyam, Sivam, and Sundaram.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Satyam
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q7
Journal entries in the books of Sivam
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q7.1
Journal entries in the books of Sundaram
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q7.2

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 8.
On 1st July 2014, Ajay purchased goods worth ₹ 8,000 from Kiran and accepted the bill which was drawn by Kiran payable after three months for the same amount. Kiran sent the bill to his bank for collection. The bill was honoured on the date of maturity.
Pass necessary journal entries in the books of Kiran and Ajay.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Kiran
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q8
Journal entries in the books of Ajay
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q8.1

Question 9.
Jayaram sold goods for ₹ 20,000 to Sivaram on 15th March 2014 and drew upon him a bill of exchange payable after two months. Sivaram accepted the bill and returned the same to Jayaram. On the due date, the bill was honoured.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Jayaram and Sivaram in the following circumstances.
I. When the bill was retained by Jayaram till the date of its maturity.
II. When Jayaram immediately discounted the bill @ 6% p.a. with his bank.
III. When the bill was endorsed immediately by Jayaram in favour of his creditor Seetharam.
IV. When the bill was sent by Jayaram to his bank for collection on 25th April 2014.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Jayaram
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q9
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q9.1
Journal entries in the books of Sivaram
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q9.2

B. Dishonour of bills of exchange

Question 10.
Kotireddy purchased goods worth ₹ 12,000 from Rajareddy on 25th March 2014 and accepted a bill of exchange drawn upon him by Rajareddy payable after two months. On the date of maturity, Kotireddy dishonoured the bill. Rajareddy paid ₹ 80 as noting charges.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Rajareddy and Kotireddy.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Kotireddy
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q10
Journal entries in the books of Rajareddy
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q10.1

Question 11.
Parvathi sold goods worth ₹ 14,000 to Suneetha on 1st January 2014. Suneetha paid ₹ 4,000 immediately and for the balance, she accepted a bill of exchange drawn upon her by Parvathi payable after 3 months. Parvathi discounted the bill immediately with her bank @ 10% p.a. On the due date, Suneetha dishonoured the bill and the bank paid ₹ 30 as noting charges.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Parvathi and Suneetha.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Parvathi
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q11
Journal entries in the books of Suneetha
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q11.1

Question 12.
On 1st January 2014, Hari accepted 3 months bill for ₹ 12,000 drawn on him by Raju. Raju discounted the bill with his bank @ 9% p.a. on the Same day. On the due date, Hari dishonoured his acceptance.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Raju and Hari.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Raju
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q12
Journal entries in the books of Hari
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q12.1

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 13.
On 25th April 2013, Bhagavan sold goods for ₹ 13,000 to Lakshman and drew upon him a bill of exchange for 3 months for the same amount Lakshman accepted the bill and sent the same to Bhagavan. Bhagavan endorsed the bill in favour of his creditor Raman. On the due date, the bill was dishonoured and Raman paid ₹ 90 as Noting charges.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Bhagavan and Lakshman.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Bhagavan
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q13
Journal entries in the books of Lakshman
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q13.1

Question 14.
Manga purchased goods for ₹ 20,000 from Gangs on 1st February 2013 and accepted a bill of exchange drawn by Gangs for the same amount payable after 2 months. On 20th February 2013 Gangs sent the bill to her bank for collection. On the due date, Manga dishonoured the bill and the bank paid ₹ 100 as noting charges.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Gangs and Manga.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Ganga
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q14
Journal entries in the books of Manga
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q14.1

Question 15.
Mohan sold goods for ₹ 15,000 to Vinod on 1st January 2014 and drew upon him a bill of exchange for the same amount to payable after two months. Vinod accepted the bill and handed it over the bill to Mohan. On the due date, the bill was dishonoured.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Mohan and Vinod in the following cases.
I. When Mohan retained the bill till the due date and paid ₹ 150 as noting charges.
II. When Mohan discounted the bill @ 12% p.a. on 4th February 2014 and the bank paid ₹ 150 as noting charges.
III. When Mohan endorsed the bill immediately in favour of his creditor Amar and paid ₹ 150 as noting charges.
IV. When Mohan sent the bill to his bank for collection on 25th January 2014 and bank paid ₹ 150 as noting charges.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Mohan
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q15
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q15.1
Journal entries in the books of Vinod
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q15.2

C. Renewal of a bill

Question 16.
On 1st July 2013, Kalyan sold goods to Kapil for ₹ 24,000 and drew upon him a bill for the same amount payable after 3 months. Kapil accepted the bill and returned it to Kalyan. On the due date, Kapil expressed his inability to honour the bill and offered to pay ₹ 12,000 in cash and to accept a new bill for the balance amount including interest at 10% p.a. for 2 months. Kalyan agreed to this proposal. On the due date, the new bill was honoured.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Kalyan and Kapil.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Kalyan
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q16
Journal entries in the books of Kapil
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q16.1
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q16.2

Question 17.
Anasuya sold goods worth ₹ 6,000 to the Padma on 1st March 2013 and drew upon her a bill for the same amount payable after three months. The Padma accepted the bill and sent it back to Anasuya. On the due date, Padma expressed her inability to honour the bill and requested Anasuya to cancel the original bill and draw a new bill for three months. Anasuya agreed the proposal provided interest at 12% was paid immediately in cash. The Padma paid such interest in cash and accepted a new bill. The new bill was dishonoured on the due date.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Anasuya and Padma.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Anasuya
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q17
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q17.1
Journal entries in the books of Padma
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q17.2

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 18.
On 1st May 2014 Akhil sold goods to Nikhil for ₹ 6,000 on credit and drew a bill on him for three months for the same amount. Nikhil accepted the bill and returned it to Akhil. On 4th August 2014, Nikhil requested Akhil to draw a new bill for the amount due. Akhil agreed to draw a new bill for 2 months but he charged interest @ 12% p.a. This bill was honoured on its maturity.
Pass necessary journal entries in the books of Akhil and Nikhil.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Akhil
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q18
Journal entries in the books of Nikhil
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q18.1

D. Retiring of a bill under rebate

Question 19.
On 1st January 2013, Nagababu sold goods for ₹ 10,000 to Damodhar and drew upon him a bill of exchange payable after two months. Damodhar accepted the bill and handed over the same to Nagababu. One month before the maturity of the bill Damodhar approached Nagababu to accept the payment against the bill under a rebate of 9% p.a. Nagababu agreed to the request Damodhar. Damodhar retired the bill under the agreed rate of rebate.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Nagababu and Damodhar.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Nagababu
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q19
Journal entries in the books of Damodhar
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q19.1

Question 20.
On 1st June 2014, Meghana sold goods for ₹ 13,000 to Kaveri and drew upon her a bill of exchange payable after 3 months. Kaveri accepted the bill and returned it to Meghana. One month before the maturity of the bill Kaveri approached Meghana to accept the payment against the bill under a rebate of 12% p.a. Meghana agreed to the request of Kaveri to retire the bill under the agreed rate of rebate.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Meghana and Kaveri.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Meghana
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q20
Journal entries in the books of Kaveri
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q20.1

E. Insolvency of Drawee

Question 21.
Jayababu purchased goods for ₹ 25,000 from Tatababu on 1st February 2014 and accepted a bill of exchange drawn by Tatababu for the same amount The bill was payable after 2 months. Before the due date of the bill, Jayababu became insolvent and nothing could be recovered from his estate.
Write necessary journal entries in the books of Tatababu and Jayababu.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Tatababu
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q21
Journal entries in the books of Jayababu
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q21.1
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q21.2

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 22.
Anil sold goods worth ₹ 17,000 to Sunil on 1st March 2014 and drew upon him a bill for three months for the same amount Sunil accepted the bill and handed over it to Anil. On the same day, Anil discounted the bill @ 12% p.a. with his bank. Before the due date of the bill, Sunil became insolvent and only 50 paise in a rupee could be recovered from his estate.
Pass necessary journal entries in the books of Anil and Sunil.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Anil
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q22
Journal entries in the books of Sunil
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Q22.1

Textual Examples

Question 1.
On 1st March 2014, Ravi sold goods for ₹ 10,000 to Vikas on credit and drew a bill for 3 months for the same amount Vikas accepted the bill and returned it to Ravi. This bill is honoured on the date of maturity.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Ravi and Vikas.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Ravi (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q1
Journal entries in the books of Vikas (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q1.1

Question 2.
On 1st January 2013, Sankar sold goods worth ₹ 20,000 to Bhaskar on credit and drew a bill for 3 months for the same amount. Bhaskar accepted the bill and returned it to Sankar. On the same day, Sankar discounted the bill with his bank at 10% per annum. On the due date, the bill is honoured.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Sankar and Bhaskar.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Sankar (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q2
Journal entries in the books of Bhaskar (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q2.1

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 3.
On 1st March 2014, Sumathi purchased goods for ₹ 8,000 from Lakshmi and accepted a bill for the same amount drawn by Lakshmi payable after 3 months. Lakshmi discounted the bill with her bank on 1st April 2014 at 12% per annum. Sumathi met her acceptance on the due date.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Lakshmi and Sumathi.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Lakshmi (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q3
Journal entries in the books of Sumathi (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q3.1

Question 4.
On 1st January 2014, Venkatesh sold goods worth ₹ 5,000 to Nagarjuna and drew a bill on Nagarjuna for 3 months for the same amount Nagaijuna accepted the bill and returned it to Venkatesh. On 1st February 2014, Venkatesh endorsed the bill in favour of his creditor Prabhakar in the settlement of his debt. The bill was honoured on the due date.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Venkatesh, Nagarjuna, and Prabhakar.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Venkatesh (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q4
Journal entries in the books of Nagarjuna (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q4.1
Journal entries in the books of Prabhakar (Endorsee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q4.2

Question 5.
On 1st July 2014, Parasuram sold goods to Rama Krishna for ₹ 7,000 and drew a bill on him for the same amount for two months. Rama Krishna accepted the bill and returned the same to Parasuram. Immediately after its acceptance, Parasuram sent the bill to his bank for collection. On the due date, bill is honoured.
Pass necessary journal entries in the books of Parasuram and Rama Krishna.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Parasuram (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q5
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q5.1
Journal entries in the books of Rama Krishna (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q5.2

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 6.
Ashok sold goods to Rajesh on 1st April 2014 for ₹ 10,000 on credit and drew upon him a bill for the same amount payable after 3 months. Rajesh accepted the bill and returned it to Ashok. On the date of maturity, a bill was presented to Rajesh for payment and he honoured it.
Pass the journal entries in the books of Ashok and Rajesh when
Case I: Bill is retained by Ashok till the date of maturity.
Case II: Bill is discounted by Ashok with his bank on the same date @ 12% p.a.
Case III: Bill is endorsed in favour of Santosh on 4th May 2014.
Case IV: Bill is sent to the bank for collection on 1st June 2014.
Also, record the journal entries in the books of Santosh.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Ashok (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q6
Journal entries in the books of Rajesh (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q6.1
Journal entries in the books of Santosh (Endorsee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q6.2

Question 7.
On 15th March 2014, Suresh sold goods for ₹ 3,000 to Naresh on credit. Naresh accepted the bill of exchange drawn upon him by Suresh payable after 2 months. On the due date, the bill was dishonoured and Suresh paid ₹ 40 as noting charges.
Pass the journal entries in the books of Suresh and Naresh.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Suresh (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q7
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q7.1
Journal entries in the books of Naresh (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q7.2

Question 8.
Narayana purchased goods for ₹ 15,000 from Ravindra on 1st March 2013. Ravindra drew upon Narayana a bill of exchange for the same amount payable after two months. The bill was immediately discounted by Ravindra with his bank @ 6% p.a. On the due date, the bill was dishonoured and Bank paid ₹ 100 as noting charges.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Ravindra and Narayana.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Ravindra (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q8
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q8.1
Journal entries in the books of Narayana (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q8.2

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 9.
On 1st January 2013, Leela purchased goods for ₹ 15,000 from Neela. She immediately made a payment of ₹ 5,000 by cash and for the balance accepted the bill of exchange for 3 months drawn upon her by Neela. On 25th January 2013, Neela purchased goods worth ₹ 10,000 from Bala and endorsed the above bill to Bala. On the due date, the bill was dishonoured and Bala paid ₹ 50 as noting charges.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Neela, Leela, and Bala.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Neela (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q9
Journal entries in the books of Leela (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q9.1
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q9.2
Journal entries in the books of Bala (Endorsee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q9.3

Question 10.
On 1st June 2014 Jaya sold goods to Surya for ₹ 8,000 on credit and drew a bill on Surya for the above amount payable after 3 months. Immediately after its acceptance, Jaya sent the bill to her bank for collection. On the due date, the bill was dishonoured and the noting charges amounted to ₹ 70.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Jaya and Surya.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Jaya (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q10
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q10.1
Journal entries in the books of Surya (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q10.2

Question 11.
Siva sold goods to Pradeep on 1st May 2014 for ₹ 6,000 on credit and drew upon him a bill for the same amount payable after 2 months. Pradeep accepted the bill and returned it to Siva. On the date of maturity, Pradeep failed to make payment of the bill.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Siva and Pradeep in the following cases:
Case I: When Siva retained the bill till the due date and paid noting charges of ₹ 100.
Case II: When Siva discounted the bill with his bank on 4th June 2014 @ 12% p.a. and the bank paid noting charges of ₹ 100.
Case III: When Siva endorsed the bill in favour of his creditor Rahul on 1st June 2014 and Rahul paid noting charges of ₹ 100.
Case IV: When Siva sent the bill to his bank for collection on 1st June 2014 and bank paid noting charges of ₹ 100.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Siva (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q11
Case I: When the bill is retained by Siva till the date of maturity
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q11.1
Case II: When the bill is discounted by Siva with his bank
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q11.2
Case III: When the bill is endorsed in favour of Rahul
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q11.3
Case IV: When the bill is sent to the bank for collection
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q11.4
Journal entries in the books of Pradeep (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q11.5

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 12.
On 1st September 2014, Hari purchased goods for ₹ 12,000 from Sekhar and accepted a bill for the same amount drawn by Sekhar payable after 3 months. On the date of maturity, Hari offered to pay ₹ 6,000 and requested Sekhar to draw a new bill for 3 months for the balance amount including interest at 12% p.a. Sekhar agreed to this proposal.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Sekhar and Hari.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Sekhar (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q12
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q12.1
Journal entries in the books of Hari (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q12.2
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q12.3

Question 13.
Viswanath sold goods to Srinivas on 1st April 2014 for ₹ 4,000 and drew a bill for 3 months on Srinivas for the same amount Srinivas accepted the bill and returned it to Viswanath. On the due date, Srinivas requested Viswanadh to draw a new bill for the period of 3 months. Srinivas agreed to pay interest in cash @ 9% p.a. immediately. Viswanath agreed to this proposal. The new bill was honoured on the due date.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Viswanath and Srinivas.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Viswanath (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q13
Journal entries in the books of Srinivas (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q13.1

Question 14.
On 1st March 2013 Jagannadham sold goods to Chidambaram for ₹ 24,000 and drew upon him a bill for the same amount payable after 3 months. On the due date, Chidambaram requested Jagannadham to renew the bill for a further period of 3 months at 9% interest per annum. Jagannadham agreed to this proposal. Chidambaram accepted a new bill drawn by Jagannadham for the amount of the old bill including interest payable after 3 months. On the due date, a new bill was dishonoured.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Jagannadham and Chidambaram.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Jagannadham (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q14
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q14.1
Journal entries in the books of Chidambaram (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q14.2
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q14.3

Question 15.
On 1st March 2013, Prudhvi sold goods to Akbar for ₹ 6,000 and drew upon him a bill for the same amount payable after 3 months. Akbar accepted the bill and returned it to Prudhvi. On 4th April 2013, Akbar retired the bill under a rebate of 12% p.a.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Prudhvi and Akbar
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Prudhvi (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q15
Journal entries in the books of Akbar (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q15.1
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q15.2

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 16.
On 1st January 2014 Revathi drew a bill for ₹ 4,000 on Savithri payable after 3 months. Savithri accepted the bill and returned it to Revathi. On 4th February 2014, Savithri retired the bill under a rebate of 9% p.a.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Revathi and Savithri.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Revathi (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q16
Journal entries in the books of Savithri (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q16.1

Question 17.
Damayanthi sold goods worth ₹ 9,000 to Jayanthi on 1st June 2014 and drew a bill for 2 months for the same amount Jayanthi accepted the bill and returned it to Damayanthi. Before the due date of the bill, Jayanthi became insolvent and nothing could be recovered from her estate.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Damayanthi and Jayanthi.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Damayanthi (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q17
Journal entries in the books of Jayanthi (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q17.1

AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange

Question 18.
Kumar sold goods worth ₹ 7,000 to Murali on 1st January 2014 and drew upon him a bill for 3 months for the same amount Murali accepted the bill and returned it to Kumar. On the due date, murali requested Kumar to draw a new bill for the amount due. Kumar agreed to draw a new bill for 2 months but he charged interest @ 12% p.a. Murali accepted the new bill which was drawn by Kumar. Before the due date of the bill, Murali became insolvent and only 50 paise in a rupee could be recovered from his estate.
Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Kumar and Murali.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of Kumar (Drawer)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q18
Journal entries in the books of Murali (Drawee)
AP Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 1 Bills of Exchange Textual Examples Q18.1

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 13th Lesson Atoms Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 13th Lesson Atoms

Vey Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is the angular momentum of electron in the second orbit of Bohr’s model of hydrogen atom ?
Answer:
Angular momentum of electron in second orbit of Hydrogen atom
L = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{2 \pi}\) = \(\frac{h}{\pi}\) (∵ L = \(\frac{h h}{2 \pi}\))

Question 2.
What is the expression for fine structure constant and what is its value ?
Answer:
Formula for fine structure constant
α = \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{2 \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{ch}}\); value of α = \(\frac{1}{137}\)

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 3.
What is the physical meaning of ‘negative energy of an electron’ ?
Answer:
The ‘negative energy of an electron’ indicates that the electron bound to the nucleus due to force of attraction.

Question 4.
Sharp lines are present in the spectrum of a gas. What does this indicate ?
Answer:
Sharp lines in the spectrum of gas indicates bright lines against dark background.

Question 5.
Name a physical quantity whose dimensions are the same as those of angular momentum.
Answer:
Planck’s constant.

Question 6.
What is the difference between α – particle and helium atom ?
Answer:
Alpha particle

  1. It is a + 2e charged Helium nucleus.
  2. It contains 2 protons and 2 neutrons.

Helium atom

  1. It has no charge.
  2. It contains 2 protons, 2 electrons and 2 neutrons.

Question 7.
How is impact parameter related to angle of scattering ?
Answer:
The impact parameter related to angle of scattering is given by b = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0} \times \frac{\mathrm{Ze}^2}{\left(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\right)} \cot \theta_2\)

Question 8.
Among alpha, beta and gamma radiations, which get affected by the electric field ?
Answer:
Alpha and Beta radiations are get affected by the electric field.

Question 9.
What do you understand by the ‘phrase ground state atom’ ?
Answer:
If the electron is present in the ground state, it is called ground state atom.

Question 10.
Why does the mass of the nucleus not have any significance in scattering in Rutherford’s experiment ?
Answer:
The size of the atom is 10-10 m and size of the nucleus is 10-15 m. Hence atom has large empty space. So the mass of nucleus has no significance in Rutherford’s scattering experiment.

Question 11.
The Lyman series of hydrogen spectrum lies in the ultraviolet region. Why ? (A.P. Mar. ’15)
Answer:
The calculated values of wavelengths lie in the ultraviolet region of the spectrum well agree with the values of wavelengths observed experimentally by Lyman.

Question 12.
Write down a table giving longest and shortest wavelengths of different spectral series.
Answer:
Wavelength limits of some spectral series of hydrogen.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 1

Question 13.
The wavelengths of some of the spectral lines obtained in hydrogen spectrum are 1216 A, 6463 A and 9546A. Which one of these wavelengths belongs to the Paschen series ?
Answer:
The wavelength of spectral line 9546A belongs to the Paschen series.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 14.
Give two drawbacks of Rutherford’s atomic model.
Answer:
Drawbacks of Rutherford’s atom model:

  1. As the revolving electron loses energy continuously, it must spiral inwards and eventually fall into the nucleus. But matter is stable, we can not expect the atom collapse.
  2. The atoms should emit continuous spectrum, but what we observe is only a line spectrum.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is impact parameter and angle of scattering ? How are they related to each other ?
Answer:

  1. Impact parameter (b) : Impact parameter is defined as the perpendicular distance of the initial velocity vector of the alpha particle from the central line of the nucleus, when the particle is far away from the nucleus of the atom.
  2. Scattering angle (θ): The scattering angle (θ) is the angle between the asymtotic direction of approach of the α – particle and the asymptotic direction in which it receeds.
  3. The relation between b and θ is b = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0} \frac{Z \mathrm{e}^2}{E} \cot \frac{\theta}{2}\) where E = K.E. of α – particle = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^2\)

Question 2.
Derive an expression for potential and kinetic energy of an electron in any orbit of a hydrogen atom according to Bohr’s atomic model. How does P.E change with increasing n. (T.S. Mar. ’15)
Answer:

  1. According fo Bohr electrostatic force of attraction, Fe between the revolving electrons and nucleus provides the necessary centripetal force Fc to keep them in their orbits.
  2. Thus for dynamically state orbit in a hydrogen atom.
    Fc = Fe ⇒ \(\frac{m v^2}{r}\) = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0} \frac{e^2}{r_2}\)
  3. The relation between the orbit radius and the electron velocity is r = 2
    4e0 (m )
  4. The kinetic energy (K) and electrostatic potential energy (υ) of the electron in hydrogen atom are
    K = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^2\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 r}\) and υ = \(\frac{-\mathrm{e}^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\)
  5. The total energy E of the electron in a hydrogen atom is
    E = K + U = \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\) – \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\)
    ∴ E = \(\frac{-\mathrm{e}^2}{8 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{r}}\)
  6. With increase in ‘nr potential energy (U) also increases.

Question 3.
What are the limitations of Bohr’s theory of hydrogen atom ? (Mar. ’14)
Answer:
Limitations of Bohr’s theory of Hydrogen atom :

  1. This theory is applicable only to simplest atom like hydrogen, with z = 1. The theory fails in case of atoms- of other elements for which z > 1.
  2. The theory does not explain why orbits of electrons are taken as circular, while elliptlical orbits are also possible.
  3. Bohr’s theory does not say anything about the relative intensities of spectral lines.
  4. Bohr’s theory does not take into account the wave properties of electrons.

Question 4.
Explain the distance of closest approach and impact parameter.
Answer:
Distance of closest approach :

  1. Suppose an α-particle with initial kinetic energy (K.E) is directed towards the centre of the nucleus of an atom.
  2. On account of Coulomb’s repulsive force between nucleus and alpha particle, kinetic energy of alpha particle goes on decreasing and in turn, electric potential energy of the particle goes on increasing.
  3. At certain distance ‘d’ from the nucleus, K. E of α-particle reduces to zero. The particle stops and it can not go closer to the nucleus. It is repelled by the nucleus and therefore it retraces its path, turning through 180°.
  4. Therefore, the distance d is known as the distance of closest of approach.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 2
    The closest distance of approach,
    d = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0} \times \frac{Z e^2}{\left(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\right)}\)
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 3
  5. Impact parameter (b) : Impact parameter is defined as the ⊥r distance of the initial velocity vector of the α – particle from the central line of the nucleus, when the particle is far away from the nucleus of the atom.

Question 5.
Give a brief account of Thomson model of atom. What are its limitations ?
Answer:
Thomson’s model of atom :

  1. According to Thomson’s model, every atom consists of a positively charged sphere of radius of the order of 10-10 m in which entire mass and positive charge of the atom are uniformly distributed.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 4
  2. Inside this sphere, the electrons are embedded like seeds in a watermelon or like plums in a pudding.
  3. The negative charge of electrons is equal to the positive charge of the atom. Thus atom is electrically neutral.

Limitations :

  1. It could not explain the origin of spectral series of hydrogen and other atoms, observed experimentally.
  2. It could not explain large angle scattering of a-particles from thin metal foils, as observed by Rutherford.

Question 6.
Describe Rutherford atom model. What are the draw backs of this model.
Answer:
Rutherford atom model: The essential features of Rutherford’s nuclear model of the atom or planetary model of the atom are as follows :

  1. Every atom consists of tiny central core, called the atomic nucleus, in which the entire positive charge and almost entire mass of the atom are concentrated.
  2. The size of nucleus is of the order of 10-15m, which is very small as compared to the size of the atom which is of the order of 10-10m.
  3. The atomic nucleus is surrounded by certain number of electrons. As atom on the whole is electrically neutral, the total negative charge of electrons surrounding the nucleus is equal to total positive charge on the nucleus.
  4. These electrons revolve around the nucleus in various circular orbits as do the planets around the sun. The centripetal force required by electron for revolution in provided by the electrostatic force of attraction between the electrons and the nucleus.

Draw backs : According to classical E.M. theory.

  1. The revolving electron loses energy continuously, it must spiral inwards and eventually fall into the nucleus. As matter is stable, we cannot expect the atoms to collapse.
  2. Since the frequency of radiation emitted is the same as the frequency of revolution, the atom should radiate a continuous spectrum, but what we observe is only a line spectrum.

Question 7.
Distinguish between excitation potential and ionization potential.
Answer:
Excitation Potential:

1) When the electron jumps from lower orbit to higher orbit by absorbing energy is called excited electron and the process is known as excitation. The minimum accelerating potential which provides an electron energy sufficient to jump from the inner most orbit (ground state) to one of the outer orbits is called excitation potential or resonance potential.

2) a) For example, in case of hydrogen atom,
E1 = -13.6 eV. E2 = -3.4 eV E3 = -1.51eV and soon, E = 0
∴ Energy required to raise an electron from ground state (n = 1) to first excited state
(n = 2) is E = E2 – E1 = -3.4 – (-13.6) = 10.2 eV.
The corresponding excitation potential = 10.2 Volt,

b) Similarly, energy required to raise an electron from ground state (n = 1) to second excited , state (n = 3) is
E = E3 – E1 = -1.51 – (-13.6) = -1.51 + 13.6 = 12.09 eV
The corresponding excitation potential = 12.09 Volt and so on.

3) The excitation potential of an atom is not one. It can have many values, depending on the state to which the atom is excited.

Ionisation potential:

  1. The energy supplied is so large that it can remove an electron from the outer most orbit of an atom, the process is called Ionisation. Thus ionisation is the phenomenon of removal of an electron from the outer most orbit of an atom.
  2. The minimum accelerating potential which would provide an electron energy sufficient just to remove it from the atom is called Ionisation potential.
  3. For example, total energy of electron in ground state of hydrogen atom, + 13.6 eV energy is required.
    ∴ Ionisation energy of hydrogen atom = 13.6 eV.
    Ionisation potential of hydrogen atom = 13.6 Volts.
  4. The general expression for ionisation potential of an atom is V = \(\frac{13.6 \mathrm{Z}^2}{\mathrm{n}^2}\) volt, Where Z is the charge number of the atom and n is number of orbit from which electron is to be removed.
  5. For a given element, ionisation potential is fixed, but for different elements, ionisation potentials are different.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 8.
Explain the different types of spectral series in hydrogen atom. (A.P. Mar. ’19, ’15; T.S. Mar. ’16)
Answer:
The atomic hydrogen emits a line spectrum consisting of five series.

  1. Lyman series : v = Rc \(\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\) where n = 2, 3, 4, ……
  2. Balmer series : v = Rc\(\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\) where n = 3, 4, 5, ………
  3. Paschen series : v = Rc\(\left(\frac{1}{3^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\) where n = 4, 5, 6, …….
  4. Brackett series : v = Rc\(\left(\frac{1}{4^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\) where n = 5, 6, 7, ……
  5. Pfund series : v = Rc\(\left(\frac{1}{5^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\) where n = 6, 7, 8,……..

Question 9.
Write a short note on Debroglie’s explanation of Bohr’s second postulate of quantization.
Answer:
Debroglie’s explanation of Bohr’s second postulate of quantization :

  1. The second postulate of Bohr atom model says that angular momentum of electron orbiting around the nucleus is quantized i.e., mυr = \(\frac{\text { nh }}{2 \pi}\) where m = 1, 2, 3,….
  2. According to Debroglie, the electron in its circular orbit, as proposed by Bohr, must be seen as a particle wave.
  3. When a string fixed at two ends is plucked, a large number of wavelengths are excited and standing wave is formed.
  4. It means that in a string, standing waves form when total distance travelled by a wave down the string and back is an integral number of wavelengths.
  5. According to Debroglie, a stationary orbit is that which contains an integral number of Debrogile waves associated with the revolving electron.
  6. For an electron revolving in nth circular orbit of radius rn, total distance covered = circumference òf the orbit = 2πrn
    ∴ For permissible orbit, 2πrn = nλ
  7. According to Debrogile, λ = \(\frac{h}{m v_n}\) Where υn is speed of electron revolving in nth orbit
    ∴ mυnrn = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\) = \(\mathrm{n}\left(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2 \pi}\right)\)
    i.e., angular momentum of electron revolrmg in nth orbit must be an integral multiple of \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2 \pi}\), which is the quantum condition proposed by Bohr in second postulate.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Describe Geiger-Marsden Experiment on scattering of α – particles. How is the size of the nucleus estimated in this experiment ?
Answer:

  1. The experimental set up used by Rutherford and his colaborators, Geiger and Marsden is shown in fig.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 5
  2. The α-particles emitted by radio active source contained in a lead cavity are collimated into a narrow beam with the help of a lead slit (collimator).
  3. The collimated beam is allowed to fall on a thin gold foil of thickness of the order of 2.1 × 10-7m.
  4. The α-particles scattered in different directions are observed through a rotatable detector consisting of zinc sulphide screen and a microscope.
  5. The α-particles produce bright flashes or scintillations on the ZnS screen.
  6. These are observed in the microscope and counted at different angles from the direction of incidence of the beam.
  7. The angle θ of deviation of an α-particle from its original direction is called its scattering angle θ.

Observations : We find that

  1. Most of the alpha particles pass straight through the gold foil. It means they do not suffer any collision with gold atoms.
  2. Only about 0.14% of incident α-particles scatter by more than 1°.
  3. About one α-particle in every 8000 α-particles deflect by more than 90°.

Estimation of size of the nucleus :

  1. This led to Rutherford postulate, that the entire positive charge of the atom must be concentration in a tiny central core of the atom. This tiny central core of each atom was called atomic nucleus.
  2. The electrons would be moving in orbits about the nucleus just as the planets do around the sun.
  3. Rutherford’s experiments suggested the size of the nucleus to be about 10-15m to 10-14m. From kinetic theory, the size of an atom was known to be 10-10m, about 10,000 to 1,00,000 times larger than the size of the nucleus.

Question 2.
Discuss Bohr’s theory of the spectrum of hydrogen atom.
Answer:

  1. According to Bohr’s model an electron continuous to revolve round the nucleus in fixed, stationary orbits. This is called groupd state of the atom. In ground state there is no emission of radiation.
  2. But when some energy is given to an atom the electron absorbs this energy. This is called excited state of the atom. In this state the electron jumps to the next higher orbit. But it can remain 10-8 sec and it immediatly returns back to its ground state and the balance of the energy is emitted out as a spectral line.
  3. According to Bohr’s third postulate, the emitted energy is given by E = hv = E2 – E1
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 6

Spectral series of Hydrogen atom:

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 7

Hydrogen atom has five series of spectral lines: They are

1. Lyman series: When an electron jumps from the outer orbits to the first orbit, the spectral lines are in the ultra – violet region. Here n1 = 1, n2 = 2, 3, 4, 5….
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left[\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_2^2}\right]\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left[1-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_2^2}\right]\)

2) Balmer Series : When an electron jumps from the outer orbits to the second orbit, the
spectral Lines are in the visible region. Here n1 = 2, n2 = 3, 4, 5…
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_2^2}\right]\)

3) Paschen series : When an electron jumps from the outer orbits to the third orbit, the spectral lines are in the near infrared region. Here n1 = 3, n2 = 4, 5, 6 ….
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left[\frac{1}{3^2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_2{ }^2}\right]\)

4) Brackett series : When an electron jumps from outer orbits to the forth orbit, the spectral lines are in the infrared region. Here n1 = 4, n2 = 5, 6, 7…….
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left[\frac{1}{4^2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_2^2}\right]\)

5) Pfund series : When an electron jumps from outer orbits to the fifth orbit, the spectral lines are in the far infrared region. Here n1 = 5, n2 = 6, 7, 8, ………
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left[\frac{1}{5^2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_2^2}\right]\)

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 3.
State the basic postulates of Bohr’s theory of atomic spectra. Hence obtain an expression for the radius of orbit and the energy of orbital electron in a hydrogen atom.
Answer:
a) Basic postulates of Bohr’s theory are
1) The electron revolves round a nucleus is an atom in various orbits known as stationary orbits. The electrons can not emit radiation when moving in their own stationary levels.

2) The electron can revolve round the nucleus only in allowed, orbits whose angular momentum is the integral multiple of \(momentum is the integral multiple of
i.e., mυnrn = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\) ———> (1)
where n = 1, 2, 3…..

3) If an electron jumps from higher energy (E2) orbit to the lower energy (E1) orbit, the difference of energy is radiated in the form of radiation.
i.e., E = hv = E2 – E1 ⇒ v = \(\frac{E_2-E_1}{h}\) ——> (2)

b) Energy of emitted radiation : In hydrogen atom, a single electron of charge — e, revolves around the nucleus of charge e in a ciccular orbit of radius rn.

1) K.E. of electron : For the electron to be in circular orbit, centripetal force = The electrostatic force of attraction between the electron and nucleus,
From Coulomb’s law, \(\frac{\mathrm{m} \dot{v}_n^2}{r_n}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{Ke}^2}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}^2}\) ——> (3)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 8
where K = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0}\) —–> (4)
\(m v_n^2\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{Ke}^2}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}}\) —–> (5)
\(m v^2 r_n\) = Ke2 ——-> (6)
Dividing (5) by (1), υn = Ke2 × \(\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{nh}}\)
From (3), kinetic energy K = \(\frac{1}{2} m v_n^2\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{Ke}^2}{2 r_{\mathrm{n}}}\)

2) Potential energy of electron:
P.E. of electron, U = \(\frac{\mathrm{Ke}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}} \times-\mathrm{e}\) [∵ W = \(\frac{I^{\prime}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0} \frac{Q}{d}\) × -Q]
∴ U = \(\frac{-\mathrm{Ke}^2}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}}\)

3) Radius of the orbit: Substituting the value of (6) in (2),
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 9

4) Total energy (En) : Revolving electron posses K.E. as well as P.E.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 10

Textual Exercises

Question 1.
The radius of the first electron orbit of a hydrogen atom is 5.3 × 10-11m. What is the radius of the second orbit ?
Solution:
rn ∝ n2
\(\frac{\mathrm{r}_2}{\mathrm{r}_1}\) = \(\frac{2^2}{1^2}\) = \(\frac{4}{1}\) ⇒ r2 = 4r1

Question 2.
Determine the radius of the first orbit of the hydrogen atom. What would be the velocity and frequency of the electron in the first orbit ?
Solution:
Given: h = 6.62 × 10-34 J-s,
m = 9.1 × 10-31kg,
e = 1.6 × 10-19 C,
k = 9 × 109Nm2C-2, n = 1

i)
r1 = \(\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 \mathrm{mke}^2}\)
= \(\frac{(1)^2 \times\left(6.62 \times 10^{-34}\right)^2}{4 \times(3.14)^2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 9 \times 10^9\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)^2}\)
∴ r1= 0.529 A \(\simeq\) 0.53 A

ii)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 11

iii)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 12

Question 3.
The total energy of an electron in the first excited state of the hydrogen atom is -3.4eV. What is the potential energy of the electron in this state ?
Solution:
In 1st orbit, E = -3.4eV
Total energy E = \(\frac{\mathrm{KZe}^2}{2 \mathrm{r}}\) – \(\frac{\mathrm{KZe}^2}{\mathrm{r}}\)
\(\frac{\mathrm{KZe}^2}{\mathrm{r}}\) = U(say)
E = \(\frac{\mathrm{U}}{2}-\mathrm{U}\) = \(\frac{-\mathrm{U}}{2}\)
U = -2E
∴ U = -2 × -3.4 = 6.8 eV.

Question 4.
The total energy of an electron in the first excited state of hydrogen atom is -3.4eV. What is the kinetic energy of the electron in this state ?
Solution:
In Hydrogen like atom, we know that
K = – Total energy E
Here E = – 3.4eV
∴ K = -(-3.4) = 3.4 eV

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 5.
Find the radius of the hydrogen atom in its ground state. Also calculate the velocity of the electron in n = 1 orbit. Given
h = 6.63 × 10-34 J s, m = 9.1 × 10-31 kg, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, K = 9 × 109N m2C-2
Solution:
n = 1, h = 6.63 × 10-34 J-s,
m = 9.1 × 10-31 kg
e = 1.6 × 10-19C,
K = 9 × 109 Nm2C-2
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 13

Question 6.
Prove that the ionisation energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV.
Solution:
n = 1 corresponds to ground state.
E = \(\frac{-13.6}{n^2} e V\)
E = \(\frac{-13.6}{1^2} \mathrm{eV}\)
E = -13.6 eV
∴ The minimum energy required to free the electron from the ground state of hydrogen atom
= 13.6 eV.
∴ Ionisation energy of hydrogen atom = 13.6 eV

Question 7.
Calculate the ionization energy for a lithium atom.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 14
∴ Ionization energy of Lithium = 30.6eV.

Question 8.
The wavelength of the first member of Lyman series is 1216 A. Calculate the wavelength of second member of Balmer series.
Solution:
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = \(R\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)
For 1st member of Lyman series, λ = 1216; n1 = 1, n2 = 2
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 15
For 2nd member of Balmer senes,
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 16

Question 9.
The wavelength of first member of Balmer series is 6563 A. Calculate the wavelength of second member of Lyman series.
Solution:
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_1^2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_2^2}\right)\)
For 1st member of Balmer senes,
\(\frac{1}{6563}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)\)
\(\frac{1}{6563}\) = \(\frac{5 R}{36}\) —–> (1)
For 2nd member of Lyman senes,
\(\frac{1}{\lambda^1}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)\)
\(\frac{1}{\lambda^1}\) = \(\frac{8 \mathrm{R}}{9}\) —–> (2)
\(\frac{(1)}{(2)}\) ⇒ \(\frac{\lambda^1}{6563}\) = \(\frac{5 \mathrm{R}}{36} \times \frac{9}{8 \mathrm{R}}\)
λ’ = \(\frac{5}{32} \times 6563\)
∴ λ’ = 1025.5A

Question 10.
The second member of Lyman series in hydrogen spectrum has wavelength 5400 A. Find the wavelength of first member.
Solution:
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_1^2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_2^2}\right)\)
For second member of Lyman senes,
\(\frac{1}{5400}\) = \(R\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)\) ⇒ \(\frac{1}{5400}\) = \(\frac{8 \mathrm{R}}{9}\) —-> (1)
For first member of Lyman series,
\(\frac{1}{\lambda^1}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{2^2}\right)\)
\(\frac{1}{\lambda^1}\) = \(\frac{3 R}{4}\) —–> (2)
\(\frac{(1)}{(2)}\) ⇒ \(\frac{\lambda^1}{5400}\) = \(\frac{8 R}{9} \times \frac{4}{3 R}\)
∴ λ’ = \(\frac{32}{27}\) × 5400 = 6400A.

Question 11.
Calculate the shortest wavelength of Balmer series. Or Calculate the wavelength of the Balmer senes limit. Given : R = 10970000m-1.
Solution:
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_1^2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_2^2}\right)\)
R = 10970000 = 1.097 × 107 ms-1
For Balmer senes limit n1 = 2 and n2 = ∞
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = \(\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{\infty}\right)\) ⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{R}{4}\)
λ = \(\frac{4}{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\frac{4}{1.097 \times 10^7}\) = 3646.3A

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 12.
Using the Rydberg formula, calcûlate the wavelength of the first four spectral lines in the Balmer series of the hydrogen spectrum.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 17

Additional Exercises

Question 1.
Choose the correct alternative from the clues given at the end of the each statement:
a) The size of the atom in Thomson’s model is ……… the atomic size in Rutherford’s model. (much greater than / no different from / much less than.)
b) In the ground state of ……. electrons are in stable equilibrium, while in …… electrons always experience a net force. (Thomson’s model / Rutherford’s model.)
c) A classical atom based on …… is doomed to collapse. (Thomson’s model / Rutherford’s model).
d) An atom has a nearly continuous mass distribution in a ……. but has a highly non-uniform mass distribution in ………. (Thomson’s model / Rutherford’s model.)
e) The positively charged part of the atom possesses most of the mass in …….. (Rutherford’s model / both the models.)
Answer:
a) No different from
b) Thomson’s model, Rutherford’s model
c) Rutherford’s model
d) Thomson’s model, Rutherford’s model
e) Both the models.

Question 2.
Suppose you are given a chance to repeat the alpha – particle scattering experiment using a thin sheet of solid hydrogen in place of the gold foil. (Hydrogen is a solid at temperatures below 14 K.) What results do you expect ?
Answer:
The basic purpose of scattering experiment is defeated because solid hydrogen will be much lighter target compared to the alpha particle acting as projectile. According to theory of elastic the collisions, the target hydrogen will move much faster compared to alpha after collision. We cannot determine the size of hydrogen nucleus.

Question 3.
What is the shortest wavelength present in the Paschen series of spectral lines ?
Answer:
From Rydberg’s formula
\(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) = 13.6 × 1.6 × 10-19\(\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_1^2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_2^2}\right)\)
For shortest wavelength in Paschen series n2 = ∞ and n1 = 3
\(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) = 21.76 × 10-19\(\left[\frac{1}{3^2}-\frac{1}{\infty^2}\right]\)
= 2.42 × 10-19
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{2.42 \times 10^{-19}}\) = \(\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{2.42 \times 10^{-19}} \mathrm{~m}\)
= 8.1818 × 10-7m = 818.18nm.

Question 4.
A difference of 2.3 eV separates two energy levels in an atom. What is the frequency of radiation emitted when the atom make a transition from the upper level to the lower level ?
Answer:
Here E = 2.3eV = 2.3 × 1.6 × 10-19 J
As E = hv
∴ v = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}}{\mathrm{h}}\) = \(\frac{2.3 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}\) = 5.6 × 104 Hz

Question 5.
The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. What are the kinetic and potential energies of the electron in this state ?
Answer:
Total energy E = -13.6 eV
K.E = -E = 13.6 eV
RE. = -2.K.E = -2 × 13.6
= -27.2eV.

Question 6.
A hydrogen atom initially in the ground level absorbs a photon, which excites it to the n = 4 level. Determine the wavelength and frequency of photon.
Answer:
For ground state n1 = 1 and n2 = 4
Energy of photon absorbed E = E2 – E1
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 18

Question 7.
a) Using the Bohr’s model calculate the speed of the electron in a hydrogen atom in the n = 1, 2 and 3 levels.
b) Calculate the orbital period in each of these levels.
Answer:
a) From v = \(\frac{c}{n} \alpha\), where α = \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{Ke}^2}{\mathrm{ch}}\) = 0.0073
v1 = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{1}\) × 0.0073 = 2.19 × 106 m/s
v2 = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{2}\) × 0.0073 = 1.095 × 106 m/s
v3 = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{3}\) × 0.0073 = 7.3 × 105 m/s

b) Orbital period, T = \(\frac{2 \pi r}{V}\), As r1 = 0.53 × 10-10m
T1 = \(\frac{2 \pi \times 0.53 \times 10^{-10}}{2.19 \times 10^6}\) = 1.52 × 10-16S
As r2 = 4r1 and V2 = \(\frac{1}{2} V_1\)
T2 = 8T2 = 8 × 1.52 × 10-6 S = 1.216 × 10-15S
As r3 = 9r1 and V3 = \(\frac{1}{3} \mathrm{~V}_1\)
T3 = 27T1= 27 × 1.52 × 10-16 S = 4.1 × 10-15S

Question 8.
The radius of the innermost electron orbit of a hydrogen atom is 5.3 × 10--11m. What are the radii of the n = 2 and n = 3 orbits?
Answer:
As r = n2r
∴ r2 = 4r1 = 4 × 5.3 × 10-11 m = 2.12 × 10-10m ,
and r3 = 9r1 = 9 × 5.3 × 10-11 = 4.77 × 10-10m.

Question 9.
A 12.5 eV electron beam is used to bombard gaseous hydrogen at room temperature. What series of wavelengths will be emitted?
Answer:
In ground state, energy of gaseous hydrogen at room temparature = -13.6eV, when it is bombarded with 12.5 eV electron beam, the energy becomes 13.6 + 12.5 = -1.1eV.
The electron would jump from n = 1 to n = 3 where E3 = \(\frac{-13.6}{32}\) = -1.5eV
On de — excitation the electron may jump from n = 3 to n = 2 giving rise to Balmer series. It may also jump from n = 3 to n = 1 giving rise to Lýman series.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 10.
In accordance with the Bohr’s model, find the quantum number that characterises the earths revolution around the sun in an orbit of radius 1.5 × 1011 m with orbital speed 3 × 104m/s. (Mass of earth = 6.0 × 1024 kg.)
Answer:
Here r = 1.5 × 1011m, V = 3 × 104m/s, m = 6.0 × 1024kg
According to Bohrs model mvr = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\)
n = \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{mvr}}{\mathrm{h}}\) = 2 × \(\frac{22}{7}\) × \(\frac{6.0 \times 10^{24} \times 3 \times 10^4 \times 1.5 \times 10^{11}}{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}\)
= 2.57 × 1074, which is too large.

Question 11.
Answer the following questions, which help you understand the difference between Thomson’s model and Rutherford’s model better.
a) Is the average angle of deflection of α — particles by a thin gold foil predicted by Thomson’s model much less, about the same, or much greater than that predicted by Rutherford’s model?
b) Is the probability of backward scattering (i.e., scattering of α – particles at angles greater than 90°) predicted by Thomson’s model much less, about the same, or much greater than that predicted by Rutherford’s model ?
c) Keeping other factors fixed, it is found experimentally that for small thickness t, the number of α – particles scattered at moderate angles is proportional to t. What clue does this linear dependence on t provide ?
d) In which model is it completely wrong to ignore multiple scattering for the calculation of average angle of scattering of a – particles by a thin foil ?
Answer:
a) About the same this is because we are talking of average angle of deflection.
b) Much less, because in Thomson’s model there is no such massive central core called the nucleus as in Rutherford’s model.
c) This suggests that scattering is predominantly due to a single collision increases with the number of target atoms which increases linearly with the thickness of the foil.
d) In Thomson model, positive charge is uniformly distributed in the spherical atom. Therefore a single collision causes very little deflection. Therefore average scattering angle can be explained only by considering multiple scattering may be ignored as a first approximation.

Question 12.
The gravitational attraction between electron and proton in a hydrogen atom is weaker than the coulomb attraction by a factor of about 10-40. An alternative way of looking at this fact is to estimate the radius of the first Bohr orbit of a hydrogen atom if the electron and proton were bound by gravitational attraction. You will find the answer interesting.
Answer:
The radius of the first Bohr orbit of a hydrogen atom is
r0 = \(\frac{4 \pi \varepsilon_0(h / 2 \pi)^2}{m_e \mathrm{e}^2}\)
If we consider the atom bound by the gravitational force
= \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_{\mathrm{p}} \mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\mathrm{r}^2}\right)\). We should replace \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0}\) by (Gmpme). In that case radius of first Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom would be given by r0 = \(\frac{(\mathrm{h} / 2 \pi)^2}{\mathrm{Gm}_p \mathrm{~m}^2 \mathrm{e}}\)
Putting the standard values we get
r0 = \(\frac{\left(6.6 \times 10^{-34} / 2 \pi\right)^2}{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 1.67 \times 10^{-27} \times\left(9.1 \times 10^{-31}\right)^2}\)
= 1.2 × 1029 metre.
This is much greater than the estimated size of the whole universe!

Question 13.
Obtain an expression for the frequency of radiation emitted when a hydrogen atom de- excites from level n to level (n – 1). For large n, show that this frequency equals the classical frequency of revolution of the electron in the orbit.
Answer:
The frequency v of the emitted radiation when a hydrogen atom de-excites from level n to level (n – 1) is
E = hv = E2 – E1
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 19
In Bohr’s Atomic model, velocity of electron in nth orbit is v = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi \mathrm{mr}}\)
and radius of nth orbital is v = \(\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m K e^2}\)
Frequency of revolution of electron v = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi \mathrm{mr}}\)
and radius of nth orbital is r = \(\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m K e^2}\)
Frequency of revolution of electron
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 20
which is the same as (i) .
Hence for large values of n1 classical frequency of revolution of electron in nth orbit is the same as the frequency of radiation emitted when hydrogen atom de-excites from level (n) to level (n – 1)

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms

Question 14.
Classically, an electron can be in any orbit around the nucleus of an atom. Then what determines the typical atomic size ? Why is an atom not, say, thousand times bigger than its typical size ? The question had greatly puzzled Bohr before he arrived at his famous model of the atom that you have learnt in the text. To simulate what he might well have done before his discovery, let us play as follows with the basic constants of nature and see if we can get a quantity with the dimensions of length that is roughly equal to the known size of an atom (~ 1010m).
a) Construct a quantity with the dimensions of length from the fundamental constants e, me, and c. Determine its numerical value.
b) You will find that the length obtained in (a) is many orders of magnitude smaller than the atomic dimensions. Further, it involves c. But energies of atoms are mostly in non- relativistic domain where c is not expected to play any role. This is what may have suggested Bohr to discard c and look for ‘something else’ to get the right atomic size. Now, the ‘Planck’s constant h had already made its appearance elsewhere. Bohr’s great insight lay in recognising that h, me, and e will yield the right atomic size. Construct a quantity with the dimension of length from h, me, and e and confirm that its numerical value has indeed the correct order of magnitude.
Answer:
a) Using fundamental constants e, me and c, we construct a quantity which has the dimensions of length. This quantity is \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{e}} \mathrm{c}^2}\right)\)
Now \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^2}{4 \pi \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{e}} \mathrm{c}^2}\) = \(\frac{\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)^2 \times 9 \times 10^9}{9.1 \times 10^{-31}\left(3 \times 10^8\right)^2}\) = 2.82 × 10-15m
This is of the order of atom sizes.

b) However when we drop c and use hc, me and e to construct a quantity which has dimensions of length the quantity we obtain is
\(\frac{4 \pi \varepsilon_0(\mathrm{~h} / 2 \pi)}{\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}} \mathrm{e}^2}\)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Atoms 21
= 0.53 × 10-10m
This is of the order of atom sizes.

Question 15.
The total energy of an electron in the first excited state of the hydrogen atom is about -3.4 eV
a) What is the kinetic energy of the electron in this state ?
b) What is the potential energy of the electron in this state ?
c) Which of the answers above would change if the choice of the zero of potential energy is changed ?
Answer:
We know kinetic energy of electron = \(\frac{K Z e^2}{2 r}\)
and P.E of electron = \(\frac{-\mathrm{KZe}^2}{\mathrm{r}}\)
P.E. = -2 (kinetic energy).
In this calculation electric potential and hence potential energy is zero at infinity.
Total energy = PE + KE = -2KE + KE = -KE
a) In the first excited state total energy = -3.4eV
∴ K.E = -(-3.4eV) = + 3.4 eV
b) P. E of electron in this first excited state = -2KE = -2 × 3.4 = -6.8eV.
c) If zero of potential energy is changed, KE does not change and continues to be +3.4 eV However, the P.E. and total energy of the state would change with the choice of zero of potential energy.

Question 16.
If Bohr’s quantisation postulate (angular momentum = nh/2π) is a basic law of nature, it should be equally valid for the case of planetary motion also. Why then do we never speak of quantisation of orbits of planets around the sun ?
Answer:
Bohr’s quantisation postulate is in terms of Plank’s constant (h), But angular momenta associated with planetary motion are = 1070 h (for earth). In terms of Bohr’s quantisation posulate this will correspond to n = 107. For such large values of n the differences in successive energies and angular momenta of the quantised levels are so small, that the levels can be considered as continuous and not discrete.

Question 17.
Obtain the first Bohr’s radius and the ground state energy of a muonic hydrogen atom [i.e., an atom in which a negatively charged muon (µ) of mass about 207me orbits around a proton].
Answer:
A muonic hydrogen is the atom in which a negatively charged muon of mass about 207 me revolves around a proton.
In Bohr’s atom model as, r ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~m}}\)
\(\frac{\mathrm{r}_\mu}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{e}}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\mathrm{m}_\mu}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}}}{207 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{e}}}\) = \(\frac{1}{207}\)
Here re is radius of first orbit of electron in hydrogen atom = 0.53A = 0.53 × 10-10m.
rm = \(\frac{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{e}}}{207}\) = \(\frac{0.53 \times 10^{-10}}{207}\) = 2.56 × 10-13m
Again in Bohr’s atomic model
E ∝ m
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_\mu}{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{e}}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_\mu}{\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}}}\) = \(\frac{207 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}}}\), Eμ = 207Ee
As ground state energy of electron in hydrogen atom is Ee = -13.6 eV
Eμ = 207(-13.6)eV = -2815.2eV
= -2.8152KeV.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 9th Lesson Gravitation Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 9th Lesson Gravitation

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State the unit and dimension of the universal gravitational constant (G).
Answer:
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_1 \mathrm{~m}_2}{\mathrm{~d}^2}\)
units of G = Nm2 Kg-2
dimensional formula of G = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{MLT}^{-2}\right]\left[\mathrm{L}^2\right]}{[\mathrm{M}][\mathrm{M}]}\) = [M-1 L3 T-2]

Question 2.
State the vector form of Newtons’s law of gravitation.
Answer:
Vector form of Newton’s law of gravitation is
F = \(\frac{-G m_1 m_2}{r^3} \hat{r}\) where \(\hat{r}\) is unit vector.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 3.
If the gravitational force of Earth on the Moon is F, what is the gravitational force of moon on earth ? Do these forces to attraction-reaction pair ?
Answer:
F. Yes, they form action and reaction pair.

Question 4.
What would be the change in acceleration due to gravity (g) at the surface, if the radius of Earth decreases by 2% keeping the mass of Earth constant ?
Answer:
g1r12, l = g2r22, r2 = \(\frac{98}{100}\) r1
\(\frac{g_2}{g_1}=\frac{r_1^2}{r_2^2}=\frac{r_1^2}{\left(\frac{98}{100}\right) r_1^2}=\frac{100 \times 100}{98 \times 98}\)
\(\frac{g_2}{g_1}\) = 1.04
\(\frac{g_2}{g_1}\) – 1 = 1.04 – 1
\(\frac{g_2-g_1}{g_1}\) = 0.04

Question 5.
As we go from one planet to another, how will
a) the mass and
b) the weight of a body change ?
Answer:
a) The mass remains constant.
b) The weight (w = mg), changes from one planet to another planet.

Question 6.
Keeping the length of a simple pendulum constant, will the time period be the same on all planets ? Support your answer with reason.
Answer:
No, Time period depends on acceleration due to gravity (g).
T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
g value varies from planet to planet. So time period changes.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 7.
Give the equation for the value of g at a depth ‘d’ from the surface of Earth. What is the value of ‘g’ at the centre of Earth ?
Answer:

  1. gd = g(1 – \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\)) where d = Depth
    R = Radius of the Earth
  2. At the centre of the Earth g = 0.

Question 8.
What are the factors that make ‘g’ the least at the equator and maximum at the poles ? > .
Answer:

  1. g value is maximum at poles due to
    a) Rotation of the Earth
    b) Earth is flattened at the poles
    c) The equatorial radius is less at the poles.
  2. g value minimum at equator due to
    a) Rotation of the earth
    b) Bulging near the equator.

Question 9.
“Hydrogen is in abundance around the sun but not around Earth”. Explain.
Answer:
The escape velocity on the sun is 620 km/s and escape velocity on the Earth is 11.2 km/s. The r.m.s velocities of hydrogen (2 km/s) is less than escape velocity on the Sun. So hydrogen is more abundant around the Sun and less around the Earth.

Question 10.
What is the time period of revolution of a geostationary satellite ? Does it rorate from West to East or from East to West ?
Answer:
Time period of geo-stationary satellite is 24 hours. It can rotate from west to east.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 11.
What are polar satellites ?
Answer:
Polar satellites are low altitude satellites (500 to 800 km), but they go around the poles of the earth in a north-south direction. Its time period is around 100 minutes.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State Kepler’s laws of planetary motion.
Answer:
The three laws of Kepler can be stated as follows.

  1. Law of orbits : All planets move in elliptical orbits with the sun situated at one of the foci.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 1
  2. Law of areas : The line that joins any planet to the sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals of time.
  3. Law of periods : The square of the time period of revolution of a planet is proportional to the cube of the semi-major axis of the ellipse traced out by the planet.
    T2 ∝ R3

Question 2.
Derive the relation between acceleration due to gravity (g) at the surface of a planet and Gravitational constant (G).
Answer:
Consider a body of mass m on the surface of the planet. Let R be the radius of the Earth and M be the mass of the Earth.
Force acting on the body due to gravitational pull of the planet is
F = m g → (1)
According to Newton’s gravitational law, Force on the body is F = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\) → (2)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 2
From eq’s (1) and (2), we have
m g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\)
g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\)
This is the relation between g and G
Mass of the earth (M) = Volume × density of the earth
M = \(\frac{4}{3}\) π R2 × ρ
g = \(\frac{4}{3}\) π G R ρ

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 3.
How does the acceleration due to gravity (g) change for the same values of height(h) and depth (d).
Answer:
a) gh = g(1 – \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{R}}\)), gd = g(1 – \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\))
Same values of height and depth, h = d
gh = g (1 – \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~d}}{\mathrm{R}}\)) and gd = g(1 – \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\))
∴ gd > gh

b) For large height and large depth
gh = \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)^2}\) and gd = g(1 – \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\))
If h = d = R
gh = \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)^2}\) and gd = g(1 – \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{R}}\)) = 0
∴ gh > gd

Question 4.
What is orbital velocity ? Obtain an expression for it. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Orbital velocity (V0) : The horizontal velocity required for an object to revolve around a planet in a circular orbit is called orbital velocity.

Expression for orbital velocity :
Consider a body (satellite) of mass m, revolves round the earth in a circular orbit. Let h be the height of the satellite from the surface of the earth. Then (R + h) is the radius of the orbit.
The Gravitational force of attraction of the earth on the body is given by F = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})^2}\) ………….. (1)
Where M = Mass of the earth, R = Radius of the earth, G = universal gravitational constant. If V0 is the orbital velocity of the body.
The centripetal force on the body is given by F = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}_{\mathrm{o}}^2}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\) …………… (2)
In order to make the body revolve in the same orbit, its centripetal force must be equal to the gravitational force
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 3

Question 5.
What is escape velocity ? Obtain an expression for it.
Answer:
Escape velocity : It is the minimum velocity with which a body should be projected, so that it moves into the space by overcoming the earth’s gravitational field.

Expression for escape velocity :
Consider a body of mass m thrown with a velocity v2
Then K.E = \(\frac{1}{2}\) m ve2 …………. (1)
The gravitational force of attraction of the earth of mass M and Radius R on a body of mass m at its surface is F = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\) ……………… (2)
Gravitational P. E. = work done on the body
∴ P. E. = F × R = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\) × R
P.E. = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\) …………….. (3)
A body just escapes when its K. E. = P. E
\(\frac{1}{2}\) m ve2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\)
ve2 = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}}\) (∵ g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\))
ve = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}}}\)
ve = \(\sqrt{2 g R}\) (gR = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}}\))
ve = \(\sqrt{2} \times \sqrt{g R}\) (∵ v0 = \(\sqrt{g R}\))
ve = \(\sqrt{2}\) × v0
∴ Escape velocity is \(\sqrt{2}\) times the orbital velocity.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 6.
What is a geostationary satellite ? State its uses. [T.S. Mar. 18, 15; A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Geo-stationary satellite : If the period of revolution of an artificial satellite is equal to the period of rotation of earth, then such a satellite is called geo-stationary satellite.
Time period of geo-stationary satellite is 24 hours.
Uses :

  1. Study the upper layers of atmosphere
  2. Forecast the changes in atmosphere
  3. Know the shape and size of the earth.
  4. Identify the minerals and natural resources present inside and on the surface of the earth.
  5. Transmit the T. V. programmes to distant objects
  6. Under take space research i.e. to know about the planets, satellites, comets etc.

Question 7.
If two places are at the same height from the mean sea level; One is a mountain and other is in air at which place will ‘g’ be greater ? State the reason for your answer.
Answer:
The acceleration due to gravity on mountain is greater than that of air.
g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\) ………….. (1)
Mass (M) = volume × density (ρ)
M = \(\frac{4}{3}\)π R3 × ρ
g = \(\frac{\mathrm{G}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\) × \(\frac{4}{3}\) π R3 ρ
g = – \(\frac{4}{3}\) π R G ρ …………….. (2)
g ∝ ρ
So density is more at mountains. So g is more on mountain.

Question 8.
The weight of an object is more at the poles than at the equator. At which of these can we get more sugar for the same weight ? State the reason for your answer.
Answer:
Weight of the object at poles = mp gp (∵ w = mg)
Weight of the object at equator = me ge
Given weight of the object at poles > weight of the object at equator
mp gp > mege
We know that gp > ge
Then mp < me
Hence we can get more sugar at equator.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 9.
If a nut becomes loose and gets detached form a satellite revolving around the earth, will it fall down to earth or will it revolve around earth ? Give reasons for your answer.
Answer:
When a nut is detached from a satellite revolving around the earth, the nut is also moving with the speed of the satellite as the orbit of a satellite does not depend upon its mass. Hence nut is moving in the same orbit under centripetal force.

Question 10.
An object projected with a velocity greater than or equal to 11.2 kms it will not return to earth. Explain the reason.
Answer:
The escape velocity on the surface of the earth (ve) = 11.2 km/s. Any object projected with the velocity greater then (or) equal to 11.2 km/s it will not come back. Because it has overcome the earth’s gravitational pull.
So an object never come back to earth.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define gravitational potential energy and derive an expression for it associated with two particles of masses m1 and m2.
Answer:
Gravitational potential energy : Gravitational potential energy of a body at a point in a gravitational field of another body is defined as the amount of work done in brining the given body from infinity to that point without acceleration.

Expression for gravitational potential energy : Consider a gravitational field due to earth of mass M, radius R. The mass of the earth can be supposed to be concentrated at its centre 0. Let us calculate the gravitational the potential energy of the body of mass m placed at point p in the gravitational field, where OP = r and r > R. Let OA = x and AB = dx.
The gravitational force on the body at A will be
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{X}^2}\) ……………… (1)
Small amount of work done in bringing the body without acceleration through a small distance dx is given by
dw = Force × displacement
dw = F × dx
dw = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{X}^2}\) × dx ……………… (2)
Total work done in bringing the body from infinity to point P is given by
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 4
This work done is stored in the body as its gravitational potential energy (u)
∴ Gravitational potential energy (u) = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}}\) ……………….. (4)
Gravitational potential energy associated with two particles of masses m, and m2 separated by a distance r is given by
u = –\(\frac{G m_1 m_2}{r}\) ……………….. (5) (if we choose u = 0 as r → ∞).

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 2.
Derive an expression for the variation of acceleration due to gravity (a) above and (b) below the surface of the Earth.
Answer:
i) Variation of g with height:
When an object is on the surface of the earth, it will be at a distance r = R radius of the earth, then we have g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\)
Where G = universal gravitational constant, M = Mass of the earth
When the object is at a height h above the surface of the earth, Then r = R + h
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 5
g value decreases with altitude.

ii) Variation of g with depth :
Let us assume that the earth to be a homogeneous uniform sphere of radius R, mass M and of uniform density ρ.
We know that g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\) = \(\frac{4}{3}\) π ρ G R ………………… (1)
Consider a body of mass m be placed at a depth d.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 6
The value of g decreases with depth.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 3.
State Newton’s Universal Law of gravitation. Explain how the value of the Gravitational constant (G) can be determined by Cavendish method.
Answer:
Newton’s law of gravitation :
“Every body in the universe attracts every other body with a force which is directly proportional to the product of their masses and inversly proportional to the square of the distance between them”
Determination of G value by cavendish method :
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 7

  1. In 1798 Henry Cavendish determined the value of G experimentally.
  2. The bar AB has two small lead spheres attached at its ends.
  3. The bar is suspended from a rigid support by a fine wire.
  4. Two large lead spheres are brought close to the small ones but on opposite sides as shown in figure.
  5. The big spheres attract the nearby small ones by equal and opposite force as shown in figurer.
  6. There is no net force on the bar but only a torque which is clearly equal to F times the length of the bar. When F is the force of attraction between a big sphere and its neighbouring small sphere.
  7. Due to this torque, the suspended wire gets twisted till such time as the restoring torque of the wire equals the gravitational torque.
    Restoring torque = τ θ ………………… (1)
    Where τ is restoring couple per unit twist 0 is the angle
  8. If d is the seperation between big and small balls having masses M and m.
    Gravitational force (F) = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{d}^2}\) ……………… (2)
    ix) If L is the length of the bar A B, then the torque arising out of F is F multiplied by L. At equilibrium, this is equal to the restoring torque.
    \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{d}^2}\) = τ θ
    observations of θ thus enables one to calculate G.
    The measurement of G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/ Kg2

Problems

(Gravitational Constant ‘G’ = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/ Kg-2; Radius of earth ‘R’ = 6400 km; Mass of earth ‘ME’ = 6 × 1024 kg)

Question 1.
Two spherical balls each of mass 1 kg are placed 1 cm apart. Find the gravitational force of attraction between them.
Solution:
m1 = m2 = 1 kg, d = 1 cm = 1 × 10-2 m
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_1 \mathrm{~m}_2}{\mathrm{~d}^2}\)
F = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 1 \times 1}{\left(1 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2}\) = 6.67 × 10-7N

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 2.
The mass of a ball is four times the mass of another ball. When these balls are separated by a distance of 10 cm, the force of gravitation between them is 6.67 × 10-7 N. Find the masses of the two balls.
Solution:
m1 = m, m2 = 4m, d = 10 cm = 10 × 10-2 m,
F = 6.67 × 10-7 N
G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg 2
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_1 \mathrm{~m}_2}{\mathrm{~d}^2}\)
6.67 × 10-7 = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times \mathrm{m} \times 4 \mathrm{~m}}{\left(10 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2}\)
4 m2 = 102
m2 = \(\frac{100}{4}\) = 25
m = 5 kg
∴ m1 = m = 5 kg
m2 = 4m = 4 × 5 = 20 kg

Question 3.
Three spherical balls of masses 1 kg, 2kg and 3 kg are placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle of side 1 m. Find the magnitude of gravitational force exerted by the 2 kg and 3kg masses on the 1 kg mass.
Solution:
The force of attraction at 2 kg on the 1 kg particle
F2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gmn}{\mathrm{~d}^2}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{G} \times 1 \times 2}{1^2}\)
F2 = 2 G
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 8

Question 4.
At a certain height above the earth’s surface, the acceleration due to gravity is 4% of its value at the surface of earth. Determine the height.
Solution:
gh = 4% of g = \(\frac{4}{100}\)g, R = 6400 km
gh = \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)^2}\)
\(\frac{4 \mathrm{~g}}{100}=\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)^2}\)
\(\left(1+\frac{h}{R}\right)^2=\frac{100}{4}\) = 25
1 + \(\frac{h}{R}\) = 5
\(\frac{h}{R}\) = 4
h = 4 × R = 4 × 6400 = 25,600 km.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 5.
A satellite is orbiting the earth at a height of 1000km. Find its orbital speed.
Solution:
h = 1000 km
Oribital velocity (v0) = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h}}}\)
G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg 2, M = 6 × 1024 kg
R + h = 6400 + 1000 = 7400 km
= 7400 × 103m
v0 = \(\sqrt{\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24}}{7400 \times 10^3}}\)
v0 = \(\sqrt{0.5408 \times 10^{10}}\) = 73.54 × 103 m/s
v0 = 7.354km/s

Question 6.
A satellite orbits the earth at a height equal to the radius of earth. Find it’s
(i) orbital speed and
(ii) Period of revolution
Solution:
Height h = R
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 11

Question 7.
The gravitational force of attraction between two objects decreases by 36% when the distance between them is increased by 4 m. Find the original distance between them.
Solution:
F1 = F, F2 = \(\frac{64}{100}\) F
d1 = d, d2 = (d + 4) m
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 12
5d = 4d + 16
d = 16 m.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 8.
Four identical masses of m are kept at the corners of a square of side a. Find the gravitational force exerted on one of the masses by the other masses.
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 13

Question 9.
Two spherical balls of 1 kg and 4kg are separated by a distance of 12 cm. Find the distance of a point from the 1 kg mass at which the gravitational force on any mass becomes zero.
Solution:
m1 = 1 kg, m2 = 4kg, r = 12 cm
∴ x = \(\frac{r}{\sqrt{\frac{m_2}{m_1}}+1}\) from m1
= \(\frac{12}{\sqrt{\frac{4}{1}}+1}=\frac{12}{2+1}=\frac{12}{3}\) = 4 cm
At x = 4 cm the gravitational force is zero.

Question 10.
Three uniform spheres each of mass m and radius R are kept in such a way that each touches the other two. Find the magnitude of the gravitational force on any one of the spheres due to the other two.
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 9

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 11.
Two satellites are revolving round the earth at different heights. The ratio of their orbital speeds ¡s 2 : 1. If one of them is at a height of 100 km, what is the height of the other satellite ?
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 10
4R + 400 = R + h2
h2 = 3R + 400 = 3 × 6400 + 400
= 19200 + 400
h2 = 19,600 km.

Question 12.
A satellite is revolving round in a circular orbit with a speed of 8 km s-1 at a height where the value of acceleration due to gravity is 8 m s-2. How high is the satellite from the Earth’s surface ? (Radius of planet = 6000 km)
Solution:
v0 = 8 km/s = 8000 m/s
gh = 8 m/s2, R = 6000 km = 6000 × 103 m
∴ v0 = \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R+h}}=\sqrt{g(R+h)}\)
v02 = g(R + h)
(8000)2 = 8(6000 × 103 + h)
6000 × 103 + h = 8 × 106
h = (8 – 6) 106
h = 2 × 106m
h = 2000 × 103 = 2000 km.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 13.
(a) Calculate the escape velocity of a body from the Earth’s surface, (b) If. the Earth were made of wood, its mass would be 10% of its current mass. What would be the escape velocity, if the Earth were made of wood ?
Solution:
R = 6400 × 103m,
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 14

Additional Problems

Question 1.
Answer the following :
a) You can shield a charge from electrical forces by putting it inside a hollow conductor. Can you shield a body from the gravitational influence of nearby matter by putting it inside a hollow sphere or by some other means ?
b) An astronaut inside a small space ship orbiting around the earth cannot detect gravity. If the space station orbiting around the earth has a large size, can he hope to detect gravity ?
c) If you compare the gravitational force on the earth due to the sun to that due to the moon, you would find that the Sun’s pull is greater than the moon’s pull, (you can check this yourself using the data available in the succeeding exercises). However, the tidal effect of the moon’s pull is greater than the tidal effect of sun. Why ?
Solution:
a) We cannot shield a body from the gravitational influence of nearby matter because the gravitational force on the body due to near by matter is independent of the presence of other matter, whereas it is not so in the case of electrical forces it means the gravitational screens are not possible.

b) Yes, if the size of the spaceship orbiting around the earth is large enough, an astronaut inside the spaceship can detect the variation in g.

c) Tidal effect depends inversly on the cube of the distance, unlike force which depends inversly on the square of the distance. Since the distance of moon from the ocean water is very small as compared to the distance of sun from the ocean water on earth. Therefore, the tidal effect of moon’s pull is greater than the tidal effect of the sun.

Question 2.
Choose the correct alternative :
a) Acceleration due to gravity increase^ decreases with increasing altitude.
b) Acceleration due to gravity increases/decreases with increas¬ing depth (assume the earth to be a sphere of uniform density).
c) Acceleration due to gravity is independent of mass of the earth/ mass of the body.
d) The formula – G Mm (1/r2 – 1/r1) is more/less accurate than the formula mg (r2 – r1) for the difference of potential energy between two points r2 and r1 distance away from the centre of the earth.
Solution:
a) decreases
b) decreases
c) mass of the body
d) more

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 3.
Suppose there existed a planet that went around the sun twice as fast as the earth. What would be its orbital size as compared to that of the earth ?
Solution:
Here, Te = 1 year; Tp = \(\frac{T_c}{2}=\frac{1}{2}\) year; re = 1
A.U.; rp = ?
Using Kepler’s third law, we have
rp = re\(\left(\frac{T_p}{T_e}\right)^{2 / 3}\) = \(1\left(\frac{1 / 2}{1}\right)^{2 / 3}\)
= 0.63 AU

Question 4.
Io, one of the satellites of Jupiter, has an orbital period of 1.769 days and the radius of the orbit is 4.22 × 108m. Show that the mass of Jupiter is about-one-thousandth that of the sun.
Solution:
For a satellite of Jupiter, orbital period,
T1 = 1.769 days = 1.769 × 24 × 60 × 60 s
Radius of the orbit of satellite,
r1 = 4.22 × 108 m
mass of Jupiter, M1 is given by M1
= \(\frac{4 \pi^2 \times\left(4.22 \times 10^8\right)^3}{G \times(1.769 \times 24 \times 60 \times 60)^2}\)
= \(\frac{4 \pi^2 r_1^3}{\mathrm{GT}_1^2}\) ……………. (1)
We know that the orbital period of earth around the sun,
T = 1 year = 365.25 × 24 × 60 × 60 s
Oribital radius, r = 1 A.U = 1.496 × 1011 m
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 15

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 5.
Let us assume that our galaxy consists of 2.5 × 1011 stars each of one solar mass. How long will a star at a distance of 50,000ly from the galactic centre take to complete one revolution ? Take the diameter of the Milky Way to be 105 ly.
Solution:
Here, r = 50,000 ly =50,000 × 9.46 × 1015m
= 4.73 × 1020m.
M = 2.5 × 1011 solar, mass = 2.5 × 1011 × (2 × 1030) kg
= 5.0 × 1041 kg
We know that, M = \(\frac{4 \pi^2 r^3}{\mathrm{GT}^2}\)
or T = \(\left(\frac{4 \pi^2 r^3}{G M}\right)^{1 / 2}\)
= \(\left[\frac{4 \times(22 / 7)^2 \times\left(4.73 \times 10^{20}\right)^3}{\left(6.67 \times 10^{11}\right) \times\left(5.0 \times 10^{41}\right)}\right]^{1 / 2}\)
= 1.12 × 1016S.

Question 6.
Choose the correct alternative :
a) If the zero of potential energy is at infinity, the total energy of an orbiting satellite is negative of its kinetic/potentia! energy.
b) The energy required to launch an orbiting .satellite out of earth’s gravitational influence is more/less than the energy required to project a stationary object at the same height (as the satellite) out of earth’s influence.
Solution:
a) Kinetic energy
b) Less.

Question 7.
Does the escape speed of a body from the earth depend on (a) the mass of the body, (b) the Ideation from where it is projected, (c) the direction of projection, (d) the height of the location from where the body is launched ?
Solution:
The escape velocity is independent of mass of the body and the direction of projection it depends upon the gravitational potential at the point from where the body is launched. Since this potential depends slightly on the latitude and height of the point, therefore, the escape velocity depends slightly on these factors.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 8.
A comet orbits the sun in a highly elliptical orbit. Does the comet have a constant (a) linear speed, (b) angular speed, (c) angular momentum, (d) kinetic energy, (e) potential energy, (f) total energy throughout its orbit ? Neglect any mass loss of the comet when it comes very close to the Sun.
Solution:
A comet while going on elliptical orbit around the sun has constant angular momentum and total energy at all locations but other quantities vary with locations.

Question 9.
Which of the following symptoms is likely to afflict an astronaut in space
(a) swollen feet,
(b) swollen face,
(c) headache,
(d) orientational problem.
Solution:
a) We know that the legs carry the weight of the body in the normal position due to gravity pull. The astronaut in space is in weightless state. Hence, swollen feet may not affect his working.

b) In the conditions of weightless, the face of the astronaut is expected to get more supply. Due to it, the astronaut may develop swollen face. As eyes, ears, nose, mouth etc. are all embedded in the face, hence, swollen face may affect to great extent the seeing / hearing / eating / smelling capabilities of the astronaut in space.

c) Headache is due to metal strain it will persist whether a person is an astronaut in space or he is on earth it means headache will have the same effect on the astronaut in space as on a person on earth.

d) Space also has orientation. We also have the frames of reference in space. Hence, orientational problem will affect the astronaut in space.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 10.
In the following two exercises, choose the correct answer from among the given ones : The gravitational intensity at the centre of a hemispherical shell of uniform mass density has the direction indicated by the arrow (see Fig) (i) a, (ii) b, (iii) c, (iv) 0.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 16
Solution:
We know that the gravitational potential is constant at all points upside a spherical shell. Therefore, the gravitational potential gradient at all points inside the spherical shell is zero [i.e as v is constant, \(\frac{\mathrm{dv}}{\mathrm{dr}}\) = 0].

Since gravitational intensity is equal to negative of the gravitational potential gradient, hence the gravitational intensity is zero at all points inside a hollow spherical shell. This indicates that the gravitational forces acting on a particle at any point inside a spherical shell, will be symmetrically placed. Therefore if we remove the upper hemispherical shell, the net gravitational forces acting on the particle at the centre Q or at some other point P will be acting downwards which will also be the direction of gravitational intensity it is so because, the gravitational intensity at a point is the gravitational force per unit mass at that point. Hence the gravitational intensity at the centre Q will be along c, i.e., option (iii) is correct.

Question 11.
For the above problem, the direction of the gravitational intensity at an arbitrary point P is indicated by the arrow (i) d, (ii) e, (iii) f, (iv) g. .
Solution:
As per explanation given in the answer of Q. 10, the direction of gravitational intensity at P will be along e i.e., option (ii) is correct.

Question 12.
A rocket is fired from the earth towards the sun. At what distance from the earth’s centre is the gravitational force on the rocket zero ? Mass of the sun = 2 × 1030 kg, mass of the earth 6 × 1024 kg. Neglect the effect of other planets etc. (orbital radius 1.5 × 1011 m).
Solution:
Here Ms = 2 × 1030 kg ; Mc = 6 × 1024 kg ; r = 1.5 × 1011 m .
Let x be the distance of a point from the earth where gravitational forces on the rocket due to sun and earth become equal and opposite. Then distance of rocket from the sun
= (r – x). If m is the mass of rocket then
\(\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{s}} \mathrm{m}}{(\mathrm{r}-\mathrm{x})^2}=\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{e}} \mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{x}^2} \text { or } \frac{(\mathrm{r}-\mathrm{x})^2}{\mathrm{x}^2}=\frac{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{e}}}\)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 17

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 13.
How will you ‘weigh the sun1, that is estimate its mass ? The mean orbital radius of the earth around the sun is 1.5 × 108 km.
Solution:
To estimate the mass of the sun, we require, the time period of revolution T of one of its planets (say the earth). Let Ms, Me be the masses of sun and earth respectively and r be the mean orbital radius of the earth around the sun. The gravitational force acting on earth due to sum is
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{s}} \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\mathrm{r}^2}\)
Let, the earth be moving in circular orbit around the sun, with a uniform angular velocity ω, the centripetal force acting on earth is.
F1 = Me2 = Mer \(\frac{4 \pi^2}{T^2}\)
As this centripetal force is provided by the gravitational pull of sun on earth, So
\(\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{s}} \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\mathrm{r}^2}=\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{e}} \mathrm{r} \frac{4 \pi^2}{\mathrm{~T}^2} \text { or } \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{s}}=\frac{4 \pi^2 \mathrm{r}^3}{G \mathrm{~T}^2}\)
Knowing r and T, mass Ms of the sun can be estimated.
In this Question, we are given, r = 1.5 × 108 km
= 1.5 × 1011 m
T = 365 days = 365 × 24 × 60 × 60 s
∴ Ms = \(\frac{4 \times(22 / 7)^2 \times\left(1.5 \times 10^{11}\right)^3}{\left(6.67 \times 10^{-11}\right) \times(365 \times 24 \times 60 \times 60)^2}\)
= 2 × 1030 kg.

Question 14.
A saturn year is 29.5 times the earth year. How far is the saturn from the sun if the earth is 1.50 × 108 km away from the sun ?
Solution:
Here, Ts = 29.5 Te; Re = 1.5 × 108 km; Rs =?
Using the relation, \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{s}}^2}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{s}}^3}=\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{e}}^2}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{e}}^3}\)
or R = Re \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{e}}}\right)^{2 / 3}\)
= 1.5 × 108 \(\left(\frac{29.5 \mathrm{~T}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{e}}}\right)^{2 / 3}\)
= 1.43 × 109 km.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 15.
A body weighs 63 N on the surface of the earth. What is the gravitational force on it due to the earth at a height equal to half the radius of the earth?
Solution:
Weight of the body = mg = 63N
At height h, the value of g is given by
g’ = \(\frac{g R^2}{(R+h)^2}=\frac{g R^2}{(R+R / 2)^2}\) = 4/9 g
Gravitational force on body at height h is
F = mg’ = m × \(\frac{4}{9}\) g = \(\frac{4}{9}\) mg
= \(\frac{4}{9}\) × 63 = 28N

Question 16.
Assuming the earth to be a sphere of uniform mass density, how much would a body weigh half way down to the centre of the earth if it weighed 250 N on the surface ?
Solution:
wt. of body at a depth d = mg1
= m × g \(\left(1-\frac{d}{R}\right)\)
= 250 \(\left(1-\frac{R / 2}{R}\right)\)
= 125 N

Question 17.
A rocket is fired vertically with a speed of 5 km s-1 from the earth’s surface. How far from the earth does the rocket go before returning to the earth ? Mass of the earth = 6.0 × 1024 kg; mean radius of the earth = 6.4 × 106 m; G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2 kg-2.
Solution:
Let the rocket be fired with velocity v from the surface of earth and it reaches a height h from the surface of earth where its velocity becomes zero.
Total energy of rocket at the surface of energy
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 18
or h = \(\frac{\mathrm{Rv}^2}{2 \mathrm{gR}-\mathrm{v}^2}\)
= \(\frac{\left(6.4 \times 10^6\right) \times\left(5 \times 10^3\right)^2}{2 \times 9.8 \times\left(6.4 \times 10^6\right)-\left(5 \times 10^3\right)^2}\)
= 1.6 × 106m

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 18.
The escape speed of a projectile on the earth’s surface is 11.2 km s-1. A body is projected out with thrice this speed. What is the speed of the body far away from the earth ? Ignore the presence of the sun and other planets.
Solution:
Here, ve = 11.2 kms-1, velocity of projection of the body v = 3ve. Let m be the mass of the projectile and v0 be the velocity of the projectile when far away from the earth (i.e) out of gravitational field of earth) then from the law of conservation of energy
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv02 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 – \(\frac{1}{2}\) mve2
or v0 = \(\sqrt{v^2-v_e^2}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 v e)^2-v_e^2}\)
= \(\sqrt{8} v_e=\sqrt{8}\) × 11.2 = 31.68 kms-1

Question 19.
A satellite orbits the earth at a height of 400 km above the surface. How much energy must be expended to rocket the satellite out of the earth’s gravitational influence ? Mass of the satellite = 200 kg; mass of the earth = 6.0 × 1024 kg; radius of the earth = 6.4 × 106 m; G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2 kg-2.
Solution:
Total energy of orbiting satellite at a hight h.
= – \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}+\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^2\)
= – \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}+\frac{1}{2} m \frac{\mathrm{GM}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{2(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
energy expended to rocket the satellite out of the earth’s gravitational field.
= – (total energy of orbiting satellite)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{2(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
= \(\frac{\left(6.67 \times 10^{-11}\right) \times\left(6 \times 10^{24}\right) \times 200}{2\left(6.4 \times 10^6+4 \times 10^5\right)}\)
= 5.9 × 109J

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 20.
Two stars each of one solar mass (= 2 × 1030< kg) are approaching each other for a head on collision. When they are a distance i09 km, their speeds are negligible. What is the speed with which they collide? The radius of each star is 104< km. Assume the stars to remain undistorted until they collide. (Use the known value of G).
Solution:
Here, mass of each star, M = 2 × 1030< kg
initial distance between two stars, r = 109<
km = 1012< m.
initial potential energy of the system = – \(\frac{\text { GMM }}{r}\)
Total K.E. of the stars = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2< + \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2<
= Mv2<
Where v is the speed of stars with which they collide. When the stars are about to collide, the distance between their centres, r1< = 2R.
∴ Final potential energy of two starts = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMM}}{2 \mathrm{R}}\)
since gain in K.E. is at the cost of loss in P.E
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 19

Question 21.
Two heavy spheres each of mass 100 kg and radius 0.10 m are placed 1.0 m apart on a horizontal table. What is the gravitational force and potential at the mid point of the line joining the centres of the spheres ? Is an object placed at that point in equilibrium ? If so, is the equilibrium stable or unstable ?
Solution:
Gravitational field at the mid – point of the line joining the centres of the two spheres.
= \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{(r / 2)^2}(-\hat{r})+\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{(r / 2)^2} \hat{r}=0\)
Gravitational potential at the mid point of the list joining the centres of the two spheres is
v = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GM}}{r / 2}+\left(\frac{-\mathrm{GM}}{r / 2}\right)=\frac{-4 \mathrm{GM}}{r}\)
\(\frac{-4 \times 6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 100}{1.0}\) = -2.7 × 10-8< J/kg
As the effective force on the body placed at mid-point is zero, so the body is in equilibrium. If the body is displaced a little towards either mass body from its equilibrium position, it will not return back to its initial position of equilibrium. Hence, the body is in unstable equilibrium.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 22.
As you have learnt in the text, a geo-stationary satellite orbits the earth at a height of nearly 36,000 km from the surface of the earth. What is the potential due to earth’s gravity at the site of this satellite ? (Take the potential energy at infinity to be zero). Mass of the earth = 6.0 × 1024 kg, radius = 6400 km.
Solution:
Gravitational potential at height h from the surface of earth is
v = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GM}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
= \(\frac{-6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times\left(6 \times 10^{24}\right)}{\left(6.4 \times 10^6+36 \times 10^6\right)}\)
= -9.4 × 106 J/kg.

Question 23.
A star 2.5 times the mass of the sun and collapsed to a size of 12 km rotates with a speed of 1.2 rev. per second. (Extremely compact stars of this kind are known as neutron stars. Certain stellar objects called pulsars belong to this category). Will an object placed on its equator remain stuck to its surface due to gravity ? (mass of the sun = 2 × 1030< kg).
Solution:
The object will remain struck to the surface of star due to gravity, if the accerlation due to gravity is more than the centrifugal accerlation due to its rotation.
Accerlation due to gravity, g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^2}\)
= \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 2.5 \times 2 \times 10^{30}}{(12000)^2}\)
= 2.3 × 1012 m/s2
centrifugal accerlation = rw2
= r(2πv)2
= 12000 (2π × 1.5)2
= 1.1 × 106 ms-2
since g > rω2 , therefore the body will remain struck with the surface of star.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 24.
A spaceship is stationed on Mars. How much energy must be expended on the spaceship to launch it out of the solar system ? Mass of the space ship = 1000 kg; mass of the sun = 2 × 1030 kg; mass of mars = 6.4 × 1023< kg; radius of mars = 3395 km; radius of the orbit of mars = 2.28 × 108< km; G = 6.67 × 10-11< N m2 kg 2 .
Solution:
Let R, be the radius of the orbit of mars and R be the radius of the mars. M be the mass of the sun and M’ be the mass of mars. If m is the mass of the space ship, then potential energy of space-ship due to gravitational attraction of the sun = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
potential energy of space – ship due to gravitational attraction of mars = – \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}^1 \mathrm{~m}}{\mathrm{R}^1}\)
since K.E of space ship is zero, therefore total energy of spaceship
= \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\) – \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}^1 \mathrm{~m}}{\mathrm{R}^1}\)
= – Gm \(\left(\frac{M}{R}+\frac{M^1}{R^1}\right)\)
∴ energy required to rocket out the spaceship from the solar system = – (total energy of space ship)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 20

Question 25.
A rocket is fired ‘vertically’ from the surface of mars with a speed of 2 km s-1. If 20% of its initial energy is lost due to martian atmospheric resistance, how far will the rocket go from the surface of mars before returning to it ? Mass of mars = 6.4 × 1023< kg; radius of mars = 3395 km; G = 6.67 × 10-11< N m2 kg-2.
Solution:
Let m = mass of the rocket, M = mass of the mars and
R = radius of mars. Let v be the initial velocity of rocket.
Initial K.E = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2; Initial P.E = – \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Total initial energy = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 – \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
since 20% of K.E is lost, only 80% is left behind to reach the height. Therefore
Total energy available = \(\frac{80}{100} \times \frac{1}{2}\) mv2
– \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\) = 0.4 mv2 – \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
If the rocket reaches the higher point which is at a height h from the surface of Mars, its
K.E. is zero and P.E. = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
using principle of conservation of energy, we have
0.4 mv2 – \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}=-\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
or \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}=\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}}\) – 0.4 v2
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 21

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Let the speed of the planet at the perihelion P in Fig. be υp and the Sun- planet distance SP be rp. Relate {rp, υp} to the corresponding quantities at the aphelion {rA, υA}. Will the planet take equal times to traverse BAC and CPB ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 22
(a) An ellipse traced out by a planet around the sun. The colsest point is P and the farthest point is A. P is called the perihelion and A the aphelion. The semimajor axis (a) is half the distance AP
Answer:
The magnitude of the angular momentum at P is Lp = mp rp υp. Similarly, LA = mp rA υA. From angular momentum conservation
mp rp υp = mp rA υA
or \(\frac{v_p}{v_A}=\frac{r_A}{r_p}\)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 2.
Three equal masses of m kg each are fixed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC. (a) What is the force acting on a mass,2m placed at the centroid O of the triangle ? (b) What is the force if the mass at the vertex A is doubled ?
Take AO = BO = CO = 1 m (see Fig)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 23
Three equal masses are placed at the three vertices of the ∆ABC. A mass 2m is placed at the centroid O.
Answer:
(a) The angle between OC and the positive x- axix is 30° and so is the angle between OB and the negative x-axis. The individual forces a vector notation are
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 24
From the principle of superposition and the law of vector addition, the resultant gravitational force FR on (2m) at O is
FR = FOA + FOB + FOC
FR = 2Gm2 \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) + 2Gm2 \(-\hat{\mathrm{i}}\) cos 30° – \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) sin 30°) + 2Gm2 (\(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\) cos 30° – \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) sin 30°) = 0
Alternatively, one expects on the basis of symmetry that the resultant force ought to be zero.

(b) By symmetry the x-component of the force cancels out. The y-component survives.
FR = 4Gm2 \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) – 2Gm2 \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) = 2Gm2 \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\)

Question 3.
Find the potential energy of a system of four particles placed at the vertices of a square of side l. Also obtain the potential at the centre of the square.
Answer:
We have four mass pairs at distance l and two diagonal pairs at distance \(\sqrt{2}\)1 Hence,
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 25
= \(\frac{2 \mathrm{Gm}}{1}\left(2+\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\right)\) = -5.41 \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm}^2}{l}\)
The gravitational potential U(r) at the centre of the square (r = \(\sqrt{2}\) l / 2) is
U(r) = \(-4 \sqrt{2} \frac{\mathrm{Gm}}{\mathrm{l}}\)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 4.
Two uniform solid spheres of equal radii R, but mass M and 4 M have a centre to centre separation 6 R, as shown in Fig. The two spheres are held fixed A projeetile of mass m is projected from the surface of the sphere of mass M directly towards the centre of the second sphere. Obtain an expression for the minimum speed v of the projectile so that it reaches the surface of the second sphere.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 26
Answer:
If ON = r, we have
\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^2}=\frac{4 \mathrm{GMm}}{\left(6 \mathrm{R}-\mathrm{r}^2\right)}\)
(6R – r)2 = 4r2
6R – r = ±2r
r = 2R or – 6R.
The neutral point r = -6R does not concern us in this example. Thus ON = r = 2R.
Thereafter, the greater gravitational pull of 4M would suffice. The mechanical energy at the surface of M is
Ei = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~m} v^2-\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}-\frac{4 \mathrm{GMm}}{5 \mathrm{R}}\)
The mechanical energy at N is purely potential.
EN = \(-\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}-\frac{4 \mathrm{GMm}}{4 \mathrm{R}}\)
From the principle of conservation of mechanical energy
\(\frac{1}{2} v^2-\frac{G M}{R}-\frac{4 G M}{5 R}=-\frac{G M}{2 R}-\frac{G M}{R}\)
υ2 = \(\frac{2 G M}{R}\left(\frac{4}{5}-\frac{1}{2}\right)\)
υ2 = \(\left(\frac{3 \mathrm{GM}}{5 R}\right)^{1 / 2}\)

Question 5.
The planet Mars has two moons, phobos and delmos. (i) phobos has a period 7 hours, 39 minutes and an orbital radius of 9.4 × 103 km. Calculate the mass of Mars, (ii) Assume that Earth and Mars move in circular orbits around the sun, with the Martian orbits being 1.52 times the orbital radius of the earth. What is the length of the Martain year in days ?
Answer:
(i) We employ T2 = K (RE + h)3 (where K = 4π2 / GME) with the Earth’s mass replaced by the Martian mass Mm
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 27
(ii) Once again Kepler’s third law comes to our aid,
\(\frac{T_M^2}{T_E^2}=\frac{R_{M S}^3}{R_{E S}^3}\)
Where RMS is the Mars-Sun distance and RES is the Earth-Sun distance.
∴ TM = (1.52)3/2 × 365
= 684 days
For example. the ratio of the semi-minor to semi-major axis for our Earth is, b/a = 0.99986.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 6.
Weighing the Earth : You are given the following data g = 9.81 ms2 RE = 6.37 x106 m the distance to the moon R = 3.4 × 108 m and the time period of the moons revolution is 27.3 days. Obtain the mass of the Earth ME in two different ways.
Answer:
(1) From g = \(\frac{F}{m}=\frac{G M_E}{R_E^2}\)
ME = \(\frac{g R_E^2}{G}\)
= \(\frac{9.81 \times\left(6.37 \times 10^6\right)^2}{6.67 \times 10^{-11}}\)
= 5.97 × 1024kg. (by Method – 1)

(2) The moon is a satellite of the Earth. From the derivation of Kepler’s third law
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 28
= 6.02 × 1024kg (by Method – 2)
Both methods yield almost the same answer the difference between them being less than 1%.

Question 7.
Express the constant k T2 = K (RE + h)2 where K = 4π2/GME of in days and kilometres. Given k = 10-13 s2 m-3. The moon is at a distance of 3.84 × 105 km from the earth. Obtain its time period of revolution in days.
Answer:
Given
k = 10-13 s2 m-3 (d = day)
= 10-13 \(\left[\frac{1}{(24 \times 60 \times 60)^2} d^2\right]\)
\(\left[\frac{1}{(1 / 1000)^3 \mathrm{~km}^3}\right]\) = 1.33 × 10-14 d2 km-3
Using T2 = K (RE + h)3 (where k = 4π2/ GME) and the given value of k the time period of the moon is
T2 = (1.33 × 10-14) (3.84 × 105)3
T = 27.3 d

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 8.
A 400 kg satellite is in a circular orbit of radius 2RE about the Earth. How much energy is required to transfer it to a circular orbit of radius 4RE? What are the changes in the kinetic and potential energies ?
Answer:
Initially,
E1 = \(\)
While finally
Ef = \(\)
The change in the total energy is
∆E = Ef – Ei
= \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}_E \mathrm{~m}}{8 R_E}=\left(\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}^2}\right) \frac{\mathrm{mR} \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}}{8}\)
∆E = \(\frac{\mathrm{gm} \mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}}{8}=\frac{9.81 \times 400 \times 6.37 \times 10^6}{8}\)
= 3.13 × 109J
The kinetic enegy is reduced and it mimics ∆E, namely, ∆K = Kf – Ki = -3.13 × 109 J.
The change in potential energy is twice the change in the total energy, namely
∆V = Vf – Vi= -6.25 × 109 J

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 10th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Solids Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 10th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Solids

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State Hooke’s law of elasticity.
Answer:
“With in the elastic limit stress directly proportional to the strain”.
Stress ∝ strain
Stress = k × strain
k = \(\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Strain }}\)
Where k is modulus of elasticity.

Question 2.
State the units and dimensions of stress.
Answer:

  1. Stress = \(\frac{\text { Force }}{\text { Area }}=\frac{F}{A}\)
    S.l units → N/m2 (or) Pascal
  2. Dimensional formula
    Stress = \(\frac{\mathrm{MLT}^{-2}}{\mathrm{~L}^2}\) = [ML-1T-2].

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 3.
State the units and dimensions of modulus of elasticity.
Answer:
Modulus of elasticity (k) = \(\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Strain }}\)
Units → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Dimensional formula → [ML-1T-2]

Question 4.
State the units and dimensions of Young’s modulus.
Answer:
Young’s modules (y) = \(\frac{\text { LongitudinalStress }}{\text { Longitudinal Strain }}=\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{\frac{e}{L}}\)
Units → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Dimensional formula → [ML-1T-2]

Question 5.
State the units and dimensions of modulus of rigidity.
Answer:
Modulus of rigidity (G) = \(\frac{F}{A \theta}=\frac{\text { Shearing Stress }}{\text { Shearing Strain }}\)
Units → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Dimensional formula → [ML-1T-2].

Question 6.
State the units and dimensions of Bulk modulus.
Answer:
Bulk modulus (B) = \(\frac{\text { Bulk Stress }}{\text { Bulk Strain }}=\frac{-P V}{\Delta V}\)
Units → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Dimensional formula → [ML-1T-2].

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 7.
State the examples of nearly perfect elastic and plastic bodies.
Answer:

  • Nearly perfect elastic bodies are quartz fibre.
  • Nearly perfect plastic bodies are dough and day.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define Hooke’s Law of elasticity, proportionality, permanent set and breaking stress.
Answer:
Hooke’s law : “With in the elastic limit stress is directly proportional to the strain”.
Stress ∝ strain
Stress = k × strain
Where k is modulus of elasticity.
Proportionality limit: The maximum stress developed in a body till it obeys Hookes law is called proportionality limit.
Permanent Set : Permanent deformation produced when a body is stretched beyond its elastic limit.
Breaking stress : The maximum stress a body can bear before it breaks.

Question 2.
Define modulus of elasticity, stress, strain and Poisson’s ratio.
Answer:
Modulus of elasticity : It is the ratio stress applied on a body to the strain produced in the body.
k = \(\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Strain }}\)
S.I unit → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Stress : When a body is subjected to an external force, the force per unit area is called stress.
Stress = \(\frac{\text { Force }}{\text { Area }}=\frac{F}{A}\)
S.I unit → N/m2 (or) Pascal
Strain : When deforming forces act on a body, the fractional deformation produced in the body. It has no units

Poisson’s ratio (σ) : The ratio between lateral strain to longitudinal strain of a body is called poisson’s ratio.
σ = \(\frac{\text { Lateral Strain }}{\text { Longitudinal Strain }}=\frac{\frac{-\Delta \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{r}}}{\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}}\)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 3.
Define Young’s modulus. Bulk modulus and Shear modulus.
Answer:
Young’s modulus (y) : With in the elastic limit, the ratio of longitudinal stress to longitudinal strain is called young’s modulus.
y = \(\frac{\text { Longitudinal Stress }}{\text { Longitudinal Strain }}=\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{\frac{e}{L}}\)
y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{A} \cdot \mathrm{e}}\)
S.I unit → N/m2 (or) Pascal

Bulk modulus (B) : With in the elastic limit, it is defined as the ratio of Bulk stress to Bulk strain
B = \(\frac{\text { Bulk Stress }}{\text { Bulk Strain }}\)
B = \(\frac{\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A}}}{\frac{-\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}}=\frac{-\mathrm{PV}}{\Delta \mathrm{V}}\) (∵ -ve sign indicates volume decreases)
S.I unit → N/m2 (or) Pascal

Rigidity modulus (G) : With in the elastic limit, it is defined as the ratio of shearing stress to shearing strain.
G = \(\frac{\text { Shearing Stress }}{\text { Shearing Strain }}\)
G = \(\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{\theta}=\frac{F}{A \theta}\)
S.I unit → N/m2 (or) Pascal

Question 4.
Define stress and explain the types of stress. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Stress : The restoring force per unit area is called stress
∴ Stress = \(\frac{\text { Restoring Force }}{\text { Area }}=\frac{F}{A}\)
Stress is classified into three types.

  1. Longitudinal stress
  2. Volume (or) Bulk stress
  3. Tangential (or) shearing stress

1. Longitudinal stress (or) Linear stress : When a normal stress changes the length of a body, then it is called longitudinal stress.
Longitudinal stress = \(\frac{F}{A}\)

2. Volume (or) Bulk stress : When a normal stresschanges the volume of a body, then it is called volume stress.
Volume stress = \(\frac{\text { Force }}{\text { Area }}\) = pressure.

3. Tangential (or) shearing stress : When the stress is tangential to the surface due to the application of forces parallel to the surface, then the stress is called tangential stress.
Tangential stress = \(\frac{F}{A}\).

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 5.
Define strain and explain the types of strain.
Answer:
Strain : It is the ratio of change in dimension to its original dimension.
Strain = \(\frac{\text { Changes in dimension }}{\text { Original dimension }}\)
Strain is of three types.
1. Longitudinal strain : It is the ratio of change in length to its original length.
Longitudinal strain = \(\frac{\text { Changes in length }}{\text { Original length }}=\frac{e}{L}\)

2. Shearing strain (or) Tangential strain : When simultaneous compression and extension in mutually perpendicular direction takes place in a body, the change of shape it under goes, is called shearing strain.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 1
Shearing strain (θ) = \(\frac{1}{L}\)

3. Bulk (or) volume strain : It is the ratio of change in volume to its original volume is called bulk strain. It is called Bulk (or) volume strain.
Bulk strain = \(\frac{\text { Change in Volume }}{\text { Original Volume }}=\frac{\Delta V}{V}\)

Question 6.
Define strain energy and derive the equation for the same. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
The potential energy stored in a body when stretched is called strain energy.
Let us consider a wire of length L and cross – sectional area A. Let x be the change in length of the wire by the application of stretching force F.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 2
Strain energy per unit volume = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{F}{A} \cdot \frac{x}{L}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × stress × strain.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 7.
Explain why steel is preferred to copper, brass, aluminium in heavy-duty machines and in structural designs.
Answer:
The elastic behavior of materials plays an important role in everyday life. Designing of buildings, the structural design of the columns, beams and supports require knowledge of strength of material used. The elasticity of the material is due to stress developed with in the body, when extenal force acts on it. A material is of more elastic nature if it develops more stress (or) restoring force. Steel develops more stress than copper, brass, aluminium for same strain. So steel is more elastic.
y = \(\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Strain }}\)

Question 8.
Describe the behaviour of a wire under gradually increasing load. [A.P. – Mar. ’18, ’16, ’15; TS – Mar. ’18, ’15, ’13]
Answer:
When the load is increased in steps, a graph is drawn between stress on y-axis and corresponding strain on x-axis.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 3
1. Proportionality limit : In the linear position OA, stress is proportional to strain, i.e. Hookes law is obeyed by the wire upto point A. The graph is a straight lint. When ever the stretching force at A is removed, the wire regains its original length.
A is called proportionality limit.

2. Elastic limit : In the graph B is the elastic limit.
Through the wire doesnot obey Hooke’s law at B. The wire regains its original length after removing the stretching force at B. upto point B the wire is under elastic behaviour.

3. Permanent set (or) yield point: In the graph c is the yield point. If the stretching force at c is removed, the wire doesnot regain its original length and the length of the wire changes permanently. In this position the wire flows like a viscous liquid. After the point c, the wire is under plastic behavior, c is called permanent set (or) yield point.

4. Breaking point: When the stress increased, the wire becomes thinner and thinner. When the stress increases to a certain limit the wire breaks. The stress at which the wire breaks is called breaking stress and the point D is called breaking point.

5. Elastic fatigue : The state of temperary loss of elastic nature of a body due to continuous strain is called elastic fatigue. When a body is subjected to continuous strain with in the elastic limit, it appears to have lost Hastic property temporarily to some extent and becomes weak.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 9.
Two identical solid balls, one of ivory and the other of wet-day are dropped from the same height onto the floor. Which one will rise to greater height after striking the floor and why ?
Answer:
Ivory ball rise to greater height after striking the floor. The ivory ball regain its original shape after striking the floor. The elastic property of ivory ball is more. Where as wet-day ball does not regain its original shape after striking the floor.

So wet-day ball acts like plastic body.

Question 10.
While constructing buildings and bridges a pillar with distributed ends is preferred to a pillar with rounded ends. Why ?
Answer:
Use of pillars (or) columns is also very common in buildings and bridges. A pillar with rounded ends supports less load than that with a distributed shape at the ends. The precise design of a bridge (or) a building has to take into account the conditions under which it will function, the cost and long period, reliability of usable materials.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 4

Question 11.
Explain why the maximum height of a mountain on earth is approximately 10 km ?
Answer:
The maximum height of a mountain on earth is 10 km, can also be provided by considering the elastic properties of rocks. A mountain base is not under uniform compression and this provides some shearing stress to rocks under which they can flow. The stress due to all the material on the top should be less than the critical shearing stress at which the rocks flow.

At the bottom of a mountain of height h, the force per unit area due to the weight of the mountain is hρg. Where ρ is the density of the mountain. The material at the bottom experiences this force in the vertical direction and the sides of the mountain are free.
There is a shear component, approximately hρg itself.
Elastic limit for 3 typical rock is 30 × 107 N/m2
hρg = 30 × 107 (ρ = 3 × 103 kg/m3)
h = \(\frac{30 \times 10^7}{3 \times 10^3 \times 10}\)
h = 10 km.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 12.
Explain the concept of Elastic Potential Energy in a stretched wire and hence obtain the expression for it.
Answer:
“When a wire is put under a tensile stress, work is done against the inter-atomic forces. The work is stored in the wire in the form of elastic potential energy”.

Expression for elastic potential energy : Consider a wire of length L and area of cross section A is subjected to a deforming force F along the length of the wire. Let the length of the wire is elongated by l.
Young’s modulus (y) = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{yAl}}{\mathrm{L}}\) ……………. (1)
Work done due to further elongation of small length dl
Work done (dw) = F × dl = (\(\frac{\mathrm{yAl}}{\mathrm{L}}\))dl ……………… (2)
Total work done in increasing the length of the wire from L to (L + l)
w = \(\int_0^1 \frac{\mathrm{yAl} }{\mathrm{L}} \mathrm{dl}=\frac{\mathrm{yA}}{2} \times \frac{l^2}{\mathrm{~L}}\)
w = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \mathrm{y} \times\left(\frac{l}{\mathrm{~L}}\right)^2 \times \mathrm{Al}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) y × stress2 × volume of the wire
w = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × stress × strain × volume of the wire.
This work is stored in the wire in elastic potential energy (u).

Long Answer Question

Question 1.
Define Hooke’s law of elasticity and describe an experiment to determine the Young’s modulus of the material of a wire.
Answer:
Hooke’s law : With in the elastic limit, stress is directly proportional to the strain.
Stress ∝ strain
Stress = k × strain
Where k is modulus of elasticity.
Determination of young’s modulus of the material of a wire:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 5
Young’s Modulus of the Material of a wire

  1. It consists of two long straight wires of same length and same area of cross-section suspended side by side from a rigid .support.
  2. The wire A (reference wire) carries a metre scale M and a pan to place a weight.
  3. The wire B (experimental wire) carries a pan in which known weights can be placed.
  4. A vernier scale v is attached to a pointer at the bottom of the experimental wire B and the main scale M is fixed to the wire A.
  5. The weights placed in the pan, the elongation of the wire is measured by the vernier arrangement.
  6. The reference wire is used to compensate for any change in length that may occur due to change in room temperature.
  7. Both the reference and experimental wires are given an initial small load to keep the wires straight and the vernier reading is noted.
  8. Now the experimental wire is gradually loaded with more weights, the vernier reading is noted again.
  9. The difference between two vernier readings gives the elongation produced in the wire.
  10. Let r and L be the radius and initial length of the experimental wire. Let M be the mass that produced an elongation ∆L in the wire.
    Young’s modulus of the material of the experimental wire is given by
    y = \(\frac{\text { Longitudinal Stress }}{\text { Longitudinal Strain }}=\frac{\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A}}}{\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}}\)
    y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{A} \Delta \mathrm{L}}\)
    y = \(\frac{\mathrm{MgL}}{\pi r^2 \times \Delta \mathrm{L}}\)
    From above equation young’s modulus of the material of the wire is determined.

Problems

Question 1.
A copper wire of 1mm diameter is stretched by applying a force of 10 N. Find the stress in the wire.
Solution:
D = 1 m.m = 10-3m, r = \(\frac{D}{2}\) = 0.5 × 10-3 m.
F = 10 N
Stress = \(\frac{F}{A}=\frac{F}{\pi r^2}\)
= \(\frac{10}{3.14 \times\left(0.5 \times 10^{-3}\right)^2}\)
= 1.273 × 107 N/m2.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 2.
A tungsten wire of length 20 cm is stretched by 0.1 cm. Find the strain on the wire.
Solution:
L = 20 × 10-2 m, ∆L = 0.1 × 10-2 m
Strain = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}=\frac{0.1 \times 10^{-2}}{20 \times 10^{-2}}\) = 0.005.

Question 3.
If an iron wire is stretched by 1 %, what is the strain on the Wire ?
Solution:
Strain = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}\) = 1 %
Strain = \(\frac{1}{100}\) = 0.01

Question 4.
A brass wire of diameter 1mm and length 2 m is streched by applying a force of 20N. If the increase in length is 0.51 mm. find
(i) the stress,
(ii) the strain and
(iii) the Young’s modulus of the wire.
Solution:
D = 1 m.m, r = \(\frac{D}{2}\) = 0.5 × 10-3 m
L = 2 m, F = 20 N, ∆L = 0.51 m.m = 0.51 × 10-3 m
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 6
= 9.984 × 1010 N/m2

Question 5.
A copper wire and an aluminium wire have lengths in the ratio 3 : 2, diameters in the ratio 2 : 3 and forces applied in the ratio 4: 5. Find the ratio of increase in length of the two wires. (Ycu = 1.1 × 1011 Nm-2, YAl = 0.7 × 1011 Nm-2).
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 7
= \(\frac{4}{5} \times \frac{3}{2} \times\left(\frac{0.7 \times 10^{11}}{1.1 \times 10^{11}}\right) \times\left(\frac{3}{2}\right)^2\)
\(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}_1}{\Delta \mathrm{L}_2}=\frac{189}{110}\)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 6.
A brass wire of cross-sectional area 2 mm2 is suspended from a rigid support and a body of volume 100 cm3 is attached to its other end. If the decrease in the length of the wire is 0.11 mm, when the body is completely immersed in water, find the natural length of the wire.
(Ybrass = 0.91 × 1011 Nm-2, ρwater = 103 kg m-3).
Solution:
A = πr2 = 2 × 10-6 m2, V = 100 × 10-6 = 10-4 m3
∆L = 0.11 × 10-3 m, yBrass = 0.91 × 1011 N/m2, ρ = 103 kg/m3
y = \(\frac{M g L}{A \times \Delta L}=\frac{v \rho g L}{A \times \Delta L}\)
L = \(\frac{\mathrm{yA} \Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{v \rho g}}=\frac{0.91 \times 10^{11} \times 2 \times 10^{-6} \times 0.11 \times 10^{-3}}{10^{-4} \times 10^3 \times 9.8}\)
L = 2.04 m.

Question 7.
There are two wires of same material. Their radii and lengths are both in the ratio 1:2. If the extensions produced are equal, what is the ratio of loads ?
Solution:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 8

Question 8.
Two wires of different material have same lengths and areas of cross¬section. What is the ratio of their increase in length when forces applied are the same ?
(Y1 = 0.9 × 1011 Nm-2, Y2 = 3.6 × 1011 Nm-2)
Solution:
y1 = 0.9 × 1011 Nm-2
y2 = 3.6 × 1011 Nm-2
y = \(\frac{F L}{A \times \Delta L}\)
∆L ∝ \(\frac{1}{y}\)
\(\frac{(\Delta L)_1}{(\Delta L)_2}=\frac{y_2}{y_1}=\frac{3.6 \times 10^{11}}{0.9 \times 10^{11}}=\frac{4}{1}\)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 9.
A metal wire of length 2.5 m and area of cross-section 1.5 × 10-6 m2 is stretched through 2 mm. if its Young’s modulus is 1.25 × 1011 N.m2, find the tension in the wire.
Solution:
L = 2.5 m, A = 1.5 × 10-6 m2
∆L = 2 × 10-9 m
y = 1.25 × 1011 N.m2
y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{A} \Delta \mathrm{L}}\)
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{yA} \Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}\)
= \(\frac{1.25 \times 10^{11} \times 1.5 \times 10^{-6} \times 2 \times 10^{-3}}{2.5}\)
F = 150 N

Question 10.
An aluminium wire and a steel wire of the same length and cross-section are joined end-to-end. The composite wire is hung from a rigid support and a load is suspended from the free end. If the increase in length of the composite wire is 1.35 mm, find the ratio of the
(i) stress in the two wires and
(ii) strain in the two wires.
(YAl = 0.7 × 1011 N.m2, YSteel = 2 × 1011 Nm2).
Solution:
YAl = 0.7 × 1011 N.m2, YSteel = 2 × 1011 Nm2
∆L1 + ∆L2 = 1.35 mm ……………… (1)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 9

Question 11.
A 2 cm cube of some substance has its upper face displaced by 0.15 cm due to a tangential force of 0.3 N while keeping the lower face fixed, Calculate the rigidity modulus of the substance.
Solution:
L = 2 × 10-2 m, A = L2 = 4 × 10-4 m2
∆x = 0.15 × 10-2 m
F = 0.3 N
G = \(\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{\frac{\Delta x}{L}}=\frac{F L}{A \Delta x}\) (∵ θ = \(\frac{\Delta x}{L}\))
G = \(\frac{0.3 \times 2 \times 10^{-2}}{4 \times 10^{-4} \times 0.15^6 \times 10^{-2}}\)
G = 104 N/m2

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 12.
A spherical ball of volume 1000 cm3 is subjected to a pressure of 10 Atmosphere. The change in volume is 10-2 cm3. If the ball is made of iron, find its bulk modulus.
(1 atmosphere = 1 × 105 Nm-2).
Solution:
v = 1000 cm3 = 1000 × 10-6 = 10-3 m3
p = 1 atm = 1 × 105 = 105 N/m2
-∆v = 10-2 cm3 = 10-2 × 10-6 = 10-8 m3
Bulk modulus (B) = \(\frac{-p v}{\Delta v}\)
= \(\frac{10^5 \times 10^{-3}}{10^{-8}}\)
B = 1010 N/m2.

Question 13.
A copper cube of side of length 1 cm is subjected to a pressure of 100 atmosphere. Find the change in its volume if the bulk modulus of copper is 1.4 × 1011 Nm-2. (1 atm = 1 × 105 Nm-2).
Solution:
l = 1 cm = 10-2 m
V = Volume of the cube = l3 = 1cm3
= 10-6 m3
P = 100 atm = 100 × 105 = 107 N/m2
B = 1.4 × 1011 N/m2
B = \(\frac{-P V}{\Delta V}\)
-∆V = \(\frac{P V}{B}=\frac{10^7 \times 10^{-6}}{1.4 \times 10^{11}}\)
-∆V = 0.7143 × 10-10 m3.

Question 14.
Determine the pressure required to reduce the given volume of water by 2%. Bulk modulus of water is 2.2 × 109 Nm-2.
Solution:
\(\frac{-\Delta V}{V}\) = 2 % = \(\frac{2}{100}\)
B = 2.2 × 109 Nm2
B = \(\frac{-P V}{\Delta V}\)
P = -B × \(\frac{\Delta V}{V}\)
= 2.2 × 109 × \(\frac{2}{100}\)
P = 4.4 × 107 N/m2.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 15.
A steel wire of length 20 cm is stretched to increase its length by 0.2 cm. Find the lateral strain in the wire if the Poisson’s ratio for steel is 0.19.
Solution:
L = 20 cm = 20 × 10-2 m
∆L = 0.2 × 10-2 m
σ = 0.19
σ = \(\frac{\text { Lateral strain }}{\text { Longitudinal strain }\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}\right)}\)
Lateral strain = σ × \(\frac{\Delta L}{L}\)
= \(\frac{0.19 \times 0.2 \times 10^{-2}}{20 \times 10^{-2}}\)
= 0.0019

Additional Problems

Question 1.
A steel wire of length 4.7 m and cross-sectional area 3.0 × 10-5 m2 stretches by the same amount as a copper wire of length 3.5 m and cross-sectional area of 4.0 × 10-5 m2,
Solution:
Given, for steel wire, a1 = 3.0 × 10-5 m2, l1 = 4.7 m, ∆l1 = ∆l, F1 = F
For copper wire, a2 = 4.0 × 10-5 m2, l2 = 3.5 m, ∆l2 = ∆l, F2 = F .
Let y1, y2 be the young modulus of steel wire and copper wire respectively.
∴ y1 = \(\frac{F_1}{a_1} \times \frac{l_1}{\Delta l_2}=\frac{F}{3.0 \times 10^{-5}} \times \frac{4.7}{\Delta l}\) ………….. (i)
and y2 = \(\frac{F_2 \times l_2}{a_2 \times \Delta l_2}=\frac{F \times 3.2}{4 \times 10^{-5} \times \Delta l}\)
\(\frac{\mathrm{y}_1}{\mathrm{y}_2}=\frac{4.7 \times 4 \times 10^{-5}}{3.5 \times 3.0 \times 10^{-5}}\) = 1.8
Here y1 : y1 = 1.8 : 1.

Question 2.
Figure shows the strain-stress curve for a given material. What are (a) Young’s modulus and (b) approximate yield strength for this material ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 10
Solution:
a) From graph, for stress = 150 × 106 Nm-2 the corresponding strain = 0.002
young’s modulus y = \(\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Strain }}=\frac{150 \times 10^6}{0.002}\)
= 7.5 × 1010 Nm-2

b) Approximate yeild strength will be equal to the maximum stress it can substain with out crossing the elastic limit. Therefore, the approximate yeild strength
= 300 × 106 Nm-2
= 3 × 108 Nm-2

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 3.
The stress-strain graphs for materials A and B are shown in Fig.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 11
The graphs are drawn to the same scale.
a) Which of the materials has the greater Young’s modulus ?
b) Which of the two is the stronger material ?
Solution:
a) From the two graphs we note that for a given strain, stress for A is more than that of B. Hence young’s modulus (= stress/ strain) is greater for A than that of B.

b) A is stronger than B. Strength of a material is measured by the amount of stress required to cause fracture, corresponding to the point of fracture.

Question 4.
Read the following two statements below carefully and state, with reasons, if it is true or false.
a) The Young’s modulus of rubber is greater than that of steel;
b) The stretching of a coil is determined by its shear modulus.
Solution:
a) False, because for a given stress there is more strain in rubber than steel and modulus of elasticity is inversly proportional to strain.

b) True because the strecting of coil simply changes its shape without any change in the length of the wire used in the coil due to which shear modulus of elasticity is involved.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 5.
Two wires of diameter 0.25 cm, one made of steel and the other made of brass are loaded as shown in Fig. The unloaded length of steel wire is 1.5 m and that of brass Wire is 1.0 m. Compute the elongations of the steel and the brass wires.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 12
Solution:
For steel wire, total force on steel wire,
F1 = 4 + 6 = 10 kg, f = 10 × 9.8 N
l1 = 1.5 m, ∆l1 = ?, 2r1 = 0.25cm or r1 =(0.25/2)cm = 0.125 × 10-2 m
y1 = 2.0 × 1011 pa
For brass wire, F2 = 6.0 kg, f = 6 × 9.8 N
2r2 = 0.25 cm or r2 = (0.25/2) cm = 0.125 × 10-2 m,
y2 = 0.91 × 1011 pa, l2 = 1.0 m, ∆l2 = ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 13

Question 6.
The edge of an aluminium cube is 10 cm long. One face of the cube is firmly fixed to a verticle wall. A mass of 100 kdis then attached to the opposite face of the cube. The shear modulus of aluminium is 25 GPa. What is the vertical deflection of this face?
Solution:
A = 0.10 × 0.10 = 10-2 m2, F = mg = 100 × 10 N
Shearing strain = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}=\frac{\left(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A}}\right)}{\eta}\)
or ∆L = \(\frac{F L}{A \eta}\)
= \(\frac{(100 \times 10) \times(0.10)}{10^{-2} \times\left(25 \times 10^9\right)}\) = 4 × 10-7 m.

Question 7.
Four identical hollow cylindrical columns of mild steel support a big structure of mass 50,000 kg. The inner and outer radii of each column are 30 and 60 cm respectively. Assuming the load distribution to be uniform, calculate the corn pressional strain of each column.
Solution:
Load on each column, F = \(\frac{50,000}{4}\) kgwt
= \(\frac{50,000 \times 9.8}{4}\) N
A = π(r22 – r12) = \(\frac{22}{7}\)(0.60)2 – (0.30)2]
= \(\frac{22}{7}\) 0.27 m2
Compression strain = \(\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{y}=\frac{F}{A y}\)
= \(\frac{50,000 \times 9.8}{4 \times\left(\frac{22}{7} \times 0.27\right) \times 2.0 \times 10^{11}}\)
= 7.21 × 10-7.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 8.
A piece of copper having a rectangular cross-section of 15.2 mm × 19.1 mm is pulled in tension with 44,500 N force, producing only elastic deformation. Calculate the resulting strain?
Solution:
Here, A = 15.2 × 19.2 × 10-6 m2, F = 44,
500 N, η = 42 × 109 Nm-2
Strain = \(\frac{\text { Stress }}{\text { Modulus of elasticity }}\)
= \(\frac{\frac{F}{A}}{\eta}=\frac{F}{A \eta}=\frac{44500}{\left(15.2 \times 19.2 \times 10^{-6}\right) \times 42 \times 10^9}\)
= 3.65 × 10-3.

Question 9.
A steel cable with a radius of 1.5 cm supports a chairlift at a ski area. If the maximum stress Is not to exceed 108 N m-2, what is the maximum load the cable can support ?
Solution:
Maximum load macimum stress × area of cross-section
= 108πr2
= 108 × \(\frac{22}{7}\) × (1.5 × 10-2)2
= 7.07 × 104 N.

Question 10.
A rigid bar of mass 15 kg is supported symmetrically by three wires each 2.0 m long. Those at each end are of copper and the middle one is of iron. Determine the ratios of their diameters if each is to have the same tension.
Solution:
As each wire has same tension F, so each wire has same extansion due to mass of rigid bar. As each wire is of same length, hence each wire has same strain, if D is the diameter of wire, then
y = \(\frac{4 \mathrm{~F} / \pi \mathrm{D}^2}{\text { Strain }}\) or D2 ∝ 1/y
\(\frac{D_{\mathrm{cu}}}{\mathrm{D}_{\mathrm{iron}}}=\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{y}_{\mathrm{iron}}}{\mathrm{y}_{\mathrm{cu}}}}\)
= \(\sqrt{\frac{190 \times 10^9}{110 \times 10^9}}=\sqrt{\frac{19}{11}}\) = 1.31.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 11.
A 14.5 kg mass, fastened to the end of a steel wire of unstretched length 1.0 m, is whirled in a vertical circle with an angular velocity of 2 rev/s at the bottom of the circle. The cross-sectional area of the wire is 0.065 cm2. Calculate the elongation of the wire when the mass is at the lowest point of its path.
Solution:
Here, m = 14.5 kg, l = r = 1m, v = 2 rps, A = 0.065 × 10-4 m2
Total pulling force on mass, when it is at the lowest position of the vertical circle is
F = mg + mrω2
= mg + mr4πv2
= 14.5 × 9.8 + 14.5 × 1 × 4 × (\(\frac{22}{7}\))2 × 22
= 142.1 +2291.6
= 2433.7 N
y = \(\frac{F}{A} \times \frac{l}{\Delta l}\) or ∆l = \(\frac{F l}{A y}\)
= \(\frac{2433.7 \times 1}{\left(0.065 \times 10^{-4}\right) \times\left(2 \times 10^{11}\right)}\)
= 1.87 × 10-3 m
= 1.87 mm.

Question 12.
Compute the bulk modulus of water from the following data : Initial volume = 100.0 litre, Pressure increase = 100.0 atm (1 atm = 1.013 × 105 Pa), Final volume = 100.5 litre. Compare the bulk modulus of water with that of air (at constant temperature). Explain in simple terms why the ratio is so large.
Solution:
Here, V = 100 lit = 100 × 10-3 m3, P = 100 atm = 100 × 1.013 × 105 Pa
V + ∆V = 100.5 litre or ∆V= (V + ∆V) – V
= 100.5 – 100
= 0.5 litre = 0.5 × 10-3 m3
We known that bulk modulus, B = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\Delta \mathrm{V}}\)
= \(\frac{100 \times 1.013 \times 10^5 \times 100 \times 10^{-3}}{0.5 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 2.026 × 109 Pa
Bulk modulus of air = 1.0 × 105 Pa
\(\frac{\text { Bulk modulus of water }}{\text { Bulk modulus of air }}=\frac{2.026 \times 10^9}{1.0 \times 10^5}\)
= 2.026 × 1014.
It is so because gases are much more compressible than those of liquids. The molecules in gases are very poorly coupled to their neighbours as compared to those of gases.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 13.
What is the density of water at a depth where pressure is 80.0 atm, given that its density at the surface is 1.03 × 103 kg m-3 ?
Solution:
Here, P = 80.0 atm = 80.0 × 1.013 × 105 pa,
compressibility = \(\left(\frac{1}{B}\right)\) = 45.8 × 10-11 pa-1
Density of water at surface,
ρ = 1.03 × 103 kg m-3
Let p be the density of water at the given depth, if v and v’ are volumes of certain mass M of ocean water at surface and at a given
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 14
Putting this value in (i) we get
1 – \(\frac{1.03 \times 10^3}{\rho^{\prime}}\) = 3.712 × 10-3 or
ρ’ = \(\frac{1.03 \times 10^3}{1-3.712 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 1.034 × 103 kg m-3.

Question 14.
Compute the fractional change in volume of a glass slab, when subjected to a hydraulic pressure of 10 atm.
Solution:
Here, P = 10 atm = 10 × 1.013 × 105 pa,
B = 37 × 109 Nm-2
Volumetric strain = \(\frac{\Delta V}{V}=\frac{P}{B}\)
= \(\frac{10 \times 1.013 \times 10^5}{37 \times 10^9}\) = 2.74 × 10-5
∴ Fractional change in volume = \(\frac{\Delta V}{V}\)
= 2.74 × 10-5

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 15.
Determine the volume contraction of a solid copper cube, 10 cm on an edge, when subjected to a hydraulic pressure of 7.0 × 106 Pa.
Solution:
Here, L = 10 cm = 0.10m; P = 7 × 106 pa B = 140 Gpa = 140 × 109 pa
As B = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\Delta \mathrm{V}}=\frac{\mathrm{Pl}^3}{\Delta \mathrm{V}}\) or ∆V = \(\frac{\mathrm{Pl}^3}{\mathrm{~B}}\)
= \(\frac{\left(7 \times 10^6\right) \times(0.10)^3}{140 \times 10^9}\) = 5 × 10-8 m3
= 5 × 10-2 mm3

Question 16.
How much should be pressure on a litre of water be changed to compress it by 0.10% ?
Solution:
Here, V = 1 litre = 10-3m3;
∆V/V = 0,10/100 = 10-3
B = \(\frac{P V}{\Delta V}\) or P = B \(\frac{\Delta V}{V}\)
= (2.2 × 109) × 10-3 = 2.2 × 106pa

Question 17.
Anvils made of single crystals of diamond, with the shape as shown in Fig. are used to investigate behaviour of materials under very high pressures. Flat faces at the narrow end of the anvil have a diameter of 0.50 mm, and the wide ends are subjected to a compressional force of 50,000 N. What is the pressure at the tip of the anvil ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 15
Solution:
Here, D = 0.5 mm = 0.5 × 10-3m = 5 × 10-4m
F = 50,000 N = 5 × 104N
Pressure at the tip of anvil.
P = \(\frac{F}{\pi D^2 / 4}=\frac{4 F}{\pi D^2}\)
P = \(\frac{4 \times\left(5 \times 10^4\right)}{(22 / 7) \times\left(5 \times 10^{-4}\right)^2}\) = 2.5 × 1011pa.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 18.
A rod of length 1.05 m having negligible mass is supported at its end by two wires of steel (wire A) and aluminium (wire B) of equal lengths as shown in Fig. The cross-sectional areas of wires A and B are 1.0 mm2 and 2.0 mm2, respectively. At what point along the rod should a mass m be suspended in order to produce (a) equal stresses and (b) equal strains in both steel and aluminium wires.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 16
Solution:
For Steel wire A, l1 = l, A1 = 1 mm2
Y1 = 2 × 1011Nm-2
For aluminium wire B, l2 = l;
A2 = 2mm2; y2 = 7 × 1010 Nm-2
a) Let mass m be suspended from the rod at the distance × from the end where wires A is connected. Let F1 and F2 be the tension in two wires and there is equal stress in two wires, then
\(\frac{F_1}{A_1}=\frac{F_2}{A_2} \text { or } \frac{F_1}{F_2}=\frac{A_1}{A_2}=\frac{1}{2}\) …………………. (i)
Taking moment of forces about the point of suspension of mass from the rod, we have
F1x = F2 (1.05 – x) or \(\frac{1.05-x}{x}=\frac{F_1}{F_2}=\frac{1}{2}\)
or 2.10 – 2x = x or x = 0.70m = 70 cm

b) Let mass m be supended from the rod at distance × from the end where wire A is connected. Let F1 and F2 be the tension in the wires and there is equal strain in the two wires i.e.
\(\frac{F_1}{A_1 Y_1}=\frac{F_2}{A_2 Y_2}\) or \(\frac{F_1}{F_2}=\frac{A_1}{A_2} \frac{Y_1}{Y_2}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{2 \times 10^{11}}{7 \times 10^{10}}=\frac{10}{7}\)
As the rod is stationary, so F1x = F2(1.05 – x)
or \(\frac{1.05-x}{x}=\frac{F_1}{F_2}=\frac{10}{7}\)
or 10 x = 7.35 – 7x
or x = 0.4324 m
x = 43.2cm.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 19.
A mild steel wire of length 1.0 m and cross-sectional area 0.50 × 10-2 cm2 is stretched, well within its elastic limit, horizontally between two pillars. A mass of 100 g is suspended from the mid-point of the wire. Calculate the depression at the- mid-point.
Solution:
Refer the figure, let x be the depression at the mid point i.e CD = x
In fig. AC = CB = Z = 0.5m
m = 100g = 0.100 kg
AD = BD = (l2 + x2)1/2
Increase in length, ∆l = AD + DB – AB
= 2 AD – AB
= 2 (l2 + x2)1/2 – 2l
= 2l(1 + \(\frac{x^2}{l^2}\))1/2 – 2l
= 2l (1 + \(\frac{x^2}{2 l^2}\)) – 2l = \(\frac{x^2}{l}\)
Strain = \(\frac{\Delta l}{2 l}=\frac{x^2}{2 l^2}\)
If T is the tension in the wire, then 2T cos θ
= mg or T = \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{2 \cos \theta}\)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 17
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 18

Question 20.
Two strips of metal are riveted together at their ends by four rivets, each of diameter 6.0 mm. What is the maximum tension that can be exerted by the riveted strip if the shearing stress on the rivet is not to exceed 6.9 × 107 Pa ? Assume that each rivet is to carry one quarter of the load.
Solution:
Here, r = 6/2 = 3mm = 3 × 10-3 m, max.
stress = 6.9 × 107 Pa
Max . load on a rivet = Max stress × area of cross section
= 6.9 × 107 × (22/7) × (3 × 10-3)2
∴ Maximum tension
= 4 (6.9 × 107 × \(\frac{22}{7}\) × 9 × 10-6)
= 7.8 × 103N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 21.
The Marina trench is located in the Pacific Ocean, and at one place it is nearly eleven km beneath the surface of water. The water pressure at the bottom of the trench is about 1.1 × 108 Pa. A steel ball of initial volume 0.32 m3 is dropped into the ocean and falls to the bottom of the trench. What is the change in the volume of the ball when it reaches to the bottom ?
Solution:
Here, P = 1.1 × 108 Pa, V = 0.32 m3,
B = 16 × 1011Pa
∆V = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{B}}\)
= \(\frac{\left(1.1 \times 10^8\right) \times 0.32}{1.6 \times 10^{11}}\)
= 2.2 × 10-4m3

Textual Examples

Question 1.
A structural steel rod has a radius of 10 mm and a length of 10 m. A 100 KN force stretches it along its length. Calculate (a) stress, (b) elongation, and (c) strain on the rod. Young’s modulus, of structural steel ¡s 2.0 × 1011 Nm2.
Answer:
a) Given Stress = \(\frac{F}{A}=\frac{F}{\pi r^2}\)
= \(\frac{100 \times 10^3 \mathrm{~N}}{3.14 \times\left(10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2}\) = 3.18 × 108 Nm-2

b) The elongation
∆L = \(\frac{(\mathrm{F} / \mathrm{A}) \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{Y}}\)
= \(\frac{\left(3.18 \times 10^8 \mathrm{Nm}^2\right)(1 \mathrm{~m})}{2 \times 10^{11} \mathrm{Nm}^{-2}}\)
= 1.59 × 10-3 m
= 1.59 mm

c) The strain is given by
Strain = ∆L/L = (1.59 × 10-3) km
= 1.59 × 10-3 = 0.16%

Question 2.
A copper wire of length 2.2 m and a steel wire of length 1.6 m, both of diameter 3.0 mm, are connected end to end. When stretched by a load, the net elongation is found to be 0.70 mm. Obtain the load applied.
Answer:
From y = \(\frac{\sigma}{\varepsilon}\)
we have stress = strain × Young’s modulus.
W/A = Yc × (∆Lc/Lc) = Ys × (∆Ls/Ls)
where the subscripts c and s refer to copper and stainless steel respectively,
∆Lc/∆Ls = (Ys/Ys) () (Lc/Ls)
Given Lc = 2.2 m, Ls = 1.6 m,
Yc = 1.1 × 1011 N.m-2 and Ys = 2.0 × 1011 N.m-2.
∆Lc/∆Ls = \(\frac{2.0 \times 10^{11}}{1.1 \times 10^{11}}=\frac{2.2}{1.6}\) = 2.5
∆Lc + ∆Ls = 7.0 × 10-4 m
Solving the above equations,
∆Lc = 5.0 × 10-4 m and ∆Ls = 2.0 × 10-4 m.
∴ W = (A × Yc × ∆Lc)Lc
= π(1.5 × 10-3)2 × \(\left[\frac{\left(5.0 \times 10^{-4} \times 1.1 \times 10^{11}\right)}{2.2}\right]\) = 1.8 × 102 N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 3.
In a human pyramid in a circus, the entire weight of the balanced group is supported by the legs of a performer who is lying on his back (as shown in Fig.) The combined mass of all the persons performing the act and the tables, planks etc. involved is 280 kg. The mass of the performer lying on his back at the bottom of the pyramid is 60 kg. Each thighbone (femur) of this performer has a length of 50 cm and an effective radius of 2.0 cm. Determine the amount by which each thighbone gets compressed under the extra load.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 19
Answer:
Total mass of all the performers, tables, plaques = 280 kg
Mass of the performer = 60 kg
Mass supported by the legs of the performer at the bottom of the pyramid = 280 – 60
= 220 kg
Weight of this supported mass = 220 kg wt.
= 220 × 9.8 N = 2156 N
Weight supported by each thighbone of the performer = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (2156) N = 1078 N.
The Young’s modulus for bone is Y = 9.4 × 109 Nm-2 (compressive)
Length of each thighbone L = 0.5 m the radius of thigbone = 2.0 cm
Thus the cross-sectional area of the thighbone
A = π × (2 × 10-2)2 m2
= 1.26 × 10-3 m2
Using \(\frac{(F \times L)}{(A \times \Delta L)}\) the compression in each thigbone (∆L) can be computed as
∆L = \(\frac{F \times L}{Y \times A}\)
= [(1078 × 0.5)/(9.4 9 × 109 × 1.26 × 10-3)]
= 4.55 × 10-5 m or 4.55 × 10-3 cm.
This is a very small change ! The fractional decrease in the thighbone is ∆L/L = 0.000091 or 0.0091%.

Question 4.
A square slab of side 50 cm and thickness 10 cm is subject to a shearing force (on its narrow face) of 9.0 × 104 N. The lower edge is riveted to the floor. How much will the upper edge be displaced ?
Answer:
The area (A) = 50 cm × 10 cm
= 0.5 m × 0.1 m
= 0.05 m2
Therefore, the stress appIid is
= (9.4 × 104N/0.05 m2)
= 1.80 × 106 N.m2
We know that shearing strain = (∆x/L)
= Stress/G.
Therefore the displacement
∆x = (Stress × L)/G = \(\frac{\left(1.8 \times 10^6 \mathrm{Nm}^{-2} \times 0.5 \mathrm{~m}\right)}{5.6 \times 10^9 \mathrm{Nm}^{-2}}\)
= 1.6 × 10-4 m = 0.16 mm.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 5.
The average depth of Indian Ocean is about 3000 m. Calculate the fractional compression. ∆V/V, of water at the bottom of the ocean, given that the bulk modulus of water is 2.2 × 109 Nm-2. (Take g = 10 ms-2)
Answer:
The pressure exerted by a 3000 m column of water on the bottom layer
ρ = hρg
= 3000 m × 1000 kg m-3× 10 ms-2
= 3 × 107 Nm-2
Fractional compression ∆V/V, is
∆V/V = stress \(\frac{\left(3 \times 10^7 \mathrm{Nm}^{-2}\right)}{2.2 \times 109 \mathrm{Nm}^{-2}}\)
= 1.36 × 10-2 or 1.36%

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 12th Lesson Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 12th Lesson Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are “cathode rays” ?
Answer:
Cathode rays are streams of fast moving electrons or negatively charged particles.

Question 2.
What important fact did Millikan’s experiment establish ?
Answer:
Millikan’s experiment established that electric charge is quantised. That means the charge on any body (oil drop) is always an integral multiple of charge of an electron, i.e., Q = ne.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 3.
What is “work function” ? (A.P. Mar. ’19 & T.S. Mar. ’15)
Answer:
The minimum energy required to liberate an electron from photometal surface is called work function, ϕ0.

Question 4.
What is “photoelectric effect” ?
Answer:
When light of sufficient energy is incident on the photometal surface electrons are emitted. This phenomenon is called photoelectric effect.

Question 5.
Give examples of “photosensitive substances”. Why are they called so ?
Answer:
Examples of photosensitive substances are Li, Na, K, Rb and Cs etc.
The work function of alkali metals is very low. Even the ordinary visible light, alkali metals can produce photoelectric emission. Hence they are called photosensitive substances.

Question 6.
Write down Einstein’s photoelectric equation. (A.P. Mar. ’15)
Answer:
Einstein’s photoelectric equation is given by Kmax = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}_{\max }^2\) = hυ – ϕ0.

Question 7.
Write down de-Broglie’s relation and explain the terms there in. (A.P. & T.S. Mar. ’16)
Answer:
The de-Broglie wave length (λ) associated with a moving particle is related to its momentum (p) is λ = \(\frac{h}{p}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\), where h is planck’s constant.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 8.
State Heisenberg’s Uncertainly Principle. (A.P. Mar. ’19) (Mar. ’14)
Answer:
Uncertainity principle states that “it is impossible to measure both position (Δx) and momentum of an electron (Δp) [or any other particle] at the same time exactly”, i.e., Δx . Δp ≈ h where Δx is uncertainty in the specification of position and Δp is uncertainty in the specification of momentum.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is the effect of
(i) intensity of light
(ii) potential on photoelectric current ?
Answer:
(i) Effect of intensity of light on photoelectric current:

1) When the intensity (I) of incident light, with frequency greater than the threshold frequency (υ > υ0) is increased then the number of photoelectrons emitted increases i.e. the value of photoelectric current (i) increases, ie. i ∝ I.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 10

ii) The effect of potential on photoelectric current:

  1. On increasing the positive potential on collecting electrode, the photoelectric current increases. At a particular positive potential, the photocurrent becomes maximum which is known as saturated current.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 11
  2. On increasing the value of negative potential on collecting electrode, the photoelectric current gradually goes on decreasing. At a particular negative potential the value of photoelectric current becomes zero. This is known as stopping potential.
  3. Stopping potential does not depend on the intensity of incident light. On increasing intensity, the value of saturated current increases, whereas the stopping potential remains unchanged.

Question 2.
Describe an experiment to study the effect of frequency of incident radiation on ‘stopping potential’.
Answer:
Experimental study of the effect of frequency of incident radiation on stopping potential:

  1. The experimental set up is shown in fig.
  2. Monochromatic light of sufficient energy (E = hv) from source ‘s’ is incident on photosensitive plate ‘C’ (emitter), electrons are emitted by it.
  3. The electrons are collected by the plate A (collector), by the electric field created by the battery.
  4. The polarity of the plates C and A can be reversed by a commutator.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 12
  5. For a particular frequency of incident radiation, the minimum negative (retarding) potential V0 given to the plate A for which the photo current stops or becomes zero is called stopping potential.
  6. The experiment is repeated with different frequencies, and their different stopping potential are measured with voltmeter.
  7. From graph, we note that
    1. The values of stopping potentials are different for different frequencies.
    2. The value of stopping potential is more negative for radiation of higher incident frequency.
    3. The value of saturation current depends on the intensity of incident radiation but it is independent of the frequency of the incident radiation.
      AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 13

Question 3.
Summarise the photon picture of electromagnetic radiation.
Answer:
We can summarise the photon picture of electromagnetic radiation as follows.

  1. In interaction of radiation with matter, radiation behaves as if it is made up of particles called photons.
  2. Each photon has energy E\(\left[\begin{array}{l}
    =\mathrm{hv} \\
    =\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}
    \end{array}\right]\) and momentum P \(\left[\begin{array}{l}
    =\frac{h v}{c} \\
    =\frac{h}{\lambda}
    \end{array}\right]\) and speed c, the speed of light.
  3. By increasing the intensity of light of given wave length, there is only an increase in the number of photons per second crossing a given area, with each photon having the same energy. Thus, photon energy is independent of intensity of radiation.
  4. Photons are not deflected by electric and magnetic field. This shows that photons are electrically neutral.
  5. In a photon-particle collision (such as photo-electron collision), the energy and momentum
    are conserved. However the number of photons may not be conserved in a collision. One photon may be absorbed or a new photon may be created.
  6. The rest mass of photon is zero. According to theory of relativity, the mass of moving particle is given by m = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_0}{\sqrt{1-\frac{v^2}{c^2}}}\) where v is velocity of particle and c is velocity of light.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 4.
What is the deBroglie wavelength of a ball of mass 0.12 Kg moving with a speed of 20 ms-1 ? What can we infer from this result ?
Answer:
Given, m = 0.12 kg; υ = 20 m/s; h = 6.63 × 10-34 J-s;
λ = \(\frac{h}{\mathrm{mv}}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{0.12 \times 20}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{2.4}\) ∴ λ = 2.762 × 10-34 m = 2762 × 10-21 A.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
How did Einstein’s photoelectric equation explain the effect of intensity and potential on photoelectric current ? How did this equation account for the effect of frequency of incident light on stopping potential ? (T.S. Mar. ’19)
Answer:

  1. Einstein postulated that a beam of light consists of small energy packets called photons or quanta.
  2. The energy of photon is E = hv. Where ‘h’ is Planck’s constant; v is frequency of incident light (or radiation).
  3. If the absorbed energy of photon is greater than the work function (ϕ0 = hυ0), the electron is emitted with maximum kinetic energy i.e., kmax = \(\frac{1}{2} m_{\max }^2\) = eV0 = hv – ϕ0. This equation is known as Einstein’s photoelectric equation.
  4. Effect of intensity of light on photoelectric current:
    When the intensity (I) of incident light, with frequency greater thanthe threshold frequency (υ > υ0) is increased then the number of photoelectrons emitted decreases i.e. the value of photoelectric current (i) increases, le. i ∝ I.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 14
  5. The effect of potential on photoelectric current:
    1. On increasing the positive potential on collecting electrode, the photoelectric current increases. At a particular positive potential, the photocurrent becomes maximum which is known as saturated current.
    2. On increasing the value of negative potential on collecting electrode, the photoelectric current gradually goes on decreasing. At a particular negative potential the value of photoelectric current becomes zero. This is known as stopping potential (v0).
      AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 15
    3. Stopping potential does not depend on the intensity of incident light. On increasing intensity, the value of saturated current increases, whereas the stopping potential remains unchanged.
  6. The effect of frequency of incident radiation on stopping potential:
    On increasing the frequency of incident light, the value of stopping potential goes on increasing gradually as shown in fig. That means kmax increases eV0 also increases.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 16
  7. From the graph, we note that
    1. For a given photosensitive metal, the cut off potential (v0) varies linearly with the frequency of the incident radiation.
    2. For a given photosensitive metal, there is a certain minimum cut off frequency v0 (called threshold frequency) for which the stopping potential is zero.
      AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 17
  8. From the graph we note that
    1. The value of cut-off potential is different for radiation of different frequency.
    2. The value of stopping potential is more negative for radiation of higher incident frequency.
  9. From above experiments, it is found that, if the incident radiation is of higher frequency than that of threshold frequency, the photoelectric emission is possible.

Question 2.
Describe the Davisson and Germer experiment. What did this experiment conclusively prove?
Answer:
Davisson and Germer experiment:

  1. The experimental arrangement is schematically shown in fig.
  2. Electrons from a filament F are rendered into a fine beam by applying a positive potential to the cylinder A.
  3. A fine narrow beam of electrons is incident on the nickel crystal. The electrons are scattered in all directions by the atoms of the crystal.
  4. The intensity of the electron beam scattered in a given direction, is measured by the electron detector (collector). The detector can be moved on a circular scale and is connected to a sensitive galvanometer, which records the current.
  5. The deflection of the galvanometer is proportional to the intensity of the electron beam entering collector.
  6. The apparatus is enclosed in an evacuated chamber.
  7. The experiment was performed by varying the accelerating voltage from 44 V to 68 V. It is found that the intensity is maximum at 50° for a critical energy of 54 V
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 18
  8. For θ = 50°, the glancing angle, ϕ (angle between the scattered beam of electron with the plane of atoms of the crystal) for electron beam will be given by
    ϕ + θ + ϕ = 180°
    ϕ = \(\frac{1}{2}\left[180^{\circ}-50^{\circ}\right]\) = 65°
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 19
  9. According to Bragg’s law for first order diffraction maxima (n = 1), we have 2 d sin ϕ = 1 × λ ⇒ λ = 2 × 0.91 × sin 65° = 1.65A = 0.165 nm. (experimentally).
    [∵ for Nickel crystal interatomic separation d = 0.91 A]
  10. According to de-Broglie hypothesis, the wavelength of the wave associated with electron is given by λ = AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 37
    = 1.67A = 0.167 nm, (Theoritically).
  11. The experimentally measured wavelength was found to be in confirmity with proving the existence of de-Broglie waves.

Textual Exercises

Question 1.
Find the
(a) maximum frequency, and
(b) minimum wavelength of X-rays produced by 30 kV electrons.
Solution:
Given voltage V = 30 kV = 30 × 103 V; e = 1.6 × 10-19 C; h = 6.63 × 10-34 j-s C = 3 × 108 m/s
a) Maximum frequency, v = \(\frac{\mathrm{eV}}{\mathrm{h}}\) = \(\frac{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 30 \times 10^3}{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}\) = 7.24 × 1018 Hz

b) Minimum wavelength of X-ray, λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{C}}{\mathrm{v}}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{7.24 \times 10^{18}}\) = 0.414 × 10-10 Hz
∴ λ = 0.0414 × 10-9m = 0.0414 nm.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 2.
The work function of caesium metal is 2.14 eV. When light of frequency 6 × 1014 Hz is incident on the metal surface, photoemission of electrons occurs. What is the
(a) maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons,
(b) stopping potential and
(c) maximum speed of the emitted photoelectrons ?
Solution:
Given ϕ0 = 2.14 eV; v = 6 × 1014 Hz
a) KEmax = hv – ϕ0 = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 6 \times 10^{14}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) – 2.14 ∴ KEmax = 0.35 eV

b) KEmax = eV0 ⇒ 0.35 eV = eV0 ∴ V0 = 0.35 V
c) KEmax = \(\frac{1}{2} m v_{\max }^2\) ⇒ \(v_{\max }^2\) = \(\frac{2 K_{\max }}{m}\) = \(\frac{2 \times 0.35 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31}}\) (∴ e = 1.6 × 10-19 C)
\(v_{\max }^2\) = 0.123 × 1012 ⇒ υmax = \(\sqrt{1230 \times 10^8}\) = 35.071 × 104 m/s ∴ υmax = 350.71 km/s.

Question 3.
The photoelectric cut-off voltage in certain experiment is 1.5 V. What is the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted ?
Solution:
Given, V0 = 1.5 V; e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, KEmax = eV0 = 1.6 × 10-19 × 1.5 = 2.4 × 10-19 J.

Question 4.
Monochromatic light of wavelength 632.8 nm is produced by a helium-neon laser. The power emitted is 9.42 mW.
(a) Find the energy and momentum of each photon in the light beam,
(b) How many photons per second, on the average, arrive at a target irradiated by this beam ? (Assume the beam to have uniform cross-section which is less than the target area), and,
(c) How fast does a hydrogen atom have to travel in order to have the same momentum as that of the photon ?
Solution:
Given, λ = 632.8 nm = 632.8 × 10-9m; p = 9.42 mW = 9.42 × 10-3W
h = 6.63 × 10-34 J-s; c = 3 × 10-3 m/s

a) E = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10}{632.8 \times 10^{-9}}\) = 3.14 × 10-19 J.
Momentum of each photon, p = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{632.8 \times 10^{-9}}\) = 1.05 × 10-27kg \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{s}}\)

b) No. of photons per second,
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 20
∴ N = 3 × 1016 photons/s
c) Since, PHydrogen = Pphoton
⇒ mυ = p ⇒ υ = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}}{\mathrm{m}}\) = \(\frac{1.05 \times 10^{-27}}{1.66 \times 10^{-27}}\) [∴ mH = 1.66 × 10-27 kg] ∴ υ = 0.63 m/s.

Question 5.
The energy flux of sunlight reaching the surface of the earth is 1.388 × 103 W/m2. How many photons (nearly) per square metre are incident on the Earth per second ? Assume that the photons in the sunlight have an average wavelength of 550 nm.
Solution:
Given, P = 1.388 × 103 W/m2; λ = 550 nm = 550 × 10-9 m
h = 6.63 × 10-34 J-s; e = 3 × 108 m/s
Energy of each photon E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{550 \times 10^{-9}}\) = 3.616 × 10-19 J
No. of photons incident on the earths surface, N = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{E}}\) = \(\frac{1.388 \times 10^3}{3.66 \times 10^{-19}}\)
∴ N = 3.838 × 1021 photons/m2 – s.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 6.
In an experiment on photoelectric effect, the slope of the cut-off voltage versus frequency of incident light is found to be 4.12 × 10-15 V s. Calculate the value of Planck’s constant.
Solution:
Given, slope of graph tan θ = 4.12 × 10-15 V — s; .
e = 1.6 × 10-19 c.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 21
For slope of graph, tan θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{v}}\)
We know that hv = eV
\(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{v}}\) = \(\frac{h}{e}\) ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{e}}\) = 4.12 × 10-15; h = 4.12 × 10-15 × 1.6 × 10-19 = 6.592 × 10-34 J-s

Question 7.
A 100W sodium lamp radiates energy uniformly in all directions. The lamp is located at the centre of a large sphere that absorbs all the sodium light which is incident on it. The wavelength of the sodium light is 589 nm. (a) What is the energy per photon associated with the sodium light ?
(b) At what rate are the photons delivered to the sphere ?
Solution:
Given, P = 100 W; λ = 589 nm = 589 × 10,sup>-9 m; h = 6.63 × 10-34 J – S; c = 3 × 108 m/s
a) E = \(\frac{\text { hc }}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{589 \times 10^{-9}}\) = 3.38 × 10-19J = \(\frac{3.38 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) eV = 2.11 eV.
b) No. of photons delivered per second, N = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{E}}\) = \(\frac{100}{3.38 \times 10^{-19}}\) = 3 × 1020 photons/s

Question 8.
The threshold frequency for a certain metal is 3.3 × 1014 Hz. If light of frequency 8.2 × 1014 Hz is incident on the metal, predict the cut-off voltage for the photoelectric emission.
Solution:
Given, v0 = 3.3 × 1014 Hz; v = 8.2 × 1014 Hz; e = 1.6 × 10-19 c; KE = eV0 = hv – hv0
V0 = \(\frac{h\left(v-v_0\right)}{e}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times(8.2-3.3) \times 10^{14}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 10^{14} \times 4.9}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) ∴ V0 = 2.03 V.

Question 9.
The work function for a certain metal is 4.2 eV. Will this metal give photoelectric emission for incident radiation of wavelength 330 nm ?
Solution:
Given, ϕ0 = 4.2 eV = 4.2 × 1.6 × 10-19 J = 6.72 × 10~1S J
λ = 330 nm = 330 × 10-9 m; h = 6.63 × 10-34 J – s ⇒ c = 3 × 108 m/s
E = \(\frac{\text { hc }}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{330 \times 10^{-9}}\) ∴ E = 6.027 × 10-19J
As E < ϕ0, no photoelectric emission takes place.

Question 10.
Light of frequency 7.21 × 1014 Hz is incident on a metal surface. Electrons with a maximum speed of 6.0 × 105 m/s are ejected from the surface. What is the threshold frequency for photoemission of electrons ?
Solution:
Given, v = 7.21 × 1014 Hz; m = 9.1 × 10-31 kg; υmax = 6 × 105 m/s
KEmax = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}_{\max }^2\) = hv – hv0 = h(v – v0)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 22

Question 11.
Light of wavelength 488 nm is produced by an argon laser which is used in the photoelectric effect. When light from this spectral line is incident on the emitter, the stopping (cut-off) potential of photoelectrons is 0.38 V. Find the work function of the material from which the emitter is made. .
Solution:
Given, λ = 488 nm = 488 × 10-9 m; V0 = 0.38 V; e = 1.6 × 10-19 c; h = 6.63 × 10-34 J – s
c = 3 × 108 m/s ⇒ KE = eV0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) – ϕ ⇒ 1.6 × 10-19 × 0.38 = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{488 \times 10^{-9}}\) – ϕ0
6.08 × 10-20 = 40.75 × 10-20 – ϕ0 ⇒ (40.75 – 6.08) × 10-20 = 34.67 × 10-20 J
= \(\frac{34.67 \times 10^{-20}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}} \mathrm{eV}\) ∴ ϕ0 = 2.17 eV.

Question 12.
Calculate the
(a) momentum, and
(b) de Broglie wavelength of the electrons accelerated through a potential difference of 56 V
Solution:
Given, V = 56 V; e = 1.6 × 10-19 c; m = 9 × 10-31 kg
a) As KE = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}^2}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\) ⇒ 2m (KE) = P2 ⇒ P = \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{~m}(\mathrm{KE})}\) = \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{eV}}\) [∵ KE = eV]
∴ P = \(\sqrt{2 \times 9 \times 10^{-31} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-31} \times 56}\) = 4.02 × 10-24 kg – m/s
b) λ = \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{V}}\) A = \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{56}}\) A = 0.164 × 10-9m ∴ λ = 0.164 nm.

Question 13.
What is the
(a) momentum,
(b) speed, and
(c) de Brogue wavelength of an electron with kinetic energy of 120 eV.
Solution:
Given, KE = 120 eV; m = 9.1 × 10-3 kg; e = 1.6 × 10-19 c
a) P = \(\sqrt{2 m(K E)}\) = \(\sqrt{2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times\left(120 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)}\) ∴ P = 5.91 × 10-24 kg – m/s
b) υ = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}}{\mathrm{m}}\) = \(\frac{5.91 \times 10^{-24}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31}}\) = 6.5 × 106 m/s .
c) λ = \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{\mathrm{V}}}\) A = \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{120}}\) A = 0.112 × 10-9 m ∴ λ = 0.112 nm.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 14.
The wavelength of light from the spectral emission line of sodium is 589 nm Find the kinetic energy at which (a) an electron, and (b) a neutron, and would have the same de Brogue wavelength.
Solution:
Given, λ = 589 mn = 589 × 10-9 m; me = 9.1 × 10-31 kg.
mn = 1.67 × 10-27 kg; h = 6.62 × 10-34 J – s.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 23

Question 15.
What is the de Brogue wavelength of
(a) a bullet of mass 0.040 kg travelling at the speed of 1.0 km/s
(b) a ball of mass 0.060 kg moving at a speed of 1.0 m/s, and
(c) a dust particle of mass 1.0 × 10-9 kg drifting with a speed of 2.2 m/s?
Solution:
a) Given, for bullet m = 0.040 kg and o = 1000 m/s = 103 m/s
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{0.040 \times 10^3}\) = 1.66 × 10-35m
b)Given, for ball m = 0.060 kg and υ = 1 m/s ⇒ λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{0.060 \times 1}\) = 1.1 × 10-32 m
c) Given, for a dust particle m = 1 × 10-9 kg and υ = 2.2 m/s
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{1 \times 10^{-9} \times 2.2}\) = 3.0 × 10-25 m.

Question 16.
An electron and a photon each have a wavelength of 1.00 nm. Find
(a) their momenta,
(b) the energy of the photon, and
(c) the kinetic energy of electron.
Solution:
Given, λ = 1 mm = 10-9m; h = 6.63 × 10-34 J-S; c = 3 × 108 m/S
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 24

Question 17.
(a) For what kinetic energy of a neutron will the associated de Brogue wavelength be 1.40 × 10-10 m?
(b) Also find the de Brogue wavelength of a neutron, in thermal equilibrium with matter, having an average kinetic energy of (3/2) k T at 300 K.
Solution:
(a) Given, for neutron, λ = 1.40 × 10-10 m and m = 1.675 × 10-27 kg
KE = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}^2}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\) = \(\frac{h^2}{2 \mathrm{~m} \lambda^2}\) = \(\frac{\left(6.63 \times 10^{-34}\right)^2}{2 \times\left(1.40 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2 \times 1.675 \times 10^{-27}}\) ∴ KE = 6.686 × 10-21J

b) Given, T = 300 k and K = 1.38 × 10-23 J/K
KE = \(\frac{3}{2}\) KT = \(\frac{3}{2}\) × 1.38 × 10-21 × 300 = 6.21 × 10-21 J
λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m(K E)}}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{2 \times 1.675 \times 10^{-27} \times 6.21 \times 10^{-21}}}\) ∴ λ = 1.45 × 10-10m = 1.45 A

Question 18.
Show that the wavelength of electromagnetic radiation is equal to the de Broglie wavelength of its quantum (photon).
Solution:
The momentum of a photon of frequency v, wavelength λ is given by p = \(\frac{\mathrm{hv}}{\mathrm{c}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\lambda}\)
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{p}}\) ⇒ de-Broglie wavelength of photon, λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\) = \(\frac{h}{p}\) = \(\frac{\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{hv}}}{\mathrm{c}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{v}}\)
Thus, the wavelength of electromagnetic radiation is equal to the de-Broglie wavelength.

Question 19.
What is the de Broglie wavelength of a nitrogen molecule in air at 300 K ? Assume that the molecule is moving with the root-mean-square speed of molecules at this temperature. (Atomic mass of nitrogen = 14.0076 u)
Solution:
Given, T = 300 k; K = 1.38 × 10-23 J/k; m = 28.0152u = 28.0152 × 1.67 × 10-27 kg;
h = 6.63 × 10-34 Js; Mean KE of molecules \(\frac{1}{2}\) mυ2 = \(\frac{3}{2}\) KT
υ = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 \mathrm{KT}}{\mathrm{m}}}\) = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 300}{28.0152 \times 1.66 \times 10^{-27}}}\)
∴ υ = 516.78 m/s
de-Broglie wavelength, λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{28.0152 \times 1.66 \times 10^{-27} \times 516.78}\) = 2.75 × 10-11 m
∴ λ = 0.0275 × 10-19 m = 0.028 nm.

Additional Exercises

Question 1.
(a) Estimate the speed with which electrons emitted from a heated emitter of an evacuated tube impinge on the collector maintained at a potential difference of 500 V with respect to the emitter. Ignore the small initial speeds of the electrons. The specific charge of the electron, i.e., its e/m is given to be 1.76 × 1011 C kg-1.
(b) Use the same formula you employ in (a) to obtain electron speed for an collector potential of 10 MV. Do you see what is wrong ? In what way is the formula to be modified ?
Solution:
a) Given, V = 500 V, \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{m}}\) = 1.76 × 1011 C/kg; KE = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^2\) = eV

b) V = 10 MV = 107 V; υ = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{m}} \times 2 \mathrm{~V}}\) = \(\sqrt{1.76 \times 10^{11} \times 2 \times 10^7}\) ∴ υ = 1.8762 × 109 m/s
This speed is greater than speed of light, which is not possible. As o approaches to c, then mass m = \(\frac{m_0}{\sqrt{1-\frac{v^2}{c^2}}}\)

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 2.
(a) A monoenergetic electron beam with electron speed of 5.20 × 106 m s-1 is subject to
a magnetic field of 1.30 × 10-4 T normal to the beam velocity. What is the radius of the circle traced by the beam, given e/m for electron equals 1.76 × 1011 C kg-1.
(b) Is the formula you employ in (a) valid for calculating radius of the path of a 20 MeV electron beam ? If not, in what way is it modified ?
[Note : Exercises 20(b) and 21(b) take you to relativistic mechanics which is beyond the scope of this book. They have been inserted here simply to emphasise the point that the formulas you use in part (a) of the exercises are not valid at very high speeds or energies. See answers at the end to know what ‘very high speed or energy’ means.]
Solution:
a) Given, υ = 5.20 × 106 m/s; B = 1.30 × 10-4 T; \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{m}}\) = 1.76 × 1011 C/kg
Since centripetal force is balanced by Force due to magnetic field, \(\frac{\mathrm{m} v^2}{\mathrm{r}}\) = Bυ
[∵ (\(\vec{v} \times \vec{B}\)) = e υ B sin 90° = Beυ]
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 25

b) Given, E = 20 MeV = 20 × 1.6 × 10-13J; me = 9.1 × 10-31 kg
E = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^2\)
⇒ v = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 E}{m}}\) = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 20 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-13}}{9.1 \times 10^{-32}}}\) ∴ v = 2.67 × 109 m/s

As υ > C, the formula used in (a) r = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}}{\mathrm{eB}}\) is not valid for calculating the radius of path of 20 MeV electron beam because electron with such a high energy has velocity in relatistic domain i.e., comparable with the velocity of light and the mass varies with the increase in velocity but we have taken it a constant.
∴ m = \(\frac{m_0}{\sqrt{1-\frac{v^2}{c^2}}}\) ⇒ Thus, the modified formula will be r = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}}{\mathrm{eB}}\) = \(\left[\frac{m_0}{\sqrt{1-\frac{v^2}{c^2}}}\right] \frac{v}{e B}\)

Question 3.
An electron gun with its collector at a potential of 100V fires out electrons in a spherical bulb containing hydrogen gas at low pressure (~ 10-2 mm of Hg). A magnetic field of 2.83 × 10-4 T curves the path of the electrons in a circular orbit of radius 12.0 cm. (The path can be viewed because the gas ions in the path focus the beam by attracting electrons and emitting light by electron capture; this method is known as the fine beam tube’ method.) Determine e/m from the data.
Solution:
Given, V = 100 V; B = 2.83 × 10-4 T; m = 9.1 × 10-31 kg; e = 1.6 × 10-19 C;
r = 12 cm = 0.12m; KE = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^2\) = eV ⇒ \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.1 × 10-31 × υ2 = 1.6 × 10-19 × 100
υ2 = \(\frac{2 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-17}}{9.1 \times 10^{-3.1}}\) = 3.516 × 1013 ∴ υ = \(\sqrt{3.516 \times 10^{13}}\) = 5.93 × 106 m/s
Specific charge of electron, \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{m}}\) = \(\frac{v}{r B}\) [∵ \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^2}{\mathrm{r}}\) = Beυ] = \(\frac{5.93 \times 10^6}{2.83 \times 10^{-4} \times 0.12}\)
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{m}}\) = 1.74 × 1011 C/kg.

Question 4.
(a) An X-ray tube produces a continuous spectrum of radiation with its short wavelength end at 0.45 A. What is the maximum energy of a photon in the radiation ?
(b) From your answer to (a), guess what order of accelerating voltage (for electrons) is required in such a tube ?
Solution:
a) Given, λ = 0.45 A = 0.45 × 10-10 m; E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{0.45 \times 10^{-10} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) eV
∴ E = 27.6 × 103 eV = 27.6 KeV

b) In X-ray tube, accelerating voltage provides the energy to the electrons which produce X-rays. For getting X-rays, photons of 27.51 KeV is required that the incident electrons must posess kinetic energy of 27.61 KeV.
Energy = eV = E; eV = 27.6 KeV; V = 27.6 KV .
So, the order of accelerating voltage is 30 KV.

Question 5.
In an accelerator experiment on high-energy collisions of electrons with positrons, a certain event is interpreted as annihilation of an electron-positron pair of total energy 10.2 BeV into two γ-rays of equal energy. What is the wavelength associated with each γ-ray ? (1 BeV = 109 eV)
Solution:
Given, energy of 2 γ-rays, 2E = 10.2 BeV
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 27
⇒ 2\(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) = 10.2 BeV [∵ E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)] ⇒ λ = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{hc}}{10.2 \mathrm{BeV}}\)
Here h = 6.63 × 10-34 J-S; c = 3 × 108m/s, 1 BeV = 109 eV = 109 × 1.6 × 10-19J
⇒ λ = \(\frac{2 \times 6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{10.2 \times 10^9 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) ∴ λ = 2.436 × 10-16 m

Question 6.
Estimating the following two numbers should bé interesting. The first number will tell you why radio engineers do not need to worry much about photons ! The second number tells you why our eye can never count photons’, even in barely detectable light.
(a) The number of photons emitted per second by a Medium wave transmitter of 10 kW power, emitting radiowaves of wavelength 500 m.
(b) The number of photons entering the pupil of our eye per second corresponding to the minimum intensity of white light that we humans can perceive (~ 10-10 W m-2). Take the area of the pupil to be about 0.4 cm2, and the average frequency of white light to be about 6 × 1014 Hz.
Solution:
a) Given, P = 10kW = 10 × 103 W; λ = 500m; h = 6.63 × 10-34 J – s; C = 3 × 108
The no. of photons emitted per second, N = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{E}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{p} \lambda}{\mathrm{hc}}\) = \(\frac{10 \times 10^3 \times 500}{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}\)
∴ N = 2.51 × 1031 photons/s

b) Given, v = 6 × 10-4 Hz; I = \(\frac{E}{A-t}\) = 10-10 W/m2; Area of pupil, A = 0.4 cm2 = 0.4 × 10-4 m2.
Total energy falling on pupil in unit time, E’ = IA = 10-10 × 0.4 × 10-4 ∴ E’ = 4 × 10-155 J/s
Energy of each photon, E” = hv = 6.63 × 10-34 × 6 × 1014 = 3.978 × 10-19 J
No. of photons per second, N = \(\frac{E^{\prime}}{E^{\prime \prime}}\) = \(\frac{4 \times 10^{-15}}{3.978 \times 10^{-19}}\) = 1.206 × 104 photons/s
As this number is not so large a: in part (a), so it is large enough for us never to sense the individual photons by our eye.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 7.
Ultraviolet light of wavelength 2271 A from a 1oo W mercury source irradiates a photo cell made of molybdenum metal. If the stopping potential is -1.3 V, estimate the work function of the metal. How would the photo-cell respond to a high intensity (-105 W m-2) red light of wavelength 6328 A produced by a He-Ne laser?
Solution:
Given, for UV light, λ = 2271A = 2271 × 10-10 m
V0 = 1.3 V; P = 100W; h = 6.63 × 10-34 J-s; c = 3 × 108 m/s
From Einstein’s equation E = KE + ϕ0, hυ = eV0 + ϕ0
ϕ0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) – eV0 = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{2271 \times 10^{-10}}\) – 1.6 × 10-19 × 1.3 = 8.758 × 10-19 – 2.08 × 10-19
ϕ0 = \(\frac{6.678 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) eV = 4.17 eV ∴ ϕ0 = 4.2 eV
Given, for red light, λ = 6328Å = 6328 × 10-10m
E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{6328 \times 10^{-10}}\) = \(\frac{3.143 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) eV ∴ E = 1.96 eV
Here, E < ϕ0, So, the photocell will not respond to this red light. (It is independent of intensity).

Question 8.
Monochromatic radiation of wavelength 640.2 nm (1 nm = 10-9 m) from a neon, lamp irradiates photosensitive material made of caesium on tungsten. The stopping voltage is measured to be 0.54 V. The source is replaced by an iron source and its 427.2 nm line irradiates the same photo-cell. Predict the new stopping voltage.
Solution:
Given, for Neon X = 640.2 nm = 640.2 × 10-9 m ; V0 = 0.54 V
h = 6.63 × 10-34 J-s; c = 3 × 108 m/s; e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
ϕ = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) – eV0 = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{640.2 \times 10^{-9}}\) – 1.6 × 10-19 × 0.54
= 3.1 × 10-19 – 0.864 × 10-19 = 2.236 × 10-19J = \(\frac{2.236 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) eV ∴ ϕ = 1.4 eV
For iron; given ϕ0 = 1.4eV; λ = 427.2 nm = 427.2 × 10-9 m
Let V0 be the new stopping potential, eV0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) – ϕ0
eV0’ = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{427.2 \times 10^{-9} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) – 1.4 = 1.51 eV. Required stopping potential V0‘ = 1.51 V.

Question 9.
A mercury lamp is a convenient source for studying frequency dependence of photoelectric emission, since it gives a number of spectral lines ranging from the UV to the red end of the visible spectrum. In our experiment with rubidium photo-cell, the following lines from a mercury source were used:
λ1 = 3650Å, λ2 = 4047Å, λ3 = 4358Å, λ4 = 5461 Å, λ5 = 6907Å,
The stopping voltages, respectively, were measured to be:
V01 = 1.28 V, V02 = 0.95 V, V03 = 0.74 V, V04 = 0.16 V, V05 = 0V.
Determine the value of Plancks constant h, the threshold frequency and work function
for the material.
[Note : You will notice that, to get h from the data, you will need to know e(which you can take to be 1.6 × 10-19 C). Experiments of this kind on Na, Li, K, etc. were performed by Millikan, who, using his own value of e (from the oil-drop experiment) confirmed Einstein’s photoelectric equation and at the same time gave an independent estimate of the value of h.]
Solution:
Given λ1 = 3650 A = 3650 × 10-10 m
λ2 = 4047 A = 4047 × 10-10 m
λ3 = 4358 A = 4358 × 10-10 m
λ4 = 5461 A = 5461 × 10-10 m
λ5 = 6907 A = 6907 × 10-10 m
V01 = 1.28V, V02 = 0.95, V03 = 0.74 V; V05 = 0

a) v1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\lambda_1}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{3650 \times 10^{-10}}\) = 8.219 × 1014 Hz
v2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\lambda_2}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{4047 \times 10^{-10}}\) = 7.412 × 1014 Hz
v3 = \(\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\lambda_3}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{4358 \times 10^{-10}}\) = 6.884 × 1014 Hz
v4 = \(\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\lambda_4}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{5461 \times 10^{-10}}\) = 5.493 × 1014 Hz
v5 = \(\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\lambda_5}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{6907 \times 10^{-10}}\) = 4.343 × 1014 Hz
As the graph between V0 and frequency v is a straight line.
The slope of this graph gives the values of \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{e}}\)
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 28
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{e}}\) = \(\frac{V_{01}-V_{04}}{v_1-v_4}\) = \(\frac{1.28-0.16}{(8.219-5.493) \times 10^{14}}\)
h = \(\frac{1.12 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{2.726 \times 10^{14}}\) = 6.674 × 10-34 J . s

b) ϕ0 = hv0 = 6.574 × 10-34 × 5 × 1014
= 32.870 × 10-20 J = \(\frac{32.870 \times 10^{-20}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}} \mathrm{eV}\)
= 2.05 eV

Question 10.
The work function for the following metals is given:
Na : 2.75 eV; K: 2.30 eV; Mo : 4.17 eV; Ni : 5.15 eV. Which of these metals will not give photoelectric emission for a radiation of wavelength 3300 A from a He-Cd laser placed 1 m away from the photocell ? What happens if the laser is brought nearer and placed 50 cm away?
Solution:
Given λ = 3300 A = 3300 × 10-10 m
Energy of incident photon, E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{3300 \times 10^{-10} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) ∴ E = 3.75 eV
Here Na, K has lesser work function than 3.75 eV. So, they produce photoelectric effect. If the laser is brought nearer then only the intensity change or the number of photoelctrons change.

Question 11.
Light of intensity 10-5 W m-2 falls on a sodium photo-cell of surface area 2 cm2. Assuming that the top 5 layers of sodium absorb the incident energy, estimate time required for photoelectric emission in the wave-picture of radiation. The work function for the metal is given to be about 2 eV. What is the implication of your answer?
Solution:
Given, I = 10-5 W/m2; A = 2 cm2 = 2 × 10-4 m2; ϕ0 = 2eV
Let t be the time.
The effective atomic area of Na = 10-20 m2 and it contains one conduction electron per
atom.
No. of conduction electrons m five layers
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 29
We know that sodium has one free electron (or conduction electron) per atom.
Incident power on the surface area of photocell
= Incident intensity × Area on the surface area of photo cell
= 10-5 × 2 × 10-4 = 2 × 10-9 W.
The electron present in all the 5 layers of sodium will share the incident energy equally.
Energy absorbed per second per electron, E = AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 30
= \(\frac{2 \times 10^{-9}}{10^{17}}\) = 2 × 10-26 W.
Time required for emission by each electron,
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 31 which is about 0.5 yr.
The answer obtained implies that the time of emission of electron is very large and is not agreement with the observed time of emission. There is no time lag between the incidence of light and the emission of photoelectron.
Thus, it is implied that the wave theory cannot be applied in this experiment.

Question 12.
Crystal diffraction experiments can be performed using X-rays, or electrons accelerated through appropriate voltage. Which probe has greater energy? (For quantitative. comparison. take the wavelength of the probe equal to 1 A, which is of the order of interatomic spacing in the lattice) (me = 9.11 × 10-31 kg).
Solution:
Given λ = 1 A = 10-10 m ; me = 9.11 × 10-31 kg; h = 6.63 × 10-34 J – s; c = 3 × 108 m/s
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 32
Thus, for the same wavelength a X-ray photon has much KE than an electron.

Question 13.
(a) Obtain the de Brogue wavelength of a neutron of kinetic energy 150 eV. As you have seen in Exercise 31, an electron beam of this energy is suitable for crystal diffraction experiments. Would a neutron beam of the same energy be equally suitable ? Explain. (mn = 1.675 × 10-27 kg)
(b) Obtain the de Brogue wavelength associated with thermal neutrons at room temperature (27 °C). Hence explain why a fast neutron beam needs to be thermalised with the environment before it can be used for neutron diffráction experiments.
Solution:
a) Given, KE = 150 eV; m = 1.675 × 10-27 kg
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 33
The interatomic spacing is 10-10 m, which is greater than this wavelength. So, neutron beam of 150 eV is not suitable for diffraction experiment.

b) T = t + 273 = 27 + 273 = 300 K; K = 1.38 × 10-23 J/mol/K
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 34
This wavelength is order of interatomic spacing. So, the neutron beam first thermalised and then used for diffraction.

Question 14.
An electron microscope uses electrons accelerated by a voltage of 50 kV. Determine the de Broglie wavelength associated with the electrons. If other factors (such as numerical aperture, etc.) are taken to be roughly the same, how does the resolving power of an electron microscope compare with that of an optical microscope which uses yellow light?
Solution:
Given, V = 50 KV s 50000 V
λ =
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 38
= 0.055 A ⇒ λ = 5.5 × 10-12 m; For yellow light (λ) = 5.9 × 10-7m
As resolving power (RP) ∝ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\)

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 35

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Question 15.
The wavelength of a probe is roughly a measure of the size of a structure that it can probe in some detail. The quark structure of protons and neutrons appears at the minute length-scale of 10-15 m or less. This structure was first probed in early 1970’s using high energy electron beams produced by a linear accelerator at Stanford, USA. Guess what might have been the order of energy of these electron beams. (Rest mass energy of electron = 0.5 11 MeV.)
Solution:
Given λ = 10-15 m; E = 0.5 11 MeV; P = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{10^{-15}}\) = 6.63 × 10-19 kgm/s
Rest mass energy; E0 = m0c2 = 0.511 MeV = 0.511 × 1.6 × 10-13 T.
From relativistic theory, E2 = p2c2 + \(m_0^2 c^4\)
= (3 × 108 × 6.63 × 10-19)2 + (0.511 × 10-13 × 1.6)2 = 9 × (6.63)2 × 10-22.
As the rest mass energy is negligible ∴ Energy E = \(\sqrt{p^2 c^2}\) = pc = 6.63 × 10-19 × 3 × 108
= \(\frac{1.989 \times 10^{-10}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)eV = 1.24 × 109 eV = 1.24 BeV
Thus, to energies the electron beam, the energy should be of the order of BeV.

Question 16.
Find the typical de Brogue wavelength associated with a He atom in helium gas at room temperature (27 °C) and 1 atm pressure; and compare It with the mean separation between two atoms under these conditions.
Solution:
Given T = 27 + 273 = 300 K; K = 1.38 × 10-23 J/mol/K; p = 1 atm = 1.01 × 105 Pa
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 36
We can see that the wave length with mean separation r, it can be observed (r >> λ) that separation is larger than wave length.

Question 17.
Compute the typical de Broglie wavelength of an electron in a metal at 27 °C and compare it with the mean separation between two electrons in a metal which is given to be about 2 × 10-10 m.
[Note : Exercise 35 and 36 reveal that while the wave-packets associated with gaseous molecules under ordinary conditions are non-overlapping, the electron wave-packets in a metal strongly overlap with one another. This suggests that whereas molecules in an ordinary gas can be distinguished apart, electrons in a metal cannot be distinguished apart from one another. This indistinguishibility has many fundamental implications which you will explore in more advanced Physics courses.]
Solution:
Given, T = 27 + 273 = 300 K; r = 2 × 10-10m
Momentum, P = \(\sqrt{3 \mathrm{mKT}}\) = \(\sqrt{3 \times 9.11 \times 10^{-31} \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 300}\) = 1.06 × 10-25 kg-m/s
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{p}}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{1.06 \times 10^{-25}}\) = 62.6 × 10-10m; Mean separation, r = 2 × 10-10 m
\(\frac{\lambda}{r}\) = \(\frac{62.6 \times 10^{-10}}{2 \times 10^{-10}}\) = 31.3
We can see that de-Broglie wavelength is much greater than the electron separation.

Question 18.
Answer the following questions :
(a) Quarks inside protons and neutrons are thought to carry fractional charges [(+2/3)e; (-1/3)e]. Why do they not show up in Millikan’s oil-drop experiment ?
Solution:
The quarks have fractional charges. These quarks are bound by forces. These forces become stronger when the quarks are tried to be pulled apart. That is why, the quarks always remain’ together. It is due to this reason that tough fractional charges exists in nature but the observable charges are always integral multiple of charge of electron.

(b) What is so special about the combination e/m ? Why do we not simply talk of e and m separately ?
Solution:
The motion.of electron in electric and magnetic fields are governed by these two equations.
\(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^2\) = eV or Beυ = \(\frac{m v^2}{\mathrm{r}}\)
In these equations, e and m both are together i.e. there is no equation in which e or m are alone. So, we always take e/m.

(c) Why should gases be insulators at ordinary pressures and start conducting at very low pressures ?
Solution:
At ordinary pressure, only very few positive ions and electrons are produced by the ionisation of gas molecules. They are not able to reach the respective electrodes and becomes insulators. At low pressure, density decreases and the mean free path becomes large. So, at high voltage, they acquire sufficient amount of energy and they collide with molecules for further ionisation. Due to this, the number of ions in a gas increases and it becomes a conductor.

(d) Every metal has a definite work function. Why do all photoelectrons not come out with the same energy if incident radiation is monochromatic ? Why is there an energy distribution of photoelectrons ?
Solution:
Because all the electrons in the metal do not belong to same level but they occupy a continuous band of levels, therefore for the given incident radiation, electrons come out from different levels with different energies.

(e) The energy and momentum of an electron are related to the frequency and wavelength of the associated matter wave by the relations :
E = h v, p = \(\frac{\mathbf{h}}{\lambda}\)
But while the value of λ is physically significant, the value of v (and therefore, the value of the phase speed v λ) has no physical significance. Why ?
Solution:
As λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{p}}\) = p = \(\frac{h}{\lambda}\) ⇒ E = hv = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)
Energy of moving particle E’ = \(\frac{p^2}{2 m}\) = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{\left(\frac{h}{\lambda}\right)^2}{m}\) = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{h^2}{\lambda^2 \mathrm{~m}}\). For the relation of E and p, we note that there is a physical significance of λ but not for frequency v.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material 8th Lesson Ecology and Environment Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material 8th Lesson Ecology and Environment

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Define the term “ecology” and its branches.
Answer:
The word ‘ecology’ was derived from the Greek terms (‘Oikos house and ‘logos’ – ‘study’) and it can be defined as “the study of the relationship of organisms with their environment”.

Question 2.
What is an ecological population?
Answer:
A population is a group of organisms of the same species living in a specific area at a specific time.

Question 3.
Define a community.
Answer:
It is an association of the interacting members of populations of different autotrophic and heterotrophic species in a particular area.

Question 4.
What is an ecosystem?
Answer:
An ecosystem is a functional unit of the biosphere in which members of the community interact among themselves and with the surrounding environment.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 5.
Distinguish between ecosystem and biome.
Answer:

Ecosystem Biome
1. Level of organization above the level of the biological community landscape. 1. Level of organization above the level.
2. It can be as small as an aquarium/tiny puddle. 2. It occupies a vast region.
3. Functional unit of the biosphere. 3. Large community of plants and animals.

Question 6.
What is a biome? Name any two biomes you studied.
Answer:
A ‘biome’ is a large community of plants and animals that occupies a vast region.
Ex: Tropical rain forest, desert, tundra (terrestrial biomes) Freshwater biomes, marine biome (aquatic biomes).

Question 7.
What is meant by ecosphere?
Answer:
It is the part of the Earth that supports ‘life’. It extends several kilometers above the Earth’s surface into the atmosphere and extends several kilometers below the ocean’s surface.

Question 8.
Explain the difference between the ‘nich’ of an organism and its ‘habitat’.
Answer:

Habitat Nich
1. It is the place in which an organism lives. 1. Functional role of an organism in an ecosystem.
2. It is comparable to the address of a person. 2. It is comparable to the profession of a person.

Question 9.
A population has more genetically similar organisms than a biotic community. Justify the statement.
Answer:
A population is a group of organisms of the same species, living in a specific area at a specific time.
Ex: The fish belongs to the species Catla. catla living at a given time.

Question 10.
How do the fish living in Antarctic waters manage to keep their body fluids from freezing?
Answer:
During the course of millions of years of their existence, many species (fish) would have evolved a relatively constant internal (within body) environment so it permits all biochemical reactions and physiological reactions to proceed with maximal efficiency and thus, enhance the overall “fitness” of the species.

Question 11.
How does your body solve the problem of altitude sickness, when you ascend tall mountains?
Answer:
The body compensates for low oxygen availability by increasing red blood cell production and increasing the rate of breathing.

Question 12.
What is the effect of light on body pigmentation?
Answer:
Light influences the colour of the skin. The animals which live in the regions of low intensity of light have less pigmentation than the animals exposed to light.

Question 13.
Distinguish the terms phototaxis and photokinesis.
Answer:
Phototaxis is the oriented locomotion of an organism towards or away from the direction of light.
Ex: As seen in Euglena
Photokinesis is the influence of light on the non-directional movement of organisms.
Ex: Mussel crab

Question 14.
What are circadian rhythms?
Answer:
Biological rhythms that occur in a time period of 24 hours are called circadian rhythms.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 15.
What is photoperiodism?
Answer:
The response of organisms to the photoperiod is called photoperiodism.
Ex: Reproduction of flowers, migration of birds.

Question 16.
Distinguish between photoperiod and critical photoperiod.
Answer:
Photoperiod: The duration of light hours is known as a photoperiod.
Critical photoperiod: The specific day length which is essential for the initiation of seasonal events is called critical photoperiod.

Question 17.
Mention the advantages of some UV rays to us.
Answer:

  • UV radiation kills the microorganisms present on the body surface of animals.
  • UV radiation helps in the conversion of sterols present in the skin into vitamin D in mammals.

Question 18.
What is cyclomorphosis? Explain its importance in Daphnia.
Answer:
The cyclic seasonal morphological variations among certain organisms are called “Cyclomorphosis”. In the case of Daphnia, it is an adaptation to “stabilize the movement” in water and can “resist the water currents better” to stay in the water rich in food materials.

Question 19.
What are ‘regulators’?
Answer:
Organisms that are able to maintain homeostasis by physiological means which ensure constant body temperature, and constant osmotic concentration are called, “regulators”.
Ex: Mammals, Birds

Question 20.
What are conformers?
Answer:
Living organisms that cannot maintain 3 constant internal environments are described as “conformers”.

Question 21.
Define commensalism. Give one example.
Answer:
This is the interaction in which one species benefits and the other is neither harmed nor benefited.
Ex: Barnacles growing on the back of a whale benefit while the whale derives no noticeable benefit.

Question 22.
Define mutualism. Give one example.
Answer:
This is the interaction that benefits both the interacting species.
Ex: Lichens represent an intimate mutualistic relationship between a fungus and photosynthesizing algae.

Question 23.
Define amensalism. Give one example.
Answer:
Amensalism is an interaction in which one species is harmed whereas the other one is unaffected.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 24.
What is meant by interspecific competition? Give one example.
Answer:
A process in which the fitness of one species is significantly lower in the presence of another species is called interspecific competition.
Ex: Competition between visiting flamingos and resident fishes in shallow South American lakes.

Question 25.
What is camouflage? Give its significance.
Answer:
Some species of insects and frogs are cryptically coloured to avoid being detected easily by the predator. This phenomenon is called “Camouflage”.

Question 26.
What is Gause’s principle? When does it applicable?
Answer:
When the resources are limited, the competitively superior species will eventually eliminate the other species. It is relatively easy to demonstrate in laboratory experiments.

Question 27.
Name the association that exists in mycorrhiza.
Answer:
The association that exists in mycorrhiza is called “Mutualism”.

Question 28.
Distinguish between lotic and lentic habitats.
Answer:

Lotic habitat Lentic habitat
The still water bodies fall under the lotic community.
Ex: Lakes, ponds
Flowing water bodies are called lentic habitats.
Ex: River, canals, streams

Question 29.
What is a zone of compensation in an aquatic ecosystem?
Answer:
The imaginary line that separates the limnetic zone from the profundal zone in a lake is called the zone of compensation (or) compensation point.

Question 30.
Distinguish between phytoplankton and zooplankton.
Answer:

Phyto plankton Zooplankton
Microscopic organisms bear chlorophyll and form producers in the lakes.
Ex: Diatoms, Green algae, Euglenoids
Microscopic organisms that do not bear chlorophyll move through water currents and form primary consumer levels in the lakes.
Ex: Daphnia, rotifers and ostracods

Question 31.
Distinguish between neuston and nekton.
Answer:

Neuston Nekton
The animals living at the air-water interface constitute the “neuston”.
Ex: Water strides beetles, the larva of mosquitoes.
The animals capable of swimming constitute the “nekton”.
Ex: Water scorpion, back swimmer, diving beetles.

Question 32.
What is periphyton?
Answer:
The animals that are attached to/creeping on the aquatic plants are called “periphyton”.
Ex: Water snails, hydras, nymphs of insects, etc.

Question 33.
Write three examples of man-made ecosystems.
Answer:
Cropland ecosystems, Aquaculture ponds, Aquaria.

Question 34.
What is meant by osmotrophic nutrition?
Answer:
The state of pre-digested food material through the body surface is known as osmotrophic nutrition.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 35.
Explaining the process of “leaching”.
Answer:
When the water-soluble inorganic nutrients go down into the soil and get precipitated as unavailable salts that entire process is called “leaching”.

Question 36.
What is PAR?
Answer:
PAR means “Photosynthetically Active Radiation”.

Question 37.
What is the percentage of PAR, in the incident solar radiation?
Answer:
Of the incident solar radiation, less than 50% of it is PAR.

Question 38.
Define entropy.
Answer:
As per the second law of thermodynamics, the energy dispersed is in the form of unavailable heat energy and constitutes entropy.

Question 39.
What is a standing crop?
Answer:
Each trophic level has a certain mass of living material at a particular time and it is called the “Standing crop”.

Question 40.
Explain the terms GPP and NPP.
Answer:
GPP means Gross primary productivity.
NPP means Net primary productivity.

Question 41.
Distinguish between upright and inverted ecological pyramids.
Answer:

Upright Pyramid Inverted Pyramid
Producers (I – trophic level Biomass) are more in number than other trophic levels.
Ex: Grazing food chain
Producers are less in number biomass than other trophic levels.
Ex: Parasitic food chain

Question 42.
Distinguish between litter and detritus.
Answer:
Litter: Litter is just like manure that is formed by dead (Either plant (or) Animal clusters) organic matter. It is the primary food source in the detritus food chain.
Detritus: It is a decaying organic matter being decomposed into detritivores organisms.

Question 43.
Distinguish between primary and secondary productivity.
Answer:

Primary Productivity Secondary Productivity
1. The amount of biomass produced per unit area over a period of time by plants. 1. The rate formation of new organic matter by consumers.
2. It can be divided into gross primary productivity (GPP), net primary productivity (NPP) 2. It also can be divided into two types cross secondary productivity, and net secondary productivity.

Question 44.
Which air pollutants are chiefly responsible for acid rains?
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide (SO2) and nitrogen oxides are the major causes of acid rain.

Question 45.
What is BOD?
Answer:
BOD means Biological Oxygen Demand. It is a measure of the content of biologically degradable substances in sewage.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 46.
What is biological magnification?
Answer:
An increase in the concentration of the pollutant (or) toxicant at successive trophic levels in an aquatic food chain is called ‘Bio-magnification’.

Question 47.
Why are incinerators used in hospitals?
Answer:
Disposal of hospital wastes that contain disinfectants, harmful chemicals, and also pathogenic micro-organisms incinerators are used in hospitals.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Considering the benefits of a constant internal environment to the organism we tend to ask ourselves why the conformers had not evolved to become regulators.
Answer:
Thermoregulation is energetically expensive for many organisms. This is particularly true in small animals like shrews and hummingbirds. Heat loss or heat gain is a function of the surface area. Since small animals have a larger surface area relative to their volume, they tend to lose body heat very fast when it is cold outside. Then they have to spend much energy to generate body heat through metabolism. This is the main reason why very small animals are rarely found in polar regions. During the course of evolution, the costs and benefits of maintaining a constant internal environment are taken into consideration. Some species have evolved the ability to regulate, but only over a limited range of environmental conditions, beyond which they simply conform.

Question 2.
The individuals who have fallen through the ice and been submerged under cold water for long periods can sometimes be revived – explain.
Answer:
Temperature variations occur with seasonal changes. These differences in the temperature form thermal layers in water. Water shows maximum density at 4°C decrease its density. Generally, during the winter season the surface water cools down in the upper water phases in the temperature reaches 0°C. below the upper icy layer, the cool water occupies the lake. The aquatic animals continue their life below the icy layer at lower temperatures the activity of bacteria and the rate of oxygen consumption by aquatic animals decrease. Hence organisms can survive below the frozen (icy) upper water without being subject to hypoxia.

Question 3.
What is summer stratification? Explain.
Answer:
During summer in temperate lakes, the density of the surface water decreases because of an increase in its temperature (21-25°C). This ‘uppermost warm layer’ of a lake is called the epilimnion. Below the epilimnion, there is a zone in which the temperature decreases at the rate of 1°C per meter in-depth, and it is called thermocline or metalimnion. The bottom layer is the hypolimnion, where water is relatively cool, stagnant, and with low oxygen content (due to the absence of photosynthetic activity).
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment SAQ Q3
During autumn (also called fall). The epilimnion cools down, and the surface water becomes heavy when the temperature is 4°C and sinks to the bottom of the lake overturns bringing about a ‘uniform temperature’ in lakes during that period, this circulation during the autumn is known as fall. The upper oxygen-rich water reaches the hypolimnion and the nutrient-rich bottom water comes to the Surface. Thus there is a uniform distribution of nutrients and oxygen in the lake.

Question 4.
What is the significance of stratification in lakes?
Answer:
Temperature variations occur with seasonal changes in temperature regions. These differences in the temperature form thermal layers in water. These phenomena are called thermal stratification.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment SAQ Q4
During autumn (also called fall), the epilimnion cools down and the surface water becomes heavy when the temperature is 4°C and sinks to the bottom of the lake. Overturns bring about uniform temperatures in lakes during that period. This circulation during autumn is known as the fall or autumn overturn. The upper oxygen-rich water reaches the hypolimnion and the nutrient-rich bottom water comes to the surface. Thus there is a uniform distribution of nutrients and oxygen in the lake. In the spring season the temperatures start rising when it reaches 4°C, the water becomes more dense and heavy and sinks to the bottom, taking oxygen-rich sinks down and bottom nutrient-rich water reaches the surface.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 5.
Explain Vant’ Hoff’s rule.
Answer:
Van’t Hoff, a Nobel Laureate in thermo chemistry proposed that, with the increase of every 10°C, the rate of metabolic activities doubles. This rule is referred to as Van’t Hoff’s rule. Van’t Hoffs rule can also be stated in reverse saying that the reaction rate is halved with the decrease of every 10°C. The effect of temperature on the rate of a reaction is expressed in terms of the temperature coefficient of the Q10 value. Q10 values are estimated by taking the ratio between the rate of a reaction at X°C and the rate of reaction at (X – 10°C). In the living systems, the Q10 value is about 2.0. If the Q10 value is 2.0, it means, for every 10°C increase, the rate of metabolism doubles.

Question 6.
Unlike mammals, reptiles cannot tolerate environmental fluctuations in temperature. How do they adapt to survive in desert conditions?
Answer:
Some organisms show behavioural responses to cope with variations in their environment. Desert lizards manage to keep their body temperature fairly constant by behavioural means. They ‘bask’ (staying in the warmth of sunlight) in the sun and absorb heat when their body temperature drops below the comfort zone, but move into the shade when the temperature starts increasing. Some species are capable of burrowing into the soil to escape from the excessive heat above the ground level.

Question 7.
How do terrestrial animals protect themselves from the danger of being dehydration of bodies?
Answer:
In the absence of an external source of water, the kangaroo rat of the North American deserts is capable of meeting all its water requirements through oxidation of its internal fat (in which water is a by-product – of metabolic water). It also has the ability to concentrate its urine, so that minimal volume of water is lost in the process of removal of its excretory products.

Question 8.
How do marine animals adapt to hypertonic seawater?
Answer:
To overcome the problem of water loss, marine fishes have glomerular kidneys with less number of nephrons. Such kidneys minimize the loss of water through urine. To compensate for water loss marine fish drink more water and along with this water, salts are added to the body fluids and disturb the internal equilibrium. To maintain salt balance (salt homeostasis) in the body they have salt-secreting chloride cells in their gills. Marine birds like seagulls and penguins eliminate salts in the form of salty fluid that drips through their nostrils. In turtles, the ducts of chloride-secreting glands open near the eyes. Some cartilaginous fishes retain urea and trimethylamine oxide (TMO) in their blood to keep the body fluids isotonic to the seawater and avoid dehydration of the body due to exosmosis.

Question 9.
Discuss the various type of adaptations in freshwater animals.
Answer:
Animals living in fresh waters have to tackle the problem of endosmosis. The osmotic pressure of freshwater is very low and that of the body fluids of freshwater organisms is much higher. So water tends to enter into bodies by endosmosis. To maintain the balance of water in the bodies, the freshwater organisms acquired several adaptations such as contractile vacuoles in the freshwater protozoans, and large glomerular kidneys in fishes, etc., They send out large quantities of urine along which some salts are also lost. To compensate for the ‘salt loss’ through urine freshwater fishes have ‘salt absorbing chloride cells’ in their gills.

The major problem in freshwater ponds is in summer most of the ponds dry up. To overcome this problem most of the freshwater protists undergo encystment. The freshwater sponges produce asexual reproductive bodies, called gemmules, to tide over the unfavourable conditions of the summer. The African lungfish Protopterus burrows into the mud and forms a gelatinous cocoon around it, to survive, in summer.

Question 10.
Compare the adaptations of animals with fresh water and seawater mode of life.
Answer:

Adaptations in freshwater Adaptations in seawater
1. Freshwater fishes have glomerular kidneys with more nephrons. 1. Marine water fishes have glomerular kidneys with a number of nephrons.
2. They send out large quantities of urine. 2. They minimize the loss of water through urine.
3. To compensate for the salt loss through urine freshwater fishes have salt-absorbing chloride cells in their gills. 3. To maintain salt balance in the body they have salt-secreting chloride cells.
4. They undergo encystment to overcome the problems. 4. Some fishes retain urea in their blood to keep the body fluid isotonic to the seawater.

Question 11.
Distinguish between euryhaline and stenohaline animals.
Answer:

Euryhaline Stenohaline
Organisms that are adapted to stand wide fluctuations in salinity are called Euryhaline animals.
Ex: Salmon fish, eel fish, etc.
Those that cannot stand wild fluctuations in salinity are known as steno haline animals.
Ex: Aromatic insects, Aromatic insects

Question 12.
Many tribes living at high altitudes in the Himalayas normally have higher red blood cell count (or) total haemoglobin than the people living in the plains. Explain?
Answer:
Some organisms possess adaptations that are physiological and allow them to respond quickly to a stressful situation. If you had ever been to any high-altitude place (e.g. > 3,500 M Rohtang pass near Manali and Manasarovar, in Tibet) you must have experienced what is called altitude sickness. Its symptoms include nausea (vomiting sense), fatigue (tiredness), and heart palpitations (abnormality in heartbeat). This is because, in the low atmospheric pressure of high altitudes, the body does not get enough oxygen. But, you gradually get acclimatized and overcome the altitude sickness. How did your body solve this problem? The body compensates for low oxygen availability by increasing red blood cell production and increasing the rate of breathing.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 13.
An orchid plant is growing on the branch of the mango tree. How do you describe this interaction between the orchid and mango tree?
Answer:
An orchid growing as an epiphyte on a mango branch gets the benefit of exposure to light, while the mango tree does not drive any noticeable benefit. So in this interaction, one species (arched) get benefitted the other (Mango) is neither armed nor benefitted. So the interactions between orchids and mango trees are commensalism.

Question 14.
Predation is not an association. Support the statement.
Answer:
Predation is not an association (it is a feeding strategy), it is an interaction between two different species. The predator gets benefits at the cost of the prey. Besides acting as) pipelines for energy transfer across trophic levels predators play other important roles. They keep the prey populations under control. In the absence of predators, the prey species could achieve very high population densities and cause instability in the ecosystem.

Question 15.
What is the biological principle behind the biological control method of managing pest insects?
Answer:
The prickly pear cactus introduced in Australia in the early 1920s caused havoc by spreading rapidly into millions of hectares of Rangel and (vast natural grasslands). Finally, the invasive cactus was brought under control only after a cactus-feeding predator (a moth) was introduced into the country. Biological control methods adopted in agricultural pest control are based on the ability of the predators to regulate prey populations.

Question 16.
Discuss competitive release.
Answer:
Another evidence for the occurrence of competition in nature comes from what is called competitive releases. Competitive release occurs when one of the two competing species is removed from an area, thereby releasing the remaining species from one of the factors that limited its distributional range dramatically when the competing species is experimentally removed. This is due to the phenomenon called competitive release, Connells field experiments showed that on the rocky sea coasts of Scotland the larger and competitively superior barnacle Balanus dominates the intertidal area, and excludes the smaller barnacle chathamalus from that zone. When the dominant one is experimentally removed, the population of the smaller one’s increases. In general, herbivores and plants appear to be more adversely affected by competition than carnivores.

Question 17.
Write a short note on the parasitic adaptations.
Answer:
In order to lead successful parasitic life, parasites evolved special adaptations such as:

  • Loss of sense organs (which are not necessary for most parasites).
  • Presence of adhesive organs such as suckers, and hooks to cling to the host’s body parts.
  • Loss of digestive system and presence of high reproductive capacity.
  • The life cycles of parasites are often complex, involving one or two intermediate hosts or vectors to facilitate the parasitization of their primary hosts.

Examples:

  • The human liver fluke depends on two intermediates (secondary) hosts (a snail and a fish) to complete its life cycle.
  • The malaria parasite needs a vector (mosquito) to spread to other hosts. The majority of the parasites harm the host: they may reduce the survival, growth, and reproduction of the host and reduce its population density. They might render the host more vulnerable to predation by making it physically weak.

Question 18.
Explain brood parasitism with a suitable example.
Answer:
Certain birds are fascinating examples of a special type of parasitism, in which the parasitic bird lays its eggs in the nest of its host and lets/allows the host incubates them. During the course of evolution, the eggs of the parasitic bird have evolved to resemble the host’s egg in size and colour to reduce the chances of the host bird detecting the foreign eggs and ejecting them from the nest.

Question 19.
How do predators act as biological control?
Answer:
The prickly pears cactus introduced in Australia in the early 1920s caused havoc by spreading rapidly into millions of hectares of Rangel and (vast natural grasslands) Finally, the invasive cactus was brought under control only after a cactus-feeding predator (a moth) was introduced into the country. Biological control methods adopted in agricultural pest control are based on the ability of the predators to regulate prey populations.

Question 20.
Write notes on the structure and functioning of an ecosystem.
Answer:
‘An ecosystem’ is a functional unit of nature, where living organisms interact among themselves and also with the surrounding physical environment.

Ecosystem varies greatly in size from a small pond to a large forest or a sea. Many ecologists regard the entire biosphere as a global ecosystem as a composite of all local ecosystems on Earth. Since this system is too big and complex to be studied at one time it is convenient to divide it into two basic categories, namely natural and artificial. The natural ecosystems include aquatic ecosystems of water and terrestrial ecosystems of the land. Both types of natural and artificial ecosystems have several subdivisions.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment SAQ Q20
The Natural Ecosystem: These are naturally occurring ecosystems and there is no role of humans in the formation of such types of ecosystems. These are categorized mainly into two types – aquatic and terrestrial ecosystems. These are man-made ecosystems such as agricultural or agroecosystems. They include cropland ecosystems, aquaculture ponds, and aquaria.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 21.
Explain the different types of aquatic ecosystems.
Answer:
Based on the salinity of water, three types of aquatic ecosystems are identified marine, fresh water, and estuarine.

  • The marine ecosystem: It is the largest of all the aquatic ecosystems. It is the most stable ecosystem.
  • Estuarine ecosystem: Estuary is the zone where the river joins the sea, and seawater ascends up into the river twice a day (effect of high tides and low tides). The salinity of water in an estuary also depends on the seasons. During the rainy season outflow of river water makes the estuary saline and the opposite occurs during the summer. Estuarine organisms are capable of withstanding the fluctuations in salinity.
  • The freshwater ecosystem: The freshwater ecosystem is the smallest aquatic ecosystem. It includes rivers, lakes, ponds, etc., It is divided into two groups the lentic and lotic. The still water bodies like ponds, lakes reservoirs, etc., fall under the category of lentic ecosystems, whereas streams, rivers, and flowing water bodies are called lotic ecosystems. The communities of the above two types are called lentic and lotic communities respectively. The study of freshwater ecosystems is called limnology.

Question 22.
Explain the different types of terrestrial ecosystems.
Answer:
The ecosystems of land are known as terrestrial ecosystems. Some examples of terrestrial ecosystems are the forest, grass, and desert.

  • The forest ecosystem: The two important types of forests seen in India are tropical rain forests and tropical deciduous forests.
  • The grassland ecosystems: These are present in the Himalayan region of India. They occupy large areas of sandy and saline soils in western Rajasthan.
  • Desert ecosystem: The areas having less than 25 cm of rainfall per year are called deserts. They have characteristic flora and fauna. The deserts can be divided into two types – hot type and cold type deserts, the desert in Rajasthan is an example of the hot type of desert. Cold-type desert is seen in Ladakh.

Question 23.
Discuss the main reason for the low productivity of the ocean.
Answer:
The Primary productivity is very low in the ocean ecosystem compared with the terrestrial ecosystem.

Unlike terrestrial ecosystems, the majority of primary production in the ocean is performed by feel living microscopic organisms called Phytoplankton, large autotrophs such as the seagrasses and macroalgae or seaweeds are generally confined to the littoral zone.

The sunlight zone of the ocean is called the photic zone or euphotic zone, it is a thin layer upto 10 to 100 m near the Ocean’s surface where there is sufficient light for photosynthesis to occur. Light is attenuated down the water column by its absorption or scattering by the water itself. Net photosynthesis in the water column is determined by the interaction between the photic zone and the mixed layer. In the deep water of the ocean (Demersal) there is no light penetration for photosynthesis.

Another factor relatively recently discovered to play a significant role in oceanic primary production is the micronutrient iron. The factors limiting primary production in the ocean are also very different from those on land. However, the availability of light, the source of energy for photosynthesis, and mineral nutrients, building the blocks for new growth, play a crucial role in regulating primary production in the ocean.

Question 24.
Explain the terms saprotrophs detritivores and mineralizers.
Answer:
Saprotrophs are microorganisms such as fungi and bacteria which live on dead organic matter. Detritivores ingest small fragments of decomposing organic materials, termed detritus mineralizers affect the mineralization of humans.

Question 25.
Define decomposition and describe the process and products of decomposition.
Answer:
When organisms die, their bodies and the waste materials passed from the bodies of living organisms form a source of energy and nutrient for the decomposer organisms like saprotrophs detritivores, and mineralizers. Saprotrophs absorb substances through the general body surface of the dead bodies. Detritivores ingest detritus as food. Mineralized mineralize humus these decomposers are referred to as micro consumers of the ecosystem. The decomposition of organic matter includes three phases. In the first phase, particulate detritus is formed by the action of saprotrophs. The second stage is the rapid action of saprotrophs and detritivores to convert detritus into humic substances. The third process is the slower mineralization of the hummus.

Decomposers also play an important role in an ecosystem by converting complex molecules of dead organisms into simpler and reusable molecules. The breakdown products of the dead organisms and waste materials are recycled in the ecosystem and are made available to the producers. The producers cannot continue to exist forever in the absence of the decomposers (as minerals are not returned to the environment).

Question 26.
Write a note on DFC. Give its significance in a terrestrial ecosystem.
Answer:
The detritus food chain (DFC) begins with dead organic matter (such as leaf litter, and bodies of dead organisms). It is made up of decomposers which are heterotrophic organisms ‘mainly’ the fungi’ and ‘bacteria’. They meet their energy and nutrient requirements by degrading dead organic matter to detritus. These are also known as saprotrophs.

Decomposers secrete digestive enzymes that break down dead and waste materials (such as feces i) into simple absorbable substances. Some examples of detritus food chains are:

  • Detritus – Earthworm – Frogs – Snakes
  • Dead animals – Flies and maggots – Frogs – Snakes

In an aquatic ecosystem. GFC is the major conduit for the energy flow. As against this, in a terrestrial ecosystem, a much larger fraction of energy flows through the detritus food chain than through the GFC. The Detritus food chain may be connected with the grazing food chain at some levels. Some of the organisms of DFC may form the prey of the GFC animals. For example, in the detritus food chain given above, the earthworms of the DFC may become the food of the birds of the GFC. It is to be understood that food chains are not ‘isolated1 always.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 27.
What is primary productivity? Give a brief description of the factors that affect primary productivity.
Answer:
Primary productivity is defined as the amount of biomass or organic matter produced per unit area over a period of time by plants, during photosynthesis. It can be divided into Gross Primary Productivity (GPP) and Net Primary Productivity (NPP).
(a) Gross Primary Productivity: Of an ecosystem is the rate of production of organic matter
during photosynthesis. A considerable amount of GPP is utilized by plants for their catabolic process (respiration).
(b) Net Primary Productivity: Gross Primary Productivity minus respiratory loss (R), is the Net Primary Productivity (NPP). On average about 20-25 percent of GPP is used for catabolic (respiratory) activity.
GPP – R = NPP
The Net Primary productivity is the biomass available for the consumption of the heterotrophs (herbivores and decomposers).

Question 28.
Define ecological pyramids and describe with examples, pyramids of numbers and biomass.
Answer:
It is a graphical representation of the trophic structure and function of an ecosystem. The base of each pyramid represents the producers of the first trophic level, while the apex represents the tertiary or top-level/top-order consumers. The three types of ecological pyramids that are usually studied are (a) pyramid of numbers (b) pyramid of biomass and (c) pyramid of energy. These pyramids were first represented by Elton, hence the name ELTONIANpyramids/Ecological pyramids.

Any calculations of energy content, biomass, or numbers have to include all organisms at that trophic level. No generalizations we make will be true if we take only a few individuals of any trophic level into account. In most ecosystems, all the pyramids – of numbers, energy, and biomass are uprights. i.e., producers are more in number and biomass than the herbivores, and herbivores are more in number and biomass than the carnivores. Also, energy (available) at a lower trophic level is always more than that at a higher level.

There are exceptions to this generalization. In the case of a parasitic food chain, the pyramid of numbers is inverted. A large tree (single producer) may support many herbivores like squirrels and fruit-eating birds. On these herbivores, many ectoparasites such as ticks, mites, and lice (secondary consumers) may live. These secondary consumers may support many more top-level consumers and also the hyper-parasites. Thus in each trophic level from the bottom to the top, the numbers of organisms increase and form an ‘inverted pyramid’ of numbers.

The pyramid of biomass in the sea is also generally inverted because the biomass of fishes far exceeds that of phytoplankton.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment SAQ Q28

Question 29.
What are the deleterious effects of depletion of ozone in the stratosphere?
Answer:
The depletion of ozone is particularly marked over the Antarctic region. This has resulted in the formation of a large area of thinned ozone layer commonly called the ‘ozone hole.

UV radiation with wavelengths shorter than that of UV-B is almost completely absorbed by Earth’s atmosphere, provided that the ozone layer is intact. But IJV-B damages DNA and may induce mutations. It causes aging of the skin, damage to skin cells, and various types of skin cancers. In the human eye, the cornea absorbs UV-B radiation, and a high dose of UV-B causes inflammation of the cornea called snow-blindness, cataract, etc., such exposure may permanently damage the cornea.

Question 30.
Describe the ‘Green House’ Effect.
Answer:
The term Green House effect’ has been derived from a phenomenon that occurs in a greenhouse. The greenhouse is a small glasshouse and is used for growing plants, especially during winter. In a greenhouse, the glass panel allows the passage of light into it but does not allow heat to escape (as it is reflected back). Therefore, the greenhouse warms up, very much like inside a car that has been parked in the sun for a few hours.

The greenhouse effect is a naturally occurring phenomenon that is responsible for heating the Earth’s surface and atmosphere. It would be surprising to know that without the greenhouse effect the average temperature of the Earth’s surface would have been chilly – 18°C rather than the present average of 15°C.

When sunlight reaches the outermost layer of the atmosphere, clouds and gases reflect about one-fourth of the incoming solar radiation and absorb some of it. Almost half of the incoming solar radiation falls on the Earth’s surface and heats it up. While a small proportion is reflected back.

Question 31.
Discuss briefly the following:
(a) Greenhouse gases
(b) Noise pollution
(c) Organic farming
(d) Municipal solid wastes
Answer:
(a) Greenhouse gases: The Earth’s surface re-emits heat in the form of infrared radiation but part of this does not escape into space as atmospheric gases (e.g. carbon dioxide, methane, etc.) absorb a major fraction of it. The molecules of these gases radiate heat energy, a major part of which again comes back to the Earth’s surface, thus heating it up once again. The above-mentioned gases- Carbon dioxide and methane are commonly known as greenhouse gases.

(b) Noise pollution: Undesirably high sounds constitute noise pollution. Sound is measured in units called decibels. The human ear is sensitive to sounds ranging from 0 to 180 dB. 0 dB is the threshold limit of hearing and 120 dB is the threshold limit for the sensation of pain in the ear. Any noise above 120 dB is considered to be noise pollution. Brief exposure to the extremely high sound level. 150 dB or more generated by jet planes while taking off may damage eardrums causing permanent hearing impairment. Even long-term exposure to a relatively higher level of noise in cities may also cause hearing impairment. Noise also causes auditory fatigue, anxiety, sleeplessness/msommaj, increased heartbeat, and altered breathing pattern thus causing considerable stress to humans.

(c) Organic farming: Integrated organic farming is a zero waste procedure, where the recycling of waste products is efficiently carried out. This allows the maximum utilization of resources and increases the efficiency of production. A method practiced by Ramesh Chandra Dagar, all these processes support one another and allow an extremely economical and sustainable venture. Natural – biogas generated in the process can be used for meeting the energy needs of the farm. Enthusiastic about spreading information and helping in the practice of integrated organic farming, Dagar has created the Haryana Kisan welfare club.

(d) Municipal Solid waste: Anything (substance/material/articles/goods) that is thrown out as waste in solid form is referred to as solid waste. The municipal solid wastes generally consist of paper, food wastes, plastics, glass, metals, rubber, leather, textile, etc., The wastes are burnt to reduce the volume of the waste. As a substitute for open-burning dumps, sanitary landfills are adopted. There is a danger of seepage of chemicals and pollutants from these landfills, which may contaminate the underground water resources.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 32.
Discuss the causes and effects of global warming. What measures need to be taken to control ‘Global warming’?
Answer:
An increase in the level of greenhouse gases has led to considerable heating of the “Earth leading to global warming. During the past century, the temperature of the earth has increased by 0.6°C most of it during the last three decades. Scientists believe that this rise in temperature is leading to severe changes in the environment. Global warming is causing climatic changes (e.g. as El Nino effect) and is also responsible for the melting of polar ice caps and other snow caps of mountains such as the Himalayas. Over many years, this will result in a rise in sea levels, all over the world, that can submerge many coastal areas. The total spectrum of changes that global warming can bring about is a subject that is still under active research.

Global warming: Control measures

  • The measures include cutting down the use of fossil fuels.
  • Improving the efficiency of energy usage.
  • Planting trees and avoiding deforestation.

Question 33.
Write critical notes on the following:
(a) Eutrophication
(b) Biological magnification
Answer:
(a) Eutrophication: Natural ageing of a lake by nutrient enrichment of its water is known as eutrophication. In a young lake, the water is cold and clear supporting little life. Gradually nutrients such as nitrates and phosphates are carried into the lake via streams, in course of time. This encourages the growth of aquatic algae and other plants. Consequently, animal life proliferates and organic matter gets deposited on the bottom of the lake. Over centuries, as silt and organic debris pile up the lake grows shallower and warmer. As a result, the aquatic organisms thriving in the cold environment are gradually replaced by warm-water organisms. Marsh plants appear by taking root in the shallow regions of the lake. Eventually, the lake gives way to large masses of floating plants (bog) and is finally converted into land.

(b) Biological magnification: Increase in the concentration of the pollutant or toxicant at successive trophic levels in an aquatic food chain is called biological magnification or Bio-magnification. This happens in the instance where a toxic substance accumulated by an organism is not metabolized or excreted and thus passes on to the next higher trophic level. This phenomenon is well known regarding DDT and mercury pollution.

As shown in the above example, the concentration of DDT is increased at successive trophic levels. Starting at a very low concentration of 0.003 PPb (PPb part per billion) in water, which ultimately reached an alarmingly high concentration of 25 ppm (ppm = parts per million) in fish-eating birds through biomagnification. High concentrations of DDT disturb calcium metabolism in birds, which causes thinning of eggshells and their premature breaking, eventually causing a decline in bird populations.

(c) Groundwater depletion and ways for its replenishment: Sewage arising from homes and hospitals may contain undesirable pathogenic microorganisms. If it is released untreated into water courses, there is a likelihood of an outbreak of serious diseases, such as dysentery, typhoid, jaundice, cholera, etc.

Untreated industrial effluents released into water bodies pollute most of the rivers, freshwater streams, etc. Effluents contain a wide variety of both inorganic and organic pollutants such as oils, greases, plastics, metallic wastes, suspended solids, and tonics. Most of them are non-degradable. Arsenic, Cadmium, Copper, Chromium, Mercury, Zinc, and Nickel are the common heavy metals discharged from industries.

Effects: Organic substances present in the water deplete the dissolved oxygen content in water by increasing the BOD (Biological Oxygen Demand) and COD (Chemical Oxygen Demand). Most of the inorganic substances render the water unit for drinking.

Removal of dissolved salts such as nitrates, phosphates, and other nutrients and toxic metal ions and organic compounds is much more difficult. Domestic sewage primarily contains biodegradable organic matter, which will be readily decomposed by the action of bacteria and other microorganisms.

Water-logging and soil salinity: Irrigation without proper drainage of water leads to water logging in the soil. Besides affecting the crops, water logging draws salt to the surface of the soil (salinization of the topsoil). The salt then is deposited as a thin crust on the land surface or starts collecting at the roots of the plants. This increased salt content is inimical (unfavourable) to the growth of crops and is extremely damaging to agriculture. Water logging and soil salinity are some of the problems that have come in the wake of the Green Revolution.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write an essay on temperature as an ecological factor.
Answer:
Temperature is a measure of the intensity of heat. The temperature on land or in water is not uniform. On land, the temperature variations are more pronounced when compared to the aquatic medium because land absorbs or loses heat much more quickly than water. The temperature on land depends on seasons and the geographical area on this planet. Temperature decreases progressively when we move from the equator to the poles. Altitude also causes variations in temperature. For instance, the temperature decreases gradually as we move to the top of the mountains.

Biological effects of Temperature:
Temperature Tolerance: A few organisms can tolerate and thrive in a wide range of temperatures they are called eurythermal, but, a vast majority of organisms are restricted to a narrow range of temperatures such organisms are called stenothermal. The levels of thermal tolerance of different species determine their geographical distribution.

Temperature and Metabolism: Temperature affects the working of enzymes and through it, the basal metabolism, and other physiological functions of the organism. The temperature at which the metabolic activities occur at the climax level is called the optimum temperature. The lowest temperature at which an organism can live indefinitely is called minimum effective temperature. It an animal or plant is subjected to a temperature below the minimum effective limit, enters into a condition of inactivity called a chill coma. The metabolic rate increases with the rise of temperature from the minimum effective temperature to the optimum temperature.

The maximum temperature at which a species can live indefinitely in an active state is called maximum effective temperature, the animals enter into a ‘heat coma’. The maximum temperature varies much in different animals.

Vant Hoffs’s rule: Vant Hoff, a Nobel Laureate the thermochemistry proposed that, with the increase of every 10°C, the rate of metabolic activities doubles. This rule is referred to as the Vant Hoffs rule. Vant Hoffs’s rule can also be stated in reverse saying that the reaction rate is halved with the decrease of every 10°C. The effect of temperature on the rate of a reaction is expressed in terms of temperature coefficient or Q10 value. Q10 values are estimated by taking the ratio between the rate of a reaction at X°C and the rate of reaction at (X-10°C). In the ‘living systems’ the Q10 value is about 2.0. If the Q10 value is about 20, it means, for every 10°C increase, the rate of metabolism doubles.

Cyclomorphosis: The cyclic seasonal morphological variations among certain organisms are called cyclomorphosis. This phenomenon has been demonstrated in the Cladoceran (a subgroup of Crustacea) and Daphnia (water flea). In the winter season, the head of Daphnia is ’round’ in shape (typical or non helmet morph). With the onset of the spring season, a small ‘helmet’/’hood’ starts developing on it. The helmet attains the maximum size in summer. In ‘autumn’ the helmet starts receding. By the winter season, the head becomes round. Some scientists are of the opinion that Cyclomorphosis is a seasonal adaptation to changing densities of the water in lakes. In summer as the water is less dense Daphnia requires a larger body surface to keep floating easily. During winter the water is denser, so it does not require a larger surface area of the body to keep floating.

Temperature adaptations: Temperature adaptations in animals can be dealt with under three heads:
(a) Behavioural adaptations
(b) Morphological and Anatomical adaptations and
(c) Physiological adaptations.

(a) Behavioural adaptations: Some organisms show behavioural responses to cope with variations in their environment. Desert lizards manage to keep their body temperature fairly constant by behavioural means. They bask (staying in the warmth of sunlight) in the sun and absorb heat when their body temperature drops below the comfort zone, but move into the shade when the temperature starts increasing. Some species are capable of burrowing into the soil to escape from the excessive heat above the ground level.

(b) Morphological and anatomical adaptations: In the polar seas, aquatic mammals such as the seals have a thick layer of fat (blubber) that acts as an insulator and reduces the loss of body heat, underneath their skin. The animals which inhabit the colder regions have larger body sizes with greater mass. The body mass is useful to generate more heat. As per Bergmann’s rule mammals and other warm-blooded living in colder regions have less surface area to body volume ratio. Then their counterparts live in the tropical regions. The small surface area helps to conserve heat. For instance, the body size of American moose/Eurasian elk (Alces alces), increases with the latitudes in which they live. Moose in the northern part of Sweden show 15-20% more body moss than the same species (counterparts) living in southern Sweden.

Mammals from colder climates generally have shorter earlobes and limbs (extremities of the body) to minimize heat loss. Large earlobes and long limbs increase the surface area without changing the body volume. This is known as Allen’s rule. For instance, the polar fox, Vulpes lagopus (formerly called Alopex lagopus) has short extremities to minimize the heat loss from the body. In contrast, the desert fox has short extremities to minimize heat loss from the body. In contrast, the desert fox, Vulpes zerda, has large ear lobes and limbs to facilitate better heat loss from the body.

(c) Physiological adaptations: In most animals, all the physiological functions proceed ‘optimally’ in a narrow temperature range (in humans, it is 37°C). But there are microbes (archaebacteria) that flourish in hot springs and in some parts of deep seas, where temperatures far exceed 100°C. Many fish thrive in Antarctic waters where the temperature is always below zero. Having realized that the abiotic conditions of many habitats may vary over a time period, we now ask. How do the organisms living in such habitats manage stressful conditions?

One would expect that during the course of millions of years of their existence, many species would have evolved a relatively constant internal (within the body) environment. It permits all biochemical reactions and physiological functions to proceed with maximal efficiency and thus, enhance the overall fitness of the species. This constancy could be chiefly in terms of optimal temperature and osmotic concentration of body fluids. So the organism should try to maintain the constancy of its internal environment (homeostasis) despite varying external environmental conditions that tend to upset its homeostasis. This is achieved by the processes described below.

Thermal migration: The organism can move away temporarily from the stressful habitat to a more hospitable (comfortable) area and return when the stressful period is over. In human analogy comparison, this strategy is comparable to a person moving from Delhi to Shimla for the duration of summer. Many animals, particularly birds, during winter undertake long-distance migrations to more hospitable areas. Every winter, many places in India including the famous Keoladeo Ghana National Park (Formerly – Bharatpur bird sanctuary) in Rajastan and Pulicat Lake in Andhra Pradesh host thousands of migratory birds coming from Siberia and other extremely cold northern regions.

Diapause: Certain organisms show a delay in development, during periods of unfavourable environmental conditions and spend periods in a state of inactiveness called diapause. This dormant period in animals is a mechanism to survive extremes of temperature drought, etc. It is seen mostly in insects and embryos of some fish. Under unfavourable conditions, many zooplankton species in Lakes and ponds are known to enter diapause.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 2.
Write an essay on water as an ecological factor.
Answer:
Water is another important factor influencing the life of organisms. Life is unsustainable without water. Its availability is so limited in deserts that only certain special adaptations make it possible for them to live there. You might think that organisms living in oceans, lakes, and rivers should not face any water-related problems, but It is not true. For aquatic organisms the quality (chemical composition, pH, etc.) of water becomes important. The salt concentration is less than 5 percent in inland waters and 30-35 percent in seawater. Some organisms are tolerant to a wide range of salinities (euryhaline) but others are restricted to a narrow range (stenohaline) Many freshwater animals cannot live for long in seawater and vice versa because of the osmotic problems, they would face.

Adaptations in freshwater habitat: Animals living in freshwater have to tackle the problem of endosmosis. The osmotic pressure of freshwater is very low and that of the body fluids of freshwater organisms is much higher. So water tends to enter into bodies by endosmosis. To maintain the balance of water in the bodies, the freshwater organisms acquired several adaptations such as contractile vacuoles in the freshwater protozoans, large glomerular kidneys in fishes, etc… They send out large quantities of urine freshwater fishes have salt-absorbing ‘chloride cells’ in their gills. The major problem in freshwater ponds is – in summer most of the ponds dry up. To overcome this problem, most of the freshwater protists undergo encystment. The freshwater sponges produce asexual reproductive bodies, called gemmules to tide over the unfavorable conditions of the summer. The African lungfish, Protopterus, burrows into the mud and forms a gelatinous cocoon around it, to survive, in summer.

Adaptations in marine habitat: Seawater is high in salt content compared to that body fluids. So, marine animals continuously tend to lose water from their bodies by exosmosis and face the problem of dehydration. To overcome the problem of water loss marine fishes have glomerular kidneys with less number of nephrons. Such Kidneys minimize the loss of water through urine. To compensate for water loss marine fish drink more water, and along with this water, salts are added to the body fluids and disturb the internal equilibrium.

To maintain salt balance (salt homeostasis) in the body they have salt-secreting chloride cells in their gills. Marine birds like seagulls and penguins eliminate salts in the form of salty fluid that drips through their nostrils. In turtles, the ducts of chloride-secreting glands open near the eyes. Some cartilaginous fishes retain urea and trimethylamine oxide (TMO) in their blood to keep the body fluid isotonic to the seawater and avoid dehydration of the body due to exosmosis.

Water-related adaptations in brackish water animals: The animals of brackish water are adapted to withstand wide fluctuations in salinity. Such organisms are called euryhaline animals and those that cant with stand is known as stenohaline. The migratory fishes such as salmon and Hilsa are anadromous fishes i.e. they ‘migrate from the sea to freshwater, for breeding; Anguilla bengalensis is a catadromous fish i.e. it migrates from the river to sea, for breeding. In these fishes, their glomerular kidneys are adjusted to changing salinities. The chloride cells are adapted to excrete or absorb salts depending on the situation. On entering the river they drink more freshwater to maintain the concentration of body fluids equal to that of the surrounding water.

Water-related adaptations for terrestrial life: In the absence of an external source of water, the Kangaroo rat of the North American deserts is capable of meeting all its water requirements through oxidation of its internal fat (in which water is a by-product – of metabolic water). It also has the ability to concentrate its urine, so that minimal volume of water is lost in the process of removal of its excretory products.

Question 3.
Describe the lake as an ecosystem giving examples for the various zones and the biotic components in it.
Answer:
Deep water lakes contain three distinct zones namely

  • Littoral zone
  • Limnetic zone
  • Profundal zone

Littoral Zone: It is the shallow part of the lake closer to the shore. Light penetrates up to the bottom. It is euphotic (having good light) and has rich vegetation and a higher rate of photosynthesis, hence rich in oxygen.

Limnetic Zone: It is the open water zone away from the shore. It extends up to the effective light penetration level, vertically. The imaginary line that separates the limnetic zone from the profundal zone is known as the zone of compensation/compensation point light compensation level. It is the zone of effective light penetration. Here the rate of photosynthesis is equal to the rate of respiration. The limnetic zone has no contact with the bottom of the lake.

Profundal Zone: It is the deep water area present below the limnetic zone and beyond the depth of effective light penetration. Light is absent. Photosynthetic organisms are absent and so the water is poor in oxygen content. It includes mostly the anaerobic organisms which feed on detritus. The organisms living in lentic habitats are classified into pedantic forms, which live at the bottom of the lake and those living in the open waters of lakes, away from the shore vegetation are known as limnetic forms.

Biota (animal and plant life of a particular region) of the littoral zone: Littoral zone is rich with pedantic flora (especially up to the depth of the effective light penetration). At the shore, proper emergent vegetation is abundant with firmly fixed roots at the bottom of the lake, and shoots and leaves are exposed above the level of water. These are amphibious plants. Certain emergent rooted plants of the littoral zone are the cattails (Typha), bulrushes (Scirpus) arrowheads (Sagittaria),. Slightly deeper are the rooted plants with floating leaves, such as the water lilies (Nymphaea), Nelumbo, Trapa, etc., still deeper are the submerged plants such as Hydrilla – Chara, Potamogeton, etc… The free-floating vegetation includes pistia, Wolffia, Lemna (duckweed), Azolla, Eichhornia, etc.

The phytoplankton of the littoral zone is composed of diatoms (Coscinodiscus, Nitzschia, etc) green algae (Volvox, spirogyra, etc), euglenoids (Euglena, phacus, etc), and dinoflagellates (Gymnodinium, Cystodinium, etc ….)

Animals, the consumers of the littoral zone, are abundant in this zone of the lake, these are categorized into zooplankton, neuston, nekton, periphyton, and benthos. The Zoo-plankton of the littoral zone consists of water fleas such as Daphnia, rotizers, and ostracods.

The animals living at the air-water interface constitute the neuston. They are of two types. The epineuston and hyponeuston. Water striders (Gerris), beetles, and water bugs (Dineutes) form the epineuston/ supraneuston and the hyponeuston/infraneuston includes the larvae of mosquitoes.

The animals such as fishes, amphibians, water-snakes, terrapins, insects like water scorpion (Ranatra), back swimmer (Notonecta), diving beetles (Dytiscus), capable of swimming constitute the nekton.

The animals that are attached to/creeping on the aquatic plants, such as the ‘water snails’, nymphs of insects, bryozoans, turbellarians, hydras, etc, constitute the periphyton. The animals that rest on or move on the bottom of the lake constitute the ‘benthos’, e.g.: red annelids, chironomid larvae, crayfishes, some isopods amphipods, clams, etc.

Biota of the limnetic zone: Limnetic zone is the largest zone of a lake. It is the region of rapid variations of the level of the water, temperature, oxygen availability, etc., from time to time. The limnetic zone has autotrophs (photosynthetic plants) in abundance. The chief autotrophs of this region are the phytoplankton such as the euglenoids, diatoms, cyanobacteria, dinoflagellates, and green algae. The consumers of the limnetic zone are the zooplanktonic organisms such as the copepods, Fisher frogs, water snakes, etc., which form the limnetic nekton.

Biota of the profundal zone: It includes the organisms such as decomposers (bacteria), chironomid larvae, Chaoborus (phantom larva), red annelids, clams, etc., that are capable of living in low oxygen levels. The decomposers of this zone decompose the dead plants and animals and release nutrients that are used by the biotic communities of both littoral and limnetic zones.

The lake ecosystem performs all the functions of any ecosystem and of the biosphere as a whole, i.e., conversion of inorganic substances into organic material, with the help of the radiant solar energy by the autotrophs, consumption of the autotrophs by the heterotrophs; decomposition and mineralization of the dead matter to release them back for reuse by the autotrophs (recycling of minerals).

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 4.
Describe different types of food chains that exist in an ecosystem.
Answer:
The food energy passes from one trophic level to another trophic level mostly from the lower to higher trophic levels. When the path of food energy is ‘linear’ the components resemble the ‘links’ of a chain and it is called a ‘food chain’. Generally, a food chain ends with decomposers. The three major types of food chains in an ecosystem are the Grazing Food Chain, Parasitic Food Chain, and Detritus Food Chain.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment LAQ Q4

(i) Grazing food chain: It is also known as the predatory food chain, it begins with the green plants (producers), and the second third, and fourth trophic levels are occupied by the herbivores, primary carnivores, and secondary carnivores respectively. In some food chains, these are yet another trophic level – the climax carnivores. The number of trophic levels in food chains varies from 3 to 5 generally. Some examples from the grazing food chain (GFC) are given below.

I trophic level II trophic level III trophic level IV trophic level V trophic level
Rosebush → Aphids → Spiders → Small birds → Hawk
Grass → Grasshopper → Frog → Snake → Hawk
Plants → Caterpillar → Lizard → Snake
Phytoplankton → Zooplankton → Fish → Bird
Grass → Goat → Man

(ii) Parasitic food chain: Some authors included the Parasitic Food Chains as a part of the GFC. As in the case of GFC’s, it also begins with the producers, the plants (directly or indirectly). However, the food energy passes from large organisms to small organisms in the parasitic chains. For instance, a tree that occupies the 1st trophic level provides shelter and food for many birds. These birds host many ectoparasites and endo parasites. Thus, unlike in the predator food chain, the path of the flow of energy includes fewer, large-sized organisms in the lower trophic levels and numerous, small-sized organisms in the successive higher trophic levels.

(iii) Detritus Food Chain: The detritus food chain (DFC) begins with dead organic matter (such as leaf litter, and bodies of dead organisms). It is made up of decomposers which are heterotrophic organisms, mainly fungi’ and ‘bacteria’. They meet their energy and nutrient requirements by degrading dead organic matter or detritus. These are also known as saprotrophs (sappro: to decompose).

Decomposers: Secrete digestive enzymes that break down dead and waste materials (such as feces) into simple absorbable substances. Some examples of detritus food chains are:

  • Detritus (formed from leaf litter) – Earthworms – Frogs – Snakes
  • Dead animals – Flies and maggots – Frogs – Snakes.

In an aquatic ecosystem, GFC is the major ‘conduit for the energy flow. As against this in a terrestrial ecosystem, a much larger fraction of energy flows through the detritus food chain than through the GFC. The Detritus food chain may be connected with the grazing food chain at some levels. Some of the organisms of DFC may form the prey of the GFC animals. For example, in the detritus food chain given above, the earthworms of the DFC may become the food of the birds of the GFC. It is to be understood that food chains are not ‘isolated’ always.

Question 5.
Give an account of the flow of energy in an ecosystem.
Answer:
Except for the deep sea hydro-thermal ecosystem, the sun is the only source of energy for all ecosystems on Earth. Of the incident solar radiation, less than 50 percent of it is photosynthetically active radiation (PAR). We know that plants and photosynthetic bacteria (autotrophs), fix the sun’s radiant energy to synthesize food from simple inorganic materials. Plants capture only 2-10 percent of the PAR and this small amount of energy sustains the entire living world. So, it is very important to know how the solar energy captured by plants flows through different organisms of an ecosystem. All heterotrophs are dependent on the producers for their food, either directly or indirectly. The law of conservation of energy is the first law of thermodynamics. It states that energy may transform from one form into another form, but it is neither created nor destroyed. The energy that reaches the earth is balanced by the energy that leaves the surface of the earth as invisible heat radiation.

The energy transfers in an ecosystem are essential for sustaining life. Without energy transfers, there could be no life and ecosystem. Living beings are the natural proliferations that depend on the continuous inflow of concentrated energy. Further, ecosystems are not exempted from the Second Law of thermodynamics. It states that no process involving energy transformation will spontaneously occur unless there is the degradation of energy. As per the second law of thermodynamics – the energy dispersed is in the form of unavailable heat energy and constitutes the entropy (energy lost or not available for work in a system).

The organisms need a constant supply of energy to synthesize the molecules they require. The transfer of energy through a food chain is known as energy flow. A constant input of mostly solar energy is the basic requirement for any ecosystem to function. The important point to note is that the amount of energy available decreases at successive trophic levels. When an organism dies, it is converted to detritus or dead biomass that serves as a source of energy for the decomposers. Organisms at each trophic level depend on those at the lower trophic level, for their energy demands.

Each trophic level has a certain mass of living material at a particular time and it is called the standing crop. The standing crop is measured as the mass of living organisms (biomass) or the number of organisms per unit area. The biomass of a species is expressed in terms of fresh or dry weight (dry weight is more accurate because water contains no usable energy).

The 10 percent Law: The 10 percent law for the transfer of energy from one trophic level to the next was introduced by Lindeman (the Founder of modern Ecosystem Ecology). According to this law, during the transfer of energy from one trophic level to the next, only about 10 percent of the energy is stored/converted as body mass/biomass. The remaining is lost during the transfer or broken down in catabolic activities (Respiration). Lindeman’s rule of trophic efficiency/Gross ecological efficiency is one of the earliest and most widely used measures of ecological efficiency. For example: If the NPP (Net Primary Production) in a plant is 100 kJ, the organic substance converted into the body mass of the herbivore which feeds on it is 10 kJ only. Similarly, the body mass of the carnivore-I is 1 kJ only.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 6.
List out the major air pollutants and describe their effects on human beings.
Answer:
Air pollutants cause injury to all living organisms. They reduce the growth and yield of crops. They are harmful to the respiratory system of humans and animals. An increase in the concentration of pollutants or duration of exposure increases the harmful effects on the organisms.
The major air pollutants:
1. Carbon monoxide (CO): It is produced mainly due to incomplete combustion of fossil fuels. Automobiles are a major cause of CO pollution in larger cities and towns. Automobile exhausts, fuels from factories, emissions from power plants, forest fires and even burning of firewood contribute to CO pollution. Haemoglobin has a greater affinity for CO and SO, and CO competitively interferes with oxygen transport. CO symptoms such aS headache and blurred vision at lower concentrations. In higher concentrations, it leads to coma and death.

2. Carbon Dioxide (CO2): Carbon dioxide is the main pollutant that is leading to global warming. Plants utilize CO2 for photosynthesis and all living organisms emit carbon dioxide in the process of respiration. With rapid urbanization, automobiles, aeroplanes, power plants, and other human activities that involve the burning of fossil fuels such as gasoline, carbon dioxide is turning out to be an important pollutant of concern.

3. Sulphur Dioxide (SO2): It is mainly produced by burning fossil fuels. Melting of sulphur ores is another important source of SO2 pollution. The metal smelting and other industrial processes also contribute to SO2 pollution. Sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides are the major causes of acid rains, which cause acidification of soils, lakes, and streams and also accelerated corrosion of buildings and monuments. High concentrations of sulphur dioxide (SO2) can result in breathing problems in asthmatic children and adults. Other effects associated with long-term exposure to sulphur dioxide, include respiratory illness, alterations in the lungs defenses, and aggravation of existing cardiovascular problems.

To control SO2 pollution, the emissions are filtered through scrubbers. Scrubbers are devices that are used to clean the impurities in exhaust gases. Gaseous pollutants such as SO2 are removed by scrubbers.

4. Nitrogen Oxides: Nitrogen oxides are considered to be major primary pollutants. The source is mainly automobile exhaust. The air polluted by nitrogen oxide is not only harmful to humans and animals but also dangerous for the life of plants. Nitrogen oxide pollution also results in acid rain and the formation of photochemical smog. The effect of nitrogen oxides on plants includes the occurrence of necrotic spots on the surface of leaves. Photosynthesis is affected in crop plants and the yield is reduced. Nitrogen oxides combine with volatile organic compounds by the action of sunlight to form secondary pollutants called Peroxyacetyl nitrate (PAN) which are found especially in photochemical smog. They are powerful irritants to the eyes and respiratory tract.

5. Particulate matter/Aerosols: Tiny particles of solid matter suspended in a gas or liquid constitute the particulate matter. Aerosols refer to particles and /or liquid droplets and the gas together (a system of colloidal particles dispersed in a gas) Combustion of “fossil fuels” (petrol, diesel, etc) fly ash produced in thermal plants, forest fires, cement factories, asbestos mining, and manufacturing units, spinning and ginning mills, etc., are the main sources of particulate matter pollution. According to the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) particles of 2.5 micrometers or less in diameter are highly harmful to man and other air-breathing organisms.

An electrostatic precipitator is a widely used filter’ for removing particulate matter from the exhaust of thermal power plants. It can remove 99% of particulate matter. It has high voltage electrodes which produce a ‘corona’ that releases electrons. These are collected by collecting plates that attract charged particles. The air flowing between the plates is kept at a low velocity so as to allow the dust particles to fall. Thus clean air is released into the atmosphere.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 7.
What are the causes of water pollution and suggested measures for control of water pollution?
Answer:
Domestic Sewage: Sewage is the major source of water pollution in large cities and towns. It mainly consists of human and animal excreta and other waste materials. It is usually released into freshwater bodies or the sea directly. As per the regulations the sewage has to be passed through treatment plants before it is released into the water sources. Only 0.1 percent of impurities from domestic sewage are making these water sources unfit for human consumption. In the treatment of sewage, solids are easy to remove. Removal of dissolved salts such as nitrates, phosphates, and other nutrients and toxic metal ions and organic compounds is much more difficult. Domestic sewage primarily contains biodegradable organic matter, which will be readily decomposed by the action of bacteria and other microorganisms.

Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD): BOD is a measure of the content of biologically degradable substances in sewage. The organic degradable substances are broken down by microorganisms using oxygen. The demand for oxygen is measured in terms of the oxygen consumed by microorganisms over a period of 5 days (BOD 5) or seven days (BOD 7). BOD forms an index for measuring pollution load in the sewage. Microorganisms involved in the biodegradation of organic matter in water bodies consume a lot of oxygen and as a result, there is a sharp decline in dissolved oxygen causing the death of fish and other aquatic animals.

Algal blooms: The presence of large amounts of nutrients in waters also causes excessive growth of plankton algae and the phenomenon is commonly called “algal blooms1′. Algal blooms impart distinct colour to the bodies and deteriorate the quality of water. It also causes the mortality of fish. Some algae which are involved in algal blooms are toxic to human beings and animals.

Excessive growth of aquatic plants such as the common water hyacinth (Eichhornia crassipes), the world’s most problematic aquatic weed which is also called “Terror of Bengal” causes blocks in our waterways. They grow faster than our ability to remove them. They grow abundantly in eutrophic water bodies (water bodies rich in nutrients) and lead to an imbalance in the ecosystem dynamics of the water body.

Sewage arising from homes and hospitals may contain undesirable pathogenic microorganisms. If it is released untreated into water courses, there is a likelihood of an outbreak of serious diseases, such as dysentery, typhoid, jaundice, cholera, etc.

2. Industrial Effluents: Untreated industrial effluents released into water bodies pollute most of the rivers, freshwater streams, etc. Effluents contain a wide variety of both inorganic and organic pollutants such as oils, greases, plastics, metallic wastes, suspended solids, and toxins. Most of them are non-degradable. Arsenic, Cadmium, Copper, Chromium, Mercury, Zinc, and Nickel are the common heavy metals discharged from industries.

Effects: Organic substances present in the water deplete the dissolved oxygen content in water by increasing the BOD (Biological Oxygen Demand) and COD (Chemical Oxygen Demand). Most of the inorganic substances render the water unfit for drinking. Outbreaks of dysentery, typhoid, jaundice, cholera, etc., are caused by sewage pollution.

Biomagnification: Increase in the concentration of the pollutant or toxicant at successive trophic levels in an aquatic food chain is called Biological Magnification or Bio-magnification. This happens in the instances where a toxic substance accumulated by an organism is not metabolized or excreted and thus passes on to the next higher trophic level. This phenomenon is well known regarding DDT and mercury pollution.

As shown in the above example, the concentration of DDT is increased at successive trophic levels starting at a very low concentration of 0.003 ppb (ppb = parts per billion) in water, which ultimately reached an alarmingly high concentration of 25 ppm (ppm = parts per million) in fish-eating birds, through biomagnification. High concentrations of DDT disturb calcium metabolism in birds, which causes thinning of eggshells and their premature breaking, eventually causing a decline in bird populations.

Eutrophication: Natural ageing of a lake by nutrient enrichment of its water is known as eutrophication. In a young lake, the water is cold and clear, supporting little life. Gradually nutrients such as nitrates and phosphates are carried into the lake via streams, in course of time. This encourages the growth of aquatic algae and other plants. Consequently, animal life proliferates and organic debris piles up, the lake grows shallower and warmer. As a result, the aquatic organisms thriving in the cold environment are gradually replaced by warm-water organisms. Marsh plants appear by taking root in the shallow regions of the lake. Eventually, the lake gives way to large masses of floating plants (bog) and is finally covered in land.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 11th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Fluids Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 11th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define average pressure. Mention it’s unit and dimensional formula. Is it a scalar or a vector ? [A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Average pressure (Pav) : Average power is defined as the normal force acting per unit area.
Pav = \(\frac{F}{A}\)
units → N/m2 (or) pascal
Dimensional formula → [ML-1 T-2]
Pressure is a scalar quantity.

Question 2.
Define Viscosity. What are it’s units and dimensions ?
Answer:
Viscosity : The property of a liquid which opposes the relative motion between its layers is called viscosity. .
G.G.S unit poise
S.I unit → Nm-2s
Dimensional formula = [M1L-1T-1]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 3.
What is the principle behind the carburetor of an automobile ? [AP – Mar. 15; TS – Mar. ’18, ’17]
Answer:
The carburetor of automobile has a venturi channel (nozzle) through which air flows with a large speed. The pressure is then lowered at the narrow neck and the petrol is sucked up in the chamber to provide the correct mixture of air to fuel necessary for combustion. ”

Question 4.
What is magnus effect ? [T.S. Mar. 16; A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
The difference in the velocities of air results in the pressure difference between the lower and upper faces and there is a net upward force on the ball. This dynamic lift due to spinning is called magnus effect.

Question 5.
Why are drops and bubbles spherical ? [A.P. Mar. 18, 17, 16, 14]
Answer:
The surface tension of a liquid tends to have minimum surface area. For a given volume, the surface area is minimum for a sphere. Hence rain drops are spherical shape.

Question 6.
Give the expression for the excess pressure in a liquid drop. [T.S. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Excess pressure in a liquid drop, pi – p0 = \(\frac{2 s}{r}\)
where s = Surface tension; r = Radius of the liquid drop.

Question 7.
Give the expression for the excess pressure in an air bubble inside the liquid.
Answer:
Excess pressure in an air bubble inside the liquid, pi – p0 = \(\frac{2 s}{r}\)
where s = Surface tension
r = Radius of the air bubble.
Air bubble forms inside the liquid, hence it has one liquid surface.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 8.
Give the expression for the excess pressure soap bubble in air. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Soap bubble have two interfaces, hence excess pressure inside a soap bubble is pi – p0 = \(\frac{4 s}{r}\)
where s = Surface tension
r = Radius of the soap bubble.

Question 9.
What are water proofing agents and water wetting agents ? What do they do ?
Answer:
Water proofing agents are added, to create a large angle of contact between water and fibres.
Soaps, detergents and dying substances are wetting agents. When they are added, the angle of contact becomes small. So that they may penetrate well and become effective.

Question 10.
What is angle of contact ? [A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
The angle between tangent to the liquid surface at the point of contact and solid surface inside the liquid is termed as angle of contact (0).

Question 11.
Mention any two examples that obey Bernoullis theorem and justify them. [A.P. Mar. 18]
Answer:

  1. In heavy winds house roof’s are blown off. When the velocity of the wind is greater on the roof top than inside the house, then the pressure on the roof top becomes less than that inside the house. This pressure difference causes the dynamic lift.
  2. When a fan is rotating, papers are blown off from .the table top. The velocity of wind on the paper increases due to fan and hence pressure decreases. Due to this pressure difference papers are blown off.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 12.
When water flows through a pipe, which of the layers moves fastest and slowest ?
Answer:
Water flows through a pipe, the layers near the axis of the tube are fastest and at the walls of the tube are slowest
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 1

Question 13.
“Terminal velocity is more if surface area of the body is more”. Give reasons in support of your answer.
Answer:
Surface area (A) = 4πr2 and terminal velocity (υt) αr2
As surface area increases, r2 is also increases. Then terminal velocity is also increases.
∴ Terminal velocity is more, if surface area of the body is more.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is atmospheric pressure and how is it determined using Barometer ?
Answer:
Atmospheric pressure : Atmospheric pressure at any point is equal to the weight of a column of air of unit cross sectional area extending from that point to the top of the earth’s atmosphere.
1 atm = 1.013 × 105 pa
Determination of atmospheric pressure using barometer: A long glass tube closed at one end and filled with mercury is inverted into a trough of mercury. This device is known as mercury barometer.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 2
The space above the mercury column in the tube contains only mercury vapour whose pressure Pis so small, that it may be neglected. The pressure inside the column at point A must equal the pressure at B.
∴ Pressure at B = Atmospheric pressure = Pa
Pa = ρgh = Pressure at A …………………… (1)
Where ρ is density of mercury and h is the height of the mercury column in the tube. In the experiment it is found that the mercury column in the barometer has a height of about 76cm at the sea level equivalent to one atmosphere.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
What is guage pressure and how is a manometer used for measuring pressure differences ?
Answer:
Guage pressure : The guage pressure is the difference of the actual pressure and the atmospheric pressure. Pg = P – Pa
measurement of pressure differences :

  1. The manometer consists of a U-shaped tube, which is filled with a low density liquid (oil) for measuring small pressure difference and high density liquid
    (mercury) for measuring large pressure difference.
  2. One end of the tube is connected to the vessel D whose pressure of air measure and the other end of the tube is open.
  3. If pressure of air in vessel D is more than the earth’s atmosphere, the level of liquid in arm I will go down up to point A and level of liquid in arm II rises up to C.
  4. Then the pressure of air in vessel is equal to pressure at point A.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 3
  5. Note the difference of liquid levels in the two arms of U-tube.(Say h). p be density of the liquid. Pa is the atmospheric pressure.
  6. Pressure at point A (PA) = Pressure at point B = Pressure at point C + Pressure due to column of liquid.
    PA = Pc + hρg (or) PA – Pc = hρg
    Here Pc = Pa, PA = P, ∴ P – Pa = hρg
    P – Pa = Pg = guage pressure = hρg

Question 3.
State Pascal’s law and verify it with the help of an experiment.
Answer:
Pascal’s law : It states that if gravity effect is neglected, the pressure at every point of liquid in equilibrium of rest is same.
Proof :

  1. Imagine a circular cylinder of uniform cross-sectional area A, such that points C and D lie on flat faces of the cylinder.
  2. The liquid inside the cylinder is in equilibrium under the action of forces exerted by the liquid outside the cylinder.
  3. These forces are acting every where perpendicular to the surface of the cylinder.
  4. Thus the forces on the flat faces of the cylinder at C and D will be perpendicular to the forces on the curved surface of the cylinder.
  5. Since liquid is in equilibrium, the sum of the forces acting on the curved surface of the cylinder must be zero.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 4
  6. If P1 and P2 are the pressures at points C and D respectively. F1 and F2 are the forces acting on the flat surfaces of the cylinder due to liquid, then
    F1 = P1 A and F2 = P2A Since liquid is in equilibrium, therefore
    F1 = F2
    P1 A = P2A
    (or) P1 = P2
    It means the pressures at C and D are the same. This proves the pascal’s law.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 4.
Explain hydraulic lift and hydraulic brakes.
Answer:
Hydraulic lift and hydraulic brakes are based on the Pascal’s law.

Hydraulic lift : Here C and D are two cylinders of different areas of cross section. They are connected to each other with a pipe E. Each cylinder is provided with airtight frictionless piston. Let a, A be the area’s of cross-sections of the piston at C and D (a < < A)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 5
The cylinders are filled with an incompressible liquid.
Let f be the applied force at C. Pressure exerted on the liquid
P = \(\frac{f}{a}\) ……………. (1)
According to pascal’s law, this pressure is transmitted to piston of cylinder D. Upward force at D will be
F = PA = \(\frac{f}{a}\) A = f \(\frac{A}{a}\) …………… (2)
As A > > a
∴ F > > f .
∴ Heavy load placed on the larger piston is easily lifted.

Hydraulic Brakes :
When the brake pedal is pressed, the piston (P) of the master cylinder is pushed inwards. There will be increased pressure on liquid at P, which is transmitted equally to P1 and P2 of wheel cylinder in accordance with pascal’s law. Due to which P1 and P2 move outwards. Breakshoes to move away from each other which in turn press against the inner rim of the wheel. The brake becomes operative.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 6

Question 5.
What is hydrostatic paradox ?
Answer:
Consider three vessels A, B and C of different shapes. They are connected at the bottom by a horizontal pipe. On filling with the level in the three vessels is the same, though they hold different amounts of water. This is so because water at the bottom has the same pressure below each section of the vessel. It means the liquid pressure at a point is independent of the quantity of liquid but depends upon the depth of point below the liquid surface. This is known as hydrostatic paradox.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 7

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 6.
Explain how pressure varies with depth.
Answer:
Consider a fluid at rest in a container. In figure point 1 is at a height h above a point 2. The pressure at points 1 and 2 are P1 and P2. As the fluid is at rest, the horizontal forces should be zero. The resultant vertical forces should balance the weight of the element. Pressure at top (P1A) acting downward, pressure at bottom (P2A) acting upward.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 8
(P2 – P1) A = mg ………………… (1)
Mass of the fluid (m) = ρv = ρhA
(P2 – P1) = ρgh ………………. (2)
Pressure difference depends on the vertical distance h.
If the point 1 under discussion is shifted to the top of the fluid (water), which is open to the atmosphere, P1 may be replaced by atmospheric pressure (Pa) and P2 by P. Then eq (2) gives
P – Pa = ρgh
P = Pa + ρgh ……………… (3)
Thus the pressure P, at depth below the surface of a liquid open to the atmosphere is greater than atmospheric pressure by an amount ρgh.

Question 7.
What is Torricelli’s law ? Explain how the speed of efflux is determined with an experiment.
Answer:
Torricelli’s theorem : The velocity of efflux i.e., the velocity with which the liquid flows out of an orifice (i.e., a narrow hole) is equal to that which is freely falling body would acquire in falling through a vertical distance equal to the depth of orifice below the free surface of liquid.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 9
Consider ideal liquid of density p contained in a tank provided with a narrow hole.
Let h = Height of free surface of liquid above O.
P = Atmospheric pressure
v = Velocity of efflux
Applying Bernoulli’s theorem at A and O
(P + ρgh + O)atA = [P + 0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)ρv2]atO
P + ρgh = P + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρv2 = ρgh = \(\frac{1}{2}\)ρv2
v = \(\sqrt{2 g h}\)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 8.
What is Venturi-meter? Explain how it is used.
Answer:
Venturi meter: The Venturi-meter is a device to measure the flow speed of incompressible fluid.

  1. It consists of a tube with a broad diameter and a small constriction at the middle.
  2. A manometer in the form of a U-tube is also attached to it, with one of arm at the broad neck point of the tube and the other at constriction as shown in figure.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 10
  3. The manometer contains a liquid of density ρm.
  4. The pressure difference causes the fluid in the U-tube connected at the narrow neck to rise in comparison to the other arm.
  5. Filter pumps, sprayers used for perfumes, carburetor of automobile has used on this principle.

Question 9.
What is Reynolds number ? What is it’s significance ?
Answer:
Reynolds number : “Reynold number is a pure number which determines the nature of flow of liquid through a pipe”.
Reynold number (Re) = \(\frac{\rho \mathrm{vd}}{\eta}\)
Where ρ is density of the fluid
v is speed of the fluid
d is diameter of the pipe

  1. If the flow is stream line (or) laminor Re < 1000
  2. If the flow is turbulent, Re > 2000
  3. If the flow becomes unsteady, 1000 < Re < 2000

Physical significance of Reynolds number : Reynold’s number describes the ratio of the inertial force per unit area to the viscous force per unit area for a flowing fluid.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 11

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 10.
Explain dynamic lift with examples.
Answer:
Dynamic lift: Dynamic lift is the force that act on a body, by virtue of its motion through a fluid.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 12
e.g.1 : Fig (a) shows, ball moving without spin. Stream lines are equally distributed above and below the ball. The velocity above and below the ball is same resulting zero pressure difference. There no upward (or) downward force on the ball.

Fig (b) shows, ball moving with spin stream lines are more crowded above the ball than below. The velocity of air above the ball is large (v + vr) and below it is smaller (v – vr). As a result, there is a pressure difference between lower and upper faces. Pressure is less at top of the ball and pressure is morebelow the ball. There is a net upward force on the ball.
e.g. 2 : Dynamic lift also acts on the an aeroplane wing.

Question 11.
Explain Surface Tension and Surface energy. [Mar. 13]
Answer:
Surface tension (S): The force acting per unit length of an imaginary line drawn on the surface of a liquid, normal to it and parallel to the surface is called surface tension.
T = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{l}\)
S.l unit → N/m
D.F → [MT-2]
Surface energy (E): The additional potential energy due to molecular forces per unit surface area is called surface tension.
Surface energy = \(\)
S.l Unit → J/m2
D.F → (MT-2 )
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 13
Consider a horizontal liquid film ending in bar free to slide over parallel guides. We move the bar by a small distance d. The area of the surface increases, the system now has more energy, this means – that some work has to be done against an internal force F.
Work done (W) = F.d
If the surface energy of the film is S per unit area, the extra area is 2dl. A film has two sides and the liquid in between them.
So there are two surfaces and the extra energy is
S (2dl) = Fd
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{2 l}\)
Surface tension is equal to the surface energy and is also equal to the force per unit length exerted by the fluid on the movable bar.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 12.
Explain how surface tension can be measured experimentally.
Answer:
A flat vertical glass plate, below which a vessel of some liquid is kept, forms one arm of the balance. The plate is balanced by weights on the otherside, with its horizontal edge just over water. The vessel is raised slightly till the liquid just touches the glass plate and pulls it down a little because of surface tension. Weights are added till the plate just clears water. Suppose the additional weight requires is W.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 14
Surface tension of liquid air interface is
Sla = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}}{2 l}=\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{2 l}\)
Where l is length of the plate edge, m is extra mass.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
State Bernoulli’s principle. From conservation of energy in a fluid flow through a tube, arrive at Bernoulli’s equation. Give an application of Bernoulli’s theorem.
Answer:
Bernoulli’s principle : Bernoulli principle states that in a stream line flow, the sum of the pressure, the K.E per unit volume and the P.E per unit volume remains a constant.
P + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρv2 + ρgh = constant

  1. Consider a non-viscous, incompressible fluid is flowing through the pipe in a steady flow.
  2. Consider the flow at two regions BC and DE. Initially the fluid lying between B and D.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 15
  3. During short time interval At, this fluid would have moved. Suppose V1 is the speed at B and V2 is the speed at D.
  4. In time ∆t, distance moved from B to C is V1 ∆t in the same interval (∆t) distance moved from D to E is V2∆t.
  5. Let P1 and P2 be pressure act at area’s of cross¬sections A1 and A2 of the two regions.
  6. The work done on the fluid at left end (BC)
    = Force × displacement
    = Pressure × Area × displacement
    = P1A1 × V1∆t (∆V = A1V1∆t) = P1∆V ………………. (1)
  7. Similarly work done by the fluid at right end (DE)
    = P2A2 × V2∆t = P2∆V …………………. (2)
  8. Work done on the fluid is taken as positive and workdone by the fluid is taken as negative.
    ∴ Total work done (W) = (P1 – P1) ∆V ………………. (3)
    Part of this work goes into changing the K.E of the fluid and part goes into changing gravitational P.E.
  9. Mass of the fluid(∆m) passing through the pipe in time (∆t) is ∆m = ρA1V1∆t
    where ρ is the density of the fluid.
    ∆m = ρ∆V ………………….. (4)
  10. Gravitational P.E = ρg∆V (h2 – h1) ………………… (5)
    Change in K.E (∆K) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ∆V (V22 – V12) …………….. (6)
  11. According to law of conservation of energy
    (P1 – P2) ∆V = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ ∆V (V22 – V12) + ρg∆V (h2 – h1)
    P1 – P2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ (V22 – V12) + ρg (h2 – h1)
    P1 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ V12 + ρgh1 = P1 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ V22 + ρgh2
    P + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ v2 + ρgh = constant ………………. (7)

∴ Sum of the pressure, K.E per unit volume and P.E per unit volume remains constant. Application of Bernoulli’s theorem :

  1. It explains the dynamic lift on the wings of aeroplanes.
  2. It explains the dynamic lift experienced by a spinning cricket ball.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
Define coefficient of viscosity. Explain Stoke’s law and explain the conditions under which a rain drop attains terminal velocity, υt. Give the expression for υt.
Answer:
Coefficient of viscosity (η): The coefficient of viscosity is defined as the tangential force per unit area of the layer, required to maintain unit velocity gradient.
η = \(\frac{F}{A\left(\frac{\Delta V}{\Delta x}\right)}\)
S.l. unit → Nm-2 s (or) PaS
C.G.S unit → Poise
Dimensional formula = [ML-1T-1]
Stoke’s law : According to this law the viscous force acting on a moving body which is spherical in shape is directly proportional to

  1. Coefficient of viscosity of fluid (η)
  2. Radius of the spherical body (r)
  3. Velocity of the body (v)

∴ F ∝ ηrv
F = Kηrv
Where K is a constant of proportionality. Experimentally it was found to be 6π.
∴ F = 6πηrv
When rain drops falling through air from the clouds reach the surface with almost constant speed through they are moving under gravitational force. This velocity is called terminal velocity. After attaining the terminal velocity, net force acting on the rain drop is zero.
According to stokes law, F ∝ ηrv
F = 6πηrv (∵ 6π = K = Proportionality constant)
Let ρ, r be the density and radius of the sphere.
The fluid density be σ.
The forces acting on the sphere are

  1. Weight of the sphere W = mg
    W = Vρg = \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr3ρg …………….. (1)
  2. The force of buoyancy (B) = V σ g = \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr3σg ……………. (2)
  3. Viscous force (f) = 6πηv ………………… (3)
    When the sphere attains terminal velocity (vt), the net force on the body becomes zero.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 16
    ∴ At terminal velocity
    Net downward force = Net upward force
    W = B + f, W – B = f
    \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr3ρg – \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr3σg = 6πηrvt;
    ∴ \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr3g (ρ – σ) = 6πηrvt
    Vt = \(\frac{2}{9} \frac{r^2 g(\rho-\sigma)}{\eta}\) ………………. (4)

Problems

Question 1.
Calculate the work done in blowing a soap bubble of diameter 0.6 cm against the surface tension force. (Surface tension of soap solution = 2.5 × 102 Nm-1).
Solution:
D = 0.6 cm = 0.6 × 102 m
r = \(\frac{D}{2}=\frac{0.6 \times 10^{-2}}{2}\) = 0.3 × 102 m
S = 2.5 × 102 N/m
W = 8πr2s
= 8 × 3.14 × (0.3 × 10-2)2 × 2.5 × 10-2
W = 5.652 × 10-6 J

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
How high does methyl alcohol rise in a glass tube of diameter 0.06 cm ? (Surface tension of methyl alcohol = 0.023 Nm-1 and density = 0.8 gmcm-3. Assume that the angle of contact is zero)
Solution:
D = 0.06cm, θ = 0°
r = \(\frac{D}{2}=\frac{0.06}{2}\) = 0.03 cm = 0.03 × 10-2 m
= 3 × 10-4 m
S = 0.023 N/m, Density = 0.8 gm/c.c.
= 0.8 × \(\frac{10^{-3}}{10^{-6}}\)
ρ = 0.8 × 103 kg/m3
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{hr \rho g}}{2 \cos \theta}\)
h = \(\frac{2 \cos \theta}{r \rho g}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 0.023}{3 \times 10^{-4} \times 0.8 \times 10^3 \times 9.8}\) (∵ cos 0° = 1)
= 0.0019 × 10-1 m
≈ 0.002 m
h = 2 cm .

Question 3.
What should be the radius of a capillay tube if water has to rise to a height pf 6 cm in it ? (Surface tension of water = 7.2 × 10-2 Nm-1).
Solution:
h = 6 × 10-2 m
S = 7.2 × 10-2 N/m
Density of water (ρ) = 103 kg/m3
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{hr \rho g}}{2}\)
r = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~S}}{\mathrm{h \rho g}}=\frac{2 \times 7.2 \times 10^{-3}}{6 \times 10^{-2} \times 10^3 \times 9.8}\)
r = \(\frac{14.4}{58.8} \) × 10-3
r = 0.24 × 10-3 m
r = 0.24 mm

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 4.
Find the depression of the meniscus in the capillary tube of diameter 0.4 mm dipped in a beaker containing , mercury. (Density of mercury = 13.6 × 103 Kg m-3 and surface tension of mercury = 0.49 Nm-1 and angle of contact = 135°).
Solution:
D = 4 m.m
r = \(\frac{D}{2}=\frac{4}{2}\) = 2m.m = 2 × 10-3 m
ρ = 13.6 × 103 kg/m3
θ = 135°, S = 0.49 Nm
cosθ = cos 135°
= – sin 45° = – \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{hr \rho g}}{2 \cos \theta}\)
h = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~s} \cos \theta}{\mathrm{r \rho g}}\)
= 2 × 0.49 \(\left(\frac{-1}{\sqrt{2}}\right) \frac{1}{2 \times 10^{-3} \times 13.6 \times 10^3 \times 9.8}\)
h = \(\frac{-0.49}{13.6 \times 9.8 \times \sqrt{2}}\)
h = -0.024m.

Question 5.
If the diameter of a soap bubble is 10 mm and its surface tension is 0.04 Nm-1, find the excess pressure inside the bubble. [Mar. 14]
Solution:
D = 10 m.m
r = \(\frac{D}{2}=\frac{10}{2}\) = 5 m.m
= 5 × 10-3
S = 0.04 N/m
Pi – P0 = \(\frac{4 S}{r}=\frac{4 \times 0.04}{5 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 0.032 × 103
Pi – P0 = 32 N/m2 (or) Pascal.

Question 6.
If work done by an agent to form a bubble of radius R is W, then how much energy is required to increase its radius to 2R ?
Solution:
R1 = R, R2 = 2R
Initial work done (W) = 8πR2S
Final work done (W) = 8π[R22 – R12]S
= 8π [4R2 – R2]S
= 3 × 8π R2S
W = 3W.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 7.
If two soap bubbles of radii R1 and R2 (in vacuum) coalasce under isothermal conditions, what is the radius of the new bubble. Take T as the surface tension of soap solution.
Solution:
R1, R2 and R be the radii of first, second and resultant bubble. The soap bubbles coalesce in vacuum, so surface energy do not change
E = E1 + E2
8π R2T = 8π R12T + 8π R22 T
R2 = R12 + R22
R = \(\sqrt{R_1^2+R_2^2}\)

Additional Problems

Question 1.
Explain why
a) The blood pressure in humans is greater at the feet than at the brain.
b) Atmospheric pressure at a height of about 6 km decreases to nearly half of its value at the sea level, though the height of the atmosphere is more than 100 km.
c) Hydrostatic pressure is a scalar quantities even though pressure is force divided by area.
Answer:
a) The height of the blood column in the human body is more at feet than at the brain. That is why, the blood exerts more pressure at the feet than at the brain (∴ pressure = hρg)

b) We know that the density of air is maximum near the surface of earth and decreases rapidly with height and at a height of about 6 km, it decreases to near by half its value at the sea level. Beyond 6 km height the density of air decreases very slowly with height. Due to this reason, the atmospheric pressure at a height of about 6 km decreases to nearby half of its value at sea level.

c) Since due to applied force on liquid, the pressure is transmitted equally in all directions inside the liquid. That is why there is no fixed direction for the pressure due to liquid. Hence hydrostatic pressure is a scalar quantity.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
Explain why
a) The angle of contact of mercurywith glass is obtuse, while that of water with glass is acute.
b) Water on a clean glass surface tends to spread out while mercury on the same surface tends to form drops. (Put differently, water wets glass while mercury does not.) [T.S. Mar. 15]
c) Surface tension of a liquid is independent of the area of the surface.
d) Water with detergent disolved in it should have small angles of contact.
e) A drop of liquid under no external forces is always spherical in shape.
Answer:
a) When a small quantity of liquid is poured on solid, three interfaces, namely liquid- air, solid-air and solid-liquid are formed. The surface tensions corresponding to these three interfaces are SLA, SSA and SSL respectively. Let 0 be the angle of contact between the liquid and solid. The molecules in the region, where the three interfaces meet are in equilibrium. It means net force acting on them is zero. For the molecule at 0 to be in equilibrium, we have.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 17
In case of mercury glass, SSA < SSL, therefore cosθ is negative or θ > 90° i.e. obtuse. In case of water-glass, SSA > SSL, therefore cosθ is positive or θ < 90° i,e. acute.

b) For mercury glass, angle of contact is obtuse. In order to achieve this obtuse value of angle of contact, the mercury tends to form a drop. In case of water glass, the angle of contact is acute. To achieve this acute value of angle of contact, the water tends to spread.

c) Surface tension of liquid is the force acting per unit length on a line drawn tangentially to the liquid surface at rest. Since this force is independent of the area of liquid surface, therefore surface tension is also independent of the area of the liquid surface.

d) We know that the cloth has narrow spaces in the form of capillaries. The rise of liquid in a capillary tude is directly proportional to cos0. if 0 is small cos0 will be large. Due to which capillary rise will be more and so the detergent will penetrate more in cloth.

e) In the absence of external forces, the surface of the liquid drop tends to acquire the minimum surface area due to surface tension. Since for a given volume, the surface area of sphere is least, hence the liquid drop takes the spherical shape.

Question 3.
Fill in the blanks using the word (S) from the list appended with each statement ;
a) Surface tension of liquids generally … with temperatures (increases / decreases)
b) Viscosity of gases… with temperature, whereas viscosity of liquids … with temperature (increases / decreases)
c) For solids with elastic modulus of rigidity, the shearing force is proportional to…. while for fluids it is proportional to … (shear strain / rate of shear strain)
d) For a fluid in a steady flow, the increase in flow speed at a constriction follows (conservation of mass / Bernoulli’s principle)
e) For the model of a plane in a wind tunnel, turbulence occurs at a… speed for turbulence for an actual plane (greater / smaller)
Answer:
a) Decreases
b) increases; decreases
c) Shear strain; rate of shear strain.
d) Conservation of mass; Bernoullis principle.
e) Greater.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 4.
Explain why
a) To keep a piece of paper horizontal, you should blow over, not under, it.
b) When we try to close a water tap with our fingers, fast jets of water gush through the openings between our fingers.
c) The size of the needle of a syringe controls flow rate better than the thumb pressure exerted by a doctor while administering an injection.
d) A fluid flowing out of a small hole in a vessel results in a backward thrust on the vessel.
e) A spinning cricket ball in air does not follow a parabolic trajectory.
Answer:
a) When we blow over the paper, the velocity of air blow increases and hence pressure of air on it decreases (according to Bernoullis theorem), whereas pressure of air below the paper is atmosphere. Hence the paper stays horizontal.

b) By doing so the area of the outlet of water jet is reduced, so velocity of water increases according to equation of continuity av = a constant.

c) When a fluid is flowing out of a small hole in a vessel it acquires a large velocity and hence possesses large momentum. Since no external force is acting on the system, a backward velocity must be attained by the vessel (according to law of conservation of momentum). As a result of it, impulse (backward thrust) is experienced by the vessel.

d) There, size of the needle controls velocity of flow and thumb pressure controls pressure. According to Bernoulli’s theorem, P + ρgh + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρV2 = a constant shows that P occurs with power one and V occurs with power two, hence the velocity has more influence. That is why the needle has a better control over flow.

e) If the ball is spinning well as moving linearly, the streamlines at the top of ball due to two types of motion are opposed to each other and those below are in the same direction. As a result of it, the velocity of air flow is greater below than above the ball. Now, according to Bernoullis principle, the pressure on the upper side of the ball becomes more than the pressure on the lower side of ball. Due to it, a resultant force F acts upon the ball at right angle to linear motion in the downward, direction, resulting the ball to move along a curved path.

Question 5.
A 50 kg girl wearing high heel shoes balances on a single heel. The heel is circular with a diameter 1.0 cm. What is the pressure exerted by the heel on the horizontal floor ?
Answer:
Here, m = 50kg; r =D/2 = 1/2 cm = \(\frac{1}{200}\) m
Pressure = \(\frac{\text { Force }}{\text { area }}=\frac{m g}{\pi r^2}=\frac{50 \times 9.8}{(22 / 7)(1 / 200)^2}\)
= 6.24 × 106 Nm-2.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 6.
Toricelli’s barometer used mercury. Pascal duplicated it using French wine of density 984 kg m-3. Determine the height of the wine column for normal atmosphere pressure.
Answer:
P = 0.76 × (13.6 × 103) × 9.8
= h × 984 × 9.8 or
h = \(\frac{0.76 \times 13.6 \times 10^3 \times 9.8}{984 \times 9.8}\)
= 10.5 m.

Question 7.
A vertical off-shore structure is built to withstand a maximum stress of 109 Pa. Is the structure suitable for putting up on top of an oil well in the ocean ? Take the depth of the ocean to be roughly 3 km and ignore ocean currents.
Answer:
Here, maximum stress = 109Pa,
h = 3km = 3 × 103m;
ρ(water) = 103kg/m3 and g = 9.8 m/s2
The structure will be suitable for putting upon top of an oil well provided the pressure exerted by sea water is less than the maximum stress it can bear.
Pressure due to sea water, P = hρg
= 3 × 103 × 103 × 9.8
= 2.94 × 107 Pa
Since the pressure of sea water is less than the maximum stress of 109 Pa, the structure will be suitable for putting upon top of the oil well.

Question 8.
A hydraulic automobile lift is designed to lift cars with a maximum mass of 3000 kg. The area of cross-section of the piston carrying the load is 425 cm2. What maximum pressure would the smaller piston have to bear ?
Answer:
The maximum force, which the bigger piston can bear,
F = 3000 kgf = 3000 × 9.8 N
∴ Area of piston, A = 425 cm2
= 425 × 10-4 m2
∴ maximum pressure on the bigger piston.
P = \(\frac{F}{A}=\frac{3000 \times 9.8}{425 \times 10^{-4}}\) = 6.92 × 105 Pa
Since the liquid transmits pressure equally, therefore the maximum pressure the smaller piston can bear is 6.92 × 105 Pa.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 9.
A U-tube contains water and methylated spirit separated by mercury. The mercury columns in the two arms are in level with 10.0 cm of water in one arm and 12.5 cm of spirit in the other. What is the specific gravity of spirit ?
Answer:
For water column in one arm of U-tube,
h1 = 10.0 cm; ρ1 (density) = 1g cm-3
For spirit column in other arm of U-tube, h2 = 12.5 cm; ρ1 = ?
As the mercury column in the two arms of U-tube are in level, therefore pressure exerted by each is equal. Hence h1ρ1g = h2ρ2g or
P2 = \(\frac{h_1 \rho_1}{h_2}=\frac{10 \times 1}{12.5}\) = 0.8 g cm-3
Therefore, relative density of spirit = ρ21
= \(\frac{0.8}{1}\) = 0.8

Question 10.
In the previous problem, if 15.0 cm of water and spirit each are further poured into the respective arms of the tube, what is the difference in the levels of mercury in the two arms ? (Specific, gravity of mercury = 13.6)
Answer:
On pouring 15.0 cm of water and spirit each into the respective arms of U-tube, the mercury level will rise in the arm containing spirit. Let h be the difference in the levels of mercury in two arms of U-tube and p be the density of mercury.
∴ The pressure exerted by h cm of mercury column = difference in pressure exerted by water and spirit.
∴ h1ρ1g = h2ρ2g ……………. (1)
Here h = ? ρ =13.6 g cm-3
ρ1 =1 cm-3
ρ2 = 0.8 g cm-3
h1 = 15 + 10 = 25 cm
h2 = 15 + 12.5 = 27.5 cm
Putting values in (i) we get h × 13.6 × g
= 25 × 1 × g – 27.5 × 0.8 × g = 3g
or h = 3/13.6 = 0.22cm

Question 11.
Can Bernoulli’s equation be used to describe the flow of water through a rapid in a river ? Explain.
Answer:
No, Bernoulli’s theorem is used only for stream – line flow.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 12.
Does it matter if one uses gauge instead of absolute pressures in applying Bernoulli’s equation ? Explain.
Answer:
No, it does not matter if one uses gauge instead of absolute pressures in applying Bernoulli’s’ equation, provided the atmospheric pressure at the two points where Bernoulli’s equation is applied are significantly different.

Question 13.
Glycerine flows steadily through a horizontal tube of length 1.5 m and radius 1.0 cm. If the amount of glycerine collected per second at one end is 4.0 × 10-3 kg s-1, what is the pressure difference between the two ends of the tube ? (Density of glycerine = 1.3 × 103 kg m-3 and viscosity of glycerine = 0.83 Pa s). [You may also like to check if the assumption of laminar flow in the tube is correct].
Answer:
Here, l = 1.5 m, r = 1.0 cm = 10-2 m, ρ = 1; 1.3 × 10-3 kg/m3; η = 0.83 Nsm-2.
Mass of glycerine flouring per sec, M = 4 × 10-3 kg/s
Volume of glycerine flouring per sec, V = \(\frac{M}{\rho}\)
V = \(\frac{4 \times 10^{-3}}{1.3 \times 10^3} \mathrm{~m}^3 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\) m3s-1
If ρ is the difference of pressure between two ends of the tube,then using poisevilles formula we have
V = \(\frac{\pi \rho r^4}{8 \eta l}\) or P = \(\frac{V \times 8 \eta l}{\pi r^4}\)
P = \(\left(\frac{4 \times 10^{-3}}{1.3 \times 10^3}\right) \times \frac{8 \times 0.83 \times 1.5}{3.142 \times\left(10^{-2}\right)^4}\)
= 975.37 Pa

Question 14.
In a test experiment on a model aeroplane in a wind tunnel, the flow speeds on the upper and lower surfaces of the wing are 70 m s-1 and 63 m s-1 respectively. What is the lift on the wing if its area is 2.5 m2 ? Take the density of air to be 1.3 kg m-3.
Answer:
Let V1, V2 be the speeds on the upper and lower surfaces of the wing of aeroplane and P1 and P2 be the pressures on upper and lower surfaces of the wing respectively.
Then V1 = 70ms-1; V2 = 63ms-1,
P = 1.3kg m-3.
This difference of pressure provides the lift to the aeroplane.
\(\frac{P_1}{\rho}\) + gh + \(\frac{1}{2} V_1^2\) = \(\frac{P_2}{\rho}\) + gh + \(\frac{1}{2} V_2^2\)
∴ \(\frac{P_1}{\rho}-\frac{P_2}{\rho}=\frac{1}{2}\left(V_2^2-V_1^2\right)\)
or P1 – P2 = \(\frac{1}{2} \rho\left(V_2^2-V_1^2\right)\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 1.3 [(70)2 – (63)2]
= 605.15 Pa
This difference of pressure provides the lift to the aeroplane.
So, lift on the aeroplane = Pressure difference × area of wings
= 605.15 × 2.5
= 1512.875 N
= 1.51 × 103N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 15.
Figures (a) and (b) refer to the steady flow of a (non-viscous) liquid. Which of the two figures is incorrect ? Why ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 18
Answer:
Figure a is incorrect. According to equation of continuity i.e. av = a constant, where area of cross – section of tube is less, the velocity of liquid flow is more than the other portion of tube. According to Bernoulli’s theorem,
P + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρv2 = a constant i.e. where V is more P is less and avice versa.

Question 16.
The cylindrical tube of a spray pump has a cross-section of 8.0 cm2 one end of which has 40 fine holes each of diameter 1.0 mm. If the liquid flow inside the tube is 1.5 m min-1, what is the speed of ejection of the liquid through the holes ?
Answer:
Area of cross – section of tube, a1 = 8.0 cm2 = 8 × 10-4 m2
No. of holes = 40, Diameter of each hole, D = 1 mm = 10-3 m
∴ Radius of hole, r = \(\frac{D}{2}=\frac{1}{2}\) × 10-3 m
= 5 × 10-4 m
Area of cross – section of each hole = πr2
= π(5 × 10-4)2m2
Total area of cross – section of 40 holes,
a2 = 40 × π (5 × 10-4)2m2
Speed of liquid inside the tube,
V1 = 1.5m/min
= \(\frac{1.5}{60}\) ms-1
If V2 is the velocity of ejection of the liquid through the holes, then
a1V1 = a2V2 or V2 = \(\frac{a_1 V_1}{a_2}\)
V2 = \(\frac{\left(8 \times 10^{-4}\right) \times 1.5}{60 \times 40 \times \pi \times\left(5 \times 10^4\right)^2}\)
= 0.637 ms-1

Question 17.
A U-shaped wire is dipped in a soap solution and removed. The thin shaped film formed between the surfaces and the light slider supports a weight of 1.5 × 10-2 N (which includes the small weight of the slider). The length of the slider is 30 cm. What is the surface tension of the film ?
Answer:
We know that soap film has two free surfaces, so total length of the film to be supported,
= 2l = 2 × 30 = 60 cm
= 0.6 m
Total force on the slider due to surface tension will be,
F = S × 2l
= S × 0.6 N
In equilibrium position, the force F on slider due to surface tension must balance the weight mg
(1.5 × 10-2)N i.e. F = 1.5 × 10-2
= S × 0.6 Or
S = \(\frac{1.5 \times 10^{-2}}{0.6}\)
2.5 × 10-2Nm-1

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 18.
Figure (a) shows a thin liquid film supporting a small weight = 4.5 × 10-2 N. What is the weight supported by a film of the same liquid at the same temperature in Fig. (b) and (c) ? Explain your answer physically.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 19
Answer:
a) Here, length of film supporting the weight
= 40cm = 0.4 m
Total liquid film supported (or force)
= 4.5 × 10-2 N
film has two free surfaces, ∴ surface tension,
S = \(\frac{4.5 \times 10^{-2}}{2 \times 0.4}\)
S = 5.625 × 10-2 Nm-1
Since the liquid is same for all the cases (a), (b), (c) and temperature is also same, therefore surface tension for cases (b) and (c) will also be the same = 5.625 × 10-2. In figure (b) and (c) the length of the film supporting the weight is also the same as that of(a), hence the total weight supported in each case is 4.5 × 10-2 N.

Question 19.
What is the pressure inside the drop of mercury of radius 3.00 mm at room temperature ? Surface tension of mercury at that temperature (20°C) is 4.65 × 10-1 Nm-1. The atmospheric pressure is 1.01 × 105 Pa. Also give the excess pressure inside the drop.
Answer:
Here, r = 3.0 mm = 3 × 10-3 m;
S = 4.65 × 10-1 Nm-1;
P = 1.01 × 105 Pa
Excess of pressure inside the drop of mercury is given by
P = \(\frac{2 S}{r}=\frac{2 \times 4.65 \times 10^{-1}}{3 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 310 Pa
Total pressure inside the drop = P + ρ
= 1.01 × 105 + 310
= 1.01 31 × 105 Pa

Question 20.
What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap solution of radius 5.0 mm, given that the surface tension of soap solution at the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10-2 Nm-1? If an air bubble of the same dimension were formed at depth of 40.0 cm inside a container containing the soap solution (of relative density 1.20), what would be the pressure inside the bubble ? (1 atmospheric pressure is 1.01 × 105 Pa).
Answer:
Here, S = 2.5 × 10-2 Nm-1, r = 5.00 mm = 5 × 10-3 m.
Density of soap solution, ρ = 1.2 × 103 kg m-3
Excess pressure inside the soap bubble,
P = \(\frac{4 s}{r}=\frac{4 \times 2.5 \times 10^{-2}}{5 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 20 Pa
Excess pressure inside the air bubble, P’ = \(\frac{2S}{r}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 2.5 \times 10^{-2}}{5 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 10 Pa
Total pressure inside the air bubble at depth h in soap solution – ρ’ + atmospheric pressure + hρg
= 10 + 1.01 × 105 + 0.4 × 1.2 × 103 × 9.8
= 1.06 × 103 Pa

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 21.
A tank with a square base of area 1.0 m2 is divided by a vertical partition in the middle. The bottom of the partition has a small-hinged door of area 20 cm2. The tank is filled with water in one compartment and an acid (of relative density 1.7) in the other, both to a height of 4.0 m. compute the force necessary to keep the door close.
Answer:
For compartment containing water,
h1 = 4m, ρ1 = 103 kg m-3
The pressure exerted by water at the door provided at bottom
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 20
P1 = h1ρ1g
= 4 × 103 × 9.8
= 3.92 × 104 Pa
For compartment containing acid,
h2 = 4m,
ρ2 = 1.7 × 1.03 kg/m3
The pressure exerted by acid at the door provided at bottom.
P2 = h2ρ2g
= 4 × 1.7 × 103 × 9.8
= 6.664 × 104 Pa
∴ Difference of pressure = P2P1
= 6.664 × 104 – 3.92 × 104
= 2.774 × 104Pa
Given, area of door, A = 20cm2
= 20 × 10-4m2
Force on the door = difference in pressure × area
= (P2 – P1) × A
= (2.774 × 104) × (20 × 104)
= 54.88N
≈ 55N
To keep the door closed, the force equal to 55 N should be applied horizontally on the door from compartment containing water to that containing acid.

Question 22.
A manometer reads the pressure of a gas in an enclosure as shown in Fig. (a) when a pump removes some of the gas, the manometer reads as in Fig. (b) The liquid used in the manometers is mercury and the atmo-spheric pressure is 76 cm of mercury.
a) Give the absolute and gauge pressure of the gas in the enclosure for cases (a) and b) in units of cm of mercury.
b) How would the levels change in case (b) if 13.6 cm of water (immiscible with mercury, are poured into the right limb of the manometer? (Ignore the small change in the volume of the gas).
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 21
Answer:
a) Here, atomospheric presure, p = 76 cm of mercury
In Fig (a) Pressure head
h = + 20 cm
∴ Absolute pressure = p + h
= 76 + 20
= 96 cm of mercury
Gauge pressure = h = 20 cm of mercury.
In fig (b) pressure head, h = -18 cm
Absolute pressure = p + h
= 76+ (-18)
= 58 cm of mercury
Gauge pressure = h = -18cm of mercury.

b) Here 13.6 cm of water added in right limb is equiralent to
\(\frac{13.6}{13.6}\) = 1 cm of mercury column.
i.e., h1 = 1 cm of mercury column.
Now pressure at A, PA = P + h1 = 76 + 1
= 77 cm
Let the difference in mercury levels in the two lumbs be h1, then pressure at B,
PB = 58 + h1 or
As PA = PB = 77 = 58 + h1
h1 = 77 – 58 = 19 cm of mercury column.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 23.
Two vessels have the same base area but different shapes. The first vessel takes twice the volume of water that the second vessel requires to fill upto a particular comon height. Is the force exerted by the water on the base of the vessel the same in the two cases ? If so, why do the vessels filled with water to that same height give different readings on a weighing scale ?
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 22
Since the pressure depends upon the height of water column and the height of the water column in the two vessels of different shapes is the same.hence there will be same pressure due to water on the base of each vessel. As the base area of each vessel is same, hence there will be equal force acting on the two base areas due to water pressure. The water exerts force on the walls of the vessel also. In case, the walls of the vessel are not perpendicular to base, the force exerted by water on the walls has a net non-zero vertical component which is more in first vessel than that of second vessel. That is why, the two vessel:; filled with water to same vertical height show different readings on a weighing machine.

Question 24.
During blood transfusion the needle is inserted in a vein where the gauge pressure is 2000 Pa. At what height must the blood container be placed so that blood may just enter the vein ? Use the density of whole blood from Table 1.
Answer:
h = \(\frac{p}{p g}=\frac{200}{1.06 \times 10^3}\) × 9.8 = 0.1925 m
The blood may just enter the vein if the height at which the blood container be kept must be slightly greater than 0.1925 m i.e. 0.2 m.

Question 25.
In deriving Bernoulli’s equation, we equated the work done on the fluid in the tube to its change in the potential and kinetic energy.
a) What is the largest average velocity of blood flow in an artery of diameter 2 × 10-3 m if the flow must remain laminar ?
b) Do the dissipative forces become more important as the fluid velocity increases ? Discuss qualitatively.
Answer:
a) If dissipative forces are present, then some forces in liquid flow due to pressure different is spent against dissipative forces. Due to which the pressure drop becomes large.

b) The dissipative forces become more important with increasing flow velocity, because of tubulence.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 26.
a) What is the largest average velocity of blood flow in an artery of radius 2 × 10-3m if the flow must remain lanimar ?
Answer:
Here, r = 2 × 10-3m ;
D = 2r = 2 × 2 × 10-3 = 4 × 10-3m
η = 2.084 × 10-3 Pa s;
p = 1.06 × 103 kgm3
For flow tobe laminar, Nr = 2000
a) Now, Vc = \(\frac{N_r \eta}{\rho D}\)
= \(\frac{2000 \times\left(2.084 \times 10^{-3}\right)}{\left(1.06 \times 10^3\right) \times\left(4 \times 10^{-3}\right)}\) = 0.98m/s.

b) What is the corresponding flow rate ? (Take viscosity of blood to be 2.084 × 10-3 Pa s).
Answer:
Volume flowing per second = πr2Vc
= \(\frac{22}{7}\) × (2 × 10-3)2 × 0.98
= 1.23 × 10-5 m3s-1

Question 27.
A plane is in level flight at constant speed and each of its two wings has an area of 25m2. If the speed of the air is 180 km/h over the lower wing and 234 km/h over the upper wing surface, determine the plane’s mass. (Take air density to be 1 kg m-3)
Answer:
Here, V1 = 180 km/h = 50m/s, V2 = 234 km/ h = 65 m/s;
A = 2 × 25 = 50m2; P = 1kg/m3
P1 – P2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) p (V22 – V12)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 1 × (652 – 502)
Upward force = (P1 – P2) A = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (652 – 502) × 50N
As the plane is in level flight, so
mg = (P1 – P2)A
or m = \(\frac{\left(P_1-P_2\right) A}{g}=\frac{1 \times\left(65^2-50^2\right) \times 50}{2 \times 9.8}\)
= 4.4 × 103N

Question 28.
In Millikan’s oil drop experiment, what is the terminal speed of an uncharged drop of radius 2.0 × 10-5 m and density 1.2 × 103 kg m-3. Take the viscosity of air at the temperature of the experiment to be 1.8 × 105 Pa s. How much is the viscous force on the drop at that speed ? Neglect buoyancy of the drop due to air.
Answer:
Here, r = 2.0 × 10-5m; ρ = 1.2 × 103 kg m-3;
η = 1.8 × 105 Ns m-2
P0 = 0, V = ?, F = ?
Terminal velocity V = \(\frac{2 r^2\left(\rho-\rho_0\right) g}{9 \eta}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times\left(2.0 \times 10^{-5}\right)^2 \times\left(1.2 \times 10^3-0\right) \times 9.8}{9 \times 1.8 \times 10^{-5}}\)
= 5.8 × 10-2ms-1 = 5.8 cms-1
Viscous force on the drop, F = 6πηrv
= 6 × \(\frac{22}{7}\) × (1.8 × 10-5) × (2.0 × 10-5) × (5.8 × 10-2)
= 3.93 × 10-10N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 29.
Mercury has an angle of contact equal to 140° with soda lime glass. A narrow tube of radius 1.00 mm made of this glass is dipped in a trough containing mercury. By what amount does the mercury dip down in the tube relative to the liquid surface outside ? Surface tension of mercury at the temperature of the experiment is 0.456 N m-1. Density of mercury = 1.36 × 103 kg m-3.
Answer:
Here, θ = 140°, r = 1 × 10-3 m;
S = 0.465 Nm-1, ρ = 13.6 × 103 kg, h = ?]
Cos = 140° = – cos40° = -0.7660
Now h = \(\frac{2 S \cos \theta}{r \rho g}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 0.465 \times \cos 140^{\circ}}{10^{-3} \times 13.6 \times 10^3 \times 9.8}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 0.465 \times(-0.7660)}{10^{-3} \times 13.6 \times 10^3 \times 9.8}\)
= -5.34 × 10-3m
= -5.34mm
Negative value of h shows that the mercury levels is depressed in the tube.

Question 30.
Two narrow bores of diameters 3.0 mm and 6.0 mm are joined together to forma a U-tube open at both ends. If the U-tube contains water, what is the difference in its levels in the two limbs of the tube ? Surface tension of water at the temperature of the experiment is 7.3 × 10-2 N m-1. Take the angle of contact to be zero and density of water to be 1.0 × 103 kg m-3 (g = 9.8 m-2).
Answer:
Here, S = 7.3 -2 Nm-1, ρ = 1.0 × 103 kg m-3; θ = 0°
For narrow tube, 2r1 = 3.00 mm = 3 × 10-3 m or r1 =1.5 × 10-3 m .
For wider tube, 2r2 = 6.00 mm = 6 × 10-3 m or r2 = 3 × 10-3 m
let h1, h2 be the heights to which water rises in narrow tube and wider tube respectively.
Then, h1 = \(\frac{2 s \cos \theta}{r_1 \rho g}\) and h2 = \(\frac{2 s \cos \theta}{r_2 \rho g}\)
∴ Difference in levels of water in two limbs of U-tube is
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 23

Question 31.
a) It is known that density of air decreases with height y as
ρ = ρ0e-y/y0
Where p0 = 1.25 kg m-3 is the density at sea level, and y0 is a constant. This density variation is called the law of atmospheres. Obtain this law assuming that the temperature of atmosphere remains a constant (isothermal conditions). Also assume that the value of g remains constant.
Answer:
We know that the rate of decrease of density p of air is directly proportional to height y i.e.
\(\frac{-d \rho}{d y}\) ∝ p or \(\frac{d \rho}{d y}\) = – Kρ
Where K is a constant of proportionality. Here – ve sign shows that ρ decreases as y increases.
\(\frac{d y}{\rho}\) = – Kρ
Integrating it with in the conditions, as y changes fromotoy density changes from ρ0 to ρ, we have
\(\left.\int_{P_0}^p \frac{d P}{P}=-\int_0^y k d y=\left[\log e^p\right)\right]_{\rho_0}^p=k y\)
\(\frac{\rho}{\rho_0}=e^{-k y}=\rho=\rho_0 e^{-\mathrm{y} / y_0}\)

b) A large He balloon of volume 1425 m3 is used to lift a payload of 400 kg. Assum that the balloon maintains constant radius as it rises. How high does it rise ?
(Take y0 = 8000 m and PHe = 0.18 kgm-3)
Answer:
The balloon will rise to aheight, where its density becomes equal to the air at that height.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 24
y = 8000 × 1 = 8000 m
= 8 km.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
The two thigh bones (femurs), each of cross-sectional area 10 cm2 mass 40 kg. Estimate the average pressure sustained by the femurs.
Answer:
Total cross-sectional area of the femurs is A = 2 × 10 cm2 20 × 10-4 m2. The force acting on them is F = 40 kg wt = 400 N (taking g 10 ms-2). This force is acting vertically down and hence, normally on the femurs. Thus, the average pressure is
Pav = \(\frac{F}{A}\) = 2 × 105 N m-2

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
What is the pressure on a swimmer 10m below the surface of a lake ?
Answer:
Here
h = 10 m and p = 1000 kg m-3.
Take g 10 m S-2
From Equation = P = Pa + ρgh
P = Pa + ρgh
= 1.01 × 105 Pa + 1000 kgm-3 × 10m S-2 × 10 m
= 2.10 × 105 Pa
≈ 2 atm
This is a 100% increase in pressure from surface level. At a depth of 1 km the increase in pressure is 100 atm! Submarines are designed to withstand such enormous pressures.

Question 3.
The density of the atmosphere at sea level is 1.29 kg/m3. Assume that it does not change with altitude. Then how high would the atmosphee extend ?
Answer:
We use P – Pa = ρgh
ρgh = 1.29 kg m-3 × 9.8 ms2 × hm
= 1.01 × 105 pa
∴ h = 7989 m ≈ 8 km
In reality the density of air decreases with height. So does the value of g. The atmospheric cover extends with decreasing press-ure over 100 km. We should also note that the sea level atmospheric pressure is not always 760 mm of Hg. A drop in the Hg level by 10 mm or more is a sign of an approaching storm.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 4.
At a depth of 1000 m in an ocean
(a) What is the absolute pressure ?
b) What is the guage Pressure ?
c) Find the force acting on the window of area 20 cm × 20 cm of a submarine at this depth, the interior of which is maintained at sealevel atmospheric pressure. (The density of sea water is 1.03 × 103 kg m-3, g = 10ms-2.
Answer:
Here h = 1000 m and ρ = 1.03 × 103 kg m-3
a) From P2 – P1 = ρgh absolute pressure
P = Pa + ρgh
= 1.01 × 105 Pa + 1.03 × 103 kg m-3 × 10 m s-2 × 1000 m
= 104.01 × 105 Pa .
= 104 atm

b) Gauge pressure is P – Pa = ρgh = Pg
Pg = 1.03 × 103 kg m-3 × 10 m s2 × 1000 m
= 103 × 105 Pa
≈ 103 atm

c) The pressure outside the submarine is P = Pa + ρgh and the pressure inside it is Pa. Hence, the net pressure acting on the window is gauge pressure, Pg = ρgh. Since the area of the window is A = 0.04 m2, the force acting on it is
F = PgA = 103 × 105 Pa × 0.04m2
= 4.12 × 105 N
≈ 103 atm

Question 5.
Two syringes of different cross sections A1, A2 and lengths L1, L2 (without needles) filled with water are connected with a tightly fitted rubber tube filled with water. Diameters of the smaller piston and larger piston are 1.0 cm and 3.0 cm respectively.
a) Find the force exerted on the larger piston when a force of ION is applied to the smaller piston, b) if the smaller piston is pushed in through 6.0 cm,’how much does the larger piston move out ?
Answer:
a) Since pressure is transmitted undiminished throughout the fluid.
F2 = \(\frac{A_2}{A_1} F_1=\frac{\pi\left(3 / 2 \times 10^{-2} m\right)^2}{\pi\left(1 / 2 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2} \times 10 \mathrm{~N}\)
= 90 N

b) Water is considered to be perfectly incompressible. Volume covered by the move-ment of smaller piston inwards is equal to volume moved outwards due to the larger piston.
L1A1 = L2A2
L2 = \(\frac{A_1}{A_2} L_1=\frac{\pi\left(1 / 2 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2}{\pi\left(3 / 2 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2}\)
= × 6 × 10-2m
≃ 0.67 × 10-2m = 0.67 cm.
Note, atmospheric pressure is common to both pistons and has been ignored.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 6.
In a car lift compressed air exerts a force F1 on a small piston having a radius of 5.0 cm. This pressure is transmitted to a second piston or radius 15 cm (Fig). If the mass of the car to be lifted is 1350 kg, calculate F1. What is the pressure necessary to accomplish this task ? (g = 9.8 ms-2).
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 25
Answer:
Since pressure is transmitted undiminished throughout the fluid.
F1 = \(\frac{A_1}{A_2} F_2=\frac{\pi\left(5 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2}{\pi\left(15 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2}\)
= (1350 N × 9.8m s-2) = 1470 N
= 1.5 × 103N
The air pressure that will produce this force is
P = \(\frac{F_1}{A_1}=\frac{1.5 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~N}}{p\left(5 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2 \mathrm{~m}}\) = 1.9 × 105 Pa
This is almost double the atmospheric pressure.

Question 7.
Blooc velocity : The flow of blood in a large artery of an anesthetised dog is diverted through a Venturi meter. The wider part of the meter has a cross-sectional area equal to that of the artery. A = 8 mm2. The harrower part has an area = 4mn2. The pressure drop in the artery is 24 Pa. What is the speed of the blood in the artery ?
Answer:
We take the density of blood from whole blood to be 1.06 × 103 kg m3. The ratio of the areas is \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{a}}\right)\) = 2
Using v1 = \(\left(\sqrt{\frac{2 \rho_m g h}{\rho}}\right)\left(\left(\frac{A}{2}\right)^2-1\right)^{-1 / 2}\)
we obtain
v1 = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 24 \mathrm{pA}}{1060 \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~m}^{-3} \times\left(2^2-1\right)}=0.125 \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}\)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 8.
A fully loaded Boeing aircraft has a mass of 3.3 × 105 kg. Its total wing area is 500 m2. It is in level flight with a speed of 960 km/h. a) Estimate the pressure difference between the lower and upper surfaces of the wings (b) Estimate the fractional increase in the speed of the air on the upper surface of the wing relative to the lower surface. [The density of air is ρ = 1.2 kgm-3].
Answer:
a) The weight of’the Boeing aircraft is balanced by the upward force due to the pressure difference
∆P × A – 3.3 × 105 kg × 9.8 = mg.
∆P = (3.3 × 105 kg × 9.8 m s-2) / 500 m2
= 6.6 × 103 N m-2

b) We ignore the small height difference between the top and bottom sides in
P1 + (\(\frac{1}{2}\)) ρv12 + ρgh1 = P2 + (\(\frac{1}{2}\))ρv22 + ρgh2
The pressure difference between them is then
∆P = \(\frac{\rho}{2}\left(v_2^2-v_1^2\right)\)
Where v2 is the speed of air over the upper surface and v1 is the speed under the bottom surface.
(v2 – v1) = \(\frac{2 \Delta P}{\rho\left(v_2+v_1\right)}\)
Taking the average speed vav (v2 + v1)/2 – 960 km/h = 267 m s-1, we have
(v2 – v1)/vav = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{P}}{\rho v_{\mathrm{av}}^2}\) ≈ 0.08
The speed of air above the wing needs to be only 8% higher than that below.

Question 9.
A metal block of area 0.10 m2 is connected to a 0.010 kg mass via a string that passes over an ideal pulley (considered massless and frictionless), as in Fig. A liquid with a film thickness of 0.30 mm is placed between the block and the table. When released, the block moves to the right with a constant speed of 0.085 ms-1. Find the co-efficient of viscosity of the liquid.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 26
Answer:
The metal block moves to the right because of the tension in the string. The tension T is equal in magnitude to the weight of the suspended mass m. Thus the shear force F is
F = T = mg = 0.010 kg × 9.8 ms-2
= 9.8 × 10-2 N
Shear stress on the fluid = F/A = \(\frac{9.8 \times 10^{-2}}{0.10}\)
Strain rate = \(\frac{v}{l}=\frac{0.085 \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}{0.3 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~m}}\)
η = \(\frac{\text { stress }}{\text { strain rate }}\)
= \(\frac{\left(9.8 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~N}\right)\left(0.30 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~m}\right)}{\left(0.085 \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}\right)\left(0.10 \mathrm{~m}^2\right)}\)
= 3.45 × 10-3 Pa s

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 10.
The terminal velocity of a copper ball of radius 2.0 mm falling through a tank of oil at 20°C is 6.5 cm s-1. Compute the viscosity of the oil at 20°C. Density of oil is 1.5 × 103 kg m-3, density of copper is 8.9 × 103 kg m-3.
Answer:
We have vt = 6.5 × 10-2 ms-1,
a = 2 × 10-3m,
g = 9.8 ms-2, ρ = 8.9 × 103 kg m-3,
σ = 1.5 × 103 kg m-3. From
vt = \(\frac{2 a^2(\rho-\sigma) g}{(9 \eta)}\)
η = \(\frac{2}{9} \times \frac{\left(2 \times 10^{-3}\right) \mathrm{m}^2 \times 9.8 \mathrm{~ms}^{-2}}{6.5 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}\) × 7.4 × 103 kg m-3
= 9.9 × 10-1 kg m-1s-1

Question 11.
a) The flow rate of water from a tap of diameter 1.25 cm is L7min. The co-efficient of viscosity of water is 10-3 Pa s.
b) After sometime the flow rate is increased to 3L / min. Characterise the flow for both the flow rates.
Answer:
a) Let the speed of the flow be v and the diameter of the tap be d = 1.25 cm. The volume of the water flowing out per second is
Q = v × π d2/4
v = 4Q / d2 π
We then estimate the Reynolds number to be
Re = 4vQ / πdη
= 4 × 103 kg m-3 × Q / (3.14 × 1.25 × 10-2 m × 10-3 Pa S)
= 1.019 × 108 m-3 SQ
Since initially (a)
Q = 0.48 L/min = 8cm3/s
= 8 × 10-6 m3 s-1, we obtain,
Re = 815
Since this is below 1000, the flow is steady.
After some time

b) When Q = 3L/ min = 50 cm3, s = 5 × 10-5 m3 s-1 we obtain,
Re = 5095
The flow will be turbulent. You may carry out an experiment in your washbasin to determine the ransition from laminar to turbulent flow.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 12.
The lower end of a capillary tube of diameter 2.00 mm is dipped 8.00 cm below the surface of water in a beaker. What is the pressure required in the tube in order to blow a hemispherical bubble at its end in water ? The surface tension of water at temperature of the experiments is 7.30 × 10-2 Nm1. 1 atmospheric pressure = 1.01 × 105 Pa, density of water = 1000 kg/m3, g = 9.8 × ms-2. Also calculate the excess pressure.
Answer:
The excess pressure in a bubble of gas in a liquid is given by 2S / r, where S is the surface tension of the liquid gas interface. You should note there is only one liquid surface in this case. (For a bubble of liquid in a gas, there are two liquid surfaces, so the formula for excess pressure in that case is 4S / r.) The radius of the bubble is r. Now the pressure outside the bubble, within water, P0 equals atmospheric pressure plus the pressure due to 8.00 cm of water column. That is
P0 = (1.01 × 105 Pa + 0.08 m × 1000 kg m-3 × 9.80 m s-2)
= 1.01784 × 105 Pa. .
Therefore, the pressure inside the bubble is
P1 = P0 + 2S / r (as r = 1 mm)
= 1.01784 × 105 Pa + (2 × 7.3 × 10-2 Pa m/10-3 m)
= (1.01784 + 0.00146) × 105 Pa
= 1.02 × 105 Pa
where the radius of the bubble is taken to be equal to the radius of the capillary tube, since the bubble is hemispherical ! (The answer has been rounded off to three significant figures). The excess pressure in the bubble is 146 Pa from (1.0178 + 0.00146) × 105 Pa.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 11th Lesson Electromagnetic Waves Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material 11th Lesson Electromagnetic Waves

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is the average wavelength of X-rays ? (A.P. Mar. ’16 )
Answer:
Wavelength range of X-rays is from 10-8m(10nm) to 10-13 m (10-4 nm).
Average wavelength of X – rays = \(\frac{10+0.0001}{2}\) = 5.00005nm.

Question 2.
Give any one use of infrared rays. (T.S. Mar. ’19)
Answer:

  1. Infrared radiation plays an important role in maintaining the Earth warm.
  2. Infrared lamps are used in physical therapy.
  3. Infrared detectors are used in Earth Satellites.
  4. These are used in taking photographs during the conditions of fog, smoke etc.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 3.
If the wavelength of electromagnetic radiation is doubled, what happens to the energy of photon ? (T.S. Mar. ’16)
Answer:
Photon energy (E) = hv = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)
E ∝ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\)
Given λ1 = λ, λ2 = 2λ, E1 = E
\(\frac{\mathrm{E}_1}{\mathrm{E}_2}\) = \(\frac{\lambda_2}{\lambda_1}\)
\(\frac{E}{\mathrm{E}_2}\) = \(\frac{2 \lambda}{\lambda}\)
E2 = E/2
∴ The energy of photon reduces to half of its initial value.

Question 4.
What is the principle of production of electromagnetic waves ?
Answer:
If the charge is accelerated both the magnetic field and electric field will change with space and time, then electromagnetic waves are produced.

Question 5.
What is the ratio of speed of infrared rays and ultraviolet rays in vacuum ?
Answer:
The ratio of speed of infrared rays and ultraviolet rays in vacuum is 1 : 1.
All electromagnetic waves travel with same speed 3 × 108 m /s in vacuum.

Question 6.
What is the relation between the amplitudes of the electric and magnetic fields in free space for an electromagnetic wave ?
Answer:
E0 = CB0
Where E0 = Amplitude of electric field.
B0 = Amplitude of magnetic field.
C = velocity of light.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 7.
What are the applications of microwaves ? (T.S. Mar. ’15)
Answer:

  1. Microwaves are used in Radars.
  2. Microwaves are used for cooking purposes.
  3. A radar using microwave can help in detecting the speed of automobile while in motion.

Question 8.
Microwaves are used in Radars, why ? (Mar. ’14)
Answer:
As microwaves are of smaller wavelengths, hence they can be transmitted as a beam signal in a particular direction. Microwaves do not bend around the comers of any obstacle coming in their path.

Question 9.
Give two uses of infrared rays. (A.P. Mar. ’19)
Answer:

  1. Infrared rays are used for producing dehydrated fruits.
  2. They are used in the secret writings on the ancient walls.
  3. They are used in green houses to keep the plants warm.

Question 10.
The charging current for a capacitor is 0.6 A. What is the displacement current across its plates?
Answer:
i = charging current for a capacitor = 0.6 A
i = id = \(\varepsilon_0 \frac{\mathrm{d} \phi_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
∴ i = i = id = 0.6A
∴ Displacement current (id) = 0.6 A.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What does an electromagnetic wave consists of ? On what factors does its velocity in vacuum depend ?
Answer:
Maxwell concluded that the variation in electric and magnetic field vectors perpendicular to each other leads to the production of electromagnetic waves in space. They can travel in space even without any material medium. These waves are called electromagnetic waves.

According to Maxwell, electromagnetic waves are those waves in which there are sinusoidal variation of electric and magnetic field vectors at right angles to each other as well as at right angles to the direction of wave propagation. Thus electomagnetic waves have transverse nature.

Electric field Ex = E0 Sin (kz – ωt)
Magnetic field By = B0 sin (kz – ωt)
Where K is propagation constant (K = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\))
The velocity of electromagnetic waves C = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mu_0 \varepsilon_0}}\)

Velocity of E.M waves depends on

  1. Permeability in free space (μ0).
  2. Permittivity in free space (ε0).

Velocity of e.m waves is 3 × 108 m / s.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 2.
What is Greenhouse effect and its contribution towards the surface temperature of earth ?
Answer:
Green house effect: Temperature of the earth increases due to the radiation emitted by the earth is trapped by atmospheric gases like CO2, CH4, N2, Chlorofluoro carbons etc is called green house effect.

  1. Radiation from the sun enters the atmosphere and heat the objects on the earth. These heated objects emit infrared rays.
  2. These rays are reflected back to Earth’s surface and trapped in the Earth’s atmosphere. Due to this temperature of the earth increases.
  3. The layers of carbon dioxide (CO2) and low lying clouds prevent infrared rays to escape Earth’s atmosphere.
  4. Since day-by-day the amount of carbondioxide in the atmosphere increases, more infrared rays are entrapped in the atmosphere.
  5. Hence the temperature of the Earth’s surface increases day by day.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Give the brief history of discovery of knowledge of electromagnetic waves.
Answer:

  1. Faraday from his experimental study of electromagnetic induction magnetic field changing with time, gives rise to an electric field.
  2. Maxwell in 1865 from his theoritical study concluded that, an electric field changing with time gives rise to magnetic field.
  3. It is a consequence of the displacement current being a source of magnetic field.
  4. It means a change in electric (or) magnetic field with time produces the other field.
  5. Maxwell concluded that the variation in electric and magnetic field vectors perpendicular to each other leads to the production of electromagnetic waves in space.
  6. These electromagnetic waves travel in space without any material medium.
  7. Both electric and magnetic fields vary with time and space and have the same frequency.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves 1
  8. The electric field vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}\) and magnetic field vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) are vibrating along y and z axis and propagation of electromagnetic waves along x – axis.
  9. Maxwell found that the electromagnetic waves travel in vacuum with a speed is given by
    AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves 2
    Where μ0 = 4π × 10-7 H/m = permeability in free space.
    ε0 = 8.85 × 10-12 c2 N-1 m-2 = permittivity in free space.
  10. The velocity of electromagnetic waves in a medium is given by v = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mu \varepsilon}}\)
  11. Maxwell also concluded that electromagnetic waves are transverse in nature.
  12. In 1888 Hertz demonstrated experimentally the production and detection of E.M waves using spark oscillator.
  13. In 1895 Jagadish Chandra Bose was able to produce E.M waves of wavelength 5m.m to 25 m.m.
  14. 1899 Marconi was the first to establish a wireless communication at a distance of about 50 km.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 2.
State six characteristics of electromagnetic waves. What is Greenhouse effect ?
Answer:
Characteristics (or) properties of electromagnetic waves :

  1. Electromagnetic waves do not require any material medium for their propagation. They propagate in vacuum as well as in a medium.
  2. Speed of E.M. waves in free space (or) vacuum is given by
    C = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mu_0 \varepsilon_0}}\) = 3 × 108 m/s.
  3. Speed of E.M waves in a medium is given by
    v = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mu \varepsilon}}\)
  4. Electromagnetic waves are transverse in nature.
    Electric field \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}\) and magnetic field \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) which constitute the E.M waves an mutually perpendicular to each other as well as perpendicular to the direction of propagation of the wave.
  5. Electromagnetic waves are self sustaining electric and magnetic field oscillations in space.
  6. Electromagnetic waves transport energy.
    Poynting vector (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)) = \(\frac{1}{\mu_0}(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}})\)
  7. Relation between electric field vector E and magnetic field vector g in vacuum is given by
    C = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_0}{\mathrm{~B}_0}\)
  8. Electromagnetic waves are not deflected by magnetic and electric fields.
  9. Electromagnetic waves can be reflected, refracted, interferenced, diffracted and polarised.
  10. Electromagnetic wave follow the superposition principle.
  11. Average electric energy density of E.M wave is given by
    Uav = UE + UB
    Uav = \(\frac{1}{2} \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{E}^2\) + \(\frac{1}{2} \cdot \frac{\mathrm{B}^2}{\mu_0}\)
    Uav = 2UE = 2UB
  12. Intensity of an E.M waves depends on its average energy density.
    I = \(\frac{1}{2} \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{C} \mathrm{E}_0^2\)
  13. E.M. waves carry momentum and exert radiation pressure is given by
    P = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A}}\) = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~A}} \frac{\mathrm{dp}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{\text { Intensity (I) }}{C}\)

Green house effect:
The temperature of the Earth increases due to radiation emitted by the Earth.is trapped by atmospheric gases like CO2, CH4, N2O, chlorofluoro carbons etc is called green house effect.

Textual Exercises

Question 1.
The figure shows a capacitor made of two circular plates each of radius 12cm, and separated by 5.0 cm. The capacitor is being charged by an external source (not shown in the figure). The charging current is constant and equal to 0.15A.
a) Calculate the capacitance and the rate of charge of potential difference between the plates.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves 3
b) Obtain the displacement current across the plates.
c) Is Kirchhoff’s first rule (junction rule) valid at each plate of the capacitor ? Explain.
Answer:
Given ε0 = 8.85 × 10-12 C2 N-1 m-2
Here, R = 12cm = 0.12m, d = 5.0mm = 5 × 10-3m, I = 0.15A
Area, A = πR2 = 3.14 × (0.12)2m2

a) We know that capacity of a parallel plate capacitor is given by
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves 4
b) Displacement current is equal to conduction current i.e., 0.15 A.
c) Yes, Kirchhoffs first rule is valid at each plate of the capacitor provided. We take the current to be the sum of the conduction and displacement currents.

Question 2.
A parallel plate capacitor in the figure made of circular plates each of radius R = 6.0 cm has a capacitance C = 100 pF. The capacitor is connected to a 230 V ac supply with a (angular) frequency of 300 rad s-1.
a) What is the rms value of the conduction current ?
b) Is the conduction current equal to the displacement current ?
c) Determine the amplitude of B at a point 3.0 cm from the axis between the plates.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves 5
Answer:
a) Irms = \(\frac{E_{\mathrm{fms}}}{X_c}\) = \(\frac{E_{\mathrm{rms}}}{\frac{1}{\omega C}}\) = Erms × ωC
∴ Irms = 230 × 300 × 100 × 10-12 = 6.9 × 10-6A = 6.9µA

b) Yes, I = Id where I is steady d.c or a.c. This is shown below
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves 6

c) We know, B = \(\frac{\mu_0}{2 \pi} \times \frac{\pi}{R^2} \times I_d\)
The formula is valid even if Id is oscillating. As Id = I, therefore
B = \(\frac{\mu_0 r \mathrm{I}}{2 \pi \mathrm{R}^2}\)
If I = I0, the maximum value of current, then
Amplitude of B = max. value of B = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{rI}_0}{2 \pi \mathrm{R}^2}\) = \(\frac{\mu_0 \mathrm{r} \sqrt{2} \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{rms}}}{2 \pi \mathrm{R}^2}\)
= \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 0.03 \times \sqrt{2} \times 6.9 \times 10^{-6}}{2 \times 3.14 \times(0.06)^2}\) = 1.63 × 10-11T.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 3.
What physical quantity is the same for X-rays of wavelength 10-10m, red light of wavelength 6800 A and radiowaves of wavelength 500m?
Answer:
The speed in vacuum is same for all the given wavelengths, which is 3 × 108 m/s.

Question 4.
A plane electromagnetic wave travels In vacuum aloñg z-direction. What can you say about the directions of its electric and magnetic field vectors ? If the frequency of the wave is 30 MHz, what is its wavelength?
Answer:
In electromagnetic wave, the electric field vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}\) and magnetic field vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) show their variations perpendicular to the direction of propagation of wave as well as perpendicular to each other. As the electromagnetic wave is travelling along z – direction, hence \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) show their variation in x – y plane.
wave length λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{v}}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}}{30 \times 10^6 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}\) = 10m

Question 5.
A radio can tune into any station in the 7.5 MHz to 12MHz band. What is-the corresponding wavelength band?
Answer:
λ1 = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{7.5 \times 10^6}\) = 40m
λ2 = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{12 \times 10^6}\) = 25m
Thus wavelength band is 40m to 25m.

Question 6.
A charged particle oscillates about its mean equilibrium position with a frequency of 109 Hz. What is the frequency of the electromagnetic waves produced by the oscillator ?
Answer:
The frequency of electromagnetic wave is same as that of oscillating cliarged particle about its equilibrium position; which is 109Hz.

Question 7.
The amplitude of the magnetic field part of a harmonic electromagnetic wave in vacuum is B0 = 510 nT. What is the amplitude of the electric field part of the wave ?
Answer:
Here, B0 = 510nT = 510 × 10-9T
E0 = CB0 = 3 × 108 × 510 × 10-9 = 153 NC-1.

Question 8.
Suppose that the electric field amplitude of an electromagnetic wave is E0 = 120 N/C and that its frequency is v = 50.0 MHz.
(a) Determine. B0, ω, k, and λ.
(b) Find expressions for E and B.
Answer:
a)
B0 = \(\frac{E_0}{\mathrm{c}}\) = \(\frac{120}{3 \times 10^8}\) = 4 × 10-7 T
ω = 2πv = 2 × 3.14 × (50 × 106) = 3.14 × 108 rad/s
K = \(\frac{\omega}{\mathrm{C}}\) = \(\frac{3.14 \times 10^8}{3 \times 10^8}\) = 1.05 rad/m
λ = \(\frac{C}{V}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{50 \times 10^6}\) = 6.00 m

b) Expression for \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}\) is E = E0 sin (kx – ωt)
= (120 N/c) Sin [(1.05 rad/m) x – (3.14 × 108 rad /s)t] \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\)
Expression for \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is B = B0 sin (kx – ωt)
= (4 × 10-7 T) sin [(1.05 rad/m) x – (3.14 × 108 rad/s)t] \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\).

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 9.
The terminology of different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum is given in the text. Use the formula E = hv (for energy of a quantum of radiation: photon) and obtain the photon energy in units of eV for different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum, in what way are the different scales of photon energies that you obtain related to the sources of electromagnetic radiation ?
Answer:
Energy of a photon of frequency v is given by E = hv joules = \(\frac{\mathrm{hv}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{ev}}\)
Where h = 6.6 × 10-34 J. The energy of photon of different parts of electromagnetic spectrum in joules and eV are shown in table below, along with their sources of origin.
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves 7
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves 8

Question 10.
In a plane electromagnetic wave, the electric field oscillates sinusoidally at a frequency of 2.0 × 1010 Hz and amplitude 48 V m-1.
a) What is the wavelength of the wave ?
b) What is the amplitude of the oscillating magnetic field ?
c) Show that the average energy density of the E field equals the average energy density of the B field. [C = 3 × 108 ms-1].
Answer:
Here, v = 2.0 × 1010Hz, E0 = 48 Vm-1, C = 3 × 108 m/s

a) wavelength of the wave, λ = \(\frac{C}{v}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{2.0 \times 10^{10}}\) = 1.5 × 10-2 m

b) Amplitude of oscillating magnetic field,
B0 = \(\frac{E_0}{C}\) = \(\frac{48}{3 \times 10^8}\) = 1.6 × 10-7T

c) For average energy density
UE = \(\frac{1}{2} \varepsilon_0 \mathrm{E}_0^2\) …… (1)
We know that \(\frac{E_0}{B_0}\) = C
Putting in Eq (1)
UE = \(\frac{1}{4} \varepsilon_0 \cdot C^2 \mathrm{~B}_0^2\) …. (2)
Speed of Electro magnetic waves, C = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mu_0 \mathrm{E}_0}}\)
Putting in Eq (2) We get.
UE = \(\frac{1}{4} \varepsilon_0 B_0^2 \cdot \frac{1}{\mu_0 \varepsilon_0}\)
UE = \(\frac{1}{4} \cdot \frac{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{O}}^2}{\mu_0}=\frac{\mathrm{Bo}^2}{2 \mu_0}\) = μB
Thus, the average energy density of E field equals the average energy density of B field.

Additional Exercises

Question 1.
Suppose that the electric field part of an electromagnetic wave in vacuum is E = {(3.1 N/C) cos [(1.8 rad/m) y + {5.4 × 106 rad /s} t]} i.
a) What is the direction of propagation ?
b) What is the wavelength λ ?
c) What is the frequency v ?
d) What is the amplitude of the magnetic field part of the wave ?
e) Write an expression for the magnetic field part of the wave.
Answer:
a) From the given question it is clear that direction of motion of e.m. wave is along negative y direction i.e along – \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\)

b) Comparing the given question with equation E = E0 cos (ky + ωt).
We have, K = 1.8 rad/m, ω = 5.4 × 108 rad/s, E0 = 3.1 N/C
λ = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{k}}\) = \(\frac{2 \times(22 / 7)}{1.8}\) = 3.492 m ≈ 3.5m

c) V = \(\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}\) = \(\frac{5.4 \times 10^8}{2 \times\left(\frac{22}{7}\right)}\) = 85.9 × 106 ≈ 86MHz

d) B0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_0}{\mathrm{C}}\) = \(\frac{3.1}{3 \times 10^8}\) = 1.03 × 10-8T ≈ 10.3nT

e) B = B0 cos (ky + ωt) \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) = (10.3nT) cos [(1.8 rad/m/y + (5.4 × 108 rad / s)t] \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)

Question 2.
About 5% of the power of a 100 W light bulb is converted to visible radiation. What is the average intensity of visible radiation
a) at a distance of lm from the bulb ?
b) at a distance of 10 m ?
Assume that the radiation is emitted isotropically and neglect reflection.
Answer:
a) Intensity,
AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves 9
b) I = \(\frac{100 \times(5 / 100)}{4 \pi(10)^2}\) = 4 × 10-3 W/m2

Question 3.
Use the formula λm T = 0.29 cm K to obtain the characteristic temperature ranges for different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum. What do the numbers that you obtain tell you ?
Answer:
We know, every body at given temperature T1 emits radiations of all wavelengths in certain range. For a black body, the wavelength corresponding to maximum intensity of radiation at a given temperature.
λm T = 0.29cmk or T = \(\frac{0.29}{\lambda_{\mathrm{m}}}\)
For λm = 10-6m = 10-4cm, T = \(\frac{0.29}{10^{-4}}\) = 2900 k.

Temperature for other wavelengths can be similarly found. These numbers tell us the temperature ranges required for obtaining radiations in different parts of e.m spectrum. Thus to obtain visible radiation, say, λm = 5 × 10-5cm, the source should have a temperature
T = \(\frac{0.29}{5 \times 10^{-5}}\) = 6000 k
It is to be noted that, a body at lower temperature will also produce this wavelength but not with maximum intensity.

Question 4.
Given below are some famous numbers associated with electromagnetic radiations in different contexts in physics. State the part of the electromagnetic spectrum to which each belongs.
a) 21 cm (wavelength emitted by atomic hydrogen in interstellar space).
b) 1057 MHz (frequency of radiation arising from two close energy levels in hydrogen; known as Lamb shift).
c) 2.7 K [temperature associated with the isotropic radiation filling all space-thought to be a relic of the ‘big-bang’ origin of the universe].
d) 5890 A – 5896 A [double lines of sodium]
e) 14.4 keV [energy of a particular transition in 57Fe nucleus associated with a famous high resolution spectroscopic method (Mossbauer spectroscopy).
Answer:
a) This wavelength corresponds to radiowaves.

b) This frequency also corresponds to radiowaves.

c) Given T = 2.7 K As λm T = 0.29cm °k
∴ λm = \(\frac{0.29}{\mathrm{~T}}\) = \(\frac{0.29}{2.7}\) ≈ 0.11cm
This wavelength corresponds to microwave region of the electromagnetic spectrum.

d) This wavelength lies in the visible region of the electromagnetic spectrum.

e) Here, Energy E = 14.4KeV = 14.4 × 103 × 1.6 × 10-19J
As E = hv
∴ v = \(\frac{E}{h}\) = \(\frac{14.4 \times 10^3 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}\) ≈ 3 × 1011 MHz
This frequency lies in the X-ray region of electromagnetic spectrum.

AP Inter 2nd Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Electromagnetic Waves

Question 5.
Answer the following questions :
a) Long distance radio broadcasts use short-wave bands. Why ?
b) It is neccessary to use satellites for long distance TV transmission. Why ?
c) Optical and radio telescopes are built on the ground, but X-ray astronomy is possible only from satellites orbiting the earth. Why ?
d) The small ozone layer on top of the stratosphere is crucial for human survival. Why ?
e) If the earth did not have an atmosphere, would its average surface temperature be higher or lower than what it is now ?
f) Some scientists have predicted that a global nuclear war on the earth would be followed by a severe ‘nuclear winter’ with a devastating effect on life on earth. What might be the basis of this prediction ?
Answer:
a) It is so because ionosphere reflects the waves in these bands.

b) Yes, television signals being of high frequency are not reflected by ionosphere, Therefore to reflect them satellites are needed. That is why, satellites are used for long distance TV transmission.

c) Optical and radiowaves can penetrate the atmosphere where as X-rays being of much smaller wavelength are absorbed by the atmosphere. That is why we can work with optical and radio telescopes on earth’s surface but X-ray astronomical telescopes must be used on the satellite orbiting above the earth’s atmosphere.

d) The small ozone layer present on the top of the stratosphere absorbs most of ultraviolet radiations from the sun which are dangerous and cause genetic damage to living cells, prevents them from reaching the earth’s surface and thus helps in the survival of life.

e) The temperature of earth would be lower because the green house effect of atmosphere would be absent.

f) The clouds by a global nuclear war would perhaps cover most parts of sky preventing solar light from reaching many parts of globe. This would cause a winter.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 12th Lesson Thermal Properties of Matter Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 12th Lesson Thermal Properties of Matter

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between heat and temperature. [T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Heat

  1. It is a form of energy.
  2. It is the cause on the body.
  3. It is determined with calorimeter.
  4. It’s unit is Joule and Calories.

Temperature

  1. It is a degree of hotness or coldness of a body.
  2. It is an effect on a body.
  3. It is measured with thermometer.
  4. It’s unit is degree’Celsius or Kelvin or degree Fahrenheit.

Question 2.
What are the lower and upper fixing points in Celsius and Fahrenheit scales ? [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
In Celsius scale, lower fixed point is ice point or 0°C and upper fixed point is steam point or 100°C. In Fahrenheit scale, lower fixed point is 32°F and upper fixed point is 212°F.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
Do the values of coefficients of expansion differ, when the temperatures are measured on Centigrade scale or on Fahrenheit scale ?
Answer:
Yes. The coefficients of expansion depends on scale of temperature because
\(\frac{\alpha}{{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}=\frac{9}{5} \alpha /{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{F}\)

Question 4.
Can a substance contract on heating ? Give an example.
Answer:
Yes. Rubber, type metal, cast iron contract on heating.

Question 5.
Why gaps are left between rails on a railway track ? [A.P. Mar. 17, 16]
Answer:
The length of the rails increases in summer due to high temperature. Therefore a gap is left to allow this expansion.

Question 6.
Why do liquids have no linear and areal expansions ?
Answer:
Liquids occupy the same shape of vessel. They do not have individual length and area. Hence, liquids have no linear and areal expansions.

Question 7.
What is latent heat of fusion ?
Answer:
The amount of heat per unit mass required to change a substance from solid into liquid at the same temperature and pressure is called the latent heat of fusion (Lf).

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 8.
What is latent heat of vapourisation ? [Mar. 13]
Answer:
The amount of heat per unit mass required to change a substance from the liquid to the vapour state at the same temperature and pressure is called the latent heat of vaporisation (Lv).

Question 9.
What is specific gas constant ? Is it same for all gases ?
Answer:
Universal gas constant per molecular mass is called specific gas constant.
i.e., r = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{m}}\). No, it is different for different gases.

Question 10.
What are the units and dimensions of specific gas constant ?
Answer:
The units of specific gas constant is J/Kg/K. Dimensional formula is (m0.L2t-2K1).

Question 11.
Why utensils are coated black ? Why the bottom of the utensils are made of copper ?
Answer:

  1. Utensils are coated black, because it is a good absorber of heat.
  2. Copper is a good conductor of heat. So, copper is used at the bottom of cooking utensils.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 12.
State Weins displacement law. [A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
The wavelength (λm) corresponding to maximum energy emitted by a black body is inversely proportional to its absolute temperature
i.e., λm ∝ \(\frac{1}{T}\)

Question 13.
Ventilators are provided in rooms just below the roof. Why ? [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Ventilators are provided in rooms just below the roof, because the hot air escapes out and fresh air enters into the rooms due to convection.

Question 14.
Does a body radiate heat at 0 K ? Does it radiate heat at 0°C ?
Answer:

  1. No. A body does not radiate heat at 0k.
  2. Yes. A body radiate heat at 0°C.

Question 15.
State the different modes of transmission of heat. Which of these modes require medium ?
Answer:
The different modes of transmission are : 1) conduction 2) convection and 3) radiation.
Among three modes conduction and convection require medium.

Question 16.
Define coefficient of thermal conductivity and temperature gradient.
Answer:
Coefficient of thermal conductivity : It is defined as the quantity of heat energy flowing per second between the opposite faces of cube of unit side, which are maintained at unit temperature difference.
Temperature gradient: The change of temperature per unit length of conductor is called temperature gradient.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 17.
What is thermal resistance of a conductor ? On what factors does it depend ?
Answer:
The resistance offered by the conductor for the flow of heat is called thermal resistance (R) of the conductor. R = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{kA}}\). It depends on

  1. The nature of the material, i.e., thermal conductivity (K).
  2. d; length of conductor along which heat flows and
  3. A; area of cross section of the conductor.

Question 18.
State the units and dimensions of coefficient of convection.
Answer:
The unit of coefficient of convection is, wm-2k-1.
Dimensional formula (m.L0T3θ-1).

Question 19.
Define emissive power and emissivity ?
Answer:
Emissive power : The energy flux emitted by unit surface area of a radiating body is known as emissive power (eλ).

Missivity (e): It is defined as the ratio of the emissive power of the body to that of black body at the same temperature.

Question 20.
What is greenhouse effect ? Explain global warming. [A.P. Mar. 15, 13]
Answer:
Greenhouse effect: When the earth receives sun light, it gets heated up and emits infrared radiation into air. CO2, CH4, N2O, O3, Chlorofluoro carbon (green house gases) present in the air absorbs the heat content of infrared radiation and keeps the earth warm. This is called green house effect.

Global warming : As CO2 content increases, more heat is retained in the atmosphere and the temperatures all over the world increases. This is called global warming.

Effects : a) Polar ice caps melt and fed more water in rivers and seas results in severe floods, b) In some areas, water resources dry up leading to drought conditions.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 21.
Define absorptive power of a body. What is the absorptive power of a perfect black body ?
Answer:
Absorptive power : At a given temperature and wavelength, the ratio of the amount of radiant energy absorbed to the amount of radiant energy incident in a wavelength range is called the absorptive power at that temperature and wavelength. Absorptive power of a perfect black body is 1.

Question 22.
State Newton’s law of cooling. [A.P. Mar. 18, 16; T.S. Mar. 18]
Answer:
The rate of loss of heat is directly proportional to the difference in temperature between the body and its surroundings provided the temperature difference is small. i.e., – \(\frac{\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}} \alpha\left(\mathrm{T}_B-\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{S}}\right)\)

Question 23.
State the conditions under which Newton’s law of cooling is applicable.
Answer:

  1. Loss of heat is negligible by conduction and only when it is due to convection.
  2. Loss of heat occurs in a streamlined flow of air i.e., forced convection.
  3. Temperature of the body is uniformly distributed over it.

Question 24.
The roof of buildings are often painted white during summer. Why ? [T.S. Mar. 17, 15]
Answer:
The roof of buildings are painted white during summer, because it reflects more heat radiations and absorbs less heat radiations. Hence we feel comfort inside the house.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain Celsius and Fahrenheit scales of temperature. Obtain the relation between Celsius and Fahrenheit scales of temperature.
Answer:
Centigrade (Celsius) scale of temperature: In the Celsius scale of temperature, the lower fixed point is called the ice point and is assigned the value 0°C. The upper fixed point is called the steam point and is assigned the value 100°C. The interval between these two points (i.e., 100°C – 0 = 100°C) is subdivided into 100 equal parts each one corresponding to 1°C.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 1
Fahrenheit scale of temperature : In the Fahrenheit scale of temperature, the lower fixed point is the ice point and is assigned a value 32°F and the upper fixed point is the staempoint and is assigned a value 212°F. The interval between these two points (i.e., 212°F – 32°F = 180°F) is subdivided into 180 equal parts, each one corresponding to 1°F.

Fahrenheit scale of temperature : In the Fahrenheit scale of temperature, the lower fixed point is the ice point and is assigned a value 32°F and the upper fixed point is the staempoint and is assigned a value 212°F. The interval between these two points (i.e., 212°F – 32°F = 180°F) is subdivided into 180 equal parts, each one corresponding to 1°F.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 2
Relation between Celsius and Fahreinheit scales of temperature:
Difference of 100 Celsius degrees = Difference of 180 Fahrenheit degress
When the temperature of a body is measured on both the Celsius and Fahrenheit scales, let the readings be tC and tF respectively. Then
\(\frac{t_c-0}{t^{100}}=\frac{t_F-32}{180} \Rightarrow \frac{t_C}{5}=\frac{t_F-32}{9}\)
C = \(\frac{5}{9}\) (F – 32)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 2.
Two identical rectangular strips, one of copper and the other of steel, are riveted together to form a compound bar. What will happen on heating ?
Answer:
Bimetallic strip:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 3
Two similar strips of copper and steel are revitted side by side as a compound strip called bimetallic strip. It is straight at ordinary temperatures. When the bimetallic strip is heated, copper expands more than steel. So, it bends with copper on convex side. When the bimetallic strip is cooled below room temperature, copper contracts more than steel and it bends with copper on concave side. Bimetallic strip is used in refrigerators, automatic iron, fire alarm etc.

Question 3.
Pendulum clocks generally go fast in winter and slow in summer. Why ?
Answer:
The time period of a pendulum at t1°C is T1 = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{L_1}{g}}\) ………….. (1)
Where L1 is length of pendulum at t1°C.
If L2 is length of pendulum at t2°C,
then T2 = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{L_2}{g}}\) ………………. (2)
\(\frac{(2)}{(1)}\) gives \(\frac{T_2}{T_1}=\sqrt{\frac{L_2}{L_1}}=\sqrt{\frac{L_1(1+\alpha t)}{L_1}}\)
Where a is the linear coefficient of expansion of pendulum clock. Where t = t2 – t1
\(\frac{T_2}{T_1}=\sqrt{(1+\alpha t)}=(1+\alpha t)^{\frac{1}{2}}\)
\(\frac{T_2}{T_1}=1+\frac{\alpha t}{2}\)
\(\frac{T_2}{T_1}-1=\frac{\alpha t}{2}\)
\(\frac{T_2-T_1}{T_1}=\frac{\alpha t}{2}\)
\(\frac{T_2-T_1}{T_1}\) = time lost by pendulum per second.
Due to expansion in length, during summer, time period increases or the clock looses time in summer. In winter due to fall in temperature, the length contracts, time period decreases, hence clock gains time.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 4.
In what way is the anomalous behaviour of water advantageous to acquatic animals ? [A.P. Mar. 18, Mar. 14]
Answer:
In cold countries, as atmospheric temperature decreases, the upper layers of the lakes, rivers etc., cool, contract and sink to the bottom (fig). This goes on until the whole of the water reaches the temperature of 4°C. When the top layers cool further temperature falls below 4°C, it expands and becomes lighter. It does not sink downwards and remains at the top. With further cooling the top layer gradually form ice at the top (fig). Ice and water are bad conductors of heat. So the lower layers are protected against freezing by the layers of ice and cold water at 1°C, 2°C and 3°C. This results in water remaining at the bottom at 4°C. So that aquatic animals survive in those layers of water.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 4

Question 5.
Explain conduction, convection and radiation with examples. [TS – Mar. ’18, ’16, ’15; AP – Mar. ’15]
Answer:
The heat is transmitted in three types. They are 1) Conduction 2) Convection 3) Radiation.

  1. Conduction : The process of transmission of heat from one place to other without actual movement of the particles of the medium is called conduction.
    Ex : When long iron rod is heated at one end, heat transmits to the other end.
  2. Convection : The process of transmission of heat from one place to another by the actual
    movement of the particles is called convection.
    Ex. : If water in a beaker is heated, the particles of water at the bottom receive the heat first. These particles expand, become lighter and rise up. At the same time colder and denser particles reach the bottom. They get in their turn heated and move up. This process is known as convection.
  3. Radiation : The process of transmission of heat from one place to another without any intervening medium is called radiation.
    Ex. : Earth receives heat radiations from the sun.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
State Boyle’s law and charle’s law. Hence, derive ideal gas equation which of two laws is better for the purpose of Thermometry and why ?
Answer:
P ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{V}}\)
⇒ PV = constants ⇒ P1V1 – P2V2
Charles law at constant volume : At constant volume the pressure of given mass of a gas is directly proportional to absolute temperature of gas.
P ∝ T
⇒ \(\frac{P}{T}\) = constant ⇒ \(\frac{P_1}{T_1}=\frac{P_2}{T_2}\)
Charles law at constant pressure : At constant pressure the volume of given mass of gas is directly proportional to absolute temperature.
V ∝ T
⇒ \(\frac{V}{T}\) = constant ⇒ \(\frac{V_1}{T_1}=\frac{V_2}{T_2}\)
Ideal gas equation : A gas which obeys all the gas laws at all temperature and all pressures is called an ideal gas.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 5
Consider are mole of a gas initially at a pressure P1 volume V1 and temperature T1 and Let P2, V2 and T2 be the final pressure, volume and absolute temperature T2.
From Boyle’s law, P1V1 = P2V2
⇒ V = \(\frac{P_1 V_1}{P_2}\) ………….. (1)
Now the gas is heated at constant pressure P2, then its volume changes from V to V2 and temperature changes from T1 and T2.
From charles law, \(\frac{V}{T_1}=\frac{V_2}{T_2} \Rightarrow V=\frac{V_2 T_1}{T_2}\) ………….. (2)
From (1) & (2) \(\frac{P_1 V_1}{P_2}=\frac{V_2 T_1}{T_2} \Rightarrow \frac{P_1 V_1}{T_1}=\frac{P_2 V_2}{T_2}\)
⇒ \(\frac{P V}{T}\) = constant ⇒ \(\frac{P V}{T}\) = R
Where ‘R’ is coniversal gas constant.
⇒ PV = RT
From ‘n’ gram moles PV = nRT. This law is called ideal gas equation.
Out of Boyle’s law, charles law is better for the purpose of thermometry because with increasing temperature, pressure and volume of gas also increase.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 2.
Explain thermal conductivity and coefficient of thermal conductivity. A copper bar of thermal conductivity 401 W/(mK) has one end at 104°C and the other end at 24°C. The length of the bar is 0.10 m and the cross – sectional area is 1.0 × 10-6 m-2. What is the rate of heat conduction, along the bar ?
Answer:
Thermal conductivity : Thermal conductivity of a solid body is ability to conduct heat in the body. Coefficient of thermal conductivity: The coefficient of thermal conductivity of a material may be defined as the quantity of heat energy flowing per second between the opposite faces of the cube of unit side, which are maintained at unit temperature difference.

Explanation of conduction : In steady state, conduction between the opposite faces which are at temperatures θ1°C and θ2°C separated by distance d is

  1. Directly proportional to area of cross section of the rod.
    Directly proportional to temperature difference (θ2 – θ1) between the opposite faces.
  2. Time of flow of heat, t
  3. Inversely proportional to the separation of faces ‘d’.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 6
    ∴ Q ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{A}\left(\theta_2-\theta_1\right) t}{\mathrm{~d}}\)
    or Q = \(\frac{K A\left(\theta_2-\theta_1\right) t}{d}\)
    K is called coefficient of thermal conductivity of the material.
    When A = 1; (θ2 – θ1) = 1; t = 1; d = 1
    ∴ K = Q

Problem:
Kc = 401 W/mK, θ2 = 104°C, θ2 = 24°C, d = 0.10 m, A = 1.6 × 10-6 m-2
Rate of heat conduction = \(\frac{Q}{t}=K_c A \frac{\left(\theta_2-\theta_1\right)}{d}\)
= 401 × 1 × 10-6 × (104-24) = 0.32 W

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
State and explain Newton’s law of cooling. State the conditions under which Newton’s law of cooling is applicable. A body cools down from 60°C to 50°C in 5 minutes and to 40°C in another 8 minutes. Find the temperature of the surroundings.
Answer:
Expression for Newton’s law of cooling : Consider a hot body at temperature T. Let T0 be the temperature of its surroundings. According to Newton’s law of cooling,
Rate of loss of heat ∝ Temperature difference between the body and its surroundings.
\(\frac{-\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) ∝ (T – T0)
\(\frac{-\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k (T – T0) ⇒ (1) where k is proportionality constant. Let m be the mass and C the specific heat of the body at temperature T. If the temperature of the body falls by small amount dT in time dt, then the amount of heat lost is
dQ = mc dT
∴ Rate of loss of heat is given by
\(\frac{\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = mc \(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) ………….. (2)
putting (2) in (1) ⇒
-mc \(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k(T – T0)
\(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{\mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{mc}}\) (T – T0) = -K(T – T0)
where K = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{mc}}\) is another constant.
⇒ \(\frac{d T}{\left(T-T_0\right)}\) = – K dt
on integrating both sides, we get
\(\int \frac{d T}{\left(T-T_0\right)}=-K \int d t\)
loge (T – T0) = – Kt + c …………… (3)
T – T0 = e-Kt + c
T = T0 + ec e-Kt
T = T0 + Ce-Kt ……………… (4)
Where c is integration constant and C = ec
equations (1), (2), (3) and (4) are the different expressions for Newton’s law of cooling.

Explanation of Graphs:
1) If we plot a graph by taking equation (4) different values of temperature difference ∆T = T – T0 along y – axis and the corresponding values of t along X – axis, we get a curve of the form shown in figure. It clearly shows that the rate of cooling is higher initially and then decreases as the temperature of the body falls.
Curve showing cooling of hot water with time.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 7
2) More over, the equation (3) is of the form y = mx + c. So if we plot a graph, by taking loge(T – T0) along Y – axis and time t along x – axis, we must get a straight line, as shown in figure. It has a negative slope equal to – K and intercept on Y – axis equal to C.
In both of the above situations, Newton’s law of cooling stands verified.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 8
Newton’s law of cooling is applicable :

  1. Loss of heat is negligible by conduction and only when it is due to convection.
  2. Loss of heat occurs in a stream lined flow of air i.e., forced convection.
  3. Temperature of the body is uniformly distributed over it.
  4. Temperature differences are moderate i.e., upto 30 K, however if heat body is due to forced convection the law is valid for large differences of temperature also.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 9
    ∴ Surrounding temperature, θ0 = \(\frac{85^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{3}\) = 28.33°C

Problems

Question 1.
What is the temperature for which the readings on Kelvin and Fahrenheit scales are same?
Answer:
The relation between Kelvin and Fahrenheit scales is given by
\(\frac{K-273.15}{100}=\frac{F-32}{180}\)
but K = F
\(\frac{F-273.15}{100}=\frac{F-32}{180}\)
F – 273.15 = \(\frac{5}{9}\) F – \(\frac{160}{9}\)
F – \(\frac{5}{9}\) F = 273.15 – \(\frac{160}{9}\)
= 273.15 – 17.77
\(\frac{4F}{9}\) = 255.38
∴ F = \(\frac{9}{4}\) (255.38)
= 574.6°F

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 2.
Find the increase in temperature of aluminium rod if its length ¡s to be increased by 1%. (a for aluminium = 25 × 10-6/0 C). [A.P (Mar. ‘15)]
Answer:
Percentage increase in length = \(\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1}\) × 100
= α(t2 – t1) × 100 [∵ \(\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1}\) = α(t2 – t1)]
Here, percentage increase in length = 1,
α = 25 × 10-6/ °C
1 = 25 × 10-6(t2 – t1) × 100
t2 – t1 = \(\frac{1}{25 \times 10^{-4}}=\frac{10^4}{25}\) = 400°C

Question 3.
How much steam at 100°C is to be passed into water of mass 100 g at 20°C to raise its temperature by 5°C ? (Latent heat of steam is 540 cal/g and specific heat of water is 1 cal/g°C).
Answer:
In the method of mixtures,
Heat lost by steam = Heat gained by water
mSLS + mSS(100 – 1) = mWS (t – 20)
Where mS is the mass of steam, LS is the latent heat of steam, S is the specific heat of steam and mW is the mass of water.
Here, LS = 540 cal/g
S = 1 cal/g°C;
mW = 100 g
t = 20 + 5 = 25°C
mS × 540 + mS × 1 × (100 – 25) = 100 × 1 × (25 – 20)
615 mS = 500
mS = \(\frac{500}{615}\)
= 0.813 g.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 4.
2 kg of air is heated at constant volume. The temperature of air is increased from 293 K to 313 K. If the specific heat of air at constant volume is 0.718 kJ/kgK, find the amount of heat absorbed in kJ and kcal.
(J = 4.2 kJ/kcal).
Answer:
Here, M = 2 kg
dT = 313- 293 = 20 K
CV = 0.718 × 103 J/Kg – K
J = 4.2 KJ/Kcal
CV = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~m}} \frac{\mathrm{d} \theta}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
dθ = mCVdT
= 0.718 × 103 × 2 × 20
= 28720 J
dθ = 28.72 KJ
dθ = \(\frac{28720}{4.2 \times 10^3}\)
= 6.838 Kcal.

Question 5.
A dock, with a brass pendulum, keeps correct time at 20°C, but loses 8.212 s per day, when the temperature rises to 30°C. Calculate the coefficient of linear expansion of brass.
Answer:
Here t1 = 20°C, t2 = 30°C
Loss of time per day = 8.212 sec
Loss of time per day = \(\frac{1}{2}\) α (t2 – t1) × 86,400
8.212 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) α (30 – 20) × 86,400
∴ α = \(\frac{16.424}{864 \times 10^3}\)
= 19 × 10-6/C°

Question 6.
A body cools from 60°C to 40°C in 7 minutes. What will be its temperature after next 7 minutes if the temperature of its surroundings is 10°C ?
Answer:
Rate of cooling \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \theta}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = K(θav – θ0)
Case (i) :
Given, .
θ1 = 60°C, θ2 = 40°C, θ0 = 10°C, t = 7 min
⇒ \(\frac{60^{\circ} \mathrm{C}-40^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{7}=K\left[\frac{60^{\circ} \mathrm{C}+40^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{2}-10^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\right]\)
\(\frac{20}{7}\) = K[50 – 10]
⇒ \(\frac{20}{7}\) = K × 40
∴ K = \(\frac{1}{14}\) ……………. (1)

Case (ii) :
Given,
θ1 = 40°C, θ0 = 10°C, t = 7 min, θ2 = ?
⇒ \(\frac{40-\theta_2}{7}=K\left[\frac{40+\theta_2}{2}-10\right]\)
\(\frac{40-\theta_2}{7}=\frac{1}{14}\left[\frac{40+\theta_2}{2}-10\right]\)
80 – 2θ2 = \(\frac{40+\theta_2-20}{2}\)
160 – 4θ2 = 20 + θ2
2 = 140
∴ θ2 = \(\frac{140}{5}\) = 28°C

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 7.
If the maximum intensity of radiation for a black body is found at 2.65 pm what is the temperature of the radiating body ? (Wien’s constant = 2.9 × 10-3 mK)
Answer:
λmax = 2.65 pm = 2.65 × 10-6m
Wien’s constant (b) = 2.90 × 10-3 mk
λmax T = b(constant)
T = \(\frac{b}{\lambda_{\max }}=\frac{2.9 \times 10^{-3}}{2.65 \times 10^{-6}}\)
= 1094 K.

Additional Problems

Question 1.
The triple points of neon and carbon dioxide are 24.57 K and 216.55 K respectively. Express these temperatures on the Celsius and Fahrenheit scales.
Answer:
Relation between kelvin scale and Celsius scale is TC = TK – 273.15
Where TC.TK = temperature on Celsius and kelvin scales respectively
For Neon TC = 24.57 – 273.15 = – 248.58°C
For CO2 TC = 216.55 – 273.15 = -56.60°C
Relation between Kelvin and Fahrenheit scales is
\(\frac{T_F-32}{180}=\frac{T_K-273.15}{100}\)
TF = \(\frac{180}{100}\) (TK – 273.15) + 32
FQ or Neon TF
= \(\frac{180}{100}\)(24.57 – 273.15) + 32 = – 415.44° F
FQ or CO2 TF = \(\frac{180}{100}\) (216.55 – 273.15) + 32
= – 69.88° F

Question 2.
Two absolute scales A and B have triple points of water defined to be 200 A and 350 B. What is the relation between TA and TB ?
Answer:
Given triple point of water on scale A = 200
A triple point of water on scale B = 350 B
As per question 200 A = 350, B = 273.16 K
(Or)
IA = \(\frac{273.16}{200}\) K and IB = \(\frac{273.16}{350}\) K
If TA and TB represent the triple point of water on two scales A and B then
\(\frac{273.16}{200}\) TA = \(\frac{273.16}{350}\)TB (Or) \(\frac{T_A}{T_B}=\frac{200}{350}=\frac{4}{7}\)
(Or) TA = \(\frac{4}{7}\) TB

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
The electrical resistance in ohms of a certain thermometer varies with temperature according to the approximate law:
R = R0[1 + α(T – T0)]
The resistance is 101.6 Ω at the triple-point of water 273.16 K and 165.5 Ω at the normal melting point of lead (600.5 K). What is the temperature when the resistance is 123.4 Ω ?
Answer:
Here, R0 = 101. 6 Ω, T0 = 273.16 K
Case (i) R1 = 165.5 Ω, T1 = 600.5 K
Case (ii) R2 = 123.4 Ω; T2 = ?
Using the relation R = R0(1 + α(T – T0))
Case (i):
165.5 = 101.6(1 + α(600.5-273.16))
α = \(\frac{165.5-101.6}{101.6 \times(600.5-273.16)}\)
= \(\frac{63.9}{101.6 \times 327.34}\)

Case (ii): 123.4 = 101.6(1 + α(T2 – 273.16))
(Or)
123.4 = 101.6
(1 + \(\frac{63.9}{101.6 \times 327.34}\) (T2 – 273.16))
= 101.6 + \(\frac{63.9}{327.34}\) (T2 – 273.16)
T2 = \(\frac{(123.4-101.6) \times 327.34}{63.9}\) + 273.16
= 111.67 + 273.16 = 384.83 K

Question 4.
Answer the following :
a) The triple-point of water is a standard fixed point in modern thermometry. Why? What is wrong in taking the melting point of ice and the boiling point of water as standard fixed points (as was originally done in the Celsius scale) ?
b) There were two fixed points in the original Celsius scale as mentioned above which were assigned the number 0°C and 100°C respectively. On the absolute scale, one of the fixed points is the triple-point of water, which on the Kelvin absolute scale is assigned the number 273.16 K. What is the other fixed point on this (Kelvin) scale ?
c) The absolute temperature (Kelvin scale) T is related to the temperature tC on the Celsius scale by
tc = T – 273.15
Why do we have 273.15 in this relation and not 273.16 ?
Answer:
a) This is on account of the fact that the triple point of water has a unique value i.e., 273.16 K at a unique point, where exists unique values of pressure and volume. On the other hand, the melting point of ice and boiling point of water do not have unique set of value as they change in pressure and volume.

b) The other fixed point on the absolute scale is the absolute zero itself.

c) On Celsius 0°C corresponds to melting points of ice of normal pressure. The corresponding value of absolute temperature is 273.15 K. The temperature 273.16 K corresponds to the triple point of water.
From the given relation the corresponding value of triple point of water on Celsius scale
= 273.16 – 273. 15 = 0.01°C.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 5.
Two. ideal gas thermometers A and B use oxygen and hydrogen respectively. The following observations are made :
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 10
a) What is the absolute temperature of normal melting point of sulphur as read by thermometers A and B?
b) What do you think is the reason behind the slight difference in answers of thermoineters A and B ? (The thermometers are not faulty). What further procedure is needed in the experiment to reduce the discrepancy between the two readings ?
Answer:
a). Let T be the melting point of sulphur, for water Ttr = 273.16 K
For thermometer A, T = P/Ptr × 273.16
= \(\frac{1.797 \times 10^5}{1.250 \times 10^5}\) × 273.16 = 392.69 K
For thermometer B, T = P/Ptr × 273.16
= \(\frac{0.287 \times 10^5}{0.200 \times 10^5}\) × 273.16 = 391.98 K

b) The cause of slight different answers is that the oxygen and hydrogen gases are not perfectly ideal. To reduce this discrepancy, the readings should be at lower and lower pressure as in that case, the gases approach to the ideal gas behaviour.

Question 6.
A steel tape 1 m long is correctly calibrated for a temperature of 27.0°C. The length of a steel rod measured by this tape is found to be 63.0 cm on a hot day when the temperature is 45.0°C. What is the actual length of the steel rod on that day ? What is the length of the same steel rod on a day when the temperature is 27.0°C ? Coefficient of linear expansion of steel = 1.20 × 10-5 K-1.
Answer:
Length of steell tape at 27°C is 100 cm i.e.
L = 100 cm and T = 27°C
The length of steel tape at 45°C is L1 = L + ∆L
= L + αL∆T
= 100 + (1.20 × 10-5) × 100 × (45° – 27)
= 100.0216 cm
Length of 1 cm mark at 27°C on this scale, at 45°C
= 100.0216/100 cm
Length of 63 cm measured’ by this tape at 45°C will be
= \(\frac{100.0216}{100}\) × 63 = 63.0136 cm
Length of the same steel rod on a day when the temperature is 27°C = 63 × 1 = 63 cm.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 7.
A large steel wheel is to be fitted on to a shaft of the same material. At 27°C, the outer diameter of the shaft is 8.70 cm and the diameter of the central hole in the wheel is 8.69 cm. The shaft is cooled using ‘dry ice’. At what temperature of the shaft does the wheel slip on the shaft ? Assume coefficient of linear expansion of the steel to be constant over the required temperature range :
αsteel = 1.20 × 10-5K-1.
Answer:
Here T1 = 27°C = 27 + 273 = 300 K
Length at temperature, T1K = LT1 = 8.70 cm
Length at temperature, T2K = LT2 – 8.69 cm
Change in length = LT2 – LT1 = LT2 α(T2 – T2)
Or 8.69 – 8.70 = 8.70 × (1.20 × 10-5) × (T2 – 300)
Or T2 – 300 = \(\frac{0.01}{8.70 \times 1.2 \times 10^{-5}}\) = -95.8
Or T2 = 300 – 95.8 = 204.2 K = -68.8°C

Question 8.
A hole is drilled in a copper sheet. The diameter of the hole is 4.24 cm at 27.0°C. What is the change in the diameter of the hole when the sheet is heated to 227°C ? Coefficient of linear expansion of copper = 1.70 × 10-5K-1.
Answer:
In this problem superfical expansion of copper sheet will be involved on heating. Here, area of hole at 227°C, then area of the hole at 227°C,
S2 = \(\frac{\pi \mathrm{D}_2^2}{4}\)cm2.
Coefficient of superficial expansion of copper is β = 2α = 2 × 1.70 × 10-5 = 3.4 × 10-5 c1
Increase in area = S2 – S1 = βS1 ∆T (or)
S2 = S1 + βS1 ∆T
= S1(1 + β∆T)
(Or)
\(\frac{\pi \mathrm{D}_2^2}{4}=\frac{\pi}{4}\) (4.24)2 [1 + 3.4 × 10-5 (228 – 27)]
(Or)
D22 = (4.24)2 × 1.0068
D2 = 4.2544 cm
Change in diameter = D2 – D1
= 4.2544 – 4.24
= 0.0144 cm.

Question 9.
A brass wire 1.8 m long at 27°C is held taut with little tension between two rigid supports. If the wire is cooled to a temperature of -39°C, what is the tension developed in the wire, if its diameter is 2.0 mm ? Co-efficient of linear expansion of brass = 2.0 × 10-5K-1; Young’s modulus of brass = 0.91 × 1011 Pa.
Answer:
Here L = 1.8m, T1 = 27°C, T2 = -39°C, r = 1
mm = 10-3m, F = ?
α = 2 × 10-5C-1, y = 0.91 × 1011 N/m2
From y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{a \Delta L}\), ⇒ ∆L = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{ay}}\)
Also ∆L = αL∆T = ∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{ay}}\) = αL∆T
(Or) F = α∆Tay = α(T2 – T1) πr2y
= 2 × 10-5 × (-39 – 27) × (10-3)2 × 0.91 × 1011
= -3.77 × 10-2 N
Negative sign indicates that the force is inward due to contraction of the wire.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 10.
A brass rod of length 50 cm and diameter 3.0 mm is joined to a steel rod of the same length and diameter. What is the change in length of the combined rod at 250°C, if the original lengths are at 40.0°C ? Is there a ‘thermal stress’ developed at the junction ? The ends of the rod are free to expand (Co-efficient of linear expansion of brass = 2,0 × 10-5K-1, steel = 1.2 × 10-5K-1.
Answer:
∆L1 = L1α1∆T = 50 × (2.10 × 10-5) (250 – 40) = 0.2205 cm
∆L2 = L2α2∆T
= 50 × (1.2 × 10-5) (250 – 40) = 0.216 cm
∴ Change in length of combined rod
= ∆L1 + ∆L2
= 0.220 + 0.126 = 0.346 cm

Question 11.
The coefficient of volume expansion of glycerin is 49 × 10-5K-1. What is the fractional change in its density for a 30°C rise in temperature ?
Answer:
Here r = 49 × 10-5C-1, ∆T = 30°C .
As V1 = V + ∆V = V(1 + r∆T)
∴ V1 = V(1 + 49 + 10-5 × 30) = 1.0147 V
As P = \(\frac{m}{V}\), p1 = \(\frac{m}{V^1}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{1.0147 \mathrm{~V}}\)= 09855 P
Fractional change in density = \(\frac{\rho-\rho^{\prime}}{\rho}\)
= \(\frac{\rho-0.9855 \rho}{\rho}\)
= 0.0145

Question 12.
A 10 kW drilling machine is used to drill a bore in a small aluminium block of mass 8.0 kg. How much is the rise in temperature of the block in 2.5 minutes, assuming 50% of power is used up in heating the machine itself or lost to the surroundings. Specific heat of aluminium = 0.91 Jg-1K-1.
Answer:
Here p = 10 kw = 105w,
Mass m = 8.0 kg = 8 × 103 g
Rise in temp; ∆T = ?
time t = 2.5 min = 2.5 × 60 sec
Sp. heat C = 0.91 Jg-1°C-1
Total energy = p × t = 104 × 150
= 15 × 105 J
As 50% of energy is lost
∴ Energy available ∆Q = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 15 × 105
= 7.5 × 105 J
As ∆Q = mc ∆T
∴ ∆T = \(\frac{\Delta Q}{\mathrm{mc}}=\frac{7.5 \times 10^5}{8 \times 10^3 \times 0.91}\) = 103°C

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 13.
A copper block of mass 2.5 kg is heated in a furnace to a temperature of 500°C and then placed on a large ice block. What is the maximum amount of ice that can melt ? (Specific heat of copper = 0.39 Jg-1K-1 heat of fusion of water = 335 Jg-1.
Answer:
Here, mass of copper block m = 2.5 kg = 2500 kg
Fall in temperature ∆T = 500 – 0 = 500°C
Specific heat of copper C = 0.39 Jg-1°C-1
Latent heat of fusion L = 335 Jg-1
Let the mass of ice melted by m1
As heat gained by ice = Heat lost by copper
m-1L = Mc∆T
m-1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{mC} \Delta \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{L}}\)
m1 = \(\frac{2500 \times 0.39 \times 500}{335}\)
= 1500 g = 1.5 kg

Question 14.
In an experiment on the specific heat of a metal, a 0.20 kg block of the metal at 150°C is dropped in a copper calorimeter (of water equivalent 0.025 kg) containing 150 cm3 of water at 27°C. The final temperature is 40°C. Compute the specific heat of the metal. If heat losses to the surroundings are not negligible, is your answer greater or smaller than the actual value for specific heat of the metal ?
Answer:
Here, mass of metal, m = 0.20 kg = 200 g
Fall in temperature of metal ∆T = 150 – 40
= 110°C
If L is specific heat of metal, then heat lost by the metal
∆Q = mc∆T = 200 × L × 110
Volume of water = 150 C.C
Mass of water m1 = 150 g
Water equivalent of calorimeter, w = 0.025 kg = 25 kg
Rise in temp of water and calorimeter
∆T1 = 40 – 27 = 13°C
Heat gained by water and calorimeter,
∆Q1 = (m1 + w)T1
= (150 + 25) × 13 = 175 × 13
As ∆Q = ∆Q1
∴ From (i) and (ii)
200 × C × 110 = 175 × 13
C = \(\frac{175 \times 13}{200 \times 110}\) ≈ 0.1
(Or)
If some heat is lost to the sorroundings, value of L is so obtained will be less than the actual value of L.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 15.
Given below are observations on molar specific heats at room temperature of some common gases.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 11
The measured molar specific heats of these gases are markedly different from those for monatomic gases. Typically, molar specific heat of a monatomic gas is 2.92 cal/mol K. Explain this difference. What can you infer from the somewhat larger (than the rest) value for chlorine ?
Answer:
The gases which are listed in the above table are diatomic gases and not mono atomic gases. For diatomic gases, molar specific heat
= \(\frac{5}{2}\) R = \(\frac{5}{2}\) × 1.98 = 4.95, which agrees fairly well with all observations listed in the . table except for chlorine. A monoatomic gas molecules has only the transnational motion. A diatomic gas molecules, a part from translation motion. The vibrational as well as rotational motion is also possible. Therefore to raise the temperature of 1 mole of diatomic gas through 1°C heat is also to be supplied increase not only translation energy but also rotational and vibrational energies. Hence molar specific heat of diatomic gas is greater than that for monoatomic gas. The higher value of molar specific heat of chlorine as compared to hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen etc. Shows that for chlorine molecule, at room temperature vibrational motion. Also occurs along with translational and rotational motions. Where as other diatomic molecules at room temperature usually have rotational motion apart from their translational motion. This the reason that chlorine has some what larger value of molar specific heat.

Question 16.
Answer the following questions based on the P-T phase diagram of carbon dioxide :
a) At what temperature and pressure can the solid, liquid and vapour phases of CO2 co-exist in equilibrium ?
b) What is the effect of decrease of pressure on the fusion and boiling point of CO2 ?
c) What are the critical temperature and pressure for CO2 ? What is their significance ?
d) Is CO2 solid, liquid or gas at (a) – 70°C under 1 atm, (b) -60°C under 10 atm, (c) 15°C under 56 atm ?
Answer:
a) The solid, liquid and vapour phase of carbon dioxide exist in equilibrium at the point i.e., temperature = -56.6°C and pressure = 5.11 atm.

b) With the decrease in pressure, both the fusion and boiling point of carbondioxide will decrease.

c) For carbondioxide, the critical tempera-ture is 31,1°C and critical pressure is 73.0 atm. If the temp of CO2 is more than 31.1°C. It cannot be liquified, however large pressure we may apply.

d) Carbondioxide will be (a) a vapour at – 70°C under 1 atm (b) a solid at 6°C under 10 atm (c) a liquid at 15°C under 56 atm.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 17.
Answer the following questions based on the P – T phase diagram of CO2 :
a) CO2 at 1 atm pressure and temperature – 60°C is compressed isothermally. Does it go through a liquid phase ?
b) What happens when CO2 at 4 atm pressure is cooled from room tem-perature at constant pressure ?
c) Describe qualitatively the changes in a given mass of solid CO2 at 10 atm pressure and temperature – 65°C as it is heated up to room temperature at constant pressure.
d) CO2 is heated to a temperature 70°C and compressed isothermally. What changes in its properties, do you expect to observe ?
Answer:
a) Since the temp – 60°C lies to the left of 56.6°C on the curve i.e. lies in the region of vapour and solid phase. So CO2 will condense directly into solid with out becoming liquid.

b) Since the pressure 4 atm is less than 5.11 atm. The carbondioxde will condenses directly into solid without becoming liquid.

c) When a solid CO2 at 10 atm. Pressure and -65°C temp is heated, It is first converted into a liquid. A further increase in temperature brings it to the vapour phase. At P = 10 atm. If a horizontal line is drawn parallel to the T-axis. Then the points of intersection of this line with the fusion and vapourisation curve will give the fu-sion and boiling point of CO2 at 10 atm.

d) Since 70°C is higher than the critical temperature of CO2. So the CO2 gas can not be converted into liquid state on being compressed isothermally at 70°C. It will remain in the vapour state. Nowever the gas will depart more and more now its perfect gas behavious with the increase in pressure.

Question 18.
A child running a temperature of 101 °F is given an antipyrin (i.e. a medicine that lowers fever) which causes an increase in the rate of evaporation of sweat from his body. If the fever is brought down to 98°F in 20 min, what is the average rate of extra evaporation caused, by the drug. Assume the evaporation mechanism to be the only way by which heat is lost. The mass of the child is 30 kg. The specific heat of human body is approximately the same as that of water and latent heat of evaporation of water at that temperature is about 580 cal g-1.
Answer:
Here fall in temp = ∆T = 101 – 98 = 3°F
= 3 × \(\frac{5}{3}\)°C = \(\frac{5}{3}\)°C
Mass of child M = 30 kg
Sp. heat of human body = Sp heat of water
C = 1000 cal.kg-1C-1
∴ Heat last by the body of child, ∆Q = mC∆T
= 30 × 1000 × \(\frac{5}{3}\) = 5000 calories
If m be the mass of water evapourated in 20 min then m1L = ∆Q
m1 = \(\frac{\Delta Q}{L}=\frac{5000}{580}\) = 86.2 g
∴ Average rate of extra evapouration = \(\frac{86.2}{20}\)
= 4.31 gmin-1

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 19.
A ‘thermacole’ icebox is a cheap and efficient method for storing small quantities of cooked food in summer in particular. A cubical icebox of side 30 cm has a thickness of 5.0 cm. If 4.0 kg of ice is put in the box, estimate the amount of ice remaining after 6 h. The outside temperature is 45°C and co-efficient of thermal conductivity of thermacole is 0.01 Js-1m-1 K-1. [Heat of fusion of wafer = 335 × 103 J kg-1]
Answer:
Here length of each side l = 30 cm = 0.3 m
Thickness of each side ∆x = 5 cm = 0.05 m
Total surface area through which heat enters into the box
A = 6 l2 = 6 × 0.3 × 0.3 = 0 Jum2
Temp.diff ∆T = 45 – 0 = 45°C,
K = 0.01 JS-1m-1°C-1
Time ∆T = 6 hrs = 6 × 60 × 60 S
Latent heat of fusion L = 335 × 103 J/kg
Let m be the mass of ice melted in this time
∆Q = mL = KA \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\Delta \mathrm{x}}\right)\) ∆t
m = kA \(\left(\frac{\Delta T}{\Delta \mathrm{T}}\right) \frac{\Delta \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{L}}\) = 0.01 × 0.54 × \(\frac{45}{0.05}\) × \(\frac{6 \times 60 \times 60}{335 \times 10^3}\) = 0.313 kg
Mass of ice left = 4 – 0.313 = 3.687 kg

Question 20.
A brass boiler has a base area of 0.15 m2 and thickness 1.0 cm. It boils water at the rate of 6.0 kg/min when placed on a gas stove. Estimate the temperature of the part of the flame in contact with the boiler. Thermal conductivity of brass = 109 Js-1m-1 K-1: Heat of vaporisation of water = 2256 × 103 Jkg-1.
Answer:
Were A = 0.15 m2 ∆x = 1.0 m = 10-2 m
\(\frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta t}=\frac{6 \times 10^3 \times 2256}{60}\) JS-1 = 2256 × 102 JS-1
K = 609 JS-1m-1°C-1, ∆T = (t – 100)
From \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{Q}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\mathrm{KA}\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\Delta \mathrm{x}}\right)\)
2256 × 102 = 609 × 0.15 \(\frac{(t-100)}{10^{-2}}\)
t – 100 = \(\frac{2256}{609 \times 0.15}\) = 2470 t
t = 24.70

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 21.
Explain why :
a) a body with large reflectivity is a poor emitter.
b) a brass tumbler feels much colder than a wooden tray on a chilly day.
c) an optical pyrometer (for measuring high temperatures) calibrated for an ideal black body radiation gives too low a value for the temperature of a red hot iron piece in the open, but gives a correct value for the temperature when the same piece is in the furnace.
d) the earth without its atmosphere would be inhospitably cold.
e) healting systems based on circulation of steam are more efficient in warming a building than those based on circulation of hot water.
Answer:
a) This is because a body with large refelectivity is a poor absorber of heat and poor absorbers of heat are poor imilters.

b) When we touch a brass tumbler on a chill day; heat flows from our body to the tumbler quickly cas thermal conductivity or brass is very high and as a result, it appears colder. On the other hand as the wood is bad conductor, heat does not flow to the wooden tray from our body, on touching it.

c) When the red hot iron pieces is in the oven, its temperature TK is the given by the relation.
E = αT4 But if the red hot iron piece is in the open having the surrounding temperature T0, its energy is radiated according to relation E1 = α(T4 – T40). As the working principle of optical pysometer is based on the fact that the brightness of – a glowing surface of a body depends , upon its temperature. Therefore, pysometes gives too low a value for the temperature of red iron in the open.

d) The lower layer’s of Earth’s atmosphere reflect infrared radiations from earth back to the surface of the earth. Thus the heat radiation recieved by the earth from the sun during the day are kept trapped by the atm. If atmosphere of earth were not there, its surface would become too cold to live.

e) Steam at 100°C possess more heat than the same mass of water at 100°C possess 540 calories of heat more than possessed by 1 gm of ware at 100°C. That is why heating systems based on circulation of stream are more efficient than those based on circulation of hot water.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 22.
A body cools from 80°C to 50°C in 5 minutes. Calculate the time it takes to cool from 60°C to 30°C. The temperature of the surroundings is 20°C.
Answer:
\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \theta}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = K [θav – θ0]
\(\frac{80-50}{5}\) = K(65 – 20)
⇒ \(\frac{30}{5}\) = K × 45 = K = \(\frac{2}{15}\)
\(\frac{60-30}{t}=\frac{2}{15}[45-20]\)
\(\frac{30}{t}=\frac{2}{15} \times 15\)
t = 5 min
Time of cooling is given by t = \(\frac{2.3026}{k}\) log10
\(\frac{T_1-T_0}{T_2-T_0}\)
As per question condition (i) T1 = 80°C, T2 = 50°C, T0 = 20°C, t = 5 min
5 × 60 = \(\frac{2.3026}{K} \log _{10} \frac{80-20}{50-20}\)
= \(\frac{2.3026}{k} \log _{10^2}\) ……………. (2)
As per question condition (i) T1 = 60°C, T2 = 30°C, T0 = 20°C, t = ?
t = \(\frac{2.3026}{K} \log _{10} \frac{60-20}{30-20}\)
= \(\frac{2.3026}{k} \log _{10^4}\) ……………. (3)
Div (3) by (2) we get
\(\frac{t}{5 \times 60}=\frac{\log _{10^4}}{\log _{10^2}}=\frac{0.6021}{0.3010}\) = 2
(Or) t = 5 × 60 × 2 = 10 × 60 s
= 10 min

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Show that the coefficient of areal expansions. (∆A/A)/∆T, of rectangular sheet of the solid is twice its linear expansivity, α1.
Answer:
∆A3 = (∆a) (∆b)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 12
When the temperature increases by ∆T, a increases by ∆a = α1a ∆T and b increases by ∆b = α1b ∆T. From fig. the increase in area
∆A = ∆A1 + ∆A2 + ∆A3
∆A = a ∆b + b ∆a + (∆a) (∆b)
= a α1b ∆T + b α1a ∆T + (α1)2 ab(∆T)2
= α1ab ∆T(2 + α1∆T)
= α1A ∆T(2 + α1∆T)
Since α1 = 10-5 K-1, from Table 12.1, the product α1∆T for fractional temperature is small in comparision with 2 and may be neglected.
Hence,
\(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{A}}\right) \frac{1}{\Delta \mathrm{T}}\) ≈ 2α1

Question 2.
A blacksmith fixes iron ring on the rim of the wooden wheel of a bullock cart. The diametbr of the rim and the iron ring are 5.243 m and 5.231 m respectively at 27°C. To what temperature should the ring be heated so as to fit the rim of the wheel ?
Answer:
Given,
T1 = 27°C
LT1 = 5.231 m
LT2 = 5.243 m
So,
LT2 = LT1 [1 + α1(T2 – T1)]
5.243 m = 5.231 m[1 + 1.20 × 10-5 K-1 (T2 – 27°C)]
or T2 = 218°C

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
A sphere of aluminium of 0.047 kg is placed for sufficient time in a vessel containing boiling water, so that the sphere is at 100°C. It is then immediately transfered to 0.14 kg copper calorimeter containing 0.25 kg of water at 20°C. The temperature of water rises and attains a steady state at 23°C. Calculate the specific heat capacity of aluminium.
Answer:
Mass of aluminium sphere (m.,) = 0.047 kg
Initial temp, of aluminium sphere = 100°C
Final temp. = 23°C
Change in temp. (∆T) = (100°C – 23°C)
= 77°C
Let specific heat capacity of aluminium be sAl. The amount of heat lost by the aluminium sphere = m1sAl ∆T = 0.047 kg × sAl × 77°C s ……………. (i)
Mass of water (m2) = 0.25 kg
Mass of calorimeter (m3) = 0.14 kg
Initial temp, of water and calorimeter = 20°C
Final temp, of the mixture = 23°C
Change in temp. (∆T2) = 23°C – 20°C = 3°C
Specific heat capacity of water (sw) from table
12.3 = 4.18 × 103 J kg-1 K-1
Specific heat capacity of copper calorimeter = 0.386 × 103 J kg-1 K-1
The amount of heat gained by water and calorimeter = m2sw ∆T2 + m3scu ∆T2 = (m2sw + m3scu) (∆T2)
= (0.25 kg × 4.18 × 103 J kg-1 K-1 + 0.14 kg × 0.386 × 103 J kg-1 K-1) (23°C – 20°C) ………………… (ii)
In the steady state heat lost by the aluminium sphere = heat gained by water + heat gained by calorimeter.
So, from (i) and (ii)
0.047 kg × sAl × 77°C = (0.25 kg × 4.18 × 103 J kg-1 K-1 + 0.14 kg × 0.386 × 103 J kg-1 K-1) (3°C)
sAl = 0.911 kJ kg-1 K-1

Question 4.
When 0.15 kg of ice of 0°C mixed with 0.30 kg of water at 50°C in a container, the resulting temperature is 6.7°C. Calculate the heat of fusion of ice.
(swater = 4186 J kg-1 K-1)
Answer:
Heat lost by water = mswf – θi)w
= (0.30 kg) (4186 kg-1 K-1) (50.0°C – 6.7°C)
= 54376.14 J
Heat required to melt ice = m2Lf = (0.15 kg) Lf
Heat required to raise temperature of ice water to final temperature
= mIswf – θi)I
= (0.15 kg) (4186 J kg-1 K-1) (6.7°C – 0°C)
= 4206.93 J
Heat lost = heat gained
54376.14 J = (0.15 Kg)Lf + 4206.93 J
Lf = 3.34 × 105 J kg-1

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 5.
Calculate the heat required to convert 3 kg of ice at -12°C kept in a calorimeter-to steam at 100°C at atmospheric pressure. Given specific heat capacity of ice = 2100 J kg-1 K-1, specific heat capacity of water = 4186 J kg-1 K-1, latent heat of fusion of ice = 3.35 × 105 J kg-1 and latent heat of steam = 2.256 × 106 J kg-1.
Answer:
We have
Mass of the ice, m = 3 kg
Specific heat capacity of ice, sice
= 2100 J kg-1 K-1
Specific heat capacity of water, swater
= 4186 J kg-1 K-1
Latent heat of fusion ice, Lf ice
= 3.35 × 105 J kg-1
Latent heat of steam, Lsteam
= 2.256 × 106 J kg-1
Now,
Q = Heat required to convert 3 kg of ice at -12°C to steam at 100°C.
Q1 = Heat required to convert ice at – 12°C to ice at 0°C. .
msice ∆T1 = (3 kg) (2100 J kg-1 K-1) [0 – (-12)]°C = 75600 J
Q2 = Heat required to melt ice at – 0°C to water at 0°C.
mLf ice = (3 kg) (3.35 × 105 J kg-1) = 1005000 J
Q3 = Heat required to convert water at 0°C to water at 100°C.
msW ∆T2 = (3 kg) (4186 J kg-1 K-1) (100°C)
= 1255800 J
Q4 = Heat required to convert water at 100°C to steam at 100°C.
mLsteam = (3 kg) (2-256 × 106 J kg-1)
= 6768000 J
So,
Q = Q1 + Q2 + Q3 + Q4
= 75600 J + 1005000 J + 1255800 J + 6768000 J
= 9.1 × 106 J

Question 6.
What is the temperature of the steel- copper junction in the steady state of the system shown in fig. Length of the steel rod = 15.0 cm, length of the copper rod = 10.0 cm, temperature of the furnace = 300°C, temperature of the other end = 0°C. The area of cross section of the steel rod is twice that of the copper rod. (Thermal conductivity of steel = 50.2 J s-1m-1K-1 and of copper = 385 J s-1m-1K-1].
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 13
Answer:
Let T be the temperature of the steel-copper junction in the steady state. Then,
\(\frac{K_1 A_1(300-T)}{L_2}=\frac{K_2 A_2(T-0)}{L_2}\)
Where 1 and 2 refer to the steel and copper rod respectively. For A1 = 2, A2, L1 = 15.0 cm, L2 = 10.0 cm, K1 = 50.2 J s-1m-1K-1,
K2 = 385 J s-1m-1K-1, we have
\(\frac{50.2 \times 2(300-\mathrm{T})}{15}=\frac{385 \mathrm{~T}}{10}\)
which gives T = 44.4°C

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 7.
An iron bar (L1 = 0.1 m, A1 = 0.02 m2, K1 = 79 W m-1 K-1) and a brass bar (L2 = 0.1 m, A2 = 0.02 m2, K2 = 109 W m-1K-1) are soldered end to end as shown in fig. The free ends of the iron bar and brass bar are maintained at 373 K and 273 K respectively. Obtain expressions for and hence compute (i) the temperature of the junction of the two bars, (ii) the equivalent thermal conductivity of the compound bar and (iii) the heat current through the compound bar.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 14
Answer:
Given,
L1 = L2 = L = 0.1 m, A1 = A2 = A = 0.02 m2, K1 = 79 W m-1 K-1, K2 = 109 W m-1K-1, T1 = 373 K and T2 = 273 K.
Under steady state condition, the heat current (H1) through iron bar is equal to the heat current (H2) through brass bar.
So, H = H1 = H2
= \(\frac{K_1 A_1\left(T_1-T_0\right)}{L_1}=\frac{K_2 A_2\left(T_0-T_2\right)}{L_2}\)
For A1 = A2 = A and L1 = L2 = L this equation leads to
K1(T1 – T0) = K2(T0 – T2)
Thus the junction temperature T0 of the two bars is T0 = \(\frac{\left(K_1 T_1+K_2 T_2\right)}{\left(K_1+K_2\right)}\) ………….. (a)
Using this equation, the heat current H through either bar is
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 15
Using these equations, the heat current H’ through the compound bar of length L1 + L2 = 2L and the equivalent thermal conductivity K, of the compound bar are given by
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 16
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 17

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 8.
A pan filled with hot food cools from 94°C to 86°C in 2 minutes when the room temperature is at 20°C. How long will it take to cool from 71°C to 69°C ?
Answer:
The average temperature of 94°C and 86°C is 90°C, which is 70°C above the room temperature. Under these conditions the pan cools 8°C in 2 minutes.
Using \(\frac{\mathrm{dT}_2}{\mathrm{~T}_2-\mathrm{T}_1}=-\frac{\mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{ms}}\) dt = – K dt we have
The average of 69°C and 71°C is 70°C, which is 50°C above room temperature. K is the same for this situation as for the original.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 18
The average of 69°C and 71°C is 70°C, which is 50°C above room temperature. K is the same for this situation as for the original.
\(\frac{2^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\text { Time }}\) = K(50°C)
When we divide above two equations, we have
\(\frac{8^{\circ} \mathrm{C} / 2 \min }{2^{\circ} \mathrm{C} / \text { time }}=\frac{K\left(70^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\right)}{\mathrm{K}\left(50^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\right)}\)
Time = 0.7 min = 42 s

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material 7th Lesson Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material 7th Lesson Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Why do you call cockroaches a pest?
Answer:
The cockroach is a common household pest that contaminates our food with its excreta and can transmit a number of diseases.

Question 2.
Name the terga of thoracic segments of cockroaches.
Answer:
Tergum of prothorox is Pronotum.
The tergum of mesothorax is Mesonotum.
The tergum of metathorax is Metanotum.

Question 3.
What are the structures with which cockroach walks on smooth surfaces and on rough surfaces respectively?
Answer:
The claws and the arotium help in locomotion on rough surfaces whereas planulae are useful on smooth surfaces.

Question 4.
Why is the head in cockroach called hypognathous?
Answer:
It lies hinging almost a right angles to the body with the posterior wider part upwards and the mouth parts directed downwards.

Question 5.
How is a tripod formed With reference to locomotion in cockroach?
Answer:
Tripod is formed by foreleg and hind leg of one side middle leg of other side. The fore leg and hind leg of the tripod kept on the ground, pull and push the body, while the middle leg acts as a pivot.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 6.
Name the muscles that help in elevating and depressing the wings of a cockroach.
Answer:
Wings are elevated by the contraction of dorsoventral muscles. Contraction of the dorsa longitudinal muscles depresses the muscles.

Question 7.
Name the different blood sinuses in cockroach.
Answer:
The three sinuses of haemocoel are known as
Pericardial haemocoel/Dorsal sinus
Perivisceral haemocoel/middle sinus
Perineural haemocoel/ventral sinus.

Question 8.
How are the fat bodies similar to the liver of the vertebrates?
Answer:
Fat bodies have many cells that are similar to the liver of the vertebrates in certain functions, namely
Trophocytes (store food)
Mycetocytes (contain symbiotic bacteria)
Oenocytes (secrete lipids)
Urate cells (store uric acid)

Question 9.
Which part of the gut secretes the peritrophic membrane in cockroach?
Answer:
Peritrophic membrane is secreted by the funnel like stomodel valve of the gizzard of midgut.

Question 10.
In which part of the gut of cockroach, water is reabsorbed?
Answer:
Rectum reabsorbes the water in cockroach.

Question 11.
Write the names of mouthparts in cockroach that help in biting and tasting the food.
Answer:
Mandibles helps in biting and labrum helps in tasting the food.

Question 12.
What are alary muscles?
Answer:
A services of paired triangular muscles that are present in the dorsal and ventral diaphragm.

Question 13.
What is haemocoel?
Answer:
In cockroach blood (or) haemolymph flows freely with in the body cavity (or) haemocoel.

Question 14.
The three sinuses in a cockroach are not equal in size. Why?
Answer:
The middle sinus is very large as it contains most of the viscera. The dorsal and ventral sinuses are small as they have only heart and nerve cord.

Question 15.
Why is the blood of Periplaneta called haemolymph?
Answer:
The blood of periplaneta is colourless and it consists of fluid plasma and blood cells. Hence blood of periplaneta is called haemolymph.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 16.
What is the function of haemocytes found in the blood of Periplaneta?
Answer:
Haemocytes are phagocytic in nature. These are large in size and can ingest foreign particles.

Question 17.
Why does not the blood of Periplaneta help in respiration?
Answer:
Due to the absence of respiratory pigment the blood of cockroach can’t carry oxygen to different tissues.

Question 18.
Write important functions of blood in Periplaneta.
Answer:
1. It absorbs digest food from alimentary canal and distributes it to the rest of the body.
2. It transports secretions of the ductless glands to the target organs.

Question 19.
How many spiracles are present in cockroach? Mention their locations.
Answer:
Ten pairs of spiracles are present in cockroach.
Location: First two pairs of spiracles are present in the thoracic segments, remaining eight pairs present in first eight abdominal segments. Spiracles are located in the pleura of their respective segment.

Question 20.
What are trichomes? Write their functions.
Answer:
Trichomes are small hair-like structures of spiracles.
Function: Filtering the dust particles.

Question 21.
Why is the respiratory system of cockroaches called polytheistic and holocaustic systems?
Answer:
The spiracles of cockroaches are more in number (10 pairs) and all are functional so the respiratory system of cockroaches is called polytheistic and holocaustic systems.

Question 22.
What is intima?
Answer:
A cuticle layer that forms the inner layer of trachea is called intima.

Question 23.
During inspiration which spiracles are kept open and which are kept closed?
Answer:
Thoracic spiracles are kept open and the abdominal spiracles are kept closed.

Question 24.
Which factors regulate the opening of the spiracles?
Answer:
Opening and closing of spiracles is influenced by CO2 tension in haemolymph and oxygen tension in the trachea.

Question 25.
Inspiration in cockroach is a passive process and expiration is an active process. Justify?
Answer:
As air is drawn in due to the relaxation of the muscle inspiration is a “passive process”. Expiration involves the contraction of muscles, so it is described as active process.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 26.
The nitrogenous wastes in Periplaneta are removed from the body through alimentary canal. Why?
Answer:
Malphigian tubules collect nitrogenous acts from the body parts and releases into alimentary canal. So these nitrogenous wastes get mixed with facel matter and sent out through anus.

Question 27.
How does the cuticle of a cockroach help in excretion?
Answer:
Some nitrogenous waste materials are deposited on the cuticle and eliminated during moulting.

Question 28.
How do fat bodies help in excretion?
Answer:
Urate cells present in these bodies are associated with excretion in a way. Those cells absorb and store uric acid.

Question 29.
What is ‘storage excretion’?
Answer:
Urate cells present in the fat bodies absorb and store uric acid throughout life. This is called “storage excretion”.

Question 30.
Which structure of the cockroach acts as a sensory and endocrine centre?
Answer:
The brain of the cockroach acts as the sensory and endocrine centre.

Question 31.
Distinguish between scolopidia and sensillae.
Answer:

Scolopidia Sensillae
Sub-cuticular units of mechano receptors of chordotonal organs. Units of cuticular receptors and chemoreceptors.

Question 32.
How is the ommatidium of cockroaches different from that of diurnal insects?
Answer:
Retinulae are present deep below the vitrallae and crystalline cone. The retinal sheath is absent.

Question 33.
Which of the abdominal ganglia is the largest and why?
Answer:
6th abdominal ganglia are the largest of all the abdominal ganglia because it is formed by the fusion of the ganglia of the 7th, 8th, 9th & 10th abdominal segments.

Question 34.
Name the structural and functional unit of the compound eye of the cockroach. How many such units are present in a single compound eye?
Answer:
Each compound eye is composed of about 2000 functional units called ommatidia.

Question 35.
Why is the brain called the principal sensory centre in cockroaches?
Answer:
The brain receives sensory impulses from various mouth parts & compound eye. Hence the brain is the principally a sensory centre.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 36.
Distinguish between apposition image and superposition image.
Answer:

Apposition Superposition
1. These images are formed in diurnal insects. 1. These images are formed in nocturnal insects.
2. Mosaic image is formed. 2. Overlapping (Blurred) image formed.
3. Vision is mosaic. 3. Vision is not clear.

Question 37.
List out the characters that help in understanding the difference between male and Female cockroaches.
Answer:

Male Female
1. Eight terga are not visible. 1. Both eighth & ninth terga are not visible.
2. Nine sterna are visible. 2. Only seven sterna are visible.
3. Anal styles are present. 3. Anal styles are absent.

Question 38.
What is the function of the mushroom gland in cockroaches?
Answer:
A characteristic mushroom-shaped gland is present in the 6th and 7th abdominal segments which functions as an accessory reproductive gland.

Question 39.
Compare the utriculi majors and utriculi breviores of the mushroom gland functionally.
Answer:

  • Utriculi majores forms the inner layer of the spermatophore.
  • Utriculi breviores nourish the sperms.

Question 40.
What are Phallomeres?
Answer:
Surrounding the male genital opening there are chitinous and asymmetrical structures called phallic organs/phellomeres/gonapophyses which help in copulation.

Question 41.
What is gona Pophyses?
Answer:
Surrounding the male genital opening there are chitinous and asymmetrical structures called phallic organs/phellomeres/gonapophyses which help in copulation.

Question 42.
How is the colleterial gland helpful in the reproduction of Periplaneta?
Answer:
A pair of branched colleterial glands is present behind the ovaries. These glands open into the genital pouch separately. Secretions of the two collateral glands form a hard egg case called Ootheca.

Question 43.
What is paurometabolous development?
Answer:
Gradual development (metamorphosis) through nymph stages is called “parametabolous development”.
Ex: Periplaneta

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Draw a neat labelled diagram of the mouthparts of cockroaches.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q1

Question 2.
Describe the physiology of digestion in cockroaches.
Answer:
Food collection: The cockroach is an omnivorous insect. It feeds on all types of organic matter.

Digestion: After swallowing, the food passes through the pharynx and oesophagus and reaches the crop. In the crop, food is mixed with digestive juices that are regurgitated into it through the grooves of the gizzard. Hence, most of the food is digested in the crop. The partly digested food is filtered by the bristles of the gizzard and later it passes through the stomodeal valve into the ventricular.

The enzyme amylase of the salivary juice converts starches into disaccharides. Invertase or sucrase digests sucrose into glucose and fructose. Maltose converts maltose into glucose. The enzyme lipase digests lipids into fatty acids and glycerol. Proteases digest proteins into amino acids. The cellulose of the food is digested by the enzyme cellulose secreted by the microorganisms present in the hindgut of cockroaches. Cellulose is converted into glucose.

In the ventriculus, the digested food is absorbed. The undigested food is passed into the ileum, and colon and then reaches the rectum, where water is reabsorbed by rectal papillae. Then the remaining material is finally defecated as dry pellets, through the anus.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 3.
Draw a neat labelled diagram of the salivary apparatus of cockroaches.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q3

Question 4.
Describe the structure and function of the heart in Periplaneta.
Answer:
Heart: The heart lies in the pericardial hemocoel or dorsal sinus. It is a long muscular, contractile tube found along the mid-dorsal line, beneath the terga of the thorax and abdomen. It consists of 13 chambers. Every chamber opens into the other present in front of it. Three of the thirteen chambers are situated in the thorax and ten in the abdomen. Its posterior end is closed while the anterior end is continued forward as the anterior aorta. On the posterior side of each chamber, except the last, there is a pair of small apertures called ‘Ostia’ one on each side. Ostia have valves that allow the blood to pass only into the heart from the dorsal sinus.

Question 5.
Describe the process of blood circulation in Periplaneta.
Answer:
The blood flows forward in the heart by the contractions of its chambers. At the anterior end of the heart, the blood flows into the aorta and from there it enters the sinus of the head. From the head sinus, the blood flows into the perivisceral and sternal sinuses. On contraction of the alary muscles, the pericardial septum is pulled down. This increases the volume of the pericardial sinus. Hence blood flows from the perivisceral sinus into the pericardial sinus through the apertures of the pericardial septum. On relaxation of the alary muscles, the pericardial septum moves upwards to its original position. This forces the blood, to enter the chambers of the heart through the Ostia from the pericardial sinus.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q5

Question 6.
How do contraction and relaxation of alary muscles help in circulation?
Answer:
The blood flows forward in the heart by the contractions of its chambers. At the anterior end of the heart, the blood flows into the aorta and from there it enters the sinus of the head. From the head sinus, the blood flows into the perivisceral and sternal sinuses. On contraction of the alary muscles, the pericardial septum is pulled down. This increases the volume of the pericardial sinus. Hence blood flows from the pericardial septum. On relaxation of the alary muscles, the pericardial septum moves upwards to its original position. This forces the blood, to enter the chamber of the heart through the Ostia from the pericardial sinus.

Question 7.
What are the different excretory organs in Periplaneta? Describe the process of excretion in detail.
Answer:
The structures associated with excretory function are Malpighian tubules, Fat bodies, uricase glands, Nephrocytes, and Cuticles.

Malpighian tubule: The malpighian tubules are long, unbranched yellowish tubules, attached at the extreme anterior end of the hindgut, lying freely in the hemolymph, but do not open into it being bliand at the free ends. They are 100-150 in number arranged in 6-8 bundles, each bundle having 15-25 tubules. Each tubule is lined by a single layer of glandular epithelium with a brush border on the inner surface. The ‘distal portion’ of the tubule is secretory and the ‘proximal part’ is absorptive in nature.

The glandular cells of the malpighian tubules absorb water salts, CO2, and nitrogenous wastes from the hemolymph and secrete them into the lumen of the tubules. The cell of the proximal part of the tubules reabsorbs water and certain inorganic salts. By the contraction of the tubules, urine is pushed into the ileum. More water is reabsorbed from it when it moves into the rectum and almost solid uric acid is excreted along with faecal matter.

The removal of nitrogenous waste material through the alimentary canal helps in the complete reabsorption of water from the wastes and the formation of dry uric acid. It is an adaptation for the conservation of water as it is very important in terrestrial organisms.

Fat bodies: Fat body is a lobed white structure. Urate cells present in these bodies are associated with excretion in a way. These cells absorb and store uric acid throughout life. This is called storage excretion as they remain stored in the cells of the corpora adipose.

Uricose glands: Uric acid is stored in uriosa gland or utriculi majority of the mushroom gland in male cockroaches. It is discharged during copulation.

Cuticle: Some nitrogenous waste materials are deposited on the cuticle and eliminated during moulting.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 8.
How does Periplaneta conserve water? Explain it with the help of excretion in it.
Answer:
Periplaneta can conserve water by following methods. The removal of Nitrogenous waste material through the alimentary canal helps in the complete reabsorption of water from the wastes and the formation of dry uric acid. It is an adaption for the conservation of water as it is very important in terrestrial organisms.

Cuticle: Some nitrogenous waste materials are deposited on the cuticle and eliminated during moulting.

Question 9.
Draw a neat and labelled diagram of Ommatidium.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q9

Question 10.
How can you identify the male and female cockroaches? Explain it describing the chief structures of the external and internal genitalia.
Answer:
Periplaneta is dioecious or unisexual and both the sexes have well-developed reproductive organs. Sexual dimorphism is evident both externally and internally. The female is different from the male in respect of short and broad abdomen, presence of blood pouches, and absence of anal styles.

The eighth tergum in the male and both the eighth and ninth terga in the female are not visible. In the male ninth sterna are visible, whereas in the female only the seventh sterna are visible. The seventh, eighth, and ninth sterna together form a broad pouch.

The posterior end of the abdomen is a pair of anal cerci, a pair of anal styles and gonophophyses in the males, and cerci are jointed and arise from the lateral side of the tenth tergum and are found in both sexes. The anal styles are without joints and arise from the ninth sternum. But seen only in the males. The gonopophysis are small chitinous processes arising from the ninth sternum in males and the eighth, and ninth sterna in females. They are the external genital organs.

Question 11.
Describe the male reproductive system of cockroaches.
Answer:
The male reproductive system consists of a pair of testes. These are elongated and lobed structures lying on each lateral side in the fourth to sixth abdominal segments. They are embedded in the fat bodies. From the posterior end of each testis, there starts a thin duct, the vas deferens.

The two vasa deferentia run backward and inwards to open into a wide median duct, the ductus ejaculatory in the seventh segment. A characteristic mushroom-shaped gland is present in the 6th and 7th abdominal segments which functions as an accessory reproductive gland.

The gland consists of two types of tubules:

  • Long slender tubules, the utriculi majors, or peripheral tubules.
  • Short tubules, the utriculi breviores, and secretion of utriculi majors form the inner layer of the spermatophore while the utricular breviores nourish the sperms. These tubules open into the anterior part of the ejaculatory duct.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q11

Question 12.
Describe the female reproductive system of cockroaches.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q12
The female reproductive system of Periplaneta consists of a pair of ovaries a pair of oviducts vagina, spermathecal papilla, colleterial glands, and ovaries.

A pair of large ovaries lie laterally in 2 to 6 abdominal segments. They are light yellow in colour surrounded by fat bodies. Each ovary consists of eight tubules called ovarian tubules or ovarioles. Each ovariole consists of a tapering anterior filament called germarium and a posterior wider vitellarium. The germarium contains various stages of developing ova and the vitellarium contains mature ova with the yolk. The tapering ends of the ovarioles of each ovary unite to form a single thread that attaches to the dorsal body wall.

The ovarioles, at their posterior end, unite to form a short wide oviduct. The oviducts unite to form a very short median vagina. The vertical opening of the vegina is called the female genital pore. It opens into a large genital pouch on the eighth sternum. A spermatheca or receptaculum seminis, consisting of a left-sac like and a right filamentous caecum, is present in the 6th segment which opens by a median aperture on a small spermathecal papilla in the dorsal wall of the genital pouch on the ninth sternum. In a fertile female, the spermatheca contains spermatophores, obtained during copulation.

A pair of branched colleterial glands is present behind the ovaries. These glands open into the genital pouch separately, just above the spermathecal aperture. Secretion of the two collateral glands forms a hard egg case called ootheca around the eggs.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Describe the digestive system of cockroaches with the help of a neat labelled diagram.
Answer:
The digestive system of cockroaches consists of an alimentary canal and the associated glands. The preoral cavity surrounded by the mouth parts is present in front of the mouth. The hypopharynx divides into two chambers called cibagium (anterior) and salivarium (posterior).

Alimentary canal: The alimentary canal of cockroaches is a long tube and is coiled in some places. It extends between the mouth and the anus. It is divided into three regions namely the foregut of stomodaeum, midgut or mesenteron, and hindgut is internally lined by ectoderm. The mesenteron is lined by the endodermal cells.

Forgut or stomodaeum: The foregut includes the pharynx oesophagus, crop, and gizzard. It is internally lined by a chitinous cuticle. The mouth opens into the pharynx, which in turn leads into a narrow tubular oesophagus. The oesophagus opens behind into a thin-walled distensible sac called a crop. The crop serves as a reservoir for storing food. Its outer surface is covered by a network of tracheae.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q1
Behind the crop, there is a thick-walled muscular proven- triculus or gizzard. The chitinous inner living of the gizzard has six powerful teeth, which form an efficient grinding apparatus. Behind each tooth is a hairy pad, which bears backwardly directed bristles. Among these plates, food is thoroughly ground into fine particles. These food particles are filtered by the bristles. The gizzard thus acts both as a grinding mill and also as a sieve. There is a membranous projection of the gizzard into the mesenteron in the form of a funnel called a stomodeal valve. This valve prevents the entry (regurgitation) of food from the mesenteron back into the gizzard.

Midgut (mesenteron or ventriculus): The midgut is a short and narrow tube behind the gizzard. It is also called mesenteron or ventriculus. Between the ventriculus and the gizzard, arising from the ventriculus there are six to the eighth finger-like diverticula called nepatic caecae. They are helpful in the digestion and absorption of digested food materials. Ventriculus is functionally divided into an anterior secretory part and a posterior absorptive part.

The secretory part of the ventriculus has many gland cells and it secretes several enzymes. The ‘bolus’ of food in the mesenteron is enveloped by a chitinous and porous membrane called a peritrophic membrane, which is secreted by the funnel-like stomodeal valve of the gizzard. Digested food is absorbed into the food through the peritrophic membrane in the posterior absorptive region of the ventriculus. The peritrophic membrane protects the wall of the ventriculus from hard food particles in the food. The opening of the ventriculus into the hindgut is controlled by a sphincture muscle. It prevents entry of undigested food from the hindgut into the midgut.

Hindgut or proctodaeum: The hindgut is a long coiled tube, consisting of three regions namely the ileum, colon, and rectum. It is internally lined by the chitinous cuticle. The ileum that lies behind the mesenteron is a short tube. Six bundles of fine yellow, blind tubules called Malpighian tubules open into the ileum near the junction of mesenteron and ileum. Malpighian tubules are excretory in function. The ileum collects uric acid from the malpighian tubules and undigested food from the mesenteron. The ileum opens behind into a long coiled tube called the colon. The colon leads into a short and wide rectum which opens out through the anus. The rectum bears on its inner side six longitudinal chitinous folds called rectal papillae. They are concerned with the reabsorption of water from undigested food.

Digestive gland: The digestive glands associated with the alimentary canal of cockroaches are salivary glands, hepatic caecae, and glandular cells of the mesenteron.

Salivary glands: There is a pair of salivary glands attached to the ventrolateral sides of the crop, one on each side. Each salivary gland has two lobes. Each lobe of the salivary gland has many lobules called acini. Each acinus is a group of secretory cells called zymogen cells with a small ductule. The ductules of both the lobes of a salivary gland unite to form a common salivary duct on each side.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q1.1
The two common salivary ducts are joined to form the median salivary duct. Between the two lobes of a salivary gland on each side is a sac called the salivary receptacular duct or common reservoir duct. The midious salivary duct opens into the common receptacular duct. Later these two form an efferent salivary duct. The efferent salivary duct opens at the base of the hypopharynx. Acinar cells secrete saliva, which contains a starch digesting enzymes such as amylase.

Hepatic caecae: The hepatic caecae are also termed midguts caecae. They contain secretory and absorptive cells.

Glandular cells of the mesenteron: The glandular cells of the mesenteron secrete enzymes such as maltase, invertase, proteases, and lipase.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 2.
Describe the blood circulatory system of Periplaneta in detail and draw a neat and labelled diagram of it.
Answer:
The circulatory system helps in the transportation of digested food, hormones, etc., from one part to another in the body. Periplaneta has an open type of circulatory system as the blood or hemolymph, flows freely within the body cavity or hemocoel, Blood vessels are poorly developed and open into spaces) Visceral organs located in the hemocoel are bathed in the blood. The three main parts associated with the blood circulatory system of Periplaneta are the hemocoel, heart, and blood.

Haemocoel: The haemocoel of cockroaches is divided into three sinuses by two muscular, horizontal membranes called dorsal diaphragm or pericardial septum and ventral diaphragm. Both diaphragms have pores. There is a series of paired triangular muscles called alary muscles. Every segment has one pair of these muscles situated on the lateral sides of the body. These are attached to the pericardial septum by their broad bases and to the terga by their broad bases and to the terga by their pointed ends or apices. The three sinuses of the haemocoel are known as pericardial haemocoel or the dorsal sinus, the perivisceral haemocoel or the middle sinus, and sternal haemocoel or ventral sinus or perineural sinus. The middle sinus is very large as it contains most of the viscera. The dorsal and ventral sinuses are small as they have only the heart and nerve cords, respectively.

Heart: The heart lies in the pericardial haemocoel or dorsal sinus. It is a long muscular, contractile tube found in a long mid-dorsal line, beneath the terga of the thorax and abdomen.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q2
It consists of 13 chambers. Every chamber opens into the other present in front of it. Three of the thirteen chambers are situated in the thorax and ten in the abdomen. Its posterior end is closed while the anterior end is continued forward as the anterior aorta. At the posterior side of each chamber, except the last, there is a pair of small apertures called ‘Ostia’ one on each side. Ostia have valves that allow the blood to pass only into the heart from the dorsal sinus.

Blood: The blood of Periplaneta is colourless and is called haemolymph. It consists of a fluid called plasma and free blood corpuscles or haemocytes, which are phagocytic. The phagocytic, the phagocytes are large in size and can ‘ingest’ foreign particles such as bacteria. There is no respiratory pigment in the blood and so it plays no major role in respiration.

Question 3.
Describe the respiratory system of cockroaches with the help of neat and labelled diagrams.
Answer:
Due to the absence of respiratory pigment, the blood of cockroaches is colourless and it cannot carry oxygen to different tissues. Therefore a tracheal system is developed to carry the air directly to the tissues. The respiratory system of cockroaches consists of stigmata, tracheae, and tracheoles.

Stigmata or spiracles: The tracheal system communicates with the exterior by ten pairs of openings called stigmata or spiracles. The first two pairs of spiracles are present in the thoracic segments, one pair in the mesothorax and one pair in the metathorax. The remaining eight pairs of abdominal segments.

Spiracles are located in the pleura of their respective segments. The respiratory system in insects is classified on the basis of the number and nature of spiracles. The spiracles of cockroaches are polypneustic (as they are more than 3 pairs) and holopneustic (as all of them are functional). All spiracles are valvular and each of them is surrounded by a chitinous ring called peritreme. All spiracles bear small hair-like structures called trichomes to filter the dust particles.

Each spiracle opens into a small chamber called the atrium.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q3
Tracheae: From the atrium of each thoracic spiracle several horizontal tracheae run inside. They join with each other in the thorax to form many tracheal trunks like dorsal cephalic, and ventral cephalic trunks and their branches. These branches enter all organs of the head. The thoracic region also contains lateral longitudinal trunks. The abdominal spiracles lead into the atria. From the atrium of each abdominal spiracle, three tracheal tubes arise. All these tracheal tubes on one side open into three separate longitudinal tracheal trunks. They are lateral dorsal and ventral longitudinal trunks. Lateral longitudinal trunks are the longest tracheal trunks. The three pairs of longitudinal tracheal trunks on both sides are interconnected by many commissural tracheae. From all the tracheal trunks several branches are given out, which enter different organs. All tracheal branches entering an organ end in a special cell called tracheoles cell.

The wall of the tracheae is made of three layers. They are an outer basement membrane, a middle one cell thick epithelium, and an inner layer of cuticle called the intima. The intima is produced into spiral thickening called taenidia. The taenidia keep the tracheae always open and prevent it from collapsing.

Tracheoles: The terminal cell of the trachea is called tracheoblast or tracheole cell. It has several intracellular tubular extensions called tracheoles. Tracheoles are devoid of intima and taenidia. They are formed of a protein called tracheal. Tracheolar fluid is present inside the tracheoles. The level of the tracheal fluid varies with the metabolic activity of the insect. It is more when the insect is inactive and completely reabsorbed into the tissues when the insect is more active. Tracheoles penetrate the cell and are intimately associated with mitochondria (to supply oxygen to them).

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 4.
Describe the reproductive system of Periplaneta and draw neat and labelled diagrams of it.
Answer:
Periplaneta is dioecious, or unisexual and both the sexes have well-developed reproductive organs. Sexual dimorphism is evident both externally and internally. The female is different. The female is different from the male in respect of short and broad abdomen, presence of brood pouches, and absence of anal styles.

Male Reproductive system: The male reproductive system consists of a pair of testes. These are elongated and lobed structures lying on each lateral side in the fourth to sixth abdominal segments. They are embedded in the fat bodies. From the posterior end of each testis, there starts a thin duct, the vas deferens, the two vasa deferentia run backward and inwards to open into a wide median duct, the ductus ejaculators in the seventh segment. A characteristic mushroom-shaped gland is present in the 6th and 7th abdominal segments which functions as an accessory reproductive gland.

The gland consists of two types of tubules or i, long slender tubules, the utriculi majores or periphera tubules in short tubules, the utriculi breviores secretion of utriculi majores forms the inner layer of the spermatophore while that of utriculi breviores nourishes the sperms. These tubules open into the anterior part of the ejaculatory duct. The seminal vesicles are present on the ventral surface of the ejaculatory duct. These sacs store the sperms in the form of bundles called spermatophores. The ejaculatory duct is a muscular tube that extends posteriorly and opens at the gonopore or the male genital pore.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q4

Female reproductive system: The female reproductive system of Periplaneta consists of a pair of ovaries, a pair of oviducts, vagina, spermathecae, spermathecal papilla, and colleterial glands.

Ovaries: A pair of large ovaries lie laterally in 2 to 6 abdominal segments. They are light yellow in colour surrounded by fat bodies. Each ovary consists of eight tubules called ovarian tubules or ovarioles. Each ovariole consists of a tapering anterior filament germarium and a posterior wider vitellarium. The germarium contains various stages of developing ova and the vitellarium contains mature ova with the yolk.

The tapering ends of the ovarioles of each ovary unite-to form a single thread that attaches to the dorsal body wall. The ovarioles, at their posterior end, unite to form a short wide oviduct. The oviduct unite to form a very short median vagina. The vertical opening of the vagina is called the female genital pore. It opens into a large genital pouch on the eighth sternum. A spermatheca or receptaculum seminis. Consisting of a left-sac-like and a right filamentous caecum is present in the 6th segment which opens by a median aperture on a small spermathecal papilla in the dorsal wall of the genital pouch on the ninth sternum.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q4.1
In a fertile female, the spermatheca contains spermatophores obtained during copulation. A pair of branched colleterial glands is present behind the genital pouch separately just above the spermathecal aperture, secretion of the two collateral glands forms a hard egg case called ootheca a round the eggs.

Three pairs of a plate-like chitinous structures called gonapophyses are present around the female genital aperture. These gonapophyses guide the ova into ootheca as ovipositors. These are the female external genitalia.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material 6th Lesson Biology in Human Welfare Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material 6th Lesson Biology in Human Welfare

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Define parasitism and justify this term.
Answer:
An intimate association between two organisms of different species in which ‘one is benefited and the other one is often adversely affected’ is called parasitism. The word parasitism comes from the Greek word ‘parasitos’ (Para-at the side of Sitos – food or grain) which means one eating at another one’s table.

Question 2.
Distinguish between a vector and a reservoir host.
Answer:

Vector host Reservoir host
It is an organism that transfers the infective stages of parasites from one host to another.
Ex: Anopheles for malaria parasite.
It is the host that lodges the infective stage of the parasite. It remains in the body till the main host is available.
Ex: Monkey for Plasmodium.

Question 3.
Distinguish between mechanical vector and biological vector.
Answer:

Mechanical vector Biological vector
It is the vector that merely transfers the infective stages of parasites without parasitic development.
Ex: Housefly and cockroach for Entamoeba.
It is the vector in which the parasite undergoes a part of the development before it gets transferred.
Ex: Female anopheles mosquito in the case of plasmodium.

Question 4.
What is a hyperparasite? Mention the name of one hyper-parasite.
Answer:
A parasite that parasitizes another parasite is called a Hyper parasite.
Ex: Nosema notabilis (a cnidosporan) is a parasite in Sphaerospora polymorpha (a cnidosporan parasite in the urinary bladder of the toadfish).

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 5.
What do you mean by parasitic castration? Give one example.
Answer:
Some parasites cause the degeneration of gonads of the host making it sterile. This effect is called parasitic castration.
eg: Sacculina (root-headed barnacle, a crustacean) causes the degeneration of ovaries in the crab Carcinus maenas.

Question 6.
What are the endo-parasitic adaptations observed in Fasciola hepatica?
Answer:
The life cycle of Fasciola hepatica (sheep liver fluke) is very complex involving many developmental stages and two intermediate hosts to increase the chances of reaching a new definitive host.

Question 7.
Define Neoplasia. Give one example.
Answer:
Some cause abnormal growth of the host cells in a tissue to form new structures. This effect is called Neoplasia which leads to cancers.
Ex: Some Viruses.

Question 8.
Define the most accurate definition of the term ‘health’ and write any two factors that affect health.
Answer:
Health is a state of complete physical, mental and social well-being and not merely the absence of any disease or absence of physical fitness. Our health may be affected by crenetic disorders, infections, and lifestyle.

Question 9.
Distinguish between infectious and non-infectious diseases. Give two examples each.
Answer:

Infectious Non-infectious
The diseases which are easily transmitted from one person to another are called infectious diseases. These are caused by pathogens. These are very common.
Ex: Amoebic dysentery, Malaria, Elephantiasis, Typhoid.
The diseases which are not transmitted from one person to another and are not caused by pathogens are called non-infectious diseases.
Ex: Genetic disorders, kidney problems.

Question 10.
Entamoeba histolytica is an obligatory anaerobe justify.
Answer:
Mitochondria is absent in the endoplasm of Entamoeba histolytica. The absence of mitochondria indicates the obligate anaerobic nature of Entamoeba histolytica.

Question 11.
Distinguish between the precystic stage and the cystic stage of E.histolytica.
Answer:

Precystic Cystic
(i) It is a non-feeding, non-pathogenic stage. (i) It is a feeding and infective stage.
(ii) It is small, oval, non motile form. (ii) It is found in a round shape and surrounded by a delicate membrane.

Question 12.
What is the reserve food in the precystic and early cyst stages of Entamoeba histolytica?
Answer:
The cytoplasm of the precystic stage stores glycogen granules and chromatoid bars (made of ribonucleic protein) which act as reserve food.

Question 13.
A person is suffering from bowel irregularity, abdominal pain, blood and mucus in stool, etc. Based on these symptoms, name the disease and its causative organism.
Answer:

  • The disease is Amoebiasis.
  • The causative agent is the Trophozoite of “Entamoeba histolytica”.

Question 14.
On the advice of a doctor, a patient has gone to a clinical laboratory for the examination of a sample of faeces. The lab technician, on observing the stool of the patient diagnosed that the patient was suffering from amoebiasis. Write any two characteristic features based on which the technician came to that conclusion.
Answer:

  1. Stool with blood and mucous.
  2. Presence of a tetra nucleated cyst.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 15.
Define ‘asymptomatic cyst passers’ with reference to Entamoeba histolytica.
Answer:
Some people do not exhibit any symptoms, such people are called carriers of asymptomatic cyst passers as their stand contains the tetranuclear cysts. They help in spreading the parasites to their persons.

Question 16.
What are the stages of plasmodium vivax that infect the hepatocytes of man?
Answer:
Sporozoite, Cryptozoite, Macrometacryptozoite.

Question 17.
Define the prepatent period. What is its duration in the life cycle of plasmodium vivax?
Answer:
The interval between the first entry of plasmodium into the blood in the form of sporozoites and the second entry of plasmodium into the blood in the form of Cryptozoics is called a prepatent period. It lasts approximately 8 days.

Question 18.
Define incubation period. What is its duration in the life cycle of Plasmodium vivax?
Answer:
The period between the entry of Plasmodium into the blood in the form of sporozoite and the first appearance of symptoms of malaria in man is called the incubation period which is approximately 10 to 14 days.

Question 19.
What are Schuffner’s dots? What is their significance?
Answer:
Small red coloured dots appear in the cytoplasm of the RBC known as Schuffner’s dots. These are believed to be the antigens released by the plasmodium (Malaria) parasites.

Question 20.
What are hemozoin granules? What is their significance?
Answer:
The malaria parasite digests the globin part of the ingested hemoglobin and converts the soluble heam into insoluble crystalline hemozoin. It is called the ‘malaria pigment’ which is a disposable product.

Question 21.
What is exflagellation and what are the resultant products called?
Answer:
Male gapnetes show lashing movements like flagella and get separated from the cytoplasm of microgametocyte. This process is called exflagellation and resultant products are called male (or) microgametes.

Question 22.
Why is the syngamy found in plasmodium called anisogamy?
Answer:
Since two gametes are dissimilar in size, the syngamy found in plasmodium is called anisogamy.

Question 23.
What is Ookinete? Based on the sets of chromosomes how do you describe it?
Answer:
Ookinete is a long, splendor, motile, vermiform, two sets of chromosomes are present in it. So it is described as diploid form.

Question 24.
A person is suffering from chills and shivering and high temperature. These symptoms are cyclically followed by profuse sweating and a return to normal body temperature. Based on these symptoms name the disease and its causative organism.
Answer:
The disease is malaria and the causative organism is Plasmodium vivax.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 25.
Describe the methods of biological control of mosquitoes.
Answer:
Introduction of larvivorous fishes like Gambusia, and insectivorous plants like Utricularia into the places where mosquitoes breed.

Question 26.
The eggs of Ascaris are called “mammillated eggs”. Justify it.
Answer:
Each egg of Ascaris is surrounded by a protein coat with a rippled surface. Hence the eggs of Ascaris are called “mammilated eggs”.

Question 27.
What is meant by nocturnal periodicity with reference to the life history of a nematode parasite you have studied?
Answer:
Microfilaria larvae of W.brancrofti migrate to the peripheral blood circulation during nighttime between 10 P.M – 4 A.M. This tendency is called nocturnal periodicity.

Question 28.
Distinguish between lymphadenitis and lymphangitis.
Answer:

Lymphadenitis Lymphangitis
Inflammation in the lymph glands is called lymphadenitis. Inflammation in the lymph vessels is called lymphangitis.

Question 29.
‘Elephantiasis is the terminal condition of filariasis’. Justify.
Answer:
Sweat glands of the skin in the affected region disintegrate and skin becomes rough so elephantiasis is the terminal condition of filariasis.

Question 30.
In which way does tobacco affect respiration? Name the alkaloid found in tobacco.
Answer:
Tobacco increases the carbon monoxide (CO) level and reduces the oxygen level in the blood. The alkaloid found in tobacco is “Nicotine”.

Question 31.
Define drug abuse.
Answer:
When drugs are used for a purpose other than medicinal use is called drug abuse.

Question 32.
From which substances ‘Smack’ and ‘coke’ are obtained?
Answer:
Smack is the common name for “Heroine”. It is obtained from the opium poppy plant. (Papaver somniferum).
Coke is the common name for “Cocaine”. It is obtained from the coca plant (Erythroxylum coca).

Question 33.
‘Many secondary metabolites of plants have medicinal properties. It is their misuse that creates problems. justify the statement with an example.
Answer:
Many secondary metabolites of plants like opioids, cannabinoids, and coca alkaloids are abused nowadays. Even though they have medicinal properties they cause some effects.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 34.
Why are cannabinoids and anabolic steroids banned in sports and games?
Answer:
These days some sports persons take drugs such as cannabinoids and anabolic steroids to enhance their performance (Doping) and abuse of such drugs also causes side effects that’s why such drugs are banned in sports and games.

Question 35.
Mention the names of any four drugs which are used as medicines to treat patients with mental illnesses like depression, insomnia, etc., that are often abused.
Answer:
Barbiturates, Amphetamines, Benzodiazepines, Lysergic aciddiethyl amides (LSD).

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is the need for parasites to develop special adarptations? Mention some special adaptations developed by the parasites.
Answer:
Parasites have to evolve mechanisms to counteract and neutralize the host’s defence in order to be successful within the host. For this purpose, the parasites have developed many special adaptations such as the loss of unnecessary sensory organs, formation of organs for adhesion, high reproductive capacity, etc.
Parasitic adaptations: Parasites have evolved special adaptations to meet the requirements and lead successful lives in the hosts.

  • In order to live in the host, some parasites have developed structures like hooks, suckers, rostellum, etc., for anchoring, e.g: Taenia solium.
  • Some intestinal parasites have developed protective cuticles to withstand the action of the digestive enzymes of the host, e.g: Ascaris lumbricoides.
  • Some intestinal parasites produce anti enzymes to neutralize the effect of the host’s digestive enzymes, e.g: Taenia solium.
  • Some parasites live as obligatory anaerobes as the availability of oxygen is very rare for them, e.g: Entamoeba histolytica, Taenia solium, etc.
  • Some intestinal parasites live as facultative anaerobes, i.e., if oxygen is not available, they live anaerobically and if oxygen is available, they respire aerobically, e.g: Ascaris lumbricoides.

Question 2.
Distinguish between hypertrophy and hyperplasia with an example for each.
Answer:

Hypertrophy Hyperplasia
It is an abnormal increase in the volume/size of the infected host cell caused by a parasite.
e.g: R.B.C of a man infected by plasmodium.
It is an increase in the number of cells caused by parasites.
e.g: Fasciola hepatica in the bile duct of sheep.

Question 3.
Describe the structure of a trophozoite of Entamoeba histolytica.
Answer:
It is the most active, motile, feeding, and pathogenic stage that lives in the mucosa of the large intestine. It moves with the help of pseudopodium (lobopodium) which is produced anteriorly. The body of the trophozoite is surrounded by plasmalemma. Its cytoplasm is differentiated into an outer clear, viscous, non-granular ectoplasm and inner fluid-like granular, endoplasm.

Ribosomes, food vacuoles, and verticular cartwheel-shaped nucleus is present Absence of mitochondria indicates the obligate anaerobic nature of Entamoeba histolytica. It produces a proteolytic enzyme called histolytica which dissolves mucosas & sub-mucosa of the gut wall & releases blood, and tissue debris which are ingested by the trophozoite.

Hence food vacuoles are loaded with R.B.C & fragments of cells, and bacteria. The presence of R.B.C in the food vacuole and cart wheel-shaped nucleus are the characteristic features of the trophozoite.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 4.
Explain the life cycle of Entamoeba histolytica.
Answer:
The trophozoite undergoes binary fissions in the wall of the large intestine and produces a number of daughter entamoeba. They feed upon the bacteria and the hostly tissue elements, grow in size, and again multiply. After repeated binary fissions some of the young ones enter the lumen of the large intestine and transform into precystic stage.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare SAQ Q4
Here, the precystic stage transforms into the cystic stage. Which in turn develops into tetranuclear cysts. The entire process is completed only in a few hours. These tetra nucleated cysts come out along with the faecal matter and can remain alive for about 10 days. These cysts reach new hosts through contaminated food and water. They pass into the small intestine of a new human host. Where the cyst wall gets, ruptured by the action of the enzyme trypsin releasing tetra nucleated amoeba. Such tetra nucleated exocyst amoeba is called metacyst. The four nuclei of the metacyst undergo mitotic divisions and produce eight nuclei. Each nucleus gets a bit of cytoplasm and thus eight daughter entamoeba are produced. The young ones develop into trophozoites and invade the large intestine.

Question 5.
Write a short note on the pathogenicity of Entamoeba histolytica.
Answer:
The trophozoites ‘dissolve’ the mucosal lining by histolysin going deep into the submucosa and causing ulcers. These ulcers contain cellular debris, lymphocytes, blood corpuscles, and bacteria. It leads to the formation of abscesses in the wall of the large intestine. Ultimately it results in stools with blood and mucous. This condition is called amoebic dysentery (or) Intestinal amoebiasis. Some people don’t exhibit any symptoms such people are called ‘carriers’ (or) asymptomatic cyst passers as their stools contain tetranucleotide cysts.

Question 6.
Describe the structure of the sporozoite of plasmodium vivax.
Answer:
The ultrastructure of the sporozoite of P. vivax was studied by barnham. It is sickle-shaped with a swollen middle part and pointed at both ends of it’s body. It measures about 15 microns in length and one micron in width. The body is covered by an elastic pellicle with microtubules which help in the curiggling movement of the sporozoite. The cytoplasm contains cell organelles such as the Golgi complex, E.R. mitochondria, and a nucleus.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare SAQ Q6
The cytoplasm also shows many convoluted tubules of unknown function throughout the body. It contains a cup-like depression called an apical cup at the anterior end into which a pair of secretory organelles opens. They secrete a cytolytic enzyme which helps in the penetration of sporozoite into the liver cell.

Question 7.
Describe the cycle of Golgi in the life history of Plasmodium Vivax.
Answer:
It was first described by Camillo Golgi. Hence it is also called the Golgi cycle. This is initiated either by the trophozoites of the pre-erythrocytic cycle (or) the micro meta cryptozoites of the exo-erythrocytic cycle. In the fresh R.B.C, these stages assume the spherical shape and transform into trophozoite. It develops a small vacuole that gradually enlarges in size, and pushes the cytoplasm and nucleus to the periphery.

Now the plasmodium looks like a finger ring. Hence this stage is called the signet ring stage soon it loses the vacuole, develops pseudopodia, and becomes an amoeboid stage. With the help of pseudopodium, it actively feeds on the content of the R.B.C and increases in size. As a result, the R.B.C grows almost double the size. This process is called hypertrophy. The malaria parasite digests the globin part of the ingested hemoglobin and converts the soluble haem into insoluble Haemozine. It is called malaria pigment. During this stage, small red coloured dots appear in the cytoplasm of R.B.C known as “Schuffner’s dots’.

Now the parasite loses the pseudopodia and increases in size finally it occupies the entire R.B.C and becomes schizont. It undergoes schizogony and produces 12-24 erythrocytic merozoites. They are arranged in the form of a rose hence this stage is called the rosette stage. Finally, merozoites are released along with haemozoine into the blood.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 8.
Explain the pathogenicity of Wucheria bancrofti in Man.
Answer:
The infection causes filarial fever which is characterized by headache, mental depression, and an increase in the body temperature. In general, the infection of filarial worm causes inflammation effect in lymph vessels and lymph glands. Inflammation in the lymph vessels is called lymphangitis and that of lymph glands is called lymphadenitis. In the case of heavy infection, the accumulation of dead worms blocks the lymph vessels and lymph glands resulting in immense swelling of limbs, scrotum of males, and mammary glands in females. Fibroblasts accumulate in this tissue and form the fibrous tissue. In severe cases, the sweat glands of the skin in the affected region disintegrate and the skin becomes rough. This terminal condition is called elephantiasis.

Question 9.
Write short notes on typhoid fever and its prophylaxis.
Answer:
Typhoid fever: It is caused by salmonella typhi which is a gram-negative bacterium. It mainly lives in the small intestine of man and then migrates to other organs through blood. It can be confirmed by the Widal test.
Mode of infection: Contamination through food and water.
Symptoms: Sustained fever with high temperature upto 104°F. weakness, stomach pain, constipation, headache, and loss of appetite. Intestinal perforation and death may also occur in severe cases.
Prophylaxis: Advancements made in biological science have armed us to deal with many infections effectively. The immunization programme by the use of vaccines has enabled us to completely irradicate like typhoid. Biotechnology is making available never cheaper vaccines, and the discovery of antibiotics and various other drugs also enabled us to treat typhoid.

Question 10.
Write short notes on Pneumonia and its prophylaxis.
Answer:
Pneumonia: It is caused by gram-positive bacteria such as Streptococcus pneumonia and Haemophilus influenza. They infect the alveoli of the lungs in human beings.
Mode of infection: Contamination by inhaling the droplets/aerosols released by an infected person or even by sharing the utensils with an infected person.
Symptoms: The alveoli get filled with fluid leading to severe problems in respiration. In severe cases, the lips and fingernails may turn gray to bluish in colour.
Prophylaxis: Advancements made in biological science have armed us to deal with many infections effectively. The immunization programme by the use of vaccines has enabled us to completely irradicate pneumonia. Biotechnology is making available newer, cheaper vaccines, and the discovery of antibiotics and various other drugs also enabled us to treat pneumonia.

Question 11.
Write short notes on the common cold and its prophylaxis.
Answer:
Common cold: It is caused by a rhinovirus group of viruses. They infect the nose and respiratory passage but not the lungs.
Mode of infection: Contamination is by direct inhalation of the droplets resulting from cough or sneezes of an infected person or indirectly through contaminated objects such as pens, books, cups, door knobs, computer keyboards or mice, etc.
Symptoms: Nasal congestion, discharge from the nose, sore throat, hoar senses, cough, headache, tiredness, etc., which usually last for 3-7 days.
Prophylaxis: Advancements made in biological science have armed to deal with many infections effectively. The immunization programme by the use of vaccines has enabled us to completely irradicate like viral diseases common cold. Biotechnology is making available newer cheaper vaccines, the discovery of antibiotics and various other drugs also enabled use to treat viral diseases like the common cold.

Question 12.
Write short notes on ‘ringworm’ and its prophylaxis.
Answer:
Ringworm: It is one of the most common infectious diseases in man. It is caused by many fungi belonging to the genera, Microsporum, Trichophyton, and Epidermophyton. Heat and moisture help these fungi grow in the skin folds such as those in the groin or between the toes.
Mode of infection: Contamination is by using towels, clothes or combs of the infected persons or even from the soil.
Symptoms: Appearance of dry, scaly, usually round lesions accompanied by intense itching on various parts of the body such as skin, nails, and scalp.

Question 13.
What are the adverse effects of tobacco?
Answer:
Effect: Smoking increases the carbon monoxide (CO) level and reduces the oxygen level in the blood. Nicotine stimulates the adrenal gland to release adrenaline and nor-adrenaline into the blood. These hormones raise blood pressure and increase the heart rate. Smoking is associated with bronchitis, emphysema, coronary heart disease, and gastric ulcer and increases the incidence of cancers of the throat, lungs, urinary bladder, etc. Smoking also paves the way to hard drugs. Yet smoking is very prevalent in society, both among young and old-. Tobacco chewing is associated with an increased risk of cancer of the oral cavity.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 14.
Write short notes on opioids.
Answer:
Opioids: These are the drugs obtained from the opium poppy plant Papaver somniferous (vernacular name: Nallamandu mokka): They bind to specific opioid receptors present in our central nervous system and gastrointestinal tract. Some of them are morphine, heroin, etc.
Morphine: It is extracted from the dried latex of the unripe seed capsule (Pod) of the poppy plant. It occurs as colourless crystals or a white crystalline powder.
Mode of abuse: Generally it is taken orally or by injection.
Effect: It is effective as a sedative and painkiller. It is very useful in patients who have undergone surgery.
Heroin: It is a white, bitter, odourless, and crystalline compound, obtained by the acetylation of morphine. Chemically it is diacetylmorphine. It is commonly called a snack.
Mode of abuse: Generally it is taken by shorting and injection.
Effect: Heroin is a depressant and slows down body functions.

Question 15.
Write short notes on Cannabinoids.
Answer:
Cannabinoids: These are a group of chemicals obtained from the Indian temp, plant cannabis Sativa (vernacular name Ganjai mokka). They interact with cannabinoid receptors present in the brain. The flower tops, leaves, and the resin of this plant are used in various combinations to produce marijuana, hashish, charas, and ganja. These daufs, cannabinoids are being abused by even some sports – persons (doping).
Mode of abuse: These are generally taken by inhalation and oral ingestion.
Effect: Show their effects on the cardiovascular system of the body.

Question 16.
Write short notes on Cocaine.
Answer:
Coca alkaloid or cocaine: It is a white, crystalline alkaloid that is obtained from the leaves of the coca plant Erythroxylum coca, native to South America. It is commonly called coke or crack.
Mode of abuse: It is usually shorted.
Effect: It has a potent stimulating action on the central nervous system as it interferes with the transport of the neurotransmitter dopamine. Hence it produces a sense of euphoria and increased energy. Its excessive dosage causes hallucinations.

Question 17.
Why adolescence is considered a vulnerable phase?
Answer:
Adolescence: It is the time period between the beginning of puberty and the beginning of adulthood. In other words. It is the bridge linking childhood and adulthood. The age between 12-18 years is considered adolescence period. It is both a period and process during which a child becomes muture. It is accompanied by several biological and behavioural changes. Thus, adolescence is a very vulnerable phase of the mental and psychological development of an individual.

Question 18.
Distinguish between addiction and dependence.
Answer:
Addiction: It is a psychological attachment to certain effects such as euphoria. The most important thing one fails to realize it, the inherent addictive nature of tobacco, drugs, and alcohol, with the repeated use of TDA, the tolerance level of the receptors present in our body increases. Consequently, the receptors respond only to higher doses leading to greater intake and addiction. However, it should be clearly borne in mind that the use of TDA even once, can be a forerunner to addiction. Thus, the addictive potential of tobacco, drugs, and alcohol pull the users into a vicious circle leading to their regular use (abuse) from which they may not be able to get out. In the absence of any guidance or counseling, people get addicted and become dependent on them.

Dependence: It is the tendency of the body of manifest a characteristic unpleasant condition (withdrawal syndrome). The regular dose of drugs or alcohol is abruptly discontinued. The withdrawal syndrome is characterized by anxiety. Shakiness (tremors), nausea, and sweating may be relieved when regular use is resumed again. Dependence leads the patients to ignore all social norms.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 19.
‘Prevention is better than cure. justify with regard to TDA abuse.
Answer:
The age-old adage of prevention is better than cure holds true here also.
Some of the measures successful in the prevention and control of TDA abuse among adolescents are:

  • Avoid undue parental pressure: Every child has his/her own choice. Capacity and personality. Parents should not force their children to perform beyond their capacity by comparing them with others in studies, games, etc.
  • Responsibility of parents and teachers: They should look for the danger signs and counsel such students who are likely to get into the ‘trap’.
  • Seeking help from peers: If peers find someone abusing drugs or alcohol immediately it should be brought to the notice of their parents or teachers so that they can guide them appropriately.
  • Education and counseling: Educating and counseling the children to face problems, stress, and failures as a part of life.
  • Seeking professional and medical help: A lot of help is available in the form of highly qualified psychologists, psychiatrists, and de-addiction and rehabilitation programmers.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Explain the structure and life cycle of Entamoeba histolytica with the help of neat and labelled diagrams.
Answer:
Entamoeba histolytica (Gr. entos – within : amoiba – change histos – tissues ; lysis – dissolve) is a microscopic and monogenetic parasite that inhabits the large intestine and causes amoebic dysentery or amoebiasis in man.

It is cosmopolitan in distribution but more common in the tropical and subtropical regions of the world. It is common in the people of rural and densely populated urban areas wherever the hygienic conditions are poor.

Structure: Entamoeba histolytica passes through three distinct stages in its life cycle namely

  • Trophozoite stage
  • Precystic stage
  • Cystic stage

(i) Trophozoit stage: It is the most active, motile, feeding, and pathogenic stage that lives in the mucosa and sub-mucosa membrane of the large intestine; It moves with the help of a lobopodium which is produced anteriorly. The body of the trophozoite is surrounded by plasma-lemma. Its cytoplasm is differentiated into outer clear, viscous non-granular ectoplasm and inner fluid like granular endoplasm.

Ribosomes, food vacuoles, and vesicular, cartwheel-shaped nuclei are present in the endoplasm. The absence of mitochondria indicates the obligate anaerobic nature of Entamoeba histolytica. It produces the proteolytic enzyme called histolysis due to which the species name histolytica was assigned to it. Due to the effect of this enzyme the mucosa and submucosa of the gut wall are dissolved releasing some amount of blood, and tissue debris that are ingested by the trophozoites. Hence the food vacuoles are with erythrocyte fragments of epithelial cells and bacteria. The presence of RBC in food vacuoles and cartwheel-shaped nuclei are the characteristic features of the trophozoites of Entamoeba histolytic.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q1

(ii) Precystic stage: It is the non-feeding and non-pathogenic stage of Entamoeba histolytica that is found in the lumen of the large intestine. It is a small, spherical, or oval, non-motileform. The cytoplasm of the precystic stage stores glycogen granules and chromatid bars (made of ribonucleic protein) which act as reserve food.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q1.1

(iii) Cystic stage: It is round in shape and is surrounded by a thin, delicate, and highly resistant cyst wall. It is found in the lumen of the large intestine. The process of development of the cyst wall is called encystation. Which is a means of tiding over the un¬favourable conditions that the parasite is going to encounter while passing to a new host. Soon after the encystation, the nucleus undergoes two successive mitotic divisions to form four daughter nuclei. This type of cystic stage is called tetranuclear cyst or mature cyst which is the stage infective to man.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q1.2

Life cycle: The trophozoites undergo binary fissions in the wall of the large intestine and produce a number of daughter entamoeba. They feed upon the bacteria and the host’s tissue elements, grow in size, and again multiply. After repeated binary fission some of the young ones enter of the lumen of the large intestine and transform into precystic stages. Here, the precystic stages transform into cystic stages which in turn develop into tetranuclear cysts. The entire process is completed only in a few hours. These tetranuclear cysts come out along with the faecal matter and can remain alive for about 10 days. The cyst reaches a new host through contaminated food and water. In the small intestine of a new human host, the cyst wall gets ruptured releasing the tetranuclear amoebae. Such tetranuclear excystic amoebae are called metacysts.

The four nuclei of the metacyst undergo mitotic divisions and produce eight nuclei. Each nucleus gets a bit of the cytoplasm and thus eight daughter entamoeba or metacystic trophozoites are produced. These young ones develop into feeding stages called trophozoites. They invade the mucous membrane of the large intestine and grow into mature trophozoites.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q1.3

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 2.
Describe the life cycle of plasmodium vivax in man.
Answer:
The life cycle of plasmodium in man (The human phase): In man, the plasmodium reproduces by asexual reproduction called schizogony. It occurs in liver cells (hepatocytes) as well as in RBC. In liver cells, it is called hepatic schizogony and in RBC it is called erythrocytic schizogony.

Hepatic Schizogony: This was discovered by short and Cranham. Whenever a mosquito infected by plasmodium bites a man, nearly 2000 sporozoites are released into the blood of man through its saliva, within half an hour, they reach the hepatocytes where they undergo pre-erythrocytic and exo-erythrocytic cycles.

Pre-erythrocytic cycle: Whenever the sporozoites enter the liver cells they transform into trophozoites. They feed on the contents of the hepatic cells, assume a spherical shape, and attain the maximum size. This stage is called the schizont stage. Its nucleus divides several times Mitotically, followed by the cytoplasmic divisions resulting in approximately 12,000 daughter individuals called cryptozoites or the 1st generation merozoites. They enter the sinusoids of the liver by rupturing the cell membrane of the schizont and the liver cells. This entire process is completed approximately in 8 days. Now, these first-generation merozoites have two options, i.e., they can enter either fresh liver cells and continue the exo-erythrocytic cycle or they can enter RBC and continue the erythrocytic cycle.

Exo-erythrocytic cycle: If the trophozoites enter the fresh liver cells, they undergo changes similar to that of the pre-erythrocytic cycle and produce the second generation merozoites called meta cryptozoites. These are of two types the smaller micro-metacryptozoites and larger macro-metacry- photosites. This entire process is completed approximately in two days. The macro-metacryptozoites attack fresh liver cells and continue another exo-erythrocytic cycle, whereas the micro-metacryptozoites always enter the bloodstream and attack fresh RBC to continue the erythrocytic cycle.

Prepatent period: The interval between the first entry of plasmodium into the blood in the form of sporozoites and the second entry of plasmodium into the blood in the form of Cryptozoic is called a prepatent period. It lasts approximately 8 days. During this period, the host does not show any clinical symptoms of the disease. It is only a means of multiplication.

Erythrocytic cycle: It was first described by Camillo Golgi Hence it is also called Golgi cycle. This cycle is initiated either by the trophozoites of the pre-erythrocytic cycle or the micro metocryptozoites of the exo-erythrocytic cycle in the fresh RBC, these stages assume the spherical shape and transform into trophozoites. It develops a small vacuole that gradually enlarges in size pushing the cytoplasm and nucleus to the periphery.

Now the plasmodium looks like a fisher ring. Hence this stage is called the signet ring stage. Soon it loses the vacuole, develops pseudopodia, and becomes an amoeboid stage with the help of pseudopodia. It actively feeds on the contents of the RBC and increases in size. As a result, the RBC grows almost double its size. This process is called hypertrophy. The malaria parasite digests the globin part of the ingested hemoglobin and converts the soluble haem into insoluble crystalline haemozoin. It is called the ‘malaria pigment’ which is called a disposable product. During this stage, small red coloured dots appear in the cytoplasm of the RBC known as Schaffner’s dots. These are believed to be the antigens released by the parasite.

Now the plasmodium loses the pseudopodia, further increases in size, occupies the entire RBC, and becomes a schizont. It undergoes schizogony similar to that of the pre-erythrocytic cycle and produces 12 to 24 erythrocytic merozoites. They are arranged in the form of the petals of a rose in the RBC. Hence this stage is called the rosette stage] Finally the erythrocyte bursts and releases the merozoites along with haemozoin into the blood. This cycle is completed approximately in 48 hours.

Incubation period: The period between the entry of plasmodium into the blood in the form of sporozoite and the first appearance of symptoms of malaria in man is called the incubation period, which is approximately 10 to 14 days.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q2
Formation of gametocytes: After repeated cycles of erythrocytic schizogony when the number of fresh RBC decreases, some merozoites enter the RBC and transform into gametocytes instead of continuing the erythrocytic cycle. This process generally takes place when the RBCs are present in the spleen and bone marrow.

The gametocytes are of two types namely smaller microgametocytes or male gametocytes and larger macrogametocytes or female gametocytes. The gametocytes cannot undergo further development in man as the temperature and PH of the blood man are not suitable for further development. These gametocytes reach the blood circulation and wait to reach the next host. They degenerate and die if they are not transferred to mosquitoes within a week.

Question 3.
Describe the life cycle of plasmodium vivax in mosquitoes.
Answer:
Life cycle of plasmodium in mosquito (The mosquito phase) Ross cycle: When a female Anopheles mosquito bite and sucks the blood of a malaria patient the gametocytes along with the other stages of the erythrocytic cycle reach the crop of mosquito. Here all the stages are digested except the gametocytes. Further part of the life cycle consists of

  • Gametogony
  • Fertilization
  • Formation of ookinete & oocysts
  • Sporogony

(i) Gametogony: The formation of male and female gametes from the gametocytes is called gametogony. It occurs in the lumen of the crop of mosquitoes.

Formation of male gametes: During this process, the nucleus of the microgametocyte divides into eight daughter nuclei called pronuclei which reach the periphery. The cytoplasm is pushed out in the form of eight flagella-like processes. Into each flagellum-like process, one pronucleus enters and forms a micro gamete or male gamete. These male gametes show lashing movements like flagella and get separated from the cytoplasm of microgametocyte. This process is called exflagellation.

Formation of female gamete: The female gametocyte undergoes a few changes and transforms into a female gamete. This process is called maturation. The nucleus of the female gamete moves towards the periphery and the cytoplasm at that point forms a projection. This projected region is called the fertilization cone.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q3

Fertilization: The fusion of male and female gametes is called fertilization. It also occurs in the lumen of the crop of the mosquito. When an actively moving male gamete comes into contact with the fertilization cone of the female gamete, it enters it, and the pronuclei and cytoplasm of these two gametes fuse with each other, resulting in the formation of a synkaryon Since the two gametes are dissimilar in size this process is known as anisogamy. The female gamete that bears the synkaryon is called the zygote which is round and non-motile.

(iii) Formation of ookinete and oocysts: The zygote remains inactive for some time and then transforms into a long, slender, motile, vermiform ookinete or vermicule within 18 to 24 hours. It pierces the wall of the crop and settles beneath the basement membrane. It becomes round and secretes a cyst around its body. This encysted ookinete is now called an oocyst. About 50 to 500 oocysts are formed on the wall of the crop and appear in the form of small nodules.

(iv) Sporogony: The formation of sporozoites in the oocysts is called sporogony. According to Bano, the nucleus of the oocyst first undergoes reduction division followed by repeated mitotic divisions resulting in the formation of about 1,000 daughter nuclei. Each bit of the nucleus is surrounded by a little bit of the cytoplasm and transforms into a sickle-shaped sporozoite. Oocyst with such sporozoites is called sporocyst.

When this sporocyst raptures, the sporozoites are liberated into the haemocoel of the mosquito. From there, they travel into the salivary glands and are ready for infection. The life cycle of plasmodium in mosquitoes completes in about 10 to 24 days.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 4.
Describe the structure and life cycle of Ascaris lumbricoides with the help of a neat and labelled diagram.
Answer:
Ascaris lumbricoides is commonly called the common roundworm. It lives in the small intestine of man, more frequently in children. It is cosmopolitan in distribution. The mode of infection is through contaminated food and water. The infective stage is the embryonated: egg with the 2nd stage rhabditiform larva.

Structure: Sexes are separate and sexual dimorphism is distinct. In both males and females, the body is elongated and cylindrical. The mouth is present at the extreme anterior end and is surrounded by three chitinous lips close to the mouth. Mid ventrally there is a small aperture called an excretory pore.

Male: It has a curved posterior end which is considered the tail. The posterior end possesses a cloacal aperture and a pair of equal-sized chitinous pineal spicules or pineal setae which serve to transfer the sperms during copulation.

Female: It has a straight posterior end, the tail. The female genital pore or vulva is present mid-ventrally at about one-third the length from the mouth. The anus is present a little in front of the tail end.

Life history: Copulation takes place in the small intestine of a man. After copulation, the female releases approximately two lakh eggs per day. Each egg is surrounded by a protein coat with a rippled surface. Hence the eggs of Ascaris are described as mammilla eggs. The protein coat is followed by a chitinous shelf and a lipid layer internally. These eggs come out along with faecal matter. In the moist soil, development takes place inside the egg so that the 1st stage rhabditiform larva is produced. It undergoes the 1st moulting and becomes the 2nd stage rhabditiform larva which is considered the stage infective to man. They reach the alimentary canal of man through contaminated food and water.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q4
In the small intestine, the shell gets dissolved so that the 2nd stage larva is released. Now it undergoes extra-intestinal migration. First, it reaches the liver through the hepatic portal vein. From there it reaches the heart through the post caval vein. It goes to the lungs through the pulmonary arteries.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q4.1
In the alveoli of the lungs, it undergoes the 2nd moulting to produce the 3rd stage larva. It undergoes the 3rd moulting so that the 4th stage larva is produced in the alveoli only. It leaves the alveoli and reaches the small intestine again through the bronchi, trachea, larynx, glottis, pharynx, oesophagus, and stomach. In the small intestine. It undergoes the 4th and final moulting to become a young one which attains sexual maturity within 8 to 10 weeks.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q4.2

Question 5.
Describe the life cycle of wucheria bancrofti.
Answer:
Wucheria bancrofti is commonly called the filarial worm as it causes filariasis in human beings. It is a digenetic parasite that lives in the lymph vessels of man. Sir Patrick Manson identified the female culex mosquito as its secondary host.

Life cycle: It completes its life cycle in two hosts namely man and female culex mosquito.

In man: Both male and female worms are found coiled together in the lymphatic vessels of man. After copulation, the female releases the sheathed microfilaria larvae into the lymph of the man. Each sheathed microfilaria larva measures 0.2 to 0.3 mm in length. It is surrounded by a loose cuticular sheath which is supposed to be the modified shell. They migrate to the blood circulation and reside in the deeper blood vessels during the daytime. They move to the peripheral blood circulation during the nighttime between 10.00 pm and 4.00 am. This tendency is referred to as nocturnal periodicity. When a female culex mosquito sucks the blood of an infected person. They enter the gut of mosquitoes. They die if they are not transferred to mosquitoes within 70 days.

In mosquito: In the midgut of a mosquito, the sheath of the larva is dissolved within 2 to 6 hours of the infection. The ex-sheathed microfilaria larva penetrates the gut wall and reaches the heamocoel of the mosquito. From there, it reaches the thoracic muscles and transforms into a sausage-shaped larva within two days. It is called the first stage larva or first stage microfilaria. This undergoes two moultings within 10 to 20 days and transforms into infective 3rd stage microfilaria. It reaches the labium of the mosquito.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q5
In man after the infection: When an infected mosquito bites a man, the 3rd stage microfilaria larvae enter the blood circulation of the man and finally reach the lymphatic vessels. Here they undergo the 3rd and the 4th moultings to produce young filarial worms. They attain sexual maturity within 5 to 18 months.